Csp-902rfm207e-1 I02 r05

CSP−902RFM207E−1
Title Page
FAA APPROVED
ROTORCRAFT
FLIGHT MANUAL
for
Model MD900
(902 Configuration with PW 207E)
Type Certificate No. H19NM
Approved By: _____________________________________
Manager, Flight Test Branch, ANM-160L

Federal Aviation Administration
Los Angeles Aircraft Certification Office
Transport Airplane Directorate
Original Approval Date: July 28, 2000

Reissue #1: December 2, 2008
Reissue #2:
THE FAA APPROVED ROTORCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS.
SECTION II − LIMITATIONS
SECTION III − EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
SECTION IV − NORMAL PROCEDURES
SECTION V − PERFORMANCE DATA
SECTION X − OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
SECTION XI − CATEGORY−A OPERATIONS
The helicopter must be operated in compliance with the operating limitations as set forth in section II of
this manual and any additional limitations from Section X as a result of an installed optional equipment
item.
Sections III, IV, V, X and XI contain recommended procedures and data and are FAA approved.
THIS MANUAL MUST BE KEPT IN THE HELICOPTER AT ALL TIMES.
Copyright E 1999-2014 by MD Helicopters, Inc.
All rights reserved under the copyright laws.
F−i
900 Series
RFM Revision
Manual: CSP-902RFM207E-1 Rotorcraft Flight Manual

Models: MD900 Helicopter (902 Configuration with PW207E Engines)
Initial Issue: 28 July 2000
Reissue 2: 6 November 2009
Revision 5: 30 September 2014
FILING INSTRUCTIONS:
NOTE: Make sure that Reissue 2, Revision 4, is posted in the manual before you put in
Revision 5.
REMOVE PAGES INSERT PAGES
FRONT MATTER
F-i and F-ii F-i and F-ii
F-vii thru F-xii F-vii thru F-xii
F-xv thru F-xxviii F-xv thru F-xxviii
SECTION V
5-i thru 5-iv 5-i thru 5-iv
5-1 thru 5-64 5-1 thru 5-66
SECTION IX
9-i and 9-ii 9-i and 9-ii
9-25 and 9-26 9-25 thru 9-28
SECTION XI
11-i thru 11-iv 11-i thru 11-iv
A
900 Series
RFM Revision
This page intentionally left blank!
B
CSP−902RFM207E−1 ROTORCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL
MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E)
LOG OF REVISIONS BY DATE
FAA / NON−FAA REVISIONS
REVISION NUMBER AND DATE

Original Issue . 28 July 2000
Revision 1 . . . . . . 30 May 2001
Revision 2 . . . . . . 02 November 2001
Revision 3 . . . . . . 26 December 2002
Revision 4 . . . . . . 13 February 2003
Revision 5 . . . . . . 23 April 2003
Revision 6 . . . . . . 22 September 2003
Revision 7 . . . . . . 13 January 2004
Revision 8 . . . . . . 8 July 2005
Revision 9 . . . . . . 21 August 2007
Revision 10 . . . . . 20 February 2008
Revision 11 . . . . . 11 April 2008
Reissue #1 . . . . . 2 December 2008
Revision 1 . . . . . . 21 July 2009
Reissue #2 . . . . . 06 November 2009
Revision 1 . . . . . . 03 February 2012
Revision 2 . . . . . . 03 August 2012
Revision 5 . . . . . . 30 September 2014
Approved By

Reissue 2
F−ii Revision 5
European Aviation Safety Agency approved

Rotorcraft Flight Manual for Model MD900
(902 Configuration with PW 207E)
As of 28 September 2003, the EASA began approving FAA rotorcraft
flight manuals. Operators of MD900 series helicopters registered in a
European Union member state are required to place this approval page
after the cover page in their flight manual.
Log of EASA Revisions By Date

REVISION NUMBER AND DATE EASA Approval Number
Revision 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 January 2003 2004-2053
Revision 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 July 2005 2004-2053
TR6-001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 June 2006 E02686
TR6-002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 December 2006 E02686
Revision 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 August 2007 E02686
Revision 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 February 2008 E02686
Revision 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 April 2008 E02686
Reissue #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 December 2008 E02686
Revision 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 July 2009 E02686
Reissue #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 November 2009 E02686
EASA−i
Reissue #2
EASA−ii
ROTORCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL CSP−902RFM207E−1
APPROVING AUTHORITIES
Joint Aviation Authorities (JAA)

This manual was approved by the JAA.
European Aviation Safety Authority (EASA)
The MD900 and this manual were accepted by EASA based on the JAA approval
listed above. Subsequent revisions of this manual are approved by EASA who
issues a four-digit approval number. See MDHI web page http://www.mdhelicop
ters.com, publications link for EASA approval number and instructions.
National Agency of Civil Aviation (Brazil)
This Aircraft Flight Manual is approved by the FAA on behalf of the National
Agency of Civil Aviation for Brazilian registered aircraft, in accordance with
the Regulamentos Brasileiros de Homologação Aeronáutica” (RBHA) 21, Section
21.29.
/
(Initial FAA Approval Signature/Date)
Reissue 2
Original F−iii
Reissue 2
F−iv Original
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH PAGE
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Title Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-i
Log of Revisions By Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-ii
Approving Authorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-iii
Summary of Revisions to the Rotorcraft Flight Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-v
List of Effective Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-vi
Section I − General
1-1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-3. Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-4. Method of Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-5. Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-6. Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-7. Multi-Purpose Utility Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-8. Technical Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-9. Rotorcraft Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-10. Pilot's Briefing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-11. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-12. Conversion Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Section II − Limitations
2-1. Flight Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2. Environmental Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-3. Airspeed Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-4. Weight Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-5. Center of Gravity (CG Envelope) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-6. Rotor Brake Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-7. Rotor Speed Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-8. Transmission Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-9. Power Plant Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-10. Generator Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Reissue 2
Revision 4 F−v
PARAGRAPH PAGE
2-11. Starter limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-12. Fuel System Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-13. Integrated Instrumentation Display System (IIDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-14. Decals and Placards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Section III − Emergency and Malfunction Procedures

3-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2. Caution and Warning Annunciators and Audio Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-3. Engine Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-4. Emergency Landing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-5. EEC Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-6. Engine Starting - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3-7. Engine/Aircraft Shutdown - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-8. Fire Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-9. Flight Control Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3-10. Pitot/Static System Malfunction: Single or Dual Pitot Tube Installation . . . . . 3-26
3-11. Engine and Generator Malfunction Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3-12. Transmission Malfunction Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-13. Fuel System Display Advisories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3-14. Caution and Warning Advisories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3-15. Other Malfunction/Advisories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3-16. Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-17. Emergency Egress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3-18. Emergency Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Section IV − Normal Procedures

4-1. Preflight Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-2. Pilot's Daily Preflight Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-3. Pilot's Preflight Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-4. Engine Pre-Start Cockpit Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-5. Engine Starting - Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4-6. Engine Runup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-7. Before Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-8. Normal Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Reissue 2
F−vi Revision 4
PARAGRAPH PAGE
4-9.Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4-10.Slow Flight/Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4-11.Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4-12.Engine/Aircraft Shutdown - Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4-13.Post Flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4-14.Noise Impact Reduction Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-15.Flight With Doors Removed or Cabin Doors Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4-16.One Engine Inoperative Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-17.Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Section V − Performance Data

5-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-2. Noise Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-3. Density Altitude Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-4. Airspeed Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-5. Best Rate of Climb Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-6. Rate of Climb and Descent - OEI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-7. Rate of Climb - AEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5-8. Hover Ceiling, AEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5-9. Hover Ceiling, OEI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
5-10. Height Velocity Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
5-11. Power Assurance Check - Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
5-12. Power Assurance Check - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Section VI − Weight and Balance Data

6-1. Weight and Balance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-2. Load Limits and Balance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-3. Equipment Removal or Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-4. Longitudinal Weight and Balance Determination:Passenger Configuration . . . 6-8
6-5. Longitudinal Loading of Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6-6. Permissible Lateral Loadings - Passenger Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6-7. Lateral Loading of Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-8. Internal Loading of Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Reissue 2
Revision 5 F−vii
PARAGRAPH PAGE
Section VII − Systems Description

7-1. Helicopter Exterior Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-2. Fuselage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-3. Tailboom and Empennage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-4. Landing Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-5. Main Rotor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-6. Flight Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-7. Hydraulic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7-8. Propulsion System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7-9. Engine Air Intake and Inlet Particle Separator (IPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7-10. Engine Power Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7-11. Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7-12. Fire Extinguishing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7-13. Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7-14. Environmental Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7-16. IIDS Data Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
7-17. Balance Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
7-18. IIDS Menu Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Section VIII − Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance

8-1. Hoisting, Lifting, and Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8-2. Towing and Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8-3. Parking and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-4. Access and Inspection Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-5. Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8-6. Aircraft Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
8-7. Cockpit Door Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
8-8. Cabin Seats: Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
8-9. Copilot Flight controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
8-10. Engine Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
8-11. Special Operational Checks and Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Reissue 2
F−viii Revision 4
PARAGRAPH PAGE
Section IX − Additional Operations and Performance Data

9-1. Abbreviated Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9-2. Fuel Flow vs Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9-3. International Civil Aviation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Section X − Optional Equipment

10-1. General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10-2. Listing - Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10-3. Compatibility - Combined Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10-4. Optional Equipment Performance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10-5. Operating Instructions: Air Conditioning (P/N900P7250302-103) . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10-6. Operating Instructions: Controllable Landing/Search Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10-7. Operating Instructions: Rotorcraft Cargo Hook Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10-8. Operating Instructions: Windscreen Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
10-9. Operating Instructions: Supplemental Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10-10.Operating Instructions: Rescue Hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
10-11.Operating Instructions: Removable CoPilot Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
10-12.Operating Instructions: Airframe Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
10-13.Operating Instructions: SX-16 Nightsun with Aft Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
10-14.Operating Instructions: RDR-1400C Weather Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
10-15.Operating Instructions: LEO-II-A5 Observation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
10-16.Operating Instructions: Annunciator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
10-17.Operating Instructions: Moving Map Navigation Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
10-18.Operating Instructions: W.E.S.T Battery Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
10-19.Operating Instructions: SX-16 Night Sun with EPMS mount
and Laser Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
10-20.Operating Instructions: Smoke Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
10-21.Operating Instructions: Crew Door Modification with
Quick Release Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Reissue 2
Revision 4 F−ix
PARAGRAPH PAGE
Section XI − Category A Operations

Part I General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11−1
11-1.1.General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11-1.2.Definitions - Category A Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11-1.3.Definitions - Category A Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Part II Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11−5
11-2.1.Clear Airfield, Heliport and Elevated Helipad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11-2.2.Maximum Takeoff and Landing Weight Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11-2.3.6501 - 6700 LBS Clear Airfield Operations Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Part III Takeoff and Landing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11−11
11-3.1.Clear Airfield Takeoff Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
11-3.2.Heliport/Elevated Helipad Takeoff Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11-3.3.Landing Procedures - Clear Airfield, Heliport and Elevated Helipad . . . . . . 11-17
11-3.4.Confined Heliport/Helipad Takeoff procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
11-3.5.Takeoff Decision Point (TDP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
11-3.6.Rejected Takeoff - Confined heliport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
11-3.7.Continued Takeoff - Confined Heliport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
11-3.8.Short field Takeoff Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
11-3.9.Confined heliport and Balked landing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
11-3.10.Equipment Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
Part V Takeoff and Landing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11−35
11-5.1.Takeoff Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
11-5.2.Takeoff Distance Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
11-5.3.Continued Takeoff Flight Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39
11-5.4.Landing Performance - Open Airfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
11-5.5.Landing Performance - Heliport/Elevated Helipad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
Part IX Additional Operations and Performance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11−45
11-9.1.Category A OEI Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45
Reissue 2
F−x Revision 5
SUMMARY OF REVISIONS
TO THE ROTORCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL
NOTE: Revisions are listed below by number with appropriate remarks.
Section II pages marked [C]* indicate FAA approved color pages.

Black−and−white reproductions of color pages are not considered to be “FAA
Approved”.
REVISION
REMARKS
NUMBER
Revision 5 Section V: Paragraph 5-1, corrected the metric conversion of the
maximum gross weight within the NOTE.
Paragraph 5-2, corrected the metric conversion in Table 5-1 and
added Table 5-2 for noise characteristics of max. gross weight of 6500
lb.
Section IX: Paragraph 9-3, added Tables 9-1 and 9-2 for ICAO Noise
Level data at max. gross weight of 6770 lb. and 6500 lb.
Reissue 2
Revision 5 F−xi
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
FAA APPROVED NON FAA APPROVED

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
REVISION NUMBER REVISION NUMBER
FRONT Cover -------- Reissue 2 Original
MATTER F-i Reissue 2 Original --------
F-ii Reissue 2 Revision 5 --------
F-iii Reissue 2 Original --------
F-iv Reissue 2 Original --------
F-v -------- Reissue 2 Revision 4
F-vi -------- Reissue 2 Revision 4
F-vii -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
F-viii -------- Reissue 2 Revision 4
F-ix -------- Reissue 2 Revision 4
F-x -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
F-xi -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
F-xii -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
F-xiii -------- Reissue 2 Revision 4
F-xiv -------- Reissue 2 Revision 4
F-xv -------- Reissue 2 Revision 4
F-xvi -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
F-xvii -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
F-xviii -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
F-xix -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
F-xx -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
F-xxi -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
F-xxii -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
F-xxiii -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
F-xxiv -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
F-xxv -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
F-xxvi -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
F-xxvii -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
F-xxviii -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
I 1-i -------- Reissue 2 Original

1-ii -------- Reissue 2 Original
1-1 -------- Reissue 2 Original
Reissue 2
F−xii Revision 5

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
II 2-i Reissue 2 Revision 4 --------

2-ii Reissue 2 Revision 4 --------
2-1 Reissue 2 Revision 4 --------
2-12 [C]* Reissue 2 Revision 4 --------
Reissue 2
Revision 4 F−xiii

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
III 3-i Reissue 2 Revision 1 --------

3-iii Reissue 2 Revision 1 --------
3-iv Reissue 2 Original --------
3-1 Reissue 2 Original --------
Reissue 2
F−xiv Revision 4

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
IV 4-i Reissue 2 Revision 4 --------

4-ii Reissue 2 Original --------
Reissue 2
Revision 4 F−xv

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
V 5-i Reissue 2 Revision 5 --------

5-iv Reissue 2 Revision 5 --------
Reissue 2
F−xvi Revision 5

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
Reissue 2
Revision 5 F−xvii

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
VI 6-i -------- Reissue 2 Original

Reissue 2
F−xviii Revision 5

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
VII 7-i -------- Reissue 2 Original

7-iii -------- Reissue 2 Original
7-iv -------- Reissue 2 Original
Reissue 2
Revision 5 F−xix

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
Reissue 2
F−xx Revision 5

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
VIII 8-i -------- Reissue 2 Original

8-ii -------- Reissue 2 Revision 1
Reissue 2
Revision 5 F−xxi

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
8-24 -------- Reissue 2 Revision 1
Reissue 2
F−xxii Revision 5

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
IX 9-i -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5

9-ii -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5
Reissue 2
Revision 5 F−xxiii

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
X 10-i Reissue 2 Original --------

10-ii Reissue 2 Original --------
10-iii Reissue 2 Original --------
10-iv Reissue 2 Original --------
Reissue 2
F−xxiv Revision 5

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
Reissue 2
Revision 5 F−xxv

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
Reissue 2
F−xxvi Revision 5

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
XI 11-i Reissue 2 Revision 5 --------

11-iv Reissue 2 Revision 5 --------
Reissue 2
Revision 5 F−xxvii

SECTION PAGE NUMBER
Reissue 2
F−xxviii Revision 5
MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E) General
SECTION I
GENERAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH PAGE
1-1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-3. Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-4. Method of Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-5. Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-6. Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-7. Multi-Purpose Utility Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-8. Technical Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-9. Rotorcraft Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-10. Pilot's Briefing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-11. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Figure 1-1. MD Explorer Rotorcraft Principal Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Figure 1-2. Interior Dimensions and Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-12. Conversion Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Figure 1-3. Speed: MPH/Knots/KmH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Figure 1-4. Speed: Knots - Meters/Second . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Figure 1-5. Temperature Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Figure 1-6. Liquid Measure - U.S. Gallons to Liters to Imperial Gallons . . 1-15
Figure 1-7. Linear Measure - Inches to Centimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Figure 1-8. Linear Measure - Meters to Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Figure 1-9. Weight - Pounds to Kilograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Figure 1-10. Conversion Chart: Inches of Mercury - Millibars . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Table 1-1. Standard Atmosphere Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Reissue 2
Original 1−i
General MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E)
PARAGRAPH PAGE
Reissue 2
1−ii Original
SECTION I
GENERAL
1−1. INTRODUCTION
The Rotorcraft Flight Manual has been prepared to provide the pilot with all informa
tion necessary to accomplish the intended mission with the maximum amount of
efficiency and safety.
1−2. SCOPE
This manual meets all FAA requirements for APPROVED DATA and that data
is so designated.
MD Helicopters, Inc. has included additional supplemental data which is intended
to provide the pilot with information that expands, enhances and eases his task.
1−3. ORGANIZATION
This manual is organized in the following manner:

FRONT MATTER:
Contains: Log of Revisions by Date, Table of Contents, Summary of Revisions,
and the List of Effective Pages.
By referring to the Log of Revisions By Date, the pilot may review a chronological
listing of changes to the Flight Manual.
Reading the Summary of Revisions will inform the pilot of what changes have
been made by paragraph reference. This Summary contains only the latest Flight
Manual Change.
The List of Effective Pages allows the pilot quick reference to page numbers
and their respective revision number. The pages listed should reflect the revision
number that appears at the bottom of each page.
SECTION I - GENERAL
Information of general interest to the pilot, owner or operator of the aircraft
and general rotorcraft information and conversion charts.
SECTION II - LIMITATIONS (FAA Approved)
Specifically defines the limiting factors, procedures and parameters within which
the rotorcraft may be operated. FAA regulations require that limitations not
be exceeded.
Reissue 2
Original 1−1
SECTION III - EMERGENCY AND MALFUNCTION PROCEDURES

(FAA Approved)
Problems which could be encountered in flight are defined and the procedures
necessary to cope with or alleviate them are discussed. The data is recommended
by the manufacturer.
SECTION IV - NORMAL PROCEDURES (FAA Approved)
Normal operating procedures from preflight through shutdown. The data given
is that recommended by the manufacturer.
SECTION V - PERFORMANCE DATA (FAA Approved)
Aircraft performance as defined within certain conditions, such as airspeed,
weight, altitude, temperature, humidity, and wind velocity. Data is provided in
tabular or graph form to allow the pilot to determine the aircraft's capabilities
in relation to the intended mission and prevailing conditions.
SECTION VI - WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA
Provides aircraft weight and balance operational data in chart and table form
and provides examples that allow the pilot to accurately determine the aircraft's
gross weight, and whether the load is within longitudinal and lateral center
of gravity limits. Also contained in this section are the original weight and balance
report and equipment list (equipment both required and optional) installed on
the aircraft at the time of licensing.
SECTION VII - SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
Offers a pilot-oriented technical description of the operation of each system
installed on the helicopter.
SECTION VIII - AIRCRAFT HANDLING, SERVICING, MAINTENANCE
The information contained in this section is extracted from the Handbook of
Maintenance Instructions and is highly selective. The subjects chosen are those
with which the pilot may have direct involvement either while at his normal
base of operations or in the field.
SECTION IX - ADDITIONAL OPERATIONS AND PERFORMANCE DATA
The information provided in Section IX is given by the manufacturer to further
assist the pilot in obtaining maximum utilization of the rotorcraft. It also provides
the pilot with abbreviated checklists as well as additional performance data.
SECTION X OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT (FAA Approved)
Certain optional equipment is available for performance of specific tasks. In
many cases the equipment is removable and may be used in combination(s) with
other optional items. Whenever the installation of an option affects FAA approved
limitations, normal/emergency procedures or performance (Sections II thru V),
an FAA approval is required. In addition, a tabular listing of all options is provided
as well as a table showing the compatibility of the various options with one
another.
Reissue 2
1−2 Original
SECTION XI Category A Operations (FAA Approved)

Information contained in this section pertains to Category A operations only
and supplements information that appears in Sections I thru X of this manual.
At the front of each section there is an table of contents that lists the data by para
graph number, title, and page number.
1−4. METHOD OF PRESENTATION
General information in the various sections is provided in narrative form. Other

information is given in step-by-step procedures, graphs, charts, or tabular form.
The information in the step-by-step procedure is presented in the imperative mode;
each statement describing a particular operation to be accomplished. Expansion
of the steps is accomplished as follows:
l
A black change bar ( ) in the page margin designates the latest new or changed
information appearing on that page. A hand points to changes in the contents
of an illustration.
A WARNING brings to the pilot’s immediate attention that

WARNING equipment damage and/or personal injury will occur if the
instruction is disregarded − placed after the instruction/step.
A CAUTION alerts the individual that equipment damage may result

CAUTION if the procedural step is not followed to the letter − placed after
the instruction/step.
NOTE: A NOTE expands upon and explains the preceding step and provides fuller
understanding of the particular operation.
1−5. DEFINITION OF TERMS
The concept of procedural word usage and intended meaning has been adhered
to in preparing this manual is as follows:
“Shall” has been used only when the application of a procedure is mandatory.
“Should” has been used only when the application of a procedure is recommended.
“May” and “need not” have been used only when the application of a procedure
is optional.
The terms IMMEDIATELY, POSSIBLE, and PRACTICAL as used in this manual
refer to the degree of urgency with which a landing must be made.
LAND IMMEDIATELY - Execute a power-on approach and landing without delay.
Reissue 2
Original 1−3
LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE - Execute a power-on approach and landing

to the nearest safe landing area that does not further jeopardize the aircraft or
occupants.
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICAL - Extended flight is not recommended. Whether
to complete the planned flight is at the discretion of the pilot-in-command. However,
the nature of the specific problem or malfunction may dictate termination of the
flight before reaching the destination.
1−6. ABBREVIATIONS
SIGNS C
> Greater than CAB Cabin

Equal to or greater than CAB HEAT Cabin Heat
< Less than CC Cubic Centimeter
Equal to or less than CCW Counter Clockwise
A CKP(T) Cockpit
CLP Collective Lever Position
AC Air Conditioner
Cm Centimeters
AEO All Engines Operating
COM Communication
A/N Alphanumeric
CW Clockwise
AGL Above Ground Level
D
ALT Alternate; Altitude
dBA A-weighted Decibel
AOG Aircraft On Ground
DIR Direction; Directional
APU Auxiliary Power Unit
E
ASCM Aircraft Systems Condition
Monitoring ECS Environmental Control
System
ATT Attitude
ECTM Engine Condition Trend
B Monitoring
BAT Battery EEC Electronic Engine Control
BIT Built In Test EGT Exhaust Gas Temperature
BL Butt Line ENG Engine
BLD Bleed ESNTL Essential

ETL Effective Translational Lift
BMS Balance Monitoring
System EXT Extend; External
Reissue 2
1−4 Original
F ICS Intercom System

FAA Federal Aviation
Administration IFR Instrument Flight Rules
FADEC Full Authority Digital

Electronic Control IGE In Ground Effect
FAR Federal Aviation

Regulation IIDS Integrated Instrumentation
Display System
FMU Fuel Metering Unit
FSO Flights since overhaul IMC Instrument Meteorological
Ft Feet Conditions
Ft/Min Feet per Minute
INST Instrument
FWD Forward
G
IPS Inlet Particle Separator
GA Go-around
GCU Generator control unit In Inches
GEN Generator
INST(R) Instrument
GBMC Ground-based
Maintenance Computer
IVSI Instantaneous Vertical
GPU Ground Power Unit
Speed Indicator
H
HAT Height Above Touchdown K
HD Density Altitude
Hg Mercury Kg KG Kilogram
HIRF High Intensity Radiated
Field KIAS Knots Indicated Airspeed
HP Pressure Altitude
HSI Horizontal Situation Km KM Kilometer
Indicator; Hot Section
Inspection Km/H KM/H Kilometers per
HVR Hover Hour
HYD Hydraulic
KT Knots
I
IAS Indicated Airspeed KTAS Knots True Airspeed
Reissue 2
Original 1−5
L PMA Permanent Magnet

Alternator
L Left; Liters
PNL Panel
LB Pound
POSN Position
Lb(s) Pound(s)
PRI Primary
L.H. Left Hand
Pt Pint
LND Landing
PWC Pratt and Whitney Canada
LT Light
R
M
R Right
M m Meters
MBAR Millibar REL Release
MCP Maximum Continuous RET Retract

Power R.H. Right Hand
Min Minutes RTR Rotor
MPH Miles-Per-Hour S
M/R Main Rotor
Sec Seconds
MSTR Master
SEL Sound Exposure Level
N
SL Sea Level
NAV Navigation SLT Searchlight
NG Gas Producer RPM SSO Starts since overhaul
NP Power Turbine RPM STA Station
NR Rotor Speed
STBY Standby
O
STC Supplemental Type
OAT Outside Air Temperature Certificate
OEI One Engine Inoperative SYS System
OGE Out of Ground Effect T
OVRD Override TBO Time Between Overhaul
OVSP Overspeed TOP Takeoff Power
P TSN Time Since New
PLA Power Lever Angle TSO Time Since Overhaul
Reissue 2
1−6 Original
U Vs Versus
U.S. gal U.S. gallons VSCS Vertical Stabilization

Control System
V
VY Best Rate of Climb Speed
VFR Visual Flight Rules W
VH Maximum speed in level WL Water Line
flight at MCP
X
VLV Valve
VMC Visual Metrological XFD Crossfeed
Conditions XMSN Transmission
VNE Never Exceed Speed XPNDR Transponder
1−7. MULTI−PURPOSE UTILITY OPERATIONS
The installation and use of certain optional equipment is approved by the FAA
and requires supplemental flight data when limitations, performance or procedures
are affected. Refer to Section X for Optional Equipment.
MD Helicopters, Inc. optional equipment items and STC items which are FAA ap
proved for the MD EXPLORER may be installed and used.
1−8. TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS
A file of technical publications is available to aid in obtaining maximum utilization

of your rotorcraft. Revisions and new issue publications are provided to continually
update and expand existing data.
MDHI Publications Revisions and Reissues
Changes in limitations, procedures, performance, optional equipment, etc., re
quire flight manual revisions and change or replace flight manual content as
appropriate. To ensure that MDHI manuals continue to show current changes,
revised information is supplied as follows.
Revisions
Change to parts of the manual by the replacement, addition and/or deletion
of pages is done by revision. The List of Effective Pages that accompanies
each revision, identifies all affected pages. Such pages must be removed from
the manual and discarded. Added or replaced pages must be put in and ex
amined against the List of Effective Pages.
Reissue 2
Original 1−7
Reissues
Occasionally the manual may be reissued and is identified as ``Reissue #1,
Reissue #2'', etc. The preceding issue of the manual then becomes obsolete
and must be discarded. The reissue includes all prior revisions. All pages
in a reissue become `Òriginal'' pages. The reissue may also include new or
changed data. These changes will be identified on the ``Summary of Revisions''
page as well as having change bars appear in the page margin on the effected
pages.
The following publications are available.
Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM).
Rotorcraft Maintenance Manual (RMM)
Servicing and Maintenance
Instruments - Electrical - Avionics
Component Maintenance Manual (CMM)
Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
Illustrated Parts Catalog (IPC)
Service Information Bulletins and Letters
New and revised publications are available through MDHS Subscription Service.
Further information may be obtained by contacting:
MD Helicopters, Inc.
M615-G048
4555 E McDowell Rd
Mesa, AZ 85215-9734
or your local Service Center, Distributor, or Sales Company.
All persons who fly or maintain MD helicopters are urged to keep abreast of the
latest information by using the subscription service.
Reissue 2
1−8 Original
1−9. ROTORCRAFT CERTIFICATION
Certified under FAR Part 27 through amendment 27-26 dated April 5, 1990, Special
Condition for High Intensity Radiated Fields (HIRF) protection per FAR 21.16; FAR
Part 36 Appendix J, Noise, effective on the date of Type Certification, and FAR
Part 27 Appendix C Criteria for Category A effective August 8, 1996.
The rotorcraft is certified by the Federal Aviation Administration under FAA Type
Certificate Number H19NM.
The FAA model designation is MD900
The FAA/ICAO aircraft type designator is EXPL
The MD Helicopters, Inc. commercial designation is MD Explorer
1−10. PILOT’S BRIEFING
Prior to flight, passengers should be briefed on the following.

Approach and depart the rotorcraft from the front in full view of the pilot, being
aware of the main rotor.
Use of seat belts and shoulder harnesses.
Smoking.
The opening and closing of doors.
Evacuation of the aircraft in an emergency.
Location and use of emergency/survival equipment.
Reissue 2
Original 1−9
1−11. DIMENSIONS
Refer to Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 for exterior dimensions and interior volumes.
33.83 FT
(10.34 M)
5.33 FT
(1.62 M)
5.92 FT
(1.80 M)
40.58 FT
9.33 FT (12.37 m)
5 ° 0'
9.17 FT
12.00 FT (2.79 M)
(3.66 M)
10.92 FT
(3.33 M)
3 ° 16' STATIC GROUND LINE

7.33 FT
(2.23 M) @ DESIGN GROSS WEIGHT
34.08 FT
(10.39 M)
F92−002B
Figure 1−1. MD Explorer Rotorcraft Principal Dimensions
Reissue 2
1−10 Original
6.25 FT (1.9 M)
4.75 FT (1.4 M)
12.9 FT (3.9 M)
18.25 FT (5.5 M)
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
51.4 FT3 (1.5 M3)
4.08 FT (1.2 M)
ENTIRE AFT CABIN
172.5 FT3 (4.9 M3)
4.16 FT (1.2 M) WITH DOOR ON
4.33 FT (1.3 M) WITH DOOR OFF
F90−003
Figure 1−2. Interior Dimensions and Volumes
Reissue 2
Original 1−11
1−12. CONVERSION CHARTS
EXAMPLE: CONVERT 100 KNOTS TO MPH AND TO KM/HR:

ENTER CHART AT 100 KNOTS AND FOLLOW ARROW TO SLOPING LINE. TO FIND MPH, MOVE LEFT AND READ
115 MPH. TO FIND KM/HR, MOVE RIGHT FROM THE SLOPING LINE AND READ 185 KM/HR
200 320
300
180
280
160 260
240
140 220
200
120
180
Km/H
MPH
100 160
140
80
120
60 100
80
40
60
40
20
20
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
KNOTS
F92−004
Figure 1−3. Speed: MPH/Knots/KmH
Reissue 2
1−12 Original
KNOTS METERS/SEC
50
25
45
40
20
EXAMPLE 35
CONVERT KNOTS TO METERS/SEC
KNOWN: 30
WIND SPEED = 25 KT 15
METHOD:
ENTER CHART AT 25 KT READ 25
APPROXIMATELY 13 METERS/SEC
ACROSS ON METERS/SEC SCALE
METHOD MAY BE REVERSED 20

TO FIND KNOTS WHEN METERS/SEC ARE 10
KNOWN
15
10 5
0 0 F92−006
Figure 1−4. Speed: Knots − Meters/Second
Reissue 2
Original 1−13
TEMPERATURE
°F °C
140 60
EXAMPLE:
120 50
CONVERT °F TO °C 40
100
KNOWN: 30
TEMPERATURE = 50° F 80
20
METHOD: 60
ENTER AT 50° F 10
READ 10° C ACROSS ON °C SCALE 40
0
20
METHOD MAY BE REVERSED −10
TO FIND ° F WHEN ° C IS KNOWN 0
−20
−20 −30
ALTERNATE METHOD:
° F = (9/5 X °C) + 32 −40 −40
°C = 5/9(°F − 32)
−60 −50
−80 −60
F92−005
Figure 1−5. Temperature Conversion Chart
Reissue 2
1−14 Original
IMPERIAL (BRITISH) GALLONS
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

700
650
600
550
500
450
400
LITERS
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190
U.S. GALLONS
F927-150
Figure 1−6. Liquid Measure − U.S. Gallons to Liters to Imperial Gallons
Reissue 2
Original 1−15
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
CENTIMETERS
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0
INCHES
F927-152
Figure 1−7. Linear Measure − Inches to Centimeters
Reissue 2
1−16 Original
20000
19000
18000
17000
16000
15000
14000
13000
12000
11000
FEET
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6500
METERS
F927-151
Figure 1−8. Linear Measure − Meters to Feet
Reissue 2
Original 1−17
1900
1800
1700
3000
1600
2900
1500
2800
1400
2700
1300
2600
1200
2500
1100
2400
KILOGRAMS
1000
2300
900
2200
800
2100
700
2000
600
1900
500
1800
400
4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6500
300
200
100
0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000
POUNDS F927-149
Figure 1−9. Weight − Pounds to Kilograms
Reissue 2
1−18 Original
EXAMPLE 1: 29.44 IN. Hg = 997 mbar

EXAMPLE 2: 30.18 IN. Hg = 1022 mbar
29.5
1 30.5 31.1
29.4
30.4 31.0
29.3
30.3 30.9
29.2
2
30.2 30.8
29.1
30.1
29.0 30.7
30.0
28.9 30.6
IN. Hg
29.9
30.5
28.8
29.8 1035 1040 1045 1050 1055
28.7
29.7
28.6
29.6
28.5
29.5
28.4
1000 1005 1010 1015 1020 1025 1030 1035
28.3
28.2
28.1
28.0
945 950 955 960 965 970 975 980 985 990 995 1000
MILLIBARS
F92−007
Figure 1−10. Conversion Chart: Inches of Mercury − Millibars
Reissue 2
Original 1−19
Table 1−1. Standard Atmosphere Table

Standard Sea Level Conditions:
Temperature: 59°F (15°C)
Pressure: 29.921 in.Hg (1013.25 mbar)
Density: 0.0023769 slugs/ft3 (1.225 kg/m3)
ALTITUDE DENSITY 1 TEMPERATURE PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE

(feet) RATIO σ σ (°C) (°F) (mbar) (in. Hg) RATIO
0 1.0000 1.000 15.00 59.000 1013.25 29.921 1.0000
1000 0.9711 1.0148 13.019 55.434 997.18 28.856 0.9644
2000 0.9428 1.0299 11.038 51.868 942.14 27.821 0.9298
3000 0.9151 1.0454 9.056 48.302 908.14 26.817 0.8962
4000 0.8881 1.0611 7.076 44.735 875.12 25.842 0.8637
5000 0.8617 1.0773 5.094 41.196 843.08 24.896 0.8320
6000 0.8359 1.0938 3.113 37.603 811.99 23.978 0.8014

7000 0.8106 1.1107 1.132 34.037 781.86 23.088 0.7716
8000 0.7860 1.1279 -0.850 30.471 752.63 22.225 0.7428
9000 0.7620 1.1456 -2.831 26.905 724.29 21.388 0.7148
10000 0.7385 1.1637 -4.812 23.338 696.82 20.577 0.6877
11000 0.7155 1.1822 -6.793 19.772 670.21 19.791 0.6614

12000 0.6932 1.2011 -8.774 16.206 644.40 19.029 0.6360
13000 0.6713 1.2205 -10.756 12.640 619.44 18.292 0.6113
14000 0.6500 1.2403 -12.737 9.074 595.23 17.577 0.5875
15000 0.6292 1.2606 -14.718 5.508 571.83 16.886 0.5643
16000 0.6090 1.2815 -16.669 1.941 549.14 16.216 0.5420

17000 0.5892 1.3028 -18.680 -1.625 527.23 15.569 0.5203
18000 0.5669 1.3246 -20.662 -5.191 505.99 14.942 0.4994
19000 0.5511 1.3470 -22.643 -8.757 485.48 14.336 0.4791
20000 0.5328 1.3700 -24.624 -12.323 465.63 13.750 0.4595
21000 0.5150 1.3935 -26.605 -15.899 446.47 13.184 0.4406

22000 0.4976 1.4176 -28.587 -19.456 427.91 12.636 0.4223
23000 0.4806 1.4424 -30.568 -23.002 409.99 12.107 0.4046
24000 0.4642 1.4678 -32.549 -26.588 392.72 11.597 0.3874
25000 0.4481 1.4938 -34.530 -30.154 375.99 11.103 0.3711
Reissue 2
1−20 Original
Limitations
SECTION II
LIMITATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH PAGE
2-1. Flight Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2. Environmental Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Figure 2-1. Ambient Temperature Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-2. WAT Limit and “Area A” Azimuth For Crosswind Operations . . . 2-4
2-3. Airspeed Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-3. VNE Chart - Gross Weight to 6500 lb (2948 kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-4. VNE Chart - Gross Weight to 6770 lb (3071 kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-4. Weight Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-5. Minimum Flying Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-5. Center of Gravity (CG Envelope) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2-6. Center of Gravity Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-6. Rotor Brake Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-7. Rotor Speed Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-8. Transmission Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-9. Power Plant Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-10. Generator Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-11. Starter limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-12. Fuel System Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Table 2-1. Fuel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Figure 2-7. Primary IIDS Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Figure 2-8. NP and NR Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Figure 2-9. Engine Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Figure 2-10. Engine Exhaust Gas Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Figure 2-11. Secondary IIDS Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Figure 2-12. Engine Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Figure 2-13. Transmission and Fuel Quantity Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Figure 2-14. Airspeed Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-14. Decals and Placards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
2−i
Revision 4
Limitations
Figure 2-15. Decals and Placards (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Figure 2-15. Decals and Placards (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
2−ii
Revision 4
MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E) Limitations
SECTION II
LIMITATIONS
2−1. FLIGHT RESTRICTIONS
Approved as an eight-place (maximum) helicopter.
The minimum flight crew consists of one pilot operating the helicopter from the
right seat. The left crew seat may be used for an additional pilot when the approved
dual controls are installed.
Under seat baggage stowage:
Cargo or baggage under crew and passenger seats is permitted only when the
seat is unoccupied.
Aerobatic flight:
Aerobatic flight is not permitted.
Aircraft equipped with Bendix/King KFC900 Flight Control System:
NOTE: The following information supersedes applicable limits found in Bendix/King IFR
Avionics/KFC 900 RFMS 006−00845−0000 and 006−00845−0004.
For VFR flights at gross weights between 6251 and 6500 lb (2835 and 2948
kg):
Maximum airspeed with autopilot engaged is 100 KIAS
Maximum Operating Altitude with autopilot engaged 5000 ft HD
For IFR flights at gross weights between 6251 and 6500 lb (2835 and 2948
kg):
Autopilot must be operational.
Maximum airspeed with autopilot engaged is 100 KIAS
Maximum Operating Altitude with autopilot engaged 5000 ft HD
Flight with doors opened or removed is approved under the following
conditions.
NOTE: Baggage compartment door can be removed with all these configurations:
Baggage door removed:
With the baggage door removed and cockpit and cabin doors closed, maximum
airspeed is limited to the 140 KIAS envelope shown in Figure 2-3.
Approved doors off configurations:
Maximum airspeed is limited to the 100 KIAS envelope shown in Figure 2-3.
Both cockpit doors removed
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 2−1
Revision 4
Limitations MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E)
Both cabin doors removed

Both cockpit and both cabin doors removed
Cabin doors open in-flight:
Maximum airspeed is limited to 60 KIAS (with or without cockpit doors).
One or both cabin doors may be opened or closed in-flight at airspeeds up
to 60 KIAS.
Maximum airspeed is limited to 100 KIAS (with or without cockpit doors)
following installation of modified upper door fittings (ref. Figure 2-14).
For sustained flight with the cabin doors open, use of the cabin door hold
open device is required.
2−2. ENVIRONMENTAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
NOTE: Serial numbers 900−00141 and subsequent have different operating limitations
based on gross weight and density altitude. Serial numbers 900−00140 thru
900−00052 limitations remain the same, unless the provisions of TB900−044
have been accomplished.
Kinds of Operations:
This rotorcraft is certified in the normal helicopter category for day and night
VFR operation when the appropriate instruments and equipment required by
the airworthiness and/or operating rules are approved, installed, and are in oper
able condition.
Maximum operating altitude at gross weights 6250 lb (2835 kg) and be
low: 20,000 Feet HD
Maximum operating altitude at gross weights 6251 to 6500 lb (2835 to
2948 kg): 14,000 Feet HD.
Maximum operating altitude at gross weights 6501 to 6770 lb (2949 to
3071 kg): 3000 Feet HD.
Maximum altitude for HIGE/takeoff and landing operations: Refer to
Figure 2-2.
IIDS Built-In Test - cold temperature:
A commanded IIDS BIT must be performed prior to the first start of the day
if the helicopter has been statically exposed to temperatures below 0°C for 12
hours or longer.
NOTE: The IIDS display may not be readable during the initial power up BIT when
statically exposed to the above ambient temperatures.
Cabin heat:
Cabin heat must be OFF in the crew and passenger compartments when ambient
temperatures are greater than 28°C (82°F).
FAA Approved
2−2 Reissue 2
Revision 4
Icing conditions:
Flight into known icing conditions is not permitted.
Snow conditions:
VNE is 100 KIAS in falling and blowing snow.
Aircraft with NACA inlet and IPS only.
Flight into falling or blowing snow is only permitted with the NACA inlet
switch in the CLOSED position. The switch must remain in the CLOSED
position for the duration of the flight, even after leaving the falling or blowing
snow conditions.
20000 14000HD LIMIT FOR

GROSS WEIGHTS
18000 FROM 6251 TO 6500 LB
16000
PRESSURE ALTITUDE - FEET
14000
12000 PRIMARY FUELS
ONLY DASHED LINES FOR
10000 AIRCRAFT WITHOUT
GENERATOR COOLING
8000 MODIFICATION
6000
HIGE OPERATIONS
4000 PRIMARY AND LIMITED TO 5 MINUTES
SECONDARY AT TEMPERATURES
2000 FROM 50 TO 52°C
FUELS
0
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-36 40.6 52
FREE AIR TEMPERATURE - °C F927−001C
Figure 2−1. Ambient Temperature Envelope
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 2−3
Revision 4
MAXIMUM SAFE WINDS FOR HOVER OPERATIONS DECREASE WITH OBEY THE MAXIMUM WEIGHT,
INCREASING DENSITY ALTITUDE. TAKEOFF AND LANDING OPERATIONS IN ALTITUDE, TEMPERATURE (WAT)
CALM WINDS OR HEADWINDS LIMITS FOR TAKEOFF AND LANDING
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
12400 TAKEOFF AND LANDING WAT LIMIT
12000
11000
DENSITY ALTITUDE − FEET
10000
9000 IGE HOVER OPERATIONS HAVE BEEN
DEMONSTRATED IN WINDS UP TO 17
8000 KNOTS FROM ALL AZIMUTHS.
7000 IGE HOVER OPERATIONS HAVE BEEN DEMONSTRATED
IN WINDS UP TO 17 KNOTS FROM ALL AZIMUTHS
6000 EXCEPT BETWEEN 1205 AND 1355
AND
5000 IGE HOVER OPERATIONS HAVE BEEN DEMONSTRATED
4000 IN WINDS UP TO 15 KNOTS FOR AZIMUTHS BETWEEN
1205 AND 1355.
3000
2000 AVOID STEADY IGE HOVER OPERATIONS IN AREA A WHEN WINDS ARE
GREATER THAN 15 KNOTS FROM AZIMUTHS BETWEEN 1205 TO 1355.
1000
0
6250 6500 6770
4000 4200 4400 4600 4800 5000 5200 5400 5600 5800 6000 6200 6400 6600 6800
GROSS WEIGHT − LB
120°
AZIMUTH RANGE FOR AREA A
135° FM02-002
Figure 2−2. WAT Limit and “Area A” Azimuth For Crosswind Operations
2−3. AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
Observe gross weight depictions on chart.

VNE is 60 KIAS with lateral CG greater than +2 inches (+51 mm).
VNE is 134 KIAS at 6500 lb (2948 kg) following compliance with SB900-105.
VNE is 100 KIAS from 6501 to 6770 lb (2949 to 3071 kg).
VNE decreases at a rate of 4 kts/1000 FT above 5500 Feet HD
FAA Approved
2−4 Reissue 2
Revision 4
20000
: VNE DUE TO
TIP MACH
VNE : POWER ON
AS VNE: -25°C
: HD AND VNE
LOPE 15000 LIMIT FOR
DENSITY ALTITUDE - FEET
6251 TO
6500LB
-36°
10000 C -30°
ÏÏÏ
VNE: AUTOROTATION
OEI OPERATIONS C
ÏÏÏ
HYDRAULICS FAILURE
ÏÏÏ
VSCS FAILURE
XMSN CHIP LIGHT
5100 -
ÏÏÏ
5000
6250LB 140 KIAS
ÏÏÏ
ENVELOPE
ÏÏÏ
<5100
LB
0
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
134
INDICATED AIRSPEED - KNOTS F92−010B
Figure 2−3. VNE Chart − Gross Weight to 6500 lb (2948 kg)
100 KIAS
ENVELOPE 20000
: VNE DUE TO
TIP MACH
6251 TO 6500 LB : HD AND VNE
ENVELOPE VNE : POWER ON LIMIT FOR 6251
TO 6500 LB
15000 VNE: -25°C
: HD AND VNE
LIMIT FOR 6501
TO 6770 LB
-36°C
10000 VNE: AUTOROTATION
-30°C
ÏÏÏ
OEI OPERATIONS
HYDRAULICS FAILURE
ÏÏÏ
VSCS FAILURE
XMSN CHIP LIGHT
ÏÏÏ
5000 5100 - 6250 LB
ÏÏÏ
140 KIAS
3000 ENVELOPE
6501 TO 6770 LB
<5100 LB
ÏÏÏ
ENVELOPE 0
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 ÏÏÏ
140 150
134
INDICATED AIRSPEED - KNOTS
FM02-004
Figure 2−4. VNE Chart − Gross Weight to 6770 lb (3071 kg)

FAA Approved
Reissue 2 2−5
Revision 4
2−4. WEIGHT LIMITATIONS
Serial numbers 900-00141 and subsequent:

Maximum gross weight: 6770 lb (3071 kg).
Serial numbers 900-00140 and prior:
If TB900-044 has not been accomplished: Maximum gross weight is 6500 lb
(2449 kg).
If TB900-044 has been accomplished: : Maximum gross weight is 6770 lb (3071
kg).
Minimum flying gross weight: ref. Figure 2-5.
Cargo deck capacity: 1500 lb (680 kg) and not more than 115 lb/ft2 (561 kg/m2).
Maximum weight in baggage compartment (Sta. 234 to 257): 500 lb (227 kg) and
not more than 115 lb/ft2 (561 kg/m2).
20000
4000
2000
1153
0
-2000
-4000
-6000
-6812
-8000
3000 3500 4000 4185
GROSS WEIGHT - LB FM02-005
Figure 2−5. Minimum Flying Weight
FAA Approved
2−6 Reissue 2
Revision 4
2−5. CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG ENVELOPE)
Make sure the rotorcraft CG and weight are within approved limits throughout
flight operations.
Expanded lateral CG:
Maximum lateral CG for takeoffs and landings from/to a surface is +2 inches.
VNE is 60 KIAS with lateral CG more than +2 inches.
Longitudinal CG envelope is as shown on chart “B” below when lateral CG is
greater than +2 inches.
7000 7000
6770 6770
6500 DURING OPERATION IN THE 6500
EXPANDED CG REGION OF
6000 CHART A, THE MAXIMUM 6000
GROSS WEIGHT - LB
LONGITUDINAL CG LIMIT, AS
GROSS WEIGHT - LB
5100 LB
5500 DEPICTED BY THE DASHED
5500
LINE IN CHART B, APPLIES.
EXPANDED
5000 5000
CG LIMITS
4500 4500
4000 4000
3500 3500
3000 3000
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 194 196 198 200 202 204 206 208
CHART A: LATERAL CG STATION (INCH) CHART B: LONGITUDINAL CG STATION (INCH)
FM02-006
Figure 2−6. Center of Gravity Envelope
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 2−7
Revision 4
2−6. ROTOR BRAKE LIMITATIONS
The rotor brake must be in the stowed position before engine start.
The rotor brake can be applied after both engines are shutdown with NR at or below
70 percent.
2−7. ROTOR SPEED LIMITATIONS
Power ON:
Continuous operation Maximum 101%
Minimum 99%
Transient range: 91% to 98%
102% to 108%
Power OFF:
Continuous operation: 108% maximum
88% minimum
2−8. TRANSMISSION LIMITATIONS
Maximum transmission oil pressure: 104% PSI

Minimum transmission oil pressure: see Figure 2-13.
Maximum transmission oil temperature: 110°C
Minimum transmission oil temperature: -18°C
FAA Approved
2−8 Reissue 2
Revision 4
2−9. POWER PLANT LIMITATIONS
The pilot must monitor the IIDS during all phases of operation and
CAUTION record and report all exceedances to maintenance as soon as
possible.
Torque limits:
Normal:
Maximum continuous: 100%
Takeoff (5 minute): 101% to 110%
Maximum transient over torque: 111% to 124% for 10 seconds
OEI limits:
Maximum continuous: 124%
2.5 minute: 125% to 135%
Torque greater than 135%: NOT PERMITTED
Exhaust gas temperature limits:
Normal limits:
Maximum continuous: 850°C
Takeoff (5 minutes): 851°C to 900°C
Transient limits: 901°C to 1000°C for 20 seconds
OEI limits:
Maximum continuous: 900°C
2.5 minute: 901°C to 970°C
Maximum transient limits: 971°C to 1000°C for 20 seconds
Overtemperature limits for starting:
Maximum 875°C for 2 seconds
711°C for 10 seconds
650°C for 45 seconds
NOTE: Engine start should be completed within 45 seconds with EGT stabilized below
650°C.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 2−9
Revision 4
Output shaft (NP) speed limits:

Normal operating range: 99% to 101%
Transient limits: >102% to 108% for 20 seconds (not cumulative)
NG limitations:
Normal limits:
Maximum continuous: 97.2%
Takeoff (5 minutes): 97.3% to 99.8%
Transient limits: 99.9% to 104.1% for 20 seconds
OEI operating limits:
Maximum continuous: 99.8%
2.5 minute: 99.9% to 103.0%:
Transient limits: 103.1% to 104.1% for 20 seconds
Engine oil system limitations:
Engine oil temperature limits:
During starting: -40°C to 125°C
Normal operating range: 10°C to 120°C
Engine oil pressure limits:
Normal operating range: 85% to 100% psi
Maximum: 100% psi (>5 minutes)
Minimum: <80% psi (>5 seconds)
FAA Approved
2−10 Reissue 2
Revision 4
2−10. GENERATOR LIMITATIONS

Maximum continuous: 99% for each generator.
2−11. STARTER LIMITATIONS
30 seconds ON, 30 seconds OFF; 30 seconds ON, 30 seconds OFF; 30 seconds ON,
30 minutes OFF.
2−12. FUEL SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
Table 2−1. Fuel Specifications

PRIMARY FUELS (1) SECONDARY FUELS (2)
Jet A (ASTM D1655) Jet B (ASTM D6615)
Jet A-1 (ASTM D1655) JP-4 (MIL-DTL-5624)
JP-5 (MIL-DTL-5624)
JP-8 (MIL-DTL-83133)
RT (CIS Standards Organization
GOST 10227)(4)
TS-1 (CIS GOST 10227) (3)(4)
Notes:
(1). Using these primary fuels, the engine must operate satisfactorily throughout the
altitude/temperature envelope (ref. Figure 2-1).
(2). Using these secondary fuels, the engine must operate satisfactorily up to 10,000
feet (ref. Figure 2-1).
(3). Use of TS-1 is limited by P&WC to not more than 1000 hours (intermittently or
continuously) between engine fuel nozzle inspections.
(4). Must contain one of the following anti-ice additives at a concentration up to 0.3%
by volume: Ethylene Glycol Monomethyl Ether (Ethylcellosolve, Liquid I) as defined
in GOST 8313, Liquid I-M (mixture 50% Liquid I with 50% methyl alcohol) as de
fined in TU-6-10-1458, Tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol (TGF) as defined in GOST
17477 or Liquid TGF-M (mixture 50% TGF with 50% methyl alcohol ) as defined in
TU 6-10-1457.
Additional fuel specifications can be found in Section VIII.
Maximum 140 KIAS with either left or right low fuel warning tick
WARNING marks ON.
During operations in temperatures of 13°F (-10°C) or colder, fuel added to the tank
must contain either anti-icing additive PFA‐55MB or anti-icing additive per
MIL‐I‐27868 or MIL‐I‐85470 with a minimum concentration of 0.06% by volume
and a maximum concentration of 0.15% by volume. Follow the manufacturer instruc
tions.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 2−11
Revision 4
2−13. INTEGRATED INSTRUMENTATION DISPLAY SYSTEM (IIDS)

ENGINE TORQUE EXHAUST GAS
DISPLAY TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIGITAL
DISPLAYS NR TORQUE EGT
NP NP
ENG
OUT
. .
POWER TURBINE
SPEED DISPLAY EEC EEC
MAN MAN
FAIL FAIL
ROTOR SPEED DISPLAY F92−012
Figure 2−7. Primary IIDS Display

NP NR NR
NP NP >111%
>112%
>108%
>108%
>101% >102%
99 - 101% 98 - 102%
<99%
<98%
<91%
<88%
NOTE: > = GREATER THAN <80%

< = LESS THAN F927−003
Figure 2−8. NP and NR Scales

FAA Approved
2−12 Reissue 2
Revision 4
NORMAL OEI OPERATIONS

TORQUE OPERATIONS TORQUE
>109%
>135%
>100% >124%
>98% >122%
EEC EEC
MAN MAN
FAIL FAIL
NOTE: > = GREATER THAN
< = LESS THAN
F927−004
Figure 2−9. Engine Torque
EGT EGT
>900°C >970°C
ENG ENG
OUT OUT
>850°C >900°C
. . . .
>845°C >894°C
NORMAL OEI OPERATION

OPERATIONS ONLY
NOTE: > = GREATER THAN

< = LESS THAN
F927−005
Figure 2−10. Engine Exhaust Gas Temperature
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 2−13
Revision 4
SECONDARY IIDS DISPLAY

LEFT ENGINE PARAMETER
DISPLAY TRANSMISSION OIL TRANSMISSION PARAMETER RIGHT ENGINE PARAMETER
PRESSURE DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY
ENGINE OIL
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY FIRE FIRE FIRE CAB HEAT ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE DISPLAY
CHIPS CHIPS CHIPS BAT HOT
BAT WRM
° C %PSI ° C %PSI ° C %PSI ROTOR

BRAKE
CABIN
DOOR
FUEL
BAGGAGE
%LOAD %LOAD DOOR GENERATOR
TRANSMISSION OIL GEN GEN %LOAD DISPLAY
1 HYD 2
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
IIDS
NG NG
LB
GAS PRODUCER
TURBINE SPEED DISPLAY OAT ° C
FUEL QUANTITY F92−016
Figure 2−11. Secondary IIDS Display
FIRE
CHIPS
HIGH WARNING: >125°C TI
HIGH CAUTION: >120°C >100% PSI ME
>5 MINUTES
° C %PSI TI
LOW CAUTION: <10°C WITH NG >50%
<-45°C WITH NG < 50% <80% PSI >2ME
SEC
<80% PSI >5 SEC
CAUTION: 100% LOAD
%LOAD
GEN
HIGH WARNING: >103.0% NG
HIGH CAUTION: >99.8% NG
NOTE: ``>'' = GREATER THAN
``<'' = LESS THAN
NG ``<'' = EQUAL TO OR LESS THAN
LOW WARNING: <50% NG
F927−052
Figure 2−12. Engine Display

FAA Approved
2−14 Reissue 2
Revision 4
FIRE
CHIPS
HIGH WARNING: >110°C HIGH WARNING: >104% PSI
HIGH CAUTION: >93°C HIGH CAUTION: >100% PSI
°C %PSI FLIGHT IDLE

LOW CAUTION: <-18°C LOW CAUTION: <75% PSI NO
NE
LOW WARNING: <65% PSI <50
FUEL % PSI
LOW FUEL WARNING

SEGMENT: 150 LBS LOW CAUTION: 300 LBS
LEFT/RIGHT LOW FUEL WARNING
TICK MARKS: 97 TO 127 LBS
NOTE: ``>'' = GREATER THAN
``<'' = LESS THAN LB F92−018A
Figure 2−13. Transmission and Fuel Quantity Display
KNOTS KNOTS KNOTS

200 200 200
180 MPH 180 MPH 180
40 40 40
40 40
160 200 AIRSPEED 160 200 AIRSPEED 160 AIRSPEED
60 60
140 150 140 150 140
120 100 80 60 100 80 60 60

120 120
100 80 100 80 100 80
INSTALLED WITH AUTOPILOT OPTION
AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS:
140 OR 150 KNOTS

100 KNOTS
0-30kt INDICATOR UNRELIABLE FM02−013
Figure 2−14. Airspeed Indicator

FAA Approved
Reissue 2 2−15
Revision 4
2−14. DECALS AND PLACARDS
SEAT ATTACH
ONLY LOCATED AT UPPER CABIN
SEAT ATTACH POINTS
NO TIEDOWN
FUEL CELL ACCESS DOOR

WARNING LOCATED ON CABIN FLOOR
REPLACE DOOR BEFORE FLIGHT
AND JACKING AIRCRAFT
WARNING
LOCATED ON BAGGAGE
THIS PANEL MUST BE SECURED COMPARTMENT FLOOR
PRIOR TO JACKING, TOWING
OR FLYING THE AIRCRAFT
NO ARTICLES TO BE LOCATED ON COCKPIT DOOR

STOWED UNDER SEATS LOWER WINDOW FRAME
1. LOCATED ON UPPER
COCKPIT DOOR FRAME
2. LOCATED ADJACENT
TO COCKPIT DOOR
ACCESS HANDLE
SLIDING LOCATED ON CABIN DOOR

DOOR
UPPER FRAME (FWD)
NO ARTICLES TO BE LOCATED ON CABIN DOOR

STOWED UNDER SEATS UPPER FRAME (CENTER)
PRIOR TO FLIGHT LOCATED ON CABIN DOOR

1. TURN HANDLE TO SAFELOCK POSITION UPPER FRAME (AFT)
2. FASTEN SEAT BELTS AND SHOULDER HARNESS
EMERGENCY EXIT
LOCATED ON CABIN DOOR FRAME
PULL TAB ADJACENT TO EMERGENCY EXIT
TO REMOVE WINDOW RELEASE HANDLE F92−020−1
Figure 2−15. Decals and Placards (Sheet 1 of 2)

FAA Approved
2−16 Reissue 2
Revision 4
THIS HELICOPTER MUST BE OPERATED LIMITATIONS SPECIFIED IN THE FAA

DURING OPERATIONS IN TEMPERATURES OF 13F (−10C) IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE OPERATING APPROVED ROTORCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL
OR COLDER, FUEL ADDED TO THE TANK MUST CONTAIN
EITHER ANTI-ICING ADDITIVE PFA-55MB OR ANTI-ICING LOCATED ON INSTRUMENT PANEL
ADDITIVE PER MIL-I-27868 OR MIL-I-85470 WITH A
MINIMUM CONCENTRATION OF .06% BY VOLUME
APPROVED FOR
VFR DAY/NIGHT
AND A MAXIMUM CONCENTRATION OF .15% BY VOLUME.
SEE FLIGHT MANUAL FOR MIXING PROCEDURES.
LOCATED ON INSTRUMENT PANEL
LOCATED ABOVE FUEL FILLER
RADIO CALL
N X X X X X
LOCATED ON INSTRUMENT PANEL

VNE CHART: LOCATED ON INSTRUMENT PANEL
USEABLE CAP. 158.5 U.S. GALS (600 LITERS) USEABLE CAP. 158.5 U.S. GALS
WITH RANGE EXTENDER INSTALLED WITH RANGE EXTENDER INSTALLED
ROTOR
LOCATED ON FILLER NECK BRAKE
LIFT HANDLE,
NO STEP
ROTATE CW,
LOCATED ON FILLER NECK PULL DOWN
DO NOT
ENGAGE ROTOR
BRAKE ABOVE
70% NR
LOCATED ADJACENT TO ROTOR BRAKE
100 KT
CAPABILITY
STATIC PORT
KEEP HOLES AND
SURFACE CLEAN
MODIFIED FITTING WITH DECALS
LOCATED ABOVE STATIC PORT
F92−020−2B
Figure 2−15. Decals and Placards (Sheet 2 of 2)

FAA Approved
Reissue 2 2−17
Revision 4
FAA Approved
2−18 Reissue 2
Revision 4
Emergency and
Malfunction Procedures
S E C T I O N III
EMERGENCY AND MALFUNCTION
PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH PAGE
3-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2. Caution and Warning Annunciators and Audio Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-3. Engine Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Single Engine Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Second Engine Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Low Rotor RPM Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-4. Emergency Landing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Water Landing - Dual Engine Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Water Landing - OEI/AEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-5. EEC Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3-1. EEC Caution/Warning Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
EEC Critical Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
EEC Non Critical Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
EEC Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3-6. Engine Starting - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3-7. Engine/Aircraft Shutdown - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-8. Fire Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Cabin Fire/Smoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Electrical Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Figure 3-2. Engine/Transmission Deck Fire Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Engine Fire - On Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Engine FIRE - During Flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Transmission Area Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-9. Flight Control Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Anti-Torque Failure - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Anti-Torque Failure - Complete Loss of Thrust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Anti-Torque Failure - Fixed Thruster Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 1 3−i
Emergency and
PARAGRAPH PAGE
VSCS Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Figure 3-3. VSCS Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Hydraulic System Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Cyclic Trim Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Collective Friction Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3-10. Pitot/Static System Malfunction: Single or Dual Pitot Tube Installation . . . . . 3-26
Static System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Figure 3-4. Alternate Static Source Toggle Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Pitot Heat Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3-11. Engine and Generator Malfunction Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Figure 3-5. Engine and Generator Malfunction Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Engine High Oil Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Engine Low Oil Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Engine High Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Engine Low Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Engine Chips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
NG High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
NG Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Generator High Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3-12. Transmission Malfunction Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Figure 3-6. Transmission Malfunction Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Transmission Oil Temperature High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Transmission Oil Temperature Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Transmission Oil Pressure Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Transmission Oil Pressure High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Transmission Chips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Transmission Input Torque Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3-13. Fuel System Display Advisories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Figure 3-7. Fuel System Advisory Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Fuel Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Fuel Boost Pump Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Single Fuel Probe Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Dual Fuel Probe Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Impending Fuel Filter bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Fuel Shutoff Valve Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
FAA Approved
3−ii Reissue 2
Revision 1
Emergency and
PARAGRAPH PAGE
3-14. Caution and Warning Advisories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Figure 3-8. Caution/Warning Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Cabin Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Battery Hot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Battery Warm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Rotor Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Cabin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Baggage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
IIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3-15. Other Malfunction/Advisories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
IIDS Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Battery Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Extinguisher Pressure Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
IPS Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
NACA Inlet Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Rotor Speed Display Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Ground power Unit door open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-16. Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-17. Emergency Egress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Figure 3-9. Cabin Door Emergency Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3-18. Emergency Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Figure 3-10. Emergency Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 1 3−iii
Emergency and
FAA Approved
3−iv Reissue 2
Original
MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E) Emergency and
SECTION III
EMERGENCY AND
MALFUNCTION PROCEDURES
3−1. GENERAL
The procedures contained in this section are to be followed in the event of an emergen
cy or malfunction that may potentially affect the safety of the aircrew, passengers,
aircraft, or personnel on the ground.
These procedures are recommended to minimize danger to the helicopter. However,
these procedures should not limit the pilot from taking additional actions if the
situation warrants.
In the event of an emergency or malfunction, the pilot's primary consideration
is control of the aircraft. Then, the pilot must identify the problem and perform
the appropriate procedures relevant to the situation.
Terms such as ``land immediately'', ``land as soon as possible'', and ``land as
soon as practical'' are defined in Section I.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−1
Original
Emergency and MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E)
3−2. CAUTION AND WARNING ANNUNCIATORS AND AUDIO TONES
A red warning or yellow caution annunciator will illuminate on the IIDS display
and in some cases, an audio warning will sound announcing a failure or malfunction.
Some secondary IIDS displays have a digital display with a corresponding caution/
warning annunciator. Pilots should insure that both the digital display and its ap
propriate caution/warning annunciator are in agreement before executing the proper
emergency procedure. If they do not agree, other parameters should be cross‐checked
in an attempt to validate a given abnormal indication.
The following logic applies to the warning advisories:
1. ENG OUT, FIRE, CAB HEAT, and LOW FUEL warning tick marks flash
(only go OFF if condition that caused the warning goes away).
2. All other warnings turn ON continuously (only go OFF if condition that caused
the warning goes away).
Audio warnings alert the pilot through the headset that a malfunction has occurred
that may require immediate corrective action.
The warning tone: The warning tone will sequence a high and low tone twice
to indicate a warning condition. These tones are activated for FIRE, CAB HEAT,
BAT HOT, and EEC FAIL.
Low Rotor Audio tone: The low rotor RPM tone (a sweep tone) is activated for
rotor RPM less than 95% and either engine operating, or activated for rotor
RPM less than 88% and both engines failed. When the IIDS senses an engine
failure, the low rotor RPM tone is activated for one cycle. The audio tones are
disabled when the aircraft is on the ground.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−2
Original
3−3. ENGINE EMERGENCIES
The ENG OUT warning annunciator is located between the TORQUE and EGT
vertical displays. When the IIDS senses an engine failure, the ENG OUT
TORQUE EGT warning flashes and the low rotor RPM tone is activated
for one cycle. The EGT and TORQUE displays also re-
ENG
OUT scale. The ENG OUT advisory is disabled with aircraft
on the ground.
SINGLE ENGINE FAILURE
Indications: ENG OUT annunciator illuminated and low rotor tone on for one cycle.
Affected engine torque, NP and NG decreasing to zero.
Conditions: At a hover - IGE:
Procedures:
Land
Conditions: At a hover - OGE:
Procedures:
Collective pitch ADJUST TO MAINTAIN OEI LIMITS
NOTE: The decision to land or fly−away, following a single engine failure, will depend
on ambient conditions and aircraft gross weight. Refer to Section V for best rate
of climb speed, single engine rate of climb and descent, and height velocity
envelope performance data.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−3
Original
Conditions: In flight:
Maintain operating engine within OEI limits

Reduce airspeed to 100 KIAS or less (Ref. Section II)
Identify affected (failed) engine by cross checking torque, NP and

CAUTION NG prior to performing the following steps.
Engine control switch OFF ON AFFECTED ENGINE

Fuel boost pump OFF ON AFFECTED ENGINE
Fuel shutoff valve OFF ON AFFECTED ENGINE
NOTE: With fuel shutoff valve OFF, fire extinguishing system is now armed.
NOTE: Fuel warning tick mark on side of affected engine may illuminate prior to tick mark
for operating engine.
NOTE: If attempting a restart, leave fuel shutoff valve ON. Do not attempt restart if a
malfunction is suspected.
Land as soon as practical
NOTE: If cabin heat or air-conditioning is being used when an engine failure occurs it
will automatically be switched OFF to enable the pilot to utilize the maximum
available power from the remaining engine for a safe recovery. If, after
recovering to a safe OEI flight condition, cabin heat is needed for windscreen
defogging, cabin comfort, etc., select the CAB HEAT OVRD position to restore
cabin heat. Prior to the OEI landing, insure CAB HEAT is OFF to ensure that the
maximum power is available from the remaining engine.
Air start:
Failed engine control switch TO OFF THEN TO FLY
IIDS MONITOR
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−4
Original
SECOND ENGINE FAILURE
Indications: Low rotor RPM with low rotor tone ON if RPM is below 88%.
Possible left yaw
Torque, NP, and NG decreasing to zero.
Procedures:
Lower collective and maintain rotor speed within limits.
Perform autorotation to suitable landing area.
LOW ROTOR RPM WARNING

Procedures:
Adjust collective as necessary to control rotor RPM.
Respond immediately to the ENGINE OUT/low rotor RPM warning

WARNING by adjusting collective to maintain rotor RPM within limits, then
check engine instruments and other indications to confirm engine
trouble.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−5
Original
3−4. EMERGENCY LANDING PROCEDURES
WATER LANDING - DUAL ENGINE FAILURE
Procedures:
Adjust collective pitch as necessary to establish autorotation.
Cabin doors may be opened when airspeed is 60 KIAS or less.
Make autorotative approach, flaring as required to minimize forward speed

at touchdown.
Level aircraft. Increase collective pitch as contact is made with the water.
When aircraft begins to roll, lower collective to full down to minimize blades
skipping off the water.
Notify crew/passengers to evacuate aircraft after blades have stopped turning.
Do not inflate personal flotation gear until clear of the aircraft −

WARNING safe exit will be restricted.
WATER LANDING - OEI/AEO
Conditions: Available power allows hovering.
NOTE: The gross weight of the aircraft will determine whether sufficient power is
available to terminate the approach at a hover or whether a run−on landing must
be performed if landing OEI.
Procedures:
Establish normal approach to intended landing point.
Plan to arrive at 100 FT above touchdown at approximately 40 KIAS.
At approximately 50 FT, enter a decelerating attitude and increase power to

reduce rate of closure.
Descend to hovering altitude over water.
Passengers and copilot exit aircraft.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−6
Original
Fly a safe distance away from all personnel in the water to avoid injury.
Place ENGINE CONTROL switch(s) in OFF and perform a hovering autorota

tion.
Allow aircraft to settle in a level attitude while applying full collective pitch.
When aircraft begins to roll, reduce collective to full down to minimize blades
Release safety harness and exit the aircraft as soon as the blades have stopped
turning.

Conditions: Available power does not allow hovering.
Procedures:
Establish normal approach to intended landing point.
Plan to arrive at 100 FT (30.5 M) above touchdown at approximately 40 KIAS.
At approximately 50 FT (15.2 M), enter a decelerating attitude and increase

power to reduce rate of closure.
As water contact is made, shut down engine and hold the helicopter as level
as possible, keeping forward speed and rate of descent to a minimum.
When aircraft begins to roll, reduce collective to full down to minimize blades
Release safety harness and exit the aircraft as soon as the blades have stopped
turning.

FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−7
Original
3−5. EEC MALFUNCTIONS

TORQUE
EEC NON CRITICAL FAULT

CAUTION ANNUNCIATOR
( YELLOW) EEC EEC
MAN MAN
FAIL FAIL
EEC CRITICAL FAULT WARNING EEC MANUAL MODE
ANNUNCIATOR (RED) ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW)
F92−021
Figure 3−1. EEC Caution/Warning Annunciators

NOTE: The pilot should attempt to reset the EEC by by slightly moving the affected
engine’s twistgrip out of the NORMAL detent, pressing the EEC RESET button,
and returning the twistgrip to NORMAL. Two attempts may be required. If the
EEC malfunction indication clears, the EEC was experiencing a transient fault.
If the EEC malfunction indication remains ON, the fault condition is still present
and the appropriate malfunction procedure shall be followed.
EEC CRITICAL FAULT
NOTE: In the event that the EEC on one of the engines fails, the fuel flow of that engine
remains fixed and can only be controlled by the twistgrip. The engine with the
serviceable EEC will attempt to maintain NP/NR within limits.
Indications: EEC with FAIL warning annunciator on and activation of the warning tone
for two cycles.
Procedures:
When necessary, move the affected engine twist grip out of the NORMAL posi
tion to assume manual control of the FMU.
NOTE: The pilot has the option of leaving the fuel flow fixed or using the throttle twist grip
to adjust the fuel flow (torque). When either twist grip is taken out of the NORMAL
position, the EEC MAN annunciator will illuminate. Changes in power will be
compensated through the serviceable EEC engine from zero torque to
temperature limits. Twist grip movement is only required for large power
changes.
When operating in manual mode (i.e., EEC MAN illuminated),
CAUTION reductions in power that allow the torque on the engine in the
automatic mode to approach zero % can lead to an increase in
NP on the engine being manually controlled into the transient (20
second time limit) overspeed range (> 104.5% − third yellow chevron
is illuminated).
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−8
Original
Set power of the affected engine as desired.
Continue flight and monitor engine indications on the IIDS primary display.
There is no NR governing following EEC failures on both engines.

CAUTION NR and power must be controlled by the pilot using a combination
of collective and twistgrips.
EEC NONCRITICAL FAULT

An EEC caution annunciator ON in flight may result in one of the following indica
tions.
Indications: Engine torque matching may be degraded.
Conditions: During flight
Procedures:
Continue flight
Advise maintenance
Indications: EGT indication blanks
Conditions: In flight
Procedures:
Continue flight
Advise maintenance
Conditions: On ground prior to starting
Procedures:
Do not attempt start, or abort start.
Advise maintenance
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−9
Original
Indications: Inability to change engine mode with engine control switch.
Procedures:
Continue flight
After landing, perform manual engine shutdown (Ref. paragraph 3-7).
Conditions: On ground after landing
Procedures:
Perform manual engine shutdown (Ref. paragraph 3-7).
Indications: NP and NR indications not matched (split)
Procedures:
Continue flight
Avoid maneuvers that cause NR to increase above normal. (High rates of de
scent, quick stops)
Conditions: On ground
Procedures:
Do not takeoff
Advise maintenance
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−10
Original
EEC MANUAL CONTROL
Indications: EEC and MAN annunciator ON
Procedures:
EEC RESET switch PRESS

Twistgrips CHECK IN NORMAL DETENT
Indications: EEC annunciator flashing. The EEC is in automatic, but one of the twist grips
is not in the normal position.
Procedures:
Twist grip RETURN TO NORMAL POSITION
3−6. ENGINE STARTING − MANUAL
NOTE: The following procedure is provided to the pilot as a means of starting an engine
after experiencing an EEC FAIL warning which would preclude a normal
automatic start. Flight with one EEC failed (one engine manually controlled)
should be considered an abnormal procedure. It should only be done to
evacuate the helicopter from a hazardous environment or, if necessary, for a
return flight to a maintenance base where repairs can be performed. Before
attempting a start and flight with an EEC FAIL warning on one engine, pilots
should be familiar with the information in paragraphs 3−5 thru 3−7.
NOTE: To enable the starter to function during a manual start with an EEC FAIL warning,
it may be necessary for a second crew member to push and hold the appropriate
Engine Manual Start Button located on the back corners of the electrical load
center (Ref. Section VII).
NOTE: Complete the Engine Prestart cockpit check (Ref. Section IV) before attempting
a manual start.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−11
Original
Collective control:
NOTE: The following steps of rotating the twist grip to reset the PLA are not required if
the engine was previously shut down utilizing the manual shutdown procedures
in paragraph 3−7. Insure the twist grip is in the OFF position.
Twist grip on selected engine ROTATE TO FULL OPEN (PAST

THE ‘‘NORMAL’’ DETENT): THIS
RESETS THE PLA
Twist grip on selected engine ROTATE TO OFF
NOTE: AT a point between NORMAL and OFF, the twist grip will no longer be able to
be rotated toward the OFF position without applying additional force
(approximately 30 to 40 lb / 13 to 18 kg).
Electrical master panel:

Generator on selected engine OFF
Fuel system panel:
L BOOST or R BOOST for appropriate ON, CHECK IIDS INDICATIONS
engine
Engine control panel:

L ENGINE or R ENGINE IDLE
Monitor EGT, NG, and starter limits during start. Abort the start
CAUTION If EGT rises rapidly through 700°C.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−12
Original
Abort start procedure:

Twistgrip on selected engine OFF
NOTE: AT a point between NORMAL and OFF, the twist grip will no longer able to be
rotated toward the OFF position without applying additional force (approximately
30 to 40 LBS).
Engine control panel switch OFF WHEN EGT IS BELOW 150°C
Twist grip for selected engine ROTATE TOWARDS NORMAL
NOTE: As NG increases through 8% rotate twistgrip toward normal until lightoff occurs.
Observe EGT indication for immediate temperature rise. Monitor EGT and NG
during start. Increase twistgrip toward normal only as necessary to keep NG
accelerating toward idle. Manually bring NP/NR to 65%.
If lightoff is not attained with an increase of EGT and NG within

CAUTION 10 seconds, rotate the twistgrip to OFF and place the engine control
switch to off. Following a 30 second fuel drain period, perform a
30 second dry motoring run (Ref. Section VIII) before attempting
another start. Repeat the complete starting sequence observing
limitations.
Engine oil pressure CHECK

Generator ON
IIDS CHECK
GPU start only:
Generators ON
GPU DISCONNECT
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−13
Original
3−7. ENGINE/AIRCRAFT SHUTDOWN − MANUAL
NOTE: This procedure may be performed in the event a normal shutdown cannot be
accomplished on one or both engines.
Collective stick FULL DOWN
Cyclic stick TRIM TO NEUTRAL
Pedals NEUTRAL
Twist grip(s) IDLE DETENT
NOTE: The idle position is not marked on the twist grips. Idle is located at the point where
the twist grip can no longer be rotated toward the OFF position without applying
additional force (approximately 30 to 40 LBS).
Utility panel:
All unnecessary bleed air and electrical OFF
equipment
Fuel system panel:
L/R BOOST OFF
L/R GEN OFF
NP(s) slows to idle CHECK
EEC MAN indication(s) on primary IIDS CHECK

display
L ENGINE or R ENGINE OFF
Twistgrip(s) SNAP TO CUTOFF
NOTE: AT a point between NORMAL and OFF, the twist grip will no longer able to be
rotated toward the OFF position without applying additional force (approximately
30 to 40 LBS).
IIDS CHECK NORMAL SHUTDOWN
INDICATIONS
Continue with normal shutdown proce
dures
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−14
Original
3−8. FIRE EMERGENCIES
CABIN FIRE/SMOKE
Indications: Smoke and fume accumulation in the cabin.
Procedures:
Engine control switches OFF

Passengers/crew EVACUATE
Rotor brake (if installed) APPLY
Power switch OFF
Procedures:
Cabin heat OFF (if source of smoke is the

cabin heat duct)
Fresh air vents OPEN
AC/VENT switch VENT LOW OR VENT HIGH
NOTE: If crew station and/or passenger compartment gaspers appear to be the source
of smoke and or fumes, the AC/VENT switch should remain OFF or be returned
to OFF.
Cockpit door vents OPEN

Land immediately
After landing:
Power switch OFF
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−15
Original
ELECTRICAL FIRE
Indications: Smoke and fume accumulation in the cabin.
Procedures:

Power switch OFF
Procedures:
Cabin heat OFF

Generator switches OFF
If smoke/fire conditions persist:
POWER switch ESNTL
Land as soon as possible.
After landing:
Power switch OFF
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−16
Original
TRANSMISSION DECK FIRE

LEFT ENGINE FIRE WARNING WARNING ANNUNCIATOR (RED)
ANNUNCIATOR (RED)
RIGHT ENGINE FIRE WARNING
ANNUNCIATOR (RED)
FIRE FIRE FIRE

CHIPS CHIPS CHIPS
F92−022
Figure 3−2. Engine/Transmission Deck Fire Annunciators

ENGINE FIRE - ON GROUND
Indications: Engine FIRE warning annunciator ON and activation of the warning tone for
two cycles.
Procedures:
Engine control switches OFF BOTH ENGINES

Fuel shutoff valve OFF FOR AFFECTED ENGINE
Fuel boost pumps OFF
Attempt to confirm existence of fire
Fire bottle switch PRI (ALT IF NECESSARY)
NOTE: Fire bottle will not discharge with fuel valve ON.
Power switch OFF
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−17
Revision 1
ENGINE FIRE - DURING FLIGHT

Indications: Engine FIRE warning annunciator ON and activation of the warning tone for
two cycles.
Procedures:
Airspeed REDUCE TO O.E.I. VNE OR LESS

Attempt to confirm existence of fire
NOTE: If FIRE warning annunciator goes OUT, and no other indications of fire are
present, land as soon as practical.
If FIRE warning annunciator remains ON, proceed with next steps.
Engine control switch OFF FOR AFFECTED ENGINE
Fuel boost pump OFF FOR AFFECTED ENGINE
Fuel shutoff valve OFF FOR AFFECTED ENGINE
Fire bottle discharge switch PRI (ALT IF NECESSARY)
NOTE: The fire bottle will not discharge with the fuel valve ON.
If FIRE warning goes OFF LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICAL
If FIRE warning remains ON LAND IMMEDIATELY
After landing:
Engine control switch OFF FOR OPERATING ENGINE
Power switch OFF
TRANSMISSION AREA FIRE
Indications: Transmission FIRE warning annunciator ON and activation of the warning
tone for two cycles.
Procedures:
Land immediately
After landing:
Power switch OFF
Fire extinguisher USE AS APPROPRIATE
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−18
Revision 1
3−9. FLIGHT CONTROL MALFUNCTIONS
ANTI-TORQUE FAILURE - GENERAL

Different types of failure require different techniques for optimum success in
recovery. It is not possible to identify all failure scenarios. However, under
standing the following general guidelines will assist the pilot in controlling the
aircraft.
Pilots facing an anti-torque system malfunction are presented with variables in
types of failure as well as the operating environment at the moment of failure. There
fore, it is important that the pilot fully understand the effects and use of the remain
ing functional controls on establishing aircraft directional control.
Anti-torque malfunctions can be caused by jammed or broken thruster cone control
cable (fixed rotating cone), jammed fan linkage (fixed fan thrust), or total failure
of the NOTAR fan (complete loss of thrust).
Upon encountering an anti-torque system malfunction, the following general infor
mation may be applied by the pilot, when appropriate, to maintain directional control
of the aircraft.
Evaluate the extent of the condition by (1) applying pedal inputs to determine
the effect (if any) on aircraft yaw and (2) by reducing airspeed and noting
which direction the aircraft tends to yaw. If a pilot determines that a fixed
rotating cone condition exists, the pilot should place the pedals in a “neutral”
position (approximately one inch, [25mm] of right pedal). This “neutral” position
places the NOTAR fan at minimum pitch. Using pedal input in an attempt
to counter the yaw will produce an unfavorable thrust vector, increasing the
yaw.
Normally, the nose of the aircraft should turn right when power (collective)
is increased. Conversely, the nose of the aircraft should turn left when power
(collective) is reduced. The VSCS system will attempt to maintain “trimmed”
flight within its limited authority. When the collective is raised, the vertical
fins reposition to move the aircraft nose to the left. When the collective is
lowered, the vertical fins reposition to move the aircraft nose to the right,
assuming there is sufficient airflow (i.e., airspeed) across the vertical stabiliz
ers.
The effects of the VSCS can be neutralized by turning both VSCS switches
OFF. This action should only be accomplished with the aircraft established
on final approach and below 100 knots. This procedure is most helpful when
faced with a complete loss of thrust or with a fixed thruster - right pedal
applied condition.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−19
Original
Wind speed and direction at the landing site can be beneficial if optimized
for the particular type of anti-torque malfunction. Head winds reduce ground
speed and/or power required at touchdown. Left crosswind components can
help weathervane the aircraft against the yaw tendency caused by the particu
lar malfunction.
With a fixed collective position, controlling RPM with the twist grips will change
power (torque) and induce a yaw. If needed, it is recommended that controlling
RPM with twist grips be used only to reduce RPM just prior to or at the moment
of touchdown.
NOTE: This action will place both engines in the manual mode.
ANTI-TORQUE FAILURE - COMPLETE LOSS OF THRUST
This involves a break in the fan drive system (e.g., a broken drive shaft) that causes
the fan to stop turning resulting in a complete loss of fan thrust. Directional control
becomes dependent on airspeed and power setting.
Conditions: While in hovering flight
Indications: Inability to “trim” helicopter with pedals; may also be accompanied by

noise or vibration.
Procedures:
If altitude permits, a positive reduction of collective pitch may result in a

stopping or slowing of the “uncommanded turn to the right”.
If “uncommanded turn to the right” is arrested, fly away and gain sufficient
airspeed to maintain heading control.
Proceed with procedures for complete loss of thrust in forward flight.
If unable to gain airspeed or altitude does not permit, reduce power and
altitude with collective.
As the ground is approached, rotate both twist grips simultaneously to IDLE

and perform an autorotation.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−20
Original
Conditions: In Forward Flight
Indications: Inability to “trim” helicopter with pedals; may also be accompanied by

noise or vibration.
Procedures:
Adjust airspeed and power for level flight at an airspeed between 80 and
100 KIAS.
Do not attempt an autorotation from forward flight unless an actual

CAUTION dual engine failure occurs.
Select an approach direction that offers a left quartering headwind to reduce
the touchdown ground speed and the amount of right yaw.
Perform a shallow approach to a hard surface or other suitable area at a mini

mum airspeed of 80 knots.
Set collective friction to 5 pounds.
Turn VSCS OFF.
An aggressive reduction in power (similar to a “quick stop”) as the air

craft is decelerated prior to landing should yaw the aircraft to the left.
As the ground is approached, level the aircraft and adjust collective as

necessary to align the aircraft with the touchdown direction and cushion
the landing. Landing speed should be as slow as possible, not to exceed
30 knots.
If necessary, just prior to or at the moment of touchdown, rotate both twist

grips simultaneously toward IDLE to assist in maintaining directional control.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−21
Original
ANTI-TORQUE FAILURE - FIXED THRUSTER SETTING

Conditions: Right pedal applied: This condition results in a thruster opening on the right
and may be understood either as a “stuck right pedal” or a break in the rotating
cone controls with the right pedal applied. In either failure mode, the thruster
would be opened on the right producing a thrust vector that causes the aircraft
to yaw to the right. The degree of yaw will be determined by the position of
the rotating cone at the time of failure.
Procedures:
100 KIAS.

If able, place pedals in “neutral” position (approximately one inch [25mm]

of right pedal).
NOTE: With pedals in neutral, the NOTAR fan will be at minimum pitch.
Select an approach direction that offers a left quartering headwind to reduce
the touchdown ground speed and the amount of right yaw.
Perform a shallow approach to a hard surface or other suitable area at a mini

mum airspeed of 80 knots.
Select collective friction to 5 pounds.
Turn VSCS OFF.
An aggressive reduction in power (similar to a “quick stop”) as the air

craft is decelerated prior to landing should yaw the aircraft to the left.
As the ground is approached, level the aircraft and adjust collective as

necessary to align the aircraft with the touchdown direction and cushion
the landing. Landing speed should be as slow as possible, not to exceed
30 knots.
If necessary, just prior to or at the moment of touchdown, rotate both twist

grips simultaneously toward IDLE to assist in maintaining directional control.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−22
Original
Conditions: Left pedal applied: This condition results in a thruster opening on the left
and may be understood either as a “stuck left pedal” or a break in the rotating
cone controls with the left pedal applied. In either failure mode, the thruster
would be opened on the left producing a thrust vector that causes the aircraft
to yaw to the left. The degree of yaw will be determined by the position of
the rotating cone at the time of failure.
Procedures:
100 KIAS.

If able, place pedals in “neutral” position (approximately one inch, [25mm]

of right pedal).
NOTE: With pedals in neutral, the NOTAR fan will be at minimum pitch.
Select collective friction to 5 pounds.
VSCS OFF.
Use a shallow to normal approach into wind or left quartering headwind.
Maintain directional control with small adjustments in collective.
Plan to touchdown with little or no forward speed.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−23
Original
VSCS FAILURE
LEFT VERTICAL STABILIZER MID-RANGE DEFLECTION
POSITION INDICATOR POINT
L VERTICAL STAB R RIGHT VERTICAL STABILIZER

POSITION INDICATOR
FIN TRAILING EDGE

DEFLECTION INDICATORS L VERTICAL STAB R
F92−023
Figure 3−3. VSCS Indicator

Indications: VSCS Fail message(s) on IIDS alpha-numeric display.
VSCS indicator: Abnormal indication - no movement or continuous full-scale

deflection.
Possible uncommanded sideslip in forward flight.

Procedures:
Trim aircraft with pedals.
VSCS OFF ON AFFECTED SYSTEM(S)
Reduce airspeed below 100 KIAS (Ref. Section II).
Continue flight to next point of intended landing.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−24
Original
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FAILURE

Indications: Single system failure: The `‘1HYD’’ or ‘‘HYD2'' caution annunciator illuminated
on the caution/warning advisory display. Both hydraulic system pressures or
``TEMPERATURE'' indication will be displayed on the IIDS alphanumeric
display. A stiffness in the anti-torque pedals will occur with a failure of the
number 2 system.
Dual system failure: The ``1HYD2'' caution annunciator illuminated on the
caution/warning advisory display. Both hydraulic system pressures or
``TEMPERATURE'' indications will be displayed on the IIDS alphanumeric
display.
Conditions: Single system failure - loss of pressure

Procedures:
Decrease air speed to below 100 KIAS.
NOTE: A stiffness in the anti−torque pedals will occur with a failure of the number 2
system.
Continue the flight to the point of next intended landing.
Perform a shallow approach to a hover; land vertically for a single system
failure.
Conditions: Dual system failure - loss of pressure
Procedures:
Decrease air speed to below 100 KIAS.
Continue the flight to the point of next intended landing.
Perform a running landing.
Conditions: High hydraulic fluid temperature
Procedures:
Land as soon as practical.
CYCLIC TRIM FAILURE

Indications: Cyclic trim failure is indicated by an inability to reduce cyclic forces with the
cyclic trim switch. Cyclic stick forces of approximately 15 lb (6.8 kg) may be
required for full control movement.
Procedures:
Continue flight
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−25
Original
COLLECTIVE FRICTION FAILURE

Conditions: Collective friction release failure
Indications: 25 lb (11.34 kg) of force required to move the collective up or down.
Procedures:
Set collective friction release switch to 5 lb position in an attempt to reduce
control forces.
Continue flight.
Advise maintenance.
Conditions: Collective friction fails to engage
Indications: Collective control movements will require only 5 lb (2.27 kg) of force.
Procedures:
Continue flight; advise maintenance.
3−10. PITOT/STATIC SYSTEM MALFUNCTION: SINGLE OR DUAL PITOT

TUBE INSTALLATION
STATIC SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
Indications: Altimeter and IVSI (if installed) show no change in indication during
climb/descent.
Conditions: Primary static source is clogged.
Procedures:
Alternate static source toggle valve (on
PULL UP
affected side)
NOTE: The altimeter will indicate 60 feet less during climb operations.
CO-PILOT PITOT TUBE ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE

TOGGLE VALVE LOCATED ON OPPOSITE SIDE OF
INSTRUMENT PANEL.
NOTE: TO OPERATE TOGGLE VALVE, PULL

VALVE HANDLE UP. TO RETURN TO PRIMARY
STATIC SOURCE, PUSH HANDLE DOWN. F92−024
Figure 3−4. Alternate Static Source Toggle Valve
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−26
Original
PITOT HEAT FAILURE
PITOT
Indications: Yellow pitot heat caution light (if installed) ON.
L R
Conditions: Flight conditions requiring use of pitot heat.
Procedures: Left or right pitot heat failure.
Continue flight.
Procedures: Left and right pitot heat failure.
3−11. ENGINE AND GENERATOR MALFUNCTION INDICATIONS
NOTE: Certain malfunctions may require an engine to be shutdown, however, the pilot
must assess the type of problem and decide if the affected engine is to remain
operational.
ENGINE FIRE WARNING
ENGINE CHIPS CAUTION ANNUNCIATOR (RED)
ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW)
HIGH ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE FIRE HIGH ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

WARNING ANNUNCIATOR (RED) CAUTION ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW)
CHIPS
CAUTION ANNUNCIATOR
(YELLOW)
LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
° C %PSI CAUTION ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW)
ENGINE LOW OIL TEMPERATURE WARNING ANNUNCIATOR (RED)
CAUTION ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW)
GENERATOR HIGH LOAD NG HIGH

%LOAD WARNING ANNUNCIATOR (RED)
GEN NG HIGH
GENERATOR LOAD CAUTION ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW)
DIGITAL DISPLAY (WHITE)
NG NG LOW WARNING
GENERATOR OUT CAUTION
ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW) ANNUNCIATOR (RED)
F92−025
Figure 3−5. Engine and Generator Malfunction Annunciators
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−27
Original
ENGINE HIGH OIL TEMPERATURE
Indications: Upper yellow caution annunciator ON at 120°C and/or Red warning annunciator
ON at 125°C
NOTE: The engine is certified to operate continuously up to 125°C. The caution range
and yellow annunciator are advisories only and indicate temperatures
approaching maximum.
Procedures:
Reduce power on affected engine.
Monitor pressure and temperature.
NOTE: If temperature remains above limits (red annunciator ON) and/or abnormal oil
pressure is indicated, shut down affected engine.
If indications return to normal, increase power on affected engine as desired.
ENGINE LOW OIL TEMPERATURE
Indications: Lower yellow caution annunciator ON at +10°C and below for NG >50%.
Procedures:
Allow engine oil temperature to increase to normal range before placing Engine
Control in FLY.
ENGINE HIGH OIL PRESSURE
NOTE: The red high engine oil pressure annunciator is only activated during the lamp
test mode.
Indications: Upper yellow caution annunciator ON if the oil pressure is greater than 100%
PSI for more than 5 minutes.
Procedures:
Monitor pressure.
Continue flight.
Advise maintenance.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−28
Original
ENGINE LOW OIL PRESSURE
Indications: Lower yellow caution annunciator or lower red warning annunciator ON.
Procedures:
If single engine power is sufficient to continue flight, shut down affected engine.
ENGINE CHIPS
Indications: Yellow CHIPS caution annunciator ON.
Conditions: On ground:
Shut down engine
Conditions: In flight:
NG HIGH
Indications: Red warning or yellow caution annunciator ON.
Procedures:
Reduce power to normal range

Check engine torque and EGT indications
NG LOW
Indications: Red warning annunciator ON.
Procedures:
Check affected engine IIDS indications (primary display) for possible engine
failure.
If engine failure is confirmed, proceed with engine failure procedures (Ref.

paragraph 3-3).
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−29
Original
GENERATOR HIGH LOAD

Indications: Upper yellow generator high load annunciator ON.
Procedures:
Turn off unnecessary electrical equipment.
Failure to turn off unnecessary electrical equipment may cause

CAUTION the generator(s) to automatically go off line.
GENERATOR
Indications: Yellow GEN annunciator ON and %LOAD is ``0''.
Procedures:
L GEN or R GEN (or both if dual generator RESET

failure) switch
If GEN annunciator still ON OFF FOR AFFECTED
GENERATOR(S)
Continue flight.
If both generators failed.
Power switch ESNTL UNLESS FLIGHT
CONDITIONS DICTATE
OTHERWISE
NOTE: With both generators failed and the power switch in the ESNTL position, a fully
charged battery will supply power for at least 30 minutes.
WIth the power switch in the ESNTL position, only that equipment powered by
the essential bus will be operational.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−30
Original
3−12. TRANSMISSION MALFUNCTION INDICATIONS
TRANSMISSION FIRE WARNING TRANSMISSION CHIPS CAUTION

HIGH OIL TEMP WARNING ANNUNCIATOR (RED) ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW)
ANNUNCIATOR (RED)
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION FIRE HIGH OIL PRESSURE
HIGH OIL TEMP CAUTION WARNING ANNUNCIATOR (RED)
ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW) CHIPS
TRANSMISSION
HIGH OIL PRESSURE CAUTION
TRANSMISSION ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW)
LOW OIL TEMP
CAUTION ° C %PSI
TRANSMISSION
ANNUNCIATOR LOW OIL PRESSURE CAUTION
(YELLOW) ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW)
TRANSMISSION
LOW OIL PRESSURE
WARNING
ANNUNCIATOR (RED)
F92−026
Figure 3−6. Transmission Malfunction Annunciators

TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH
Indications: Upper yellow caution or red annunciator ON.
Procedures:
Reduce power
Transmission oil pressure CHECK
Air-conditioner (if installed) OFF
If temperature remains high LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE LOW
Indications: Lower yellow caution annunciator ON.
Procedures:
Continue flight
Do not takeoff with low temperature annunciator ON.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−31
Original
TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE LOW

Indications: Lower red warning annunciator ON.
Conditions: Loss of transmission oil pressure.
Procedures:
Reduce power to 56% torque or less as soon as possible.
NOTE: The transmission has demonstrated operation without oil for 30 minutes at a
power setting of 56%.
Indications: Lower yellow caution annunciator ON.
Procedures:
TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE HIGH
Indications: Upper yellow caution annunciator ON or red warning annunciator ON.
Procedures:
Monitor transmission oil pressure.
TRANSMISSION CHIPS
Indications: Yellow CHIPS annunciator ON.
Procedures:
Reduce airspeed to 100 KIAS.
Monitor transmission oil temperature and pressure. If normal, land as soon

as practical.
If temperature/pressure are not normal, land as soon as possible.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−32
Original
TRANSMISSION INPUT TORQUE SPLIT

Indications: TQ SPLIT EXCEED message on the alphanumeric display.
Possible EEC caution indicator on.
Conditions: Possible EEC noncritical fault resulting in transmission input torque mismatch
of 18% or more.
NOTE: For this message to be displayed, both engines must be in the FLY mode, neither
engine can be out or operating in the manual mode, and the aircraft must not be
on the ground as determined by AOG logic.
Procedures:
Continue flight.
Advise maintenance.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−33
Original
3−13. FUEL SYSTEM DISPLAY ADVISORIES
FIRE FIRE FIRE CAB HEAT

CHIPS CHIPS CHIPS BAT HOT FUEL FILTER
IMPENDING FUEL FILTER
BAT WRM BY-PASS CAUTION IMPENDING BY-PASS
(YELLOW) CAUTION
°C %PSI °C %PSI °C %PSI ROTOR
BRAKE
CABIN
DOOR
FUEL
BAGGAGE
%LOAD %LOAD DOOR
GEN GEN 1 HYD 2 FUEL SHUTOFF FUEL SHUTOFF
VALVE (YELLOW) VALVE (YELLOW)
IIDS (NOTE 1) (NOTE 1)
NG NG
LB °C
OAT A. NORMAL FUEL PRESSURE
ÇÇ
ÂÂ
ÉÉ
YELLOW
WHITE
ÂÂ
RED
GREEN B. NORMAL FUEL FLOW WITH IMPENDING ENGINE FUEL FILTERS BY-PASS
C. INDICATES LOW FUEL PRESSURE ON BOTH FUEL BOOST PUMPS

OR BOTH BOOSTER PUMPS IN OFF POSITION
FUEL
LOW FUEL FUEL QUANTITY

WARNING SEGMENTS D. LOW FUEL PRESSURE LEFT BOOST PUMP WITH NORMAL FUEL
TICK MARK (RED) PRESSURE ON RIGHT BOOSTER PUMP
(LEFT SHOWN,
(RIGHT OPPOSITE) LOW FUEL CAUTION
ÉÉÉ
ÇÇÇ
SEGMENT
(YELLOW)
E. INDICATES BOTH FUEL SHUTOFF VALVES IN CLOSED POSITION (NOTE 1)
LOW FUEL WARNING SEGMENT
(RED)
NOTE:
LB FUEL QUANTITY DIGITAL 1. THE LIGHT SEGMENT BAR(S) WILL FLASH ON THE IIDS PANEL WHEN
DISPLAY (WHITE) THE VALVE IS IN TRANSIT BETWEEN THE OPEN AND CLOSED POSITION.
F92−027
Figure 3−7. Fuel System Advisory Indicators
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−34
Original
FUEL LOW
Indications: Fuel quantity displays yellow caution bars when fuel level decreases to 300
pounds; the red warning bar displays at 150 pounds. Low fuel warning
tick mark(s) displays at 127 to 97 LBS while in cruise flight.
NOTE: Under normal operating conditions (cruise flight), a low fuel warning tick mark
(left or right) will illuminate when approximately 127 to 97 total pounds remain
in the fuel tank. With tick mark(s) illuminated and both engines operating at MCP,
approximately 10 minutes of fuel remain.
Under conditions where either side of the fuel tank fails (i.e.,develops a
substantial leak) the system will display a low fuel warning tick mark when
approximately 10 minutes of fuel remain (65 LBS) on either side of the collector
tank at maximum OEI fuel consumption rate.
Procedures:
With low fuel warning tick mark(s) ON 140 KIAS MAXIMUM AND AVOID
UNCOORDINATED
TURNS/MANEUVERS
Indications: Early display of low fuel warning tick marks - above 220 LBS in hover
and 160 LBS in cruise.
Conditions: Fuel transfer system malfunction.
Procedures:
Place L BOOST and R BOOST switches OFF.
NOTE: Expect engine flameout on side with early low fuel warning tick mark illuminated.
FUEL BOOST PUMP FAILURE
Indications: Alternating white and yellow offset segments indicate low fuel pressure.
Procedures: Single Failure
Place L BOOST and R BOOST switches OFF.
NOTE: If helicopter is equipped with the Supplemental fuel system, refer to Section X,
“Operating Instructions: Supplemental Fuel System” for information regarding
fuel transfer with boost pumps off.
For operation with Secondary Fuels (Ref. Section II), continue flight and avoid
high ‘‘G’’ maneuvers.
Continue flight
NOTE: If flight is continued into low fuel conditions (fuel warning tick mark(s) on), it is
possible for an engine to flame out from fuel starvation with as much as 50 LBS
of fuel still being indicated on the fuel quantity display. Under this condition, the
indicated fuel is available for OEI flight using the remaining engine.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−35
Original
SINGLE FUEL PROBE FAILURE

Indications: Digital fuel quantity indicator blanked.
Vertical fuel quantity segments indicate approximately half the remaining fuel
quantity.
Procedures:
NOTE: Continuous display of fuel flow is available on the IIDS as a top level menu item:
L ENG WF XXX PPH

L ENG WF XXX PPH
Continue the flight using consumption and time calculations.
DUAL FUEL PROBE FAILURE
Indications: Digital fuel quantity indicator blanked.

Vertical quantity segments blanked.
NOTE: The low fuel warning tick mark indication remains operational with a dual fuel
probe failure.
Procedures:
Continue the flight using consumption and time calculations.
NOTE: Continuous display of fuel flow is available on the IIDS as a top level menu item:
L ENG WF XXX PPH

L ENG WF XXX PPH
IMPENDING FUEL FILTER BYPASS
Indications: Impending bypass is shown by an inverted `Ù''

above affected fuel flow line.
Procedures:
Continue flight
If other bypass indicator is displayed LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−36
Original
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE MALFUNCTION
Indications: Two yellow bar segments flashing above and below the fuel flow line
to the left or right of center.
Conditions: Fuel valve not fully opened/closed
Procedures:
In flight:
Continue flight
Be prepared for affected engine to flame out
Pre Start:
Fuel shutoff switch CYCLE OFF TO ON
If no change in indication DO NOT ATTEMPT START
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−37
Original
3−14. CAUTION AND WARNING ADVISORIES
CABIN HEAT
WARNING ANNUNCIATOR (RED)
CAB HEAT BATTERY HOT
WARNING ANNUNCIATOR (RED)
BAT HOT
BATTERY WARM
BAT WRM CAUTION ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW)
ROTOR BRAKE
ROTOR CAUTION ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW)
BRAKE
CABIN CABIN DOOR OPEN
DOOR CAUTION ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW)
BAGGAGE BAGGAGE DOOR OPEN
DOOR CAUTION ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW)
1 HYD 2
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
IIDS PRESSURE OR HIGH TEMPERATURE
°C IIDS MALFUNCTION
OAT
F92−028
Figure 3−8. Caution/Warning Cluster
CABIN HEAT
Indications: Red CAB HEAT annunciator ON and activation of the warning tone for two
seconds.
Conditions: Bleed air leak
Procedures:
Turn CAB HEAT switch OFF.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−38
Original
BATTERY HOT
Indications: Red BAT HOT warning annunciator ON (battery internal temperature 71°C)
and activation of the warning tone for two cycles.
Procedures:
Shut down aircraft.
Service or replace battery prior to next flight.
WARNING Overheated battery can cause burns to personnel unless

protective clothing and adequate tools are utilized. In some
instances the battery may cause a secondary fire or may rupture
adding the further danger of electrolyte burns. Exercise caution
in dealing with an overheated battery. Maintain extinguisher ready
for use. Do not use the fire extinguisher to cool the battery.
Procedures:
Power switch OFF.
Land as soon as possible
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−39
Original
BATTERY WARM
Indications: Yellow BAT WRM annunciator ON (battery internal temperature 57°C).
Do not attempt to start an engine on battery power with BAT WRM

CAUTION annunciator ON.
NOTE: A battery warm condition results in the battery being disconnected from the
aircraft electrical system once a generator is placed on line. Generator power
alone is not sufficient to start an engine.
Procedures:
Utilize a GPU to start engines.
Power switch OFF after both generators are on line.
If BATT WARM annunciator remains ON for more than five minutes, shutdown
the aircraft.
Otherwise, continue flight.
Procedures:
Power switch OFF.
Continue flight.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−40
Original
ROTOR BRAKE
Indications: Yellow ROTOR BRAKE annunciator ON.
Procedures:
Rotor brake handle CHECK STOWED

If annunciator remains on, land as soon as possible.
CABIN DOOR
Indications: Yellow CABIN DOOR annunciator ON.
Procedures:
Close and safe lock door
Conditions: In the air
Procedures:
Reduce airspeed to 60 KIAS (Ref. Section II)

Land as soon as practical and close and safe lock the door.
BAGGAGE DOOR
Indications: Yellow BAGGAGE DOOR annunciator ON.
Procedures:
Close and safe lock door
Conditions: In the air
Procedures:
Land as soon as practical and close and safe lock the door.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−41
Original
IIDS
Indications: Yellow IIDS annunciator ON.
Conditions: IIDS fault
Procedures:
Continue flight.
Check fault log after landing; advise maintenance.
3−15. OTHER MALFUNCTION/ADVISORIES
IIDS FAILURE
Indications: IIDS displays blanks.
Conditions: Loss of electrical power to IIDS.
Procedures: On ground
Shut down.
Procedures: In flight
Reduce airspeed to 100 KIAS or less.
Reduce electrical load.
BATTERY DISCHARGE
Indications: BATT DISCHARGE message on IIDS alphanumeric display.
Conditions: Battery bus voltage less than 26 volts.
Procedures:
Do not clear the BATT DISCHARGE message.
NOTE: The IIDS will display the BATT DISCHARGE message whenever the Battery Bus
Voltage is <26V for >5 seconds, or <22V for >0.5 seconds. Clearing the BATT
DISCHARGE message by pressing CLR will result in no further indication of the
electrical system health unless the condition which set the message corrects
itself AND a low voltage condition occurs again.
Check generator load indications.
Land as soon as practical if condition persists.
Advise maintenance.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−42
Revision 2
EXTINGUISHER PRESSURE LOW
Indications: EXTNGSHR PRESS LO message on IIDS alphanumeric display
Conditions: Low pressure in Halon containers.
Procedures: Advise maintenance
IPS BYPASS
Indications: IPS BYPASS message on IIDS alphanumeric display.
Conditions: Both IPS bypass doors open.
Procedures: Advisory only
NACA INLET MALFUNCTION
NOTE: Helicopters with the standard engine inlet screen do not have NACA doors.
Indications: NACA DOOR message on IIDS alphanumeric display.
Conditions: NACA door(s) in the incorrect position.
Procedures:
NOTE: In the event that the malfunction results in one door remaining closed after the
aircraft has gone beyond the threshold airspeed of 47 KIAS, the engine with the
closed NACA door will indicate a higher EGT than the engine having the NACA
door open.
Place NACA INLET switch in CLOSE if flying in falling or blowing snow (Ref.
Section II).
NOTE: Flight into falling or blowing snow is only permitted when the NACA inlet switch
is in the closed position. The switch shall remain in the closed position for the
duration of the flight, even after leaving the falling or blowing snow conditions.
Advise maintenance
ROTOR SPEED DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
Indications: Rotor speed display blanks.
Procedures: Avoid high rates of descent and maneuvers that would cause the rotor to
overspeed (e.g., rapid decelerations, quick stops, etc.)
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−43
Original
GROUND POWER UNIT DOOR OPEN

NOTE: Helicopters with aft mounted batteries only.
GPU
Indications: Yellow indicator light ON.
Conditions: External power door open.
Procedures: On ground.
Close door. If light remains ON with door closed, advise maintenance after
completion of flight.
In the air: advise maintenance after completion of flight.
Procedures: In the air
Advise maintenance after completion of flight.
3−16. VIBRATIONS
Indications: Sudden, unusual or excessive vibrations occurring during flight.
Conditions: The onset of unusual or excessive vibrations in the helicopter may be an
indication of problems in the rotor or drive train systems.
Procedures:
LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.
No further flights should be attempted until the cause of the vibration

has been identified and corrected.
Indications: “CHECK NOTAR BAL” or “CHECK ROTOR BAL” on IIDS alphaneumeric

display.
Conditions: NOTAR fan or main rotor balance out of acceptable range.
Procedures:
Clear message from adphaneumeric display.
If the message on alphaneumeric display reappears during the

CAUTION same flight, land as soon as possible.
Advise maintenance.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−44
Original
3−17. EMERGENCY EGRESS
Crew compartment doors:

Both doors function as primary and emergency exits.
Cabin door window removal:
Each cabin door window may be used as an emergency exit by pulling the emergency
exit pull tab and pulling the window inward (Ref. Figure 3-9).
RIGHT SHOWN
LEFT OPPOSITE
COCKPIT DOOR FRAME

LOOKING OUTBOARD
RIGHT SIDE
1. LOCATED ON UPPER
COCKPIT DOOR FRAME
2. LOCATED ADJACENT CREW COMPARTMENT DOOR EXIT

TO COCKPIT DOOR
ACCESS HANDLE
EMERGENCY EXIT RELEASE
EMERGENCY EXIT
PULL TAB
TO REMOVE WINDOW
CABIN DOOR EMERGENCY EXIT
F92−029
Figure 3−9. Cabin Door Emergency Exit
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−45
Original
3−18. EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Emergency Fire Extinguisher:

The fire extinguisher mounts either to the aft side of the center console or on
the aft right hand side of the station 155.5 bulkhead. It detaches from the mount
ing bracket by unfastening the quick release clamps. The extinguisher uses Halon
1211 extinguishing agent. The fire extinguisher is equipped with a pressure
gauge that indicates normal, charge, and overcharge pressures.
F92 030
Figure 3−10. Emergency Fire Extinguisher

First Aid Kit:
The first aid kit is located on the right hand sidewall panel of the baggage compart
ment.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−46
Original
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−47
Original
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
3−48
Original
Normal Procedures
SECTION IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH PAGE
4-1. Preflight Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Figure 4-1. Pilot's Preflight Guide (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Figure 4-1. Pilot's Preflight Guide (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2. Pilot's Daily Preflight Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-3. Pilot's Preflight Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Figure 4-2. Instrument Panel - Single Pilot (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Figure 4-3. Instrument Panel - Two Pilot (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Figure 4-4. Switches and Circuit Breakers - Console Mounted (Typical) . . . . 4-18
Figure 4-5. Circuit Breakers - Baggage Compartment Mounted (Typical) . . . 4-19
Figure 4-6. Collective Pitch Stick Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Figure 4-7. Cyclic Stick Grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-4. Engine Pre-Start Cockpit Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-5. Engine Starting - Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4-6. Engine Runup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-7. Before Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-8. NOrmal Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4-9. Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4-10. Slow Flight/Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4-11. Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Figure 4-8. Tail Skid (Bumper) Flare Angle and Landing Surface Clearance 4-27
4-12. Engine/Aircraft Shutdown - Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Figure 4-9. Cyclic Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4-13. Post Flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4-14. Noise Impact Reduction Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-15. Flight With Doors Removed or Cabin Doors Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Figure 4-10. Cabin Door Hold Open Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4-16. One Engine Inoperative Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-17. Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 4−i
Normal Procedures
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−ii Original
Normal Procedures
SECTION IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
4−1. PREFLIGHT REQUIREMENTS
NOTE: The checks described in this Section apply to the standard configuration MD900
and do not include certain optional equipment items. Preflight checks for optional
equipment items may be found in Section X of this manual. If your helicopter is
equipped with STC’d items, refer to the STC holder’s flight manual supplement.
``CHECK'' means to observe the helicopter and note any obvious damage. Damage
is defined as any condition that is not normal or not within limits. Examples of
conditions to look for are: inoperable equipment, excessive leakage, discoloration
caused by heat, loose attachment, dents, cracks, punctures, abrasion, chafing, gall
ing, nicks, scratches, delamination and evidence of corrosion. These are the most
common types of damage, however, checks should not be limited to these items.
Further checks shall be performed before the next flight if discrepancies are noted
to determine if the aircraft is airworthy. Flight is prohibited when unrepaired damage
exists which makes the aircraft unairworthy.
Have a thorough understanding of operating limitations. (Ref. Section II).
Service helicopter as required. (Ref. Section VIII and the Aircraft Maintenance
Manual).
Determine that helicopter loading is within limits. (Ref. Sections II and VI).
Check helicopter performance data. (Ref. Sections V, IX, and X).
Be sure to include a review of the appropriate flight manual

CAUTION supplemental data for type of optional equipment installed
(including STC items) as a regular part of preflight planning.
Perform Pilot's Daily Preflight check prior to the first flight of the day.
Perform Pilot's Preflight Check prior to subsequent flights that same day.
Brief passengers on relevant operational procedures and associated hazards (Ref.
Section I).
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 4−1
Normal Procedures MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E)
F92−031−1A
Figure 4−1. Pilot’s Preflight Guide (Sheet 1 of 2)
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−2 Original
Normal Procedures
F92−031−2A
Figure 4−1. Pilot’s Preflight Guide (Sheet 2 of 2)
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 4−3
4−2. PILOT’S DAILY PREFLIGHT CHECK
Perform these checks prior to the first flight of the day.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Aircraft attitude CHECK

Covers and tiedowns REMOVE
Main rotor blades CHECK
EXTERIOR CHECKS − FRONT
Battery compartment (front mounted bat BATTERY CONNECTED; SECURE

tery only)
Battery compartment door (front mounted CONDITION; CLOSED
battery only)
Pitot tube(s) CONDITION, FREE OF
OBSTRUCTIONS
Windscreen CONDITION
Chin windscreen CONDITION
Chin windscreen area CHECK PEDAL LINKAGES;
FOREIGN OBJECTS
Fuselage Bottom:
Landing and searchlight SECURITY, CONDITION
Antennas/externally mounted equip CHECK SECURITY/ATTACHMENT
ment
OAT probe CHECK
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−4 Original
Normal Procedures
FORWARD RIGHT SIDE
Right crew door:

Glass and vents SECURITY, CONDITION
Hinges CHECK
Latch system and handle CHECK OPERATION
Door release handle CONDITION
Door strut and strap OPERATION, SECURITY, CONDITION
Crew Seat CONDITION; NOTHING STOWED
UNDER SEAT
Pilot pedals:
Adjust ADJUSTMENT PINS ENGAGED
Move pedals by hand OBSERVE MOVEMENT OF THRUSTER
POWER switch BAT/EXT
IIDS panel: CHECK LAMP TEST MODE (B.I.T.)
Fuel quantity CHECK
NOTE: The fuel quantity indication will not display actual fuel weight when the fuel
system is ‘‘topped off’’. Remove fuel cap and pull lanyard to assure tank is full
by noting fuel level on the inside of filler neck (Ref. SECTION VIII). Fuel can be
trapped in filler neck by the flapper valve.
Lighting control panel CHECK OPERATION OF LIGHTS AS
REQUIRED
POWER switch OFF
Crew door CLOSE
FUSELAGE − RIGHT SIDE

Landing gear:
Skid tube step SECURITY, CONDITION
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 4−5
Forward spacer fitting; crosstube CHECK

Skid tube and abrasion strips CHECK
Aft crosstube and damper fluid level CHECK (REF. SECTION VII)
Aft fuel vent fairing CLEAR OF OBSTRUCTIONS
ment
Fuel sump drain:
Push in fuel drain control to take sample CHECK FOR CONTAMINATION;
VERIFY PROPER OPERATION OF
DRAIN VALVES
Fuel drain door CLOSED
Forward fuselage skin and steps CONDITION
External power door, (front mounted bat SECURITY, CONDITION
tery only) avionics access panel, static port,
fuel cap
Right side passenger door:
Upper and lower track and guide CHECK
Door rollers CHECK OPERATION
Door skin and glass CHECK
Door stops/pins CHECK
Right side passenger compartment:
Upholstery CHECK CONDITION
Seats and seat belts CHECK OPERATION
Cabin heat controls AS DESIRED
Loose equipment STOWED
NOTE: Nothing stowed under seats that are to be occupied.
RIGHT FORWARD TRANSMISSION DECK

Hydraulic System:
Hydraulic manifold CHECK MOUNTING AND FLUID LEVEL
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−6 Original
Normal Procedures
System filters CHECK IMPENDING BYPASS

INDICATORS (REF. SECTION VIII)
Longitudinal hydraulic actuator CHECK LEAKS, MOUNTING
Hydraulic lines CHECK LEAKS, FITTINGS
Static mast supports CHECK ATTACHMENT
Rotor brake fluid level CHECK (IF INSTALLED)
Environmental control system:
Air inlet screen CHECK
Cabin air and fan plenum CHECK MOUNTING
Air ductwork CHECK CONDITION
Generator cooling ducts (if installed) CHECK CONDITION
Transmission deck CHECK FOR FOREIGN OBJECTS AND
SIGNS OF FLUID LEAKAGE
Forward access door CHECK OPERATION AND CONDITION;
CLOSE
Generator cooling inlet (if installed) CHECK
RIGHT CENTER TRANSMISSION DECK
Oil cooler:
Cooling air inlet NO OBSTRUCTIONS
Oil cooler CHECK MOUNTING, LEAKS AND
CONDITION
Air ducts CHECK MOUNTING AND CONDITION
Transmission:
Transmission oil level CHECK
Transmission oil filler cap CHECK SECURITY
Static mast support CHECK MOUNTING AND CONDITION
Forward outside engine mount CHECK MOUNTING AND CONDITION
Engine drive shaft CHECK
Fan drive shaft CHECK
Rotor brake CHECK
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 4−7

Engine accessory gear box CHECK FITTINGS, LINES, CONNECTORS
AND WIRING
Engine oil filter CHECK BYPASS INDICATOR
Transmission access door latches, CHECK OPERATION; CLOSE
hinges, and door
Cabin door closed and latched CHECK
FUSELAGE − RIGHT TOP REAR
Work platforms/steps. CHECK

Engine air inlet w/o particle separator:
Inlet screen CHECK − NO OBSTRUCTIONS
NACA inlet NO OBSTRUCTIONS
Engine air inlet with particle separator:
Particle separator CHECK − NO OBSTRUCTIONS
Bypass door CLOSED − CONDITION OF SEAL
NACA inlet door CLOSED − NO OBSTRUCTIONS
Right Engine:
Engine oil access door CHECK CONDITION
Engine oil level CHECK
NOTE: To reduce the possibility of over servicing and ensure accurate readings for oil
consumption measurement, it is recommended that oil level always be checked
within 10 minutes after engine shutdown (Ref Section VIII).
Oil filler cap CHECK

Engine cowling assembly CHECK
Fuselage skin CHECK CONDITION
Notar fan inlet:
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−8 Original
Normal Procedures
Fan air inlet screen and duct CHECK CLEAR

Notar fan blades CHECK
ROTOR SYSTEM
Stationary swashplate CHECK

Lower control rodend bearings CHECK
Rotating swashplate CHECK
Scissors drive link CHECK
Pitch change links CHECK
Striker plates and rollers CHECK
Inner flexbeam attach points CHECK
Flexbeam lead and lag legs CHECK
Upper and lower damper and damper caps CHECK
Elastomeric feathering bearing CHECK
Pitch change housing CHECK
Blade attach pins (bolts):
Check for upward or downward shift of ADVISE MAINTENANCE IF SHIFT IS
installed blade retention bolts. NOTED
Check blade retention bolts for gap be ADVISE MAINTENANCE IF NO GAP IS
tween thrust washer and retainer. PRESENT
Blade attach points CHECK
Rotor blades CHECK
Top of rotor head CHECK
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 1 4−9
FUSELAGE − RIGHT REAR
Fuselage skin CHECK

Exhaust ejector cowl CHECK
Baggage door:
Handle OPERATION
Skin CHECK
Door strut CHECK
Rear spoiler CHECK
Hinge pins CHECK
Environmental control system vent CHECK
Baggage compartment:
Loose items SECURED
Circuit breaker panel CHECK
Fan Control Rod Spring Capsule:
• • • Baggage compartment ceiling panel UNZIP
• • • Control rod spring capsule CHECK
NOTE: Check piston rod for movement, clips installed on outer bellcrank assembly and
lanyards connected to clips. If clips are bent and/or lanyards are taut, or piston
rod moves in any direction, advise maintenance.
• • • Baggage compartment ceiling panel ZIP UP
Baggage door CLOSED AND LATCHED

ment
TAILBOOM AND EMPENNAGE − RIGHT SIDE
Tailboom attach ring CHECK

Tailboom slots CLEAR OF OBSTRUCTIONS
Tailboom CHECK CONDITION
Horizontal stabilizer:
Horizontal stabilizer attach points CHECK
Horizontal stabilizer fairing CHECK
Antennas CHECK SECURITY/ATTACHMENT
Vertical stabilizer CHECK
Nav light/strobe lenses CHECK
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−10 Original
Normal Procedures
Thruster rotating cone: CHECK FOR FREEDOM OF ROTATION

Place hands at the 11 and 5 o'clock positions and press inward while rotating the
cone to the left and right. Repeat check by using the 1 and 7 o'clock positions. Ad
vise maintenance if any unusual noise or roughness is noticed.
CAUTION: Do not rotate cone beyond one−half left/right open.
Turning vanes CHECK
TAILBOOM AND EMPENNAGE − LEFT SIDE
Horizontal stabilizer:
Horizontal stabilizer attach points CHECK
Horizontal stabilizer fairing CHECK
Antennas CHECK SECURITY/ATTACHMENT

Tail skid CHECK
Vertical stabilizer CHECK
Nav light CHECK
Tailboom CHECK CONDITION
Tailboom attach ring CHECK
LEFT REAR FUSELAGE
Fuselage skin CHECK

Exhaust ejector cowl CHECK
Work platforms/steps CHECK
External power door, (aft mounted battery SECURITY, CONDITION
only)
ment
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 4−11
FUSELAGE − LEFT SIDE
Landing gear: CHECK

Aft crosstube and damper fluid level CHECK (REF. SECTION VII)
Passenger step CHECK
Skid tube and abrasion strips CHECK
Forward spacer fitting; crosstube CHECK
Skid tube step SECURITY, CONDITION
Underside of fuselage:
Fuselage skin CHECK
ment
Left side passenger door:
Upper and lower track and guide CHECK
Door rollers CHECK OPERATION
Door skin and glass CHECK
Door stops/pins CHECK
Left side passenger compartment:
Upholstery CHECK CONDITION
Seats and seat belts CHECK OPERATION
Loose equipment STOWED
FORWARD LEFT SIDE
Left crew/passenger door:

Glass and vents SECURITY, CONDITION
Hinges CHECK
Latch system and handle CHECK OPERATION
Door release handle CONDITION
Door strut and strap OPERATION, SECURITY, CONDITION
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−12 Original
Normal Procedures
Crew Seat CONDITION − NOTHING STOWED

UNDER SEAT
Co-pilot pedals (if installed) ADJUSTED; ADJUSTMENT PINS
ENGAGED
Crew door CLOSE
Avionics access panel CHECK
Static port CHECK − NO OBSTRUCTIONS
Fwd fuel vent fairing CHECK − NO OBSTRUCTIONS
LEFT FORWARD TRANSMISSION DECK
Hydraulic System:
Hydraulic manifold CHECK MOUNTING AND FLUID LEVEL
System filters CHECK IMPENDING BYPASS
INDICATORS (REF. SECTION VIII)
Lateral and collective hydraulic actua CHECK LEAKS, MOUNTING
tors
Hydraulic hand pump CHECK LEAKS, FITTINGS
Hydraulic lines CHECK LEAKS, FITTINGS
Static mast supports CHECK ATTACHMENT
Environmental control system: (if installed)
Evaporator CHECK
Freon lines CHECK
Air ductwork CHECK CONDITION
Transmission oil filter CHECK BYPASS INDICATOR (REF.
SECTION VIII)
Generator cooling ducts (if installed) CHECK CONDITION
Forward access door CHECK OPERATION AND CONDITION;
CLOSE
Generator cooling inlet (if installed) CHECK
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 4−13
LEFT CENTER TRANSMISSION DECK
Oil cooler:
Cooling air inlet NO OBSTRUCTIONS
Oil cooler CHECK MOUNTING, LEAKS AND
CONDITION
Air ducts CHECK MOUNTING AND
CONDITION
Static mast support CHECK MOUNTING AND
CONDITION
Forward outside engine mount CHECK MOUNTING AND
CONDITION
Engine drive shaft CHECK
Fan drive shaft CHECK
Rotor brake CHECK
Engine accessory gear box CHECK FITTINGS, LINES,
CONNECTORS AND WIRING
Engine oil filter CHECK BYPASS INDICATOR
Transmission access door latches, hinges, CHECK OPERATION; CLOSE
and door
Cabin door closed/open and latched/secured CHECK
FUSELAGE − LEFT TOP REAR
Engine air inlet w/o particle separator:

Inlet screen CHECK − NO OBSTRUCTIONS
NACA inlet NO OBSTRUCTIONS
Engine air inlet with particle separator:
Particle separator CHECK − NO OBSTRUCTIONS
Bypass door CLOSED, CONDITION OF SEAL
NACA inlet door CLOSED, NO OBSTRUCTIONS
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−14 Original
Normal Procedures
Left Engine:
Engine oil access door CHECK
Engine oil level CHECK
NOTE: To reduce the possibility of over servicing and ensure accurate readings for oil
consumption measurement, it is recommended that oil level always be checked
within 10 minutes after engine shutdown (Ref Section VIII).
Oil filler cap CHECK

Engine cowling assembly CHECK
4−3. PILOT’S PREFLIGHT CHECK
Perform these checks prior subsequent flights of the same day.

Fluid levels CHECK
Transmission deck - signs of fluid leakage CHECK
Air inlet screens/particle separators CHECK
Fuel cap, access doors and panels CHECK
Rotor blades CHECK BLADE RETENTION BOLTS
(PINS)
Rotor blades CHECK
Tailboom and empennage CHECK
Cargo and loose equipment CHECK
Baggage, cabin and crew doors CHECK
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 4−15
ATTITUDE
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
INDICATOR GPU DOOR
MAGNETIC COMPASS
LIGHT (AFT MOUNTED TAKEOFF TIMING
BATTERY ONLY) INDICATOR LIGHTS
LOCATION TYPICAL
IIDS
ALTIMETER
IVSI
VSCS INDICATOR
ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE
TOGGLE VALVE
FOOT HEATER
CONTROL VALVE
F92−032−1A
Figure 4−2. Instrument Panel − Single Pilot (Typical)
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−16 Original
Normal Procedures
NOTE 2:
PITOT/STATIC INSTRUMENTS.
TOGGLE VALVE FOR LEFT SIDE
NOTE 2:
TOGGLE VALVE
NOTE 1:
NOTE 1:
F92−032−2A
Figure 4−3. Instrument Panel − Two Pilot (Typical)
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 4−17
ENGINE CONTROL
OVSP TEST
L ENGINE R ENGINE
IDLE FLY TRAIN IDLE FLY TRAIN
OFF OFF KEY SWITCH
UTILITY PANEL
FUEL SYSTEM
L BOOST R BOOST
ON ON
HYD CAB AC/VENT
OFF OFF TEST HEAT COOL OFF VENT
SYS 1 OVRD LOW LOW
FUEL SHUTOFF COOL
ON HIGH VENT
HIGH
BOTTLE OFF
SYS 2
DISCHARGE
PRI PITOT
O
HEAT IPS L VSCS R
F ON ON ON
F
ALT OFF
RIGHT OFF OFF OFF
LEFT OFF TEST
ELECTRICAL MASTER NACA

INLET
AVIONICS L GEN R GEN POWER CLOSE
ON ON ON BAT/EXT NOTE
OFF OFF OFF HELICOPTERS WITH
NORMAL IPS ONLY
ESNTL
OFF RESET RESET
R ESS BUS
LIGHTING CONTROL ESS GCU ENG XMSN FUEL PITOT COCKPIT
BUS R R FIRE R FIRE VLV R HEAT R
LT MSTR CONSOLE IIDS HEAT
ON CONTROL
VSCS AP/SAS INSTR
IIDS R TRIM AUDIO ALERT LTG
OFF OFF OFF
FLOOD INSTR
STROBE POSN AREA
ON ON BOTH EADI AHRS 1 NAV LDG AIR
CKP R PRIMARY COM 1 LT DATA CFU
CAB
OFF OFF OFF L ESS BUS
ESS GCU ENG FUEL FUEL
BUS L L FIRE L PROBE VLV RL GPS
BLD AIR STBY EHSI AP/SAS

STROBES STROBES LEAK ATT R CMPTR DISC ACCEL
BOTH RED
RED WHITE L DC BUS R DC BUS
NAV VSCS INSTR XPNDR BLD AIR
OFF OFF COM 2 L FLOOD ANNUN 1 HEAT
F927−006B
Figure 4−4. Switches and Circuit Breakers − Console Mounted (Typical)
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−18 Revision 1
Normal Procedures
LEFT GENERATOR BUS BATTERY BUS
AUDIO CKPT CAB L R L R RH FUEL

PNL 2 UTL UTL BST PUMP EEC LOW
EVAP VENT COMP PITOT L R T/O L R

EVAP HEAT 2 DETENT TIMER IGNTR
ATT CPLT CNDSR CNSL POSN STROBE AREA

GYRO 2 CLOCK FAN 2 LIGHTING
EADI EHSI L W/S AHRS LH DC AHRS AV AUX FIRE SMOKE

L L WIPER 1 AUX FDR 2 PRI MSTR FUEL HRD DET
RIGHT GENERATOR BUS
20
ENC SRCH HVR NACA LH FUEL

IIDS TRAK HYD AV IPS ALT LGT LGT FUEL
STB TEST FAN
CAB 5V NSUN NSUN CARGO

HOIST HOIST ATT PILOT CNDSR AUD DIM CONT PWR HOOK
CUT PWR GYRO1 CLOCK FAN 1
ELT R W/S AHRS RH DC L FLD R FLD

WIIPER 2 AUX FDR EXCIT EXCIT
FD SYN FLT DIR MODE SEL INVTR HDG SAS/AP ADF

LEFT ESS BUS 26 VAC BUS
LEFT AVIONICS BUS RIGHT AVIONICS BUS
ADF2 RADAR RADAR MKR RAD ADF1 FM FM1 FM2 FM3

RT IND BCN ALT CTRL RT RT RT
PA COM 3 XPNDR DIR NAV 3 DME STORM CAMERA NAV 1 RMI

PWR 2 GYRO 2 SCOPE
MVG
MAP
F927−007A
Figure 4−5. Circuit Breakers − Baggage Compartment Mounted (Typical)
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 4−19
5 1. COLLECTIVE FRICTION RELEASE

4 2. EEC RESET SWITCH
3. TAKEOFF TIMER
4. HOVER, LANDING AND SEARCHLIGHT SWITCHES
6 5. SEARCH LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
6. GO-AROUND SELECT SWITCH
8 7. COMMUNICATIONS SELECT SWITCH
8. YAW SYNCHRONIZATION SWITCH
9. AUTO PILOT YAW/VERTICAL BEEP SWITCH
7 10. LEFT/RIGHT ENGINE TWIST GRIPS
11. INDEX MARKS
12. ALIGNMENT MARK
3
2
L
N
O 9
R
M
A
L
10
N
O
R
M
A
L
12
11
F927008
Figure 4−6. Collective Pitch Stick Controls
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−20 Original
Normal Procedures
AUTO PILOT
DISENGAGE
RADIO/ICS
CARGO HOOK CYCLIC TRIM

RELEASE
FLOAT INFLATION SWITCH
F92−036
Figure 4−7. Cyclic Stick Grip
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 4−21
4−4. ENGINE PRE−START COCKPIT CHECK

ELECTRICAL POWER − OFF
All cabin doors closed and safelocked CHECK
Seat belt and shoulder harness for proper fit and engage FASTENED
ment of buckle
Operation of shoulder harness inertia lock CHECK
Rotor brake STOWED
Magnetic compass CHECK
Flight instruments CHECK STATIC
POSITION/SET
Cyclic Control CHECK CENTERED
(Ref. Figure 4−9)
Collective Control:
Collective friction ON
Collective stick position FULL DOWN
If collective is not full down, do not try to force down until hydraulic
CAUTION pressure increases during start.
Twistgrip alignment marks aligned with index mark CHECK

LDG/HVR lights OFF
Key switch ON
Essential bus panels:
Circuit breakers IN
NACA inlet panel (if installed):
NACA inlet switch NORMAL
Utility panel:
CAB HEAT OFF
AC/VENT OFF
PITOT HEAT (if installed) OFF
IPS (if installed) OFF
VSCS L/R ON
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−22 Revision 2
Normal Procedures
Lighting control panel:

LT MSTR AS REQUIRED
CONSOLE/IIDS/FLOOD/INSTR AS DESIRED
STROBE(S)/POSN/AREA AS DESIRED
NOTE: If white strobe lights are installed, the “BOTH” or “WHITE” switch positions are
to be used during daytime operations only. (Ref. Figure 4−4.)

Avionics AS DESIRED
L GEN and R GEN ON (OFF FOR GPU
START)
POWER OFF
Fuel system panel:
L BOOST AND R BOOST OFF
LEFT/RIGHT FUEL SHUTOFF ON; COVER CLOSED
L ENGINE and R ENGINE OFF
ELECTRICAL POWER − ON

POWER BAT/EXT
NOTE: If helicopter has the aft battery option, the yellow GPU light will be ON when a
GPU is used for electrical power.
IIDS:
Monitor BIT FIRE WARNING ANNUNCIATORS
ON FOR 2 SECONDS; CHECK IIDS
FOR ADVISORIES
NOTE: Perform a commanded IIDS BIT if the helicopter has been statically exposed to
temperatures below 0°C for 12 hours or longer.
Fuel quantity display CHECK
DISP (display by exception) AS DESIRED
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 2 4−23
4−5. ENGINE STARTING − AUTOMATIC
NOTE: Either engine may be started first.

Engine starts have been demonstrated at temperatures as low as −36°C with a
ground power unit (GPU) assisted by the aircraft battery.
Engine starts using battery power only have been demonstrated after the aircraft
and battery have been statically exposed to temperatures down to 0°C for 12
hours or more.
A GPU should be used in lieu of aircraft battery power when attempting more
than one initial engine start during operations in ambient temperatures above
32°C.
Maximum wind speed for starting and stopping the rotor is 50 knots.
Fuel system panel:
L BOOST or R BOOST ON; CHECK IIDS INDICATION
EEC MAN indicators OFF
L ENGINE or R ENGINE SET TO IDLE/FLY AS REQUIRED
Monitor EGT, NG, and starter limits during start. If EGT is observed
CAUTION approaching maximum overtemperature limits during start (Ref.
Section II), abort the start as follows.
Engine control switch OFF, fuel boost pump OFF; monitor IIDS
displays.

10 seconds, turn fuel boost pump OFF and place the engine control
switch to OFF. Following a 30 second fuel drain period, perform
a 30 second dry motoring run (Ref. Section VIII) before attempting
another start. Repeat the complete starting sequence observing
limitations. This procedure applies to ground and air−starts in the
auto mode.
Abort start if: abnormal noises are heard; engine start hangs (NG
below 54%); NG or NP increase beyond limits; start is not completed
within 45 seconds.
Ensure collective full down, cyclic (Ref. Figure 4−9) and pedals
centered as hydraulic pressure increases. Should an abnormal
vibration occur as the NR passes through 35 to 40%, shutdown
aircraft and advise maintenance. This vibration may indicate that
possible damage to the flexbeam has occurred.
If collective is not full down, do not try to force down until hydraulic
pressure increases during start. Sufficient hydraulic pressure will
be available when NR is above 25 percent.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−24 Original
Normal Procedures
IIDS CHECK FOR NORMAL INDICATIONS
NOTE: If any abnormal indications are observed, i.e. low transmission/engine oil
pressures, shut down engine.
Repeat starting procedure for second engine
NOTE: Do not start second engine until at least 60% NR is attained on the first engine.
GPU start only:
L GEN/R GEN ON
GPU DISCONNECT
Yellow GPU indicator light (aft mounted battery only) OUT
4−6. ENGINE RUNUP

Avionics ON, AS DESIRED
L ENGINE and R ENGINE FLY
4−7. BEFORE TAKEOFF
Cyclic response check:

Move cyclic stick and observe rotor tip for correct movement.
Collective friction AS DESIRED
Primary and secondary IIDS displays CHECK ADVISORIES
Utility Panel:
PITOT HEAT (if installed) AS REQUIRED
NOTE: Turn pitot heat ON when visible moisture conditions prevail and OAT is 5°C and
below.
IPS switch (if installed) AS DESIRED

CAB HEAT AS DESIRED
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 4−25
4−8. NORMAL TAKEOFF
Hover area and takeoff path CLEAR

Hover power NOTE TORQUE
Takeoff PERFORM, USING UP TO 10% ABOVE
HOVER POWER
NOTE: For takeoff in noise−sensitive areas, refer to Paragraph 4−14.

NOTE: With the fuel system ‘‘topped off’’, the IIDS fuel quantity will not display a
decrease until after approximately 10 minutes of flight.
4−9. CRUISE
IPS switch (if Inlet Particle Separator installed) may be turned OFF.
NOTE: Decision to use the inlet particle separator scavenge air should be based on
atmospheric conditions, gross weight and height above terrain where operations
are to be conducted.
NACA doors (if installed) may be closed if blowing dust, sand, etc. is present in
the atmosphere.
IIDS menu/display mode selection:
The IIDS MENU and DISP keys may occasionally become non-responsive and/or
may register key inputs twice. This condition will clear itself after a brief interval.
Care should be taken when using the arrow keys (``'' or ``'') to scroll between
menu and submenu names, or between data and message items. Pressing the
arrow keys too fast may result in scrolling past the desired menu or message
displayed. The arrow keys should be pressed only after the menu item or message
changes in the alphanumeric display.
If a garbled message appears while scrolling through a menu, scrolling past
that menu item and then returning to the desired menu item will correct the
display.
While switching between the display modes (display by exception or continuous
display modes), pilots are reminded to clear the alphaneumeric display prior
to switching display modes.
4−10. SLOW FLIGHT/APPROACH
Observe controllability envelope and critical wind azimuth as stated in Section II.
The NACA door actuators (if installed) receive a discrete input from an airspeed
switch in the airspeed indicator. This signals the NACA doors to automatically close.
When airspeed increases above 47 KIAS, the NACA doors open. If door actuator
fails to function properly, the IIDS will display ``NACA DOOR'' advisory message
in the alphanumeric display.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−26 Original
Normal Procedures
4−11. LANDING
Use the illustration below to determine safe landing / flare attitudes.

NOSE UP LANDING ATTITUDES IN
EXCESS OF 9.66° WILL RESULT IN
THE TAIL SKID CONTACTING THE
LANDING SURFACE.
900F2318401−107 Bumper
22° MAXIMUM FLARE ANGLE BEFORE

30.16 IN TAIL SKID CONTACTS GROUND.
9.66° (76.61cm)
NOSE UP LANDING ATTITUDES IN

EXCESS OF 9.15° WILL RESULT IN
THE TAIL SKID CONTACTING THE
LANDING SURFACE.
900F2318401−109 Bumper 31° MAXIMUM FLARE ANGLE

BEFORE TAIL SKID CONTACTS
32.18 IN GROUND.
9.15° (81.74cm)
F927−098B
Figure 4−8. Tail Skid (Bumper) Flare Angle and Landing Surface Clearance
Running landing:
Maximum recommended ground contact speed is 30 knots for smooth hard sur
face.
Avoid rapid lowering of the collective and applying aft cyclic after ground con
tact.
Slope landing:
Slope landings have been demonstrated up to 12° in any direction. Successful
completion of this maneuver on a particular surface will depend on sufficient
friction between the skid tubes and the landing surface to prevent the helicopter
from sliding.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 2 4−27
4−12. ENGINE/AIRCRAFT SHUTDOWN − NORMAL
NOTE: Shut down the engines before exiting the helicopter unless safety or operational
considerations dictate otherwise.
Maximum demonstrated wind speed for starting and stopping the rotor is 50
knots.
Collective stick FULL DOWN; FRICTION ON

(REF FIGURE 4−9)
Pedals NEUTRAL
Engine control panel
L ENGINE and R ENGINE SET TO IDLE
All unnecessary electrical equipment OFF
Utility panel:
Heat OFF
AC (if installed) OFF
Pitot heat (if installed) OFF
Lighting control panel AS DESIRED
Avionics master switch OFF
L GEN/R GEN switches OFF
Fuel system panel:
L BOOST/R BOOST OFF
Failure to turn OFF boost pumps will result in engine fuel nozzle
CAUTION coking over time.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−28 Original
Normal Procedures
CENTERING STRAP IN
EXTENDED POSITION
90°
CENTERING DECAL CENTERING STRAP IN

STOWED POSITION)
CENTERING STRAP
CAUTION: CYCLIC SHOULD BE TRIMMED TO THE NEUTRAL POSITION FOR START-UP AND SHUTDOWN.
NEUTRAL POSITION IS ACHIEVED WITH CENTERING STRAP EXTENDED, TOUCHING CENTERING DECAL WHEN PERPENDICULAR TO INSTRUMENT PANEL.
F92−037
Figure 4−9. Cyclic Centering

ENG OUT indications CHECK IIDS
Do not use collective pitch to slow rotor.
CAUTION Should an abnormal vibration occur as the NR passes through 40
to 35%, advise maintenance before further flights. This vibration
may indicate that possible damage to the flexbeam has occurred.
NOTE: Check that compressor decelerates freely. Abnormal noise or rapid run down
(rapid loss of NG) may indicate turbine blade rubbing.
WARNING If there is evidence of post engine high EGT, follow the dry run
procedure as described below.
Dry run procedure:
Twist grip OFF
Engine control switch for selected engine SET TO IDLE −
OBSERVE STARTER
TIME LIMITS
Engine control switch for selected engine OFF
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 4−29
Normal shutdown continued:

Rotor brake (if installed):
Raise brake handle to release from stowed position
Rotate handle clockwise and apply brake by pulling APPLY BELOW
down on handle until handle locks aft. Release rotor 70% NR
brake during last revolution unless conditions dictate
otherwise.
Care should be taken while applying the rotor brake if the helicopter
CAUTION is parked on a slippery or icy surface. Anti−torque control is
minimized at less than normal operating RPM when the engine is
not driving the rotor system. Full control of the helicopter during
these conditions may be limited.
IIDS CHECK FOR
INDICATIONS OR
MESSAGES
NOTE: Wait for NG to reach 0% before entering the IIDS “Time Summary” menu to check
“LST FLT TIME” or “TOT FLT HR”. Failure to wait for NG to reach 0% may result
in incorrect time records.
POWER OFF AT 0% NG
Key Switch AS DESIRED
4−13. POST FLIGHT
Aircraft-investigate any suspected damage CHECK

Rotor blades CHECK BLADE
RETENTION BOLTS
(PINS)
Fuel and oil leaks CHECK
Engine and rotor transmission oil levels CHECK
NOTE: Engine oil level should be checked within 10 minutes after shutdown.
Logbook entries COMPLETE
Flight manual and equipment STOWED
Aircraft tiedowns, covers AS REQUIRED
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−30 Original
Normal Procedures
4−14. NOISE IMPACT REDUCTION PROCEDURES
Safe operation of the helicopter always has the highest priority.

CAUTION Utilize the following procedures only when they will not conflict
with safe helicopter operation.
Certain flight procedures are recommended to minimize noise impact on surrounding
areas. It is imperative that every pilot subject the public to the least possible noise
while flying the helicopter.
Takeoff:
Takeoff using maximum takeoff power at the speed for best rate of climb (Ref.
Section V).
Proceed away from noise sensitive areas.
If takeoff must be made over noise sensitive area, distance (altitude) is the best
form of noise suppression.
Cruise:
Maintain 1000 feet minimum altitude where possible.
Maintain speed of no more than 110 KIAS over populated areas.
Coordinated turns at around the speed for best rate of climb cause no appreciable
change in noise.
Sharper turns reduce area exposed to noise.
Approach:
Use steepest glideslope consistent with passenger comfort and safety.
Noise characteristics data is provided in Section V.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 4−31
4−15. FLIGHT WITH DOORS REMOVED OR CABIN DOORS OPEN
Stow or secure all loose objects with doors opened or removed.

CAUTION
The aircraft may be flown with cabin doors open or removed in accordance with
the flight restrictions stated in Section II.
NOTE: Refer to Section VI for weight and balance data with doors opened or removed.
One or both cabin doors may be opened or closed in flight at airspeeds up
to 60 KIAS.
For sustained flight with the cabin doors open, use of the cabin door hold
open device is required (Ref. Figure 4-10).
CABIN DOOR HOLD CABIN DOOR

OPEN DEVICE RESTRAINT FITTING
(STOWED)
CLIP
LEFT SIDE, LOOKING INBOARD
NOTE: THE CABIN DOOR HOLD OPEN DEVICE OPERATES

BY ATTACHING TO THE FORWARD CABIN DOOR RESTRAINT
WHEN THE DOOR IS IN THE FULLY OPEN POSITION.
F92−038
Figure 4−10. Cabin Door Hold Open Device
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−32 Original
Normal Procedures
4−16. ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE TRAINING

TRAIN mode:
Placing an engine control switch in the TRAIN position will simulate a one engine
inoperative (OEI) condition by resetting the selected engine's governed speed
to 92% NP, thereby putting the engine on standby while allowing single engine
training on the opposite engine. In the event of an engine failure (or inadvertent
switching to IDLE) on the opposite engine, the engine in TRAIN will automatical
ly revert to 100% NP. Also, if the opposite engine control switch is placed in
TRAIN both engines will revert to 100% NP.
NOTE: When an engine is placed into TRAIN the opposite engine will retain the 5 minute
Take−off Power engine parameter limiters and the IIDS does not rescale. The
result is more realistic pilot OEI training, providing rotor droop in training if the
power requested is above the limiters as would happen in a real OEI condition.
IDLE mode:
If rescaling of the TORQUE and EGT displays and activation of the ENG OUT
warning is desired, the pilot should select IDLE instead of TRAIN for OEI train
ing. In the event the opposite engine should fail during this time the pilot must
select FLY on the engine control switch to bring the good engine back to 100%
NP.
NOTE: When operating with one engine in the IDLE mode OEI limits apply. OEI limits
are generally considered for ‘‘emergency use only’’ and excursions into those
limits require recording in the engine log book and may increase the
maintenance required. Ref. Section VIII for recording and maintenance action
requirements.
Precautions:
Pilots should consider such things as flight mode, gross weight, density altitude
and aircraft familiarity before conducting OEI training to avoid excursions into
OEI limits.
Recommended maximum takeoff weight for OEI training:
6000 lb (2722 kg) below 5000 Ft HD
5200 lb (2359 kg) at or above 5000 Ft HD
NOTE: For recommended Category A OEI training weights, refer to Section XI, Part IX.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 4−33
4−17. FUEL SYSTEM
Capacities - Fuel System:

JET A: 1097 lb (498 kg) / 161.3 US gallons (611L) total capacity
1078 lb (489 kg) / 158.5 US gallons (600L) useable
JET B: 1048 lb (476 kg) / 161.3 US gallons (611L) total capacity
1030 lb (467 kg) / 158.5 US gallons (600L) useable
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
4−34 Revision 4
Performance Data
SECTION V
PERFORMANCE DATA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH PAGE
5-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-2. Noise Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Table 5-1. FAA Noise Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Table 5-2. FAA Noise Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-3. Density Altitude Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Figure 5-1. Density Altitude Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-4. Airspeed Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Figure 5-2. Airspeed Calibration Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-5. Best Rate of Climb Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Figure 5-3. Best Rate of Climb Speed (VY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-6. Rate of Climb and Descent - OEI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Figure 5-4. Single Engine Rate of Climb and Descent, From -36°C to 0°C
at VY, OEI MCP, and 3500 LB Gross Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Figure 5-6. Single Engine Rate of Climb and Descent, From 0°C to -36°C
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−i
Revision 5
Performance Data
Figure 5-12. Single Engine Rate of Climb and Descent, From -36°C to -0°C
Figure 5-14. Single Engine Rate of Climb and Descent, at VY, OEI MCP,
and 5750 LB Gross Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Figure 5-15. Single Engine Rate of Climb and Descent, at VY,
OEI MCP, and 6000 LB Gross Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Figure 5-16. Single Engine Rate of Climb and Descent, at VY,
OEI MCP, and 6250 LB Gross Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
6500 LBS Gross Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
6770 lb Gross Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-7. Rate of Climb - AEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Figure 5-19. Rate of Climb - AEO at VY MCP - 3500 lb Gross Weight . . . . . . 5-26
Figure 5-27. AEO at VY MCP - 6770 lb Gross Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Figure 5-28. Rate of Climb - AEO at VY TOP - 3500 lb Gross Weight . . . . . . 5-35
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−ii Revision 5
Performance Data
5-8. Hover Ceiling, AEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Figure 5-37. Controllability Envelope and Azimuth Range
for Crosswind Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Figure 5-38. Hover Ceiling, IGE, 3.5 Foot Skid Height,
Standard Engine Inlet,
Takeoff Power, Cabin Heat Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Figure 5-39. Hover Ceiling, IGE, 3.5 Foot Skid Height, Standard Engine Inlet,
Takeoff Power, Cabin Heat On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Figure 5-40. Hover Ceiling, OGE, Standard Engine Inlet,
Figure 5-41. Hover Ceiling, OGE, Standard Engine Inlet,
Takeoff Power, Cabin Heat On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Figure 5-42. Hover Ceiling, IGE, 3.5 Foot Skid Height, IPS Installed,
Figure 5-43. Hover Ceiling, IGE, 3.5 Foot Skid Height, IPS Installed,
Figure 5-44. Hover Ceiling, OGE, IPS Installed,
Figure 5-45. Hover Ceiling, OGE, IPS Installed,
5-9. Hover Ceiling, OEI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Figure 5-46. Hover Ceiling, OGE, Standard Inlet, 2.5 Minute OEI Power . . . 5-55
Figure 5-47. Hover Ceiling, OGE, IPS, 2.5 Minute OEI Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5-10. Height Velocity Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Figure 5-48. Height Velocity Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
5-11. Power Assurance Check - Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Figure 5-49. Power Assurance Check Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
5-12. Power Assurance Check - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Figure 5-50. Engine Torque Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Figure 5-51. EGT Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Figure 5-52. NG Chart - (NG read from Secondary IIDS Display) . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Figure 5-53. NG Chart - (NG read from Third Level Power Check Menu) . . . 5-65
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−iii
Revision 5
Performance Data
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−iv Revision 5
MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E) Performance Data
SECTION V
PERFORMANCE DATA
5−1. GENERAL
This section contains baseline helicopter performance information as defined within

certain conditions such as airspeed, weight, altitude, temperature, wind velocity
and engine power available. Data is applicable to the basic helicopter without any
optional equipment installed unless otherwise noted.
Serial numbers (SNs) 900-00141 and subsequent:
Maximum gross weight: 6770 lb (3071 kg).
Serial numbers 900-00140 and prior:
If TB900-044 has been accomplished: Maximum gross weight is 6770 lb
(3071 kg).
NOTE: If TB900−044 has not been accomplished: Maximum gross weight is 6500 lb
(2948 kg).
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−1
Revision 5
Performance Data MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E)
5−2. NOISE CHARACTERISTICS
NOTE: No determination has been made by the Federal Aviation Administration that the
noise levels of this aircraft are or should be acceptable or unacceptable for
operation at, into, or out of, any airport.
The MD900 meets the FAR Part 36-J noise requirements at the certified maximum
gross weight of 6770 lb for level flight at 0.9 VH.
Table 5−1. FAA Noise Levels
MD900 NOISE CHARACTERISTICS − 6770 lb (3071 kg)

ENGINE: PW 207E
Configuration: 0.9 VH
Clean aircraft, doors (SL at 25°C)
on, no external kits. 90 KTAS
81.49 dBA
The MD900 meets the FAR Part 36-J noise requirements at the certified maximum
gross weight of 6500 lb for level flight at 0.9 VH.
Table 5−2. FAA Noise Levels

ENGINE: PW 207E
81.2 dBA
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−2
Revision 5
5−3. DENSITY ALTITUDE CHART
Description: The chart allows a quick estimation of the density altitude when
pressure altitude and OAT are known. This chart can also be used to determine
true airspeed.
Use of Chart:
To determine density altitude, the pilot must know pressure altitude and outside
air temperature. Enter bottom of chart with known or estimated OAT, move
up to known pressure altitude line, move to left and note density altitude.
Pressure altitude is found by setting 29.92 (1013 mb) in Kolsman window
± altimeter error.
To determine true airspeed convert indicated airspeed (IAS) to calibrated airspeed
(CAS) utilizing the Airspeed Calibration Curve (Ref. Figure 5-2). Read value
on right of chart opposite known density altitude. Multiply CAS by this value
to determine true airspeed.
Examples:
Find density altitude for 6000 HP at -15°C:
Follow -15°C line to 6,000 ft pressure altitude line; read density altitude (3800
ft).
Find density factor:
Read directly across from density altitude: (3800 ft). Note density factor of 1.058.
Find true airspeed:
130 KIAS = 127 KCAS (from Figure 5-2)

127 KCAS 1.058 = 134.4; round to 134 knots true airspeed.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−3
Revision 5
20000
1.36
1.34
18000
1.32
1.30
16000 1.28
1.26
14000 1.24
1.22
12000 1.20
1.18
10000
1.16
1.14
8000
1.12
1.10
6000
1.08
4000 1.06
1.04
2000
1.02
0 1.00
0.98
-2000
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
TEMPERATURE - °C
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140

TEMPERATURE - °F f927−009
Figure 5−1. Density Altitude Chart
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−4
Revision 5
5−4. AIRSPEED CALIBRATION
Description: This charts show the difference between indicated and calibrated
airspeeds.
Indicated airspeed (IAS) corrected for position error equals calibrated airspeed
(CAS).
Use of chart: Use the chart as illustrated by the example. To determine calibrated
airspeed, the pilot must know the indicated airspeed.
NOTE: The example below refers to Figure 5−2.
Example:
Wanted: Calibrated airspeed
Known: Indicated airspeed = 120 knots
Method: Enter the bottom of the chart at the indicated airspeed of 120 knots.
Move up to the airspeed calibration line; move left and read 117 knots,
calibrated airspeed.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−5
Revision 5
160
140
120
CALIBRATED AIRSPEED - KNOTS
100
80
60
40
20
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
INDICATED AIRSPEED - KNOTS
f927−010
Figure 5−2. Airspeed Calibration Curve
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−6
Revision 5
5−5. BEST RATE OF CLIMB SPEED
Description: This chart shows the indicated airspeed to use for the best rate of
climb at any given density altitude.
Use of Chart: Use the chart as illustrated by the example below.
Example:
Wanted: Best rate of climb
Known: Density altitude = 8,000 feet
Method: Enter the left side of chart at the known density altitude of 8,000 feet.
Move to the right to the airspeed calibration curve and then directly
down to read 60 knots indicated airspeed (IAS) as the best rate of climb
speed.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−7
Revision 5
20000
18000
16000
14000
12000
10000
8000
6000
4000
2000
0
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
INDICATED AIRSPEED - KNOTS f927−011
Figure 5−3. Best Rate of Climb Speed (VY)
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−8
Revision 5
5−6. RATE OF CLIMB AND DESCENT − OEI
Description: These charts (ref. Figure 5-4 thru Figure 5-18) show the rate of climb
vs pressure altitude at maximum continuous OEI power at gross weights ranging
from 3500 to 6770 lb (1588 to 3071 kg) at the best rate of climb speed.
NOTE: These charts based on an electrical load of 30%, heater OFF, and
air-conditioning OFF.
Use of Chart: The following example explains the correct use of the chart in
Figure 5-4.
Use of Charts: Use the chart as illustrated by the example below.
Example:
Wanted: Rate of climb
Known: Pressure altitude = 4000 feet
Known: Outside air temperature = 0°C
Method: Enter the left side of chart (ref. Figure 5-4) at the known pressure
altitude of 4000 feet. Move to the right to the 0°C temperature curve
and then directly down to read rate of climb of approximately 1750
feet per minute (ft/min).
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−9
Revision 5
-36
20000
19000
Continuous OEI Power, Vy, 3500 lb
18000 MAXIMUM
OAT LIMIT
17000
OAT - 5C
16000
15000 -30
14000 -10
13000
0
12000
11000
10000
9000
8000
-20
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
−1000
−200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800
RATE OF CLIMB AT VY - FT/MIN
F927−012−11
Figure 5−4. Single Engine Rate of Climb and Descent, From −36°C to 0°C
at VY, OEI MCP, and 3500 LB Gross Weight
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−10
Revision 5
20000
19000
18000
OAT - 5C
17000
16000
15000
14000
13000
12000
11000
10000 -10
9000
8000 0
7000
10
6000
5000 20
4000 40.6°
OAT LIMIT
30
3000
2000
40
1000
52°
OAT LIMIT
0
50
−1000
−200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
RATE OF CLIMB AT VY - FT/MIN f927−012−12b
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−11
Revision 5
20000
19000
18000 MAXIMUM
OAT LIMIT OAT - 5C
17000
16000
15000
14000
13000
-10
12000
-36
11000
10000 -30
9000 0
-20
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
−1000
−600 −400 −200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600

F927−012−2
Figure 5−6. Single Engine Rate of Climb and Descent, From 0°C to −36°C
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−12
Revision 5
20000
19000
18000
17000
16000
OAT - 5C
15000
14000
-10
13000
12000
0
11000
10000
9000
10
8000
7000
6000 40.6°
OAT LIMIT
20
5000
4000
30
3000 52°
OAT LIMIT 40
2000
1000
0 50
−1000
−600 −400 −200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
F927−012−1b
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−13
Revision 5
20000
-36 Continuous OEI Power, Vy and 4500 lb
19000
MAXIMUM
18000 OAT LIMIT
17000
OAT - 5C
16000
15000
14000 -30
13000
12000
11000 -10
10000
9000
8000 -20
0
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
−1000
−600 −400 −200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
F927−012−3
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−14
Revision 5
20000
19000
18000
-10
17000
OAT - 5C
16000
0
15000
14000
13000
10
12000
11000
10000
9000
8000
20
7000
6000
5000
4000
40.6°
OAT LIMIT 30
3000
2000
52°
OAT LIMIT 40
1000
0
50
-1000
-600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
F927−012−4b
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−15
Revision 5
MAXIMUM
OAT LIMIT
20000
-36 Continuous OEI Power, Vy, 5000 lb
19000
18000
OAT - 5C
17000
16000
15000
14000
13000
-30
12000
11000 -10
10000
9000
8000
-20
7000 0
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
−1000
−600 −400 −200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
RATE OF CLIMB AT VY - FT/MIN F927−012−6
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−16
Revision 5
20000
19000
18000
17000
-10
16000
15000
14000 0
13000 OAT - 5C
12000
10
11000
10000
9000
8000
7000
20
6000
5000
4000
40.6°
3000 OAT LIMIT
40
30
2000
1000 52°
OAT LIMIT
0
50
-1000
-600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
F927−012−5b
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−17
Revision 5
20000
Continuous OEI Power, Vy and 5500 lb
19000 -36
18000
17000
OAT - 5C
16000
15000
14000
13000 -30
12000
11000
10000 -10
9000
0
8000
-20
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
−1000
−600 −400 −200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
F927−012−8
Figure 5−12. Single Engine Rate of Climb and Descent, From −36°C to −0°C
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−18
Revision 5
20000
19000
18000
17000
16000
-10
15000
14000
0
13000
OAT - 5C
12000
10
11000
10000
9000
20
8000
7000 30
6000
5000
4000
40.6°
3000 OAT LIMIT 40
2000
1000
52°
OAT LIMIT
0
50
-1000
-600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
F927−012−7a
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−19
Revision 5
20000
19000 −36
18000
17000
−20
16000
15000
-10
14000
OAT - 5C
13000
0
12000
11000
10
10000
9000
8000
−30
7000 20
40.6°
6000 OAT LIMIT
5000
4000
52°
30
3000 OAT LIMIT
40
2000
1000
0
50
-1000
-600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
f927−012−13b
Figure 5−14. Single Engine Rate of Climb and Descent, at VY, OEI MCP,
and 5750 LB Gross Weight
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−20
Revision 5
20000
19000
18000 −36
17000
16000 OAT - 5C
15000
−20
14000
13000
12000
11000 -10
10000
9000
0
8000
−30
7000 10
6000
20
5000
4000
30
3000
40.6°
OAT LIMIT
2000 40
1000
52°
0 OAT LIMIT
50
-1000
-600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
F927−012−9b
Figure 5−15. Single Engine Rate of Climb and Descent, at VY,

OEI MCP, and 6000 LB Gross Weight
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−21
Revision 5
20000
19000
18000
−36
17000
16000
15000
−20
14000
OAT - 5C
13000
12000
−10
11000
10000
0 −30
9000
8000
7000 10
6000
5000
4000 20
3000
40.6° 30
OAT LIMIT
2000 40
1000
0 52°
OAT LIMIT 50
−1000
−600 −400 −200 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
f927−012−14a
Figure 5−16. Single Engine Rate of Climb and Descent, at VY,

OEI MCP, and 6250 LB Gross Weight
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−22
Revision 5
9000
THIS CHART BASED ON ELECTRICAL LOAD OF 30%,
HEATER OFF, AND AIR-CONDITIONING OFF
8000

-20°C
7000
-30°C
-36°C
OAT
6000
-10°C
PRESSURE ALTITUDE − FEET
5000 FT HD
5000 0°C
4000
10°C
3000
40.6°C
20°C
OAT LIMIT
2000
40°C
30°C
1000
52°C
OAT LIMIT 50°C
0
−200 −100 0 100 200 300 400 500
RATE OF CLIMB AT VY - FT/MIN F927−107b
6500 LBS Gross Weight
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−23
Revision 5
6770 lb Gross Weight
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−24
Revision 5
5−7. RATE OF CLIMB − AEO
Description: These charts show the rate of climb vs pressure altitude at twin engine
(AEO) MCP (ref. Figure 5-19 thru Figure 5-25) or TOP (ref. Figure 5-28 thru
Figure 5-35) at the best rate of climb speed.
NOTE: These charts based on an electrical load of 30%, heater OFF, and
air-conditioning OFF.
Figure 5-19.
Example:
Wanted: Rate of climb
Known: Pressure altitude = 3000 feet
Method: Enter the left side of chart at the known pressure altitude of 3000 feet.
Move to the right to the 20°C temperature curve and then directly down
to read rate of climb of 4200 feet per minute.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−25
Revision 5
20000
19000 MCP, VY, 3,500 lb
18000
17000
OAT - 5C
16000
15000
-36
14000 -30
13000
-20
Pressure Altitude − ft
12000
11000 -10
10000 0
9000
8000 10
7000 40.6°
OAT LIMIT
6000 20
5000
4000 30
52°
OAT LIMIT
3000
40
2000
1000
50
0
1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 2700 2900 3100 3300 3500 3700 3900 4100 4300 4500
Rate of Climb − ft/min
f927−013−7b
Figure 5−19. Rate of Climb − AEO at VY MCP − 3500 lb Gross Weight
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−26
Revision 5
20000
MCP, VY, 4000 lb

19000
18000
17000
OAT - 5C
16000
15000 -36
14000 -30
13000
-20
12000
-10
11000
10000 0
9000
8000 10
40.6°
OAT LIMIT
7000
6000 20
52°
OAT LIMIT
5000
4000 30
3000
2000 40
1000
50
0
800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200 3400 3600 3800
f927−013−1b
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−27
Revision 5
20000
19000 MCP, VY, 4500 lb

18000
17000
OAT - 5C
16000
15000 -36
14000
-30
13000
-20
12000
11000 -10
10000
0
9000
8000 10
40.6°
OAT LIMIT
7000
6000 20
52°
5000 OAT LIMIT
4000 30
3000
2000 40
1000
50
0
400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200
f927−013−2b
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−28
Revision 4
20000
19000
MCP, VY, 5000 lb
18000
17000
OAT - 5C
16000
15000
-36
14000
-30
13000
12000 -20
Pressure Altitude - ft
11000 -10
10000
0
9000
8000
40.6° 10
OAT LIMIT
7000
6000 20
52°
OAT LIMIT
5000
4000 30
3000
2000 40
1000
50
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800
Rate of Climb - ft/min
f927−013−3b
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−29
Revision 5
20000
19000
MCP, VY, 5500 lb
18000
17000
OAT - 5C
OAT - 5C
16000
15000 -36
14000
-30
13000
12000 -20
11000 -10
10000
0
9000
8000
40.6° 10
OAT LIMIT
7000
6000 20
52°
5000 OAT LIMIT
4000 30
3000
40
2000
1000
50
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
f97−013−4b
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−30
Revision 5
20000
19000 MCP, VY, 6000 lb

18000
17000
OAT - 5C
16000
15000
-36
14000
13000 -30
12000
-20
11000
-10
10000
9000 0
8000
40.6° 10
7000 OAT LIMIT
6000
20
5000
4000 52° 30
OAT LIMIT
3000
40
2000
1000
50
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200
f927−013−5b
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−31
Revision 5
20000
19000 MCP, VY, 6250 lb
18000
17000
OAT - 5C
16000
15000
-36
14000
13000 -30
12000
-20
11000
-10
10000
9000 0
8000
10
7000
40.6°
OAT LIMIT
6000
20
5000
4000 52° 30
OAT LIMIT
3000
40
2000
1000
50
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
f927−013−6b
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−32
Revision 5
20000
19000
18000 MCP, VY, 6500 lb
17000
16000 14000 FT HD
LIMIT
OAT − oC
15000
14000 -36
13000 40.6° -30

OAT LIMIT
12000 -20
11000 -10
10000
0
9000
10
8000 52°
OAT LIMIT
7000
20
6000
5000
30
4000
3000
40
2000
1000
50
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
f927−081b
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−33
Revision 5
10000
MCP, VY, 6770 lb

9000
8000
-30°C
7000 -36°C
-20°C
6000
OAT
-10°C
5000
0°C
4000
10°C
3000
20°C
2000
30°C
3000 FT HD
1000
40.6°C 40°C
OAT LIMIT
0
1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800
Rate of Climb and Descent − FT/ MIN F927−013−9
Figure 5−27. AEO at VY MCP − 6770 lb Gross Weight
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−34
Revision 5
20000
TOP , VY, 3,500 lb
19000
18000 OAT - 5C
17000
-30/-36
16000
15000
14000
13000
12000
11000 -20
-10
10000
9000 0
8000
40.6° 10
OAT LIMIT
7000
6000 52°
OAT LIMIT 20
5000
4000
30
3000
40
2000
1000
50
0
1900 2100 2300 2500 2700 2900 3100 3300 3500 3700 3900 4100 4300 4500 4700 4900 5100
F927−013−8b
Figure 5−28. Rate of Climb − AEO at VY TOP − 3500 lb Gross Weight
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−35
Revision 5
20000
19000 TOP, VY, 4000 lb
18000
17000 -30/-36
OAT - 5C
16000 -20
15000
14000 -10
13000
0
12000
11000
10
10000
9000
20
8000
7000 40.6°
OAT LIMIT 30
6000
52°
OAT LIMIT
5000
4000
40
3000
2000
1000
50
0
1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 2700 2900 3100 3300 3500 3700 3900 4100 4300 4500
F927−021−1b
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−36
Revision 5
20000
TOP, VY, 4500 lb
19000
18000
-30/-36
17000 OAT - 5C
-20
16000
15000
-10
14000
13000 0
12000
11000
10
10000
9000
20
8000
40.6°
OAT LIMIT
7000
30
6000
52°
OAT LIMIT
5000
4000
3000 40
2000
1000
50
0
900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 2700 2900 3100 3300 3500 3700 3900
F927−021−2b
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−37
Revision 5
20000
19000
18000 TOP, VY, 5000 lb

-30/-36
17000
-20
16000
15000
-10
OAT - 5C
14000
13000 0
12000
11000
10
10000
9000
20
8000
40.6°
7000 OAT LIMIT
30
6000
52°
OAT LIMIT
5000
4000
3000
40
2000
1000
50
0
500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500 2700 2900 3100 3300
F927−021−
3b
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−38
Revision 5
20000
TOP, VY, 5500 lb
19000
18000
-30/-36
17000
-20
OAT - 5C
16000
15000
-10
14000
13000
0
12000
11000
10
10000
9000
20
8000
40.6°
7000 OAT LIMIT
30
6000
52°
OAT LIMIT
5000
4000
3000
40
2000
1000
50
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800
f927−021−4
b
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−39
Revision 5
20000
19000
18000
-30/-36 TOP, VY, 6000 lb
17000
OAT - 5C
16000
-20
15000
14000 -10
13000
0
12000
11000
10
10000
9000
20
8000
40.6°
7000 OAT LIMIT
30
6000
52°
OAT LIMIT
5000
4000
3000
40
2000
1000
50
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600
f927−021−5
b
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−40
Revision 5
20000
19000
TOP, VY, 6250 lb
18000
-30/-36
17000
OAT - 5C
16000
-20
15000
14000
-10
13000
12000 0
11000
10000 10
9000
20
8000
7000 40.6°
30
OAT LIMIT
6000
5000
52°
4000 OAT LIMIT
3000
40
2000
1000
50
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
f927−021−6
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−41
Revision 5
16000
14000 FT HD
TOP, VY, 6500 LB
15000 LIMIT
14000
o
OAT − C
13000
-20
12000 -36
11000 40.6° -10 -30

OAT LIMIT
10000
0
9000
8000 10
7000
20
6000
5000
30
4000
3000
40
2000 52°
OAT LIMIT
1000
50
0
300 500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100
Rate of Climb and Descent − ft/min
f927−021−7a
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−42
Revision 5
10000
MCP, VY, 6770 lb

9000
8000 -36°C
-30°C
7000
-20°C
6000
OAT
-10°C
5000
0°C
4000
10°C
3000
20°C
2000
30°C
3000 FT HD
1000
40.6°C
OAT LIMIT
40°C
0
1800 1850 1900 1950 2000 2050
Rate of Climb and Descent − FT/ MIN F927−021−8
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−43
Revision 5
5−8. HOVER CEILING, AEO

Description:
The hover ceiling charts (ref. Figure 5-38 thru Figure 5-45) show the maximum
hover weight capability, in-ground effect (IGE) or out-of-ground effect (OGE), both
engines operating at take-off power for known conditions of pressure altitude and
outside air temperature (OAT), or alternately, the maximum hover ceiling for a
known gross weight and outside air temperature.
Refer to Figure 5-37 for HIGE operations in crosswind conditions.
ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ
Figure 5−37. Controllability Envelope and Azimuth Range for Crosswind Operations
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−44
Revision 5
Separate hover ceiling charts are provided for rotorcraft equipped with either the
inlet particle separator (IPS) or screen inlet and heater operation.
The phrase, `À/C On'' only is applicable to the MDHI air‐conditioning installation
PN 900P7250302-101.
NOTE: The charts are based on an electrical load of 15% per generator (30 amps per
generator). Reduce/increase gross weight capability by 35 lb (16 kg) for each
10% increase/decrease in total load.
For many operations, a reduction in gross weight capability still allows the
rotorcraft to operate at a maximum gross weight of 6500 lb (2948 kg). Follow the
example shown below:
Use of Chart: The following example explains the correct use of the IGE Chart
in Figure 5-38.
Example:
Wanted: Maximum gross weight for hover at 3.5 feet skid height at takeoff power.
Known: PA = 7000 feet; OAT = 30°C; cabin heat off and A/C on; 25% electrical
load.
Method: Enter the chart at 30°C OAT and move vertically to the 7000-foot PA
curve (dashed lines). At this point, move directly to the left of the chart
and read from the gross weight scale 6280 lb.
Gross weight data above 6770 LB has been provided for calculation
CAUTION purposes or external load operations only. Weights above 6770
LB must be external and jettisonable.
The instructions for the IGE hover ceiling charts also are applicable to the OGE
hover ceiling charts.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−45
Revision 5
THIS CHART BASED ON WINDS 3KTS OR LESS AND 15% ELECTRICAL LOAD. FOR ELECTRICAL LOADS ABOVE/BELOW
15%, DECREASE/INCREASE WEIGHT CAPABILITY 35 LBS PER 10% CHANGE IN ELECTRICAL LOAD.
REDUCE WEIGHT CAPABILITY 40 LBS WITH A/C ON
GENERATOR COOLING
5200 MODIFICATION
11000
12000
5300
15300 HD 13000
10000
5400
15000 14000
GROSS WEIGHT − LB
5500 16000
9000
5600
5700 8000
5800
5900 7000
6000
6000
6100
6200
5000
6300
6400
4000
6500
6600
3000
6700
6800
6900
−50 −40 −30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
OAT °C
NOTE: MAXIMUM INTERNAL GROSS WEIGHT 6770 LB. WEIGHTS IN EXCESS OF 6770 LB MUST BE EXTERNAL AND JETTISONABLE
f927−014−1e
Figure 5−38. Hover Ceiling, IGE, 3.5 Foot Skid Height, Standard Engine Inlet,
Takeoff Power, Cabin Heat Off
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−46
Revision 5
4600
THIS CHART BASED ON WINDS 3KTS OR LESS AND 15% ELECTRICAL LOAD. FOR ELECTRICAL LOADS
ABOVE/BELOW 15%, DECREASE/INCREASE WEIGHT CAPABILITY 35 LBS PER 10% CHANGE IN ELECTRICAL LOAD.
4700 REDUCE WEIGHT CAPABILITY 40 LBS WITH A/C ON
4800
4900
AIRCRAFT WITHOUT
5000 GENERATOR COOLING
MODIFICATION
5100
12000 11000
5200 15300 HD MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE
13000 FOR CABIN HEAT ON
5300
10000
GROSS WEIGHT - LB
5400 14000
16000 15000
5500
5600 9000
5700
5800
8000
5900
6000
6100 7000
6200
6300
6000
6400
6500
6600 5000
6700
6800
6900
−50 −40 −30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
OAT °C
F927−014−7
Figure 5−39. Hover Ceiling, IGE, 3.5 Foot Skid Height, Standard Engine Inlet,
Takeoff Power, Cabin Heat On
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−47
Revision 5
4600 THIS CHART BASED ON WINDS 3KTS OR LESS AND 15% ELECTRICAL LOAD. FOR ELECTRICAL LOADS ABOVE/BELOW
4800
AIRCRAFT WITHOUT PRESSURE ALTITUDE - FEET
4900 GENERATOR COOLING 15300 HD
MODIFICATION
5000 12000 11000
5100 13000
10000
5200 16000 15000 14000
GROSS WEIGHT − LB
5300 9000
5400
8000
5500
5600 7000
5700
5800 6000
5900
5000
6000
6100 4000
6200
3000
6300
6400
2000
6500
6600
1000
6700
6800
0
6900
−40 −30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
OAT °C
f927−015−6
Figure 5−40. Hover Ceiling, OGE, Standard Engine Inlet, Takeoff Power, Cabin Heat Off
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−48
Revision 5
4600
4700 15%, DECREASE/INCREASE WEIGHT CAPABILITY 35 LBS PER 10% CHANGE IN ELECTRICAL LOAD.
AIRCRAFT WITHOUT
4800 GENERATOR COOLING PRESSURE ALTITUDE - FEET
MODIFICATION
4900 12000 11000
MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE
5000 15300 HD 13000 FOR CABIN HEAT ON
5100 14000
16000 15000 10000
5200
GROSS WEIGHT − LB
5300
9000
5400
5500
8000
5600
5700
5800 7000
5900
6000
6000
6100
6200
5000
6300
6400
6500
4000
6600
6700
6800 3000
6900
−40 −30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
OAT °C
f927−015−7
Figure 5−41. Hover Ceiling, OGE, Takeoff Power, Standard Engine Inlet, Cabin Heat On
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−49
Revision 5
4600
THIS CHART BASED ON WINDS 3KTS OR LESS AND 15% ELECTRICAL LOAD. FOR ELECTRICAL LOADS ABOVE/BELOW 15%,
DECREASE/INCREASE WEIGHT CAPABILITY 35 LBS PER 10% CHANGE IN ELECTRICAL LOAD.
4800
4900
5000 PRESSURE ALTITUDE - FEET

GENERATOR COOLING 15300 HD
5200 MODIFICATION
11000
12000
5300
GROSS WEIGHT − LB
5400 13000 10000
16000 14000
5500 15000
9000
5600
5700
8000
5800
5900 7000
6000
6000
6100
6200
5000
6300
6400 4000
6500
3000
5000
6600
6700
2000
6800
6900
−50 −40 −30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
OAT °C
NOTE: MAXIMUM INTERNAL GROSS WEIGHT 6770 LB. WEIGHTS IN EXCESS OF 6770 LB MUST BE EXTERNAL AND JETTISONABLE f927−014−8
Figure 5−42. Hover Ceiling, IGE, 3.5 Foot Skid Height, IPS Installed,
Takeoff Power, Cabin Heat Off
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−50
Revision 5
4600
THIS CHART BASED ON WINDS 3KTS OR LESS AND 15% ELECTRICAL LOAD. FOR ELECTRICAL LOADS ABOVE/BELOW 15%,
DECREASE/INCREASE WEIGHT CAPABILITY 35 LBS PER 10% CHANGE IN ELECTRICAL LOAD.
4800
4900
5000
AIRCRAFT WITHOUT 15300 HD
MODIFICATION
12000 11000
5200
5300
GROSS WEIGHT − LB
13000
5400 10000
14000
16000 15000
5500
5600
9000
5700
5800
8000
5900
MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE
6100 7000
6200
6300
6000
6400
6500
6600 5000
6700
6800
6900
−50 −40 −30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
OAT °C
f927−014−9
Figure 5−43. Hover Ceiling, IGE, 3.5 Foot Skid Height, IPS Installed,
Takeoff Power, Cabin Heat On
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−51
Revision 5
4800
15300 HD PRESSURE ALTITUDE - FEET
4900
AIRCRAFT WITHOUT
GENERATOR COOLING
12000 11000
5000 MODIFICATION
13000
5100
14000 10000
16000 15000
5200
GROSS WEIGHT − LB
5300 9000
5400
8000
5500
5600 7000
5700
6000
5800
5900 5000
6000
4000
6100
6200
3000
6300
6400 2000
6500
6600 1000
6700
0
6800
6900
−40 −30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
OAT °C
f927−015−8
Figure 5−44. Hover Ceiling, OGE, IPS Installed, Takeoff Power, Cabin Heat Off
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−52
Revision 5
4600
4700 15%, DECREASE/INCREASE WEIGHT CAPABILITY 35 LBS PER 10% CHANGE IN ELECTRICAL LOAD.
GENERATOR COOLING
MODIFICATION 12000 11000
4900
5000
15300 HD 13000
14000
5100 15000 10000
16000 MAXIMUM
TEMPERATURE
5300 9000
GROSS WEIGHT − LB
5400
5500
8000
5600
5700
7000
5800
5900
6000 6000
6100
6200
5000
6300
6400
6500 4000
6600
6700
3000
6800
6900
−50 −40 −30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
OAT °C
f927−015−9
Figure 5−45. Hover Ceiling, OGE, IPS Installed, Takeoff Power, Cabin Heat On
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−53
Revision 5
5−9. HOVER CEILING, OEI
Description: These charts (Ref. Figure 5-46 and Figure 5-47) may be used to deter
mine hover performance in zero wind conditions for internal load operations or
in headwind conditions during external load operations with one engine inoperative
(emergency conditions) and the remaining engine at 2.5 minute power rating.
NOTE: Unless otherwise authorized by operating regulations, the pilot is not authorized
to credit more that 50 percent of the performance increase resulting from the
actual favorable head wind increase.
NOTE: These charts are not to be used while conducting Category A takeoff and landing
operations.
Figure 5-46.
Example 1: Zero wind
Wanted: Maximum gross weight for hover OGE at 2.5 minute OEI power.
Known: HP = 4000 FT, OAT = 10°C
Method: Enter the chart at 10°C and move right to the 4000 HP curve. At this
point move up and read from the gross weight scale, 5275 LB.
Example 2: Headwind
NOTE: It is essential that reliable wind information be available prior to determining
hover. Additionally, only the lower limit of a gust spread may be used to determine
head wind credit.
Wanted: Maximum gross weight for hover OGE at 2.5 minute OEI power.
Known: HP = 4000 FT, OAT = 10°C, 10 knot head wind
Method: Enter the chart at 10°C and move right to the 4000 HP curve. At this
point move down to the 10 knot headwind line. From this point, move to the
left and read from the gross weight scale, 5475 LB.
Next, subtract 5275 LB (from example 1) from 5475 LB to determine the unfac
tored head wind performance increase of 200 LB. However, the pilot is authorized
to allow only 50 percent of the performance credit, resulting in a gross weight
increase to 5375 LB.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−54
Revision 5
GROSS WEIGHT − POUNDS
5500
5400
5300
5200
5100
5000
4900
4800
4700
4600
4500
4400
4300
4200
4100
4000
3900
3800
3700
5600
5700
−50

−40
−30
−20
14,000
−10
9,000 13,000
0 8,000
OAT - °C 7,000 12,000
6,000 11,000
10
5,000 10,000
20 4,000
3,000
2,000
30
AIRCRAFT WITHOUT 1,000

GENERATOR COOLING 40
MODIFICATION 0
-1,000
50
NOTE:
WIND SPEEDS ARE
UNFACTORED. APPLY 60
FACTOR AS REQUIRED
BY OPERATIONAL
RULES 3700 0-5
10
3900
15
4100 20
25
4300
30
4500
4700
4900 HEADWIND - KNOTS
GROSS WEIGHT 5100

POUNDS
5300
5500
5700
5900 THIS CHART IS BASED ON OEI
CONDITIONS, 2.5 MIN POWER
6100 WIND FROM THE NOSE ±30
6300 DEGREES AND CABIN HEAT OFF
6500
F927−022−1a 6700
Figure 5−46. Hover Ceiling, OGE, Standard Inlet, 2.5 Minute OEI Power
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−55
Revision 5
GROSS WEIGHT − POUNDS
5500
5400
5300
5200
5100
5000
4900
4800
4700
4600
4500
4400
4300
4200
4100
4000
3900
3800
3700
5600
5700
−50

−40
−30
−20
14,000
−10
9,000
13,000
0 8,000
OAT − °C 12,000
7,000
6,000 11,000
10
5,000 10,000
20 4,000
3,000
30 2,000
1,000
AIRCRAFT WITHOUT
GENERATOR COOLING 40 0
MODIFICATION
-1,000
NOTE: 50
WIND SPEEDS ARE UNFAC
TORED. APPLY FACTOR AS
REQUIRED BY OPERATIONAL 60
RULES 3700 0-5
10
3900
15
4100 20
25
4300
30
4500
4700
4900
GROSS WEIGHT5100
POUNDS HEADWIND - KNOTS
5300
5500
5700
5900
6100 THIS CHART IS BASED ON OEI
CONDITIONS, 2.5 MIN POWER
6300 WIND FROM THE NOSE ±30
DEGREES AND CABIN HEAT OFF
6500
F927−022−2 6700
a
Figure 5−47. Hover Ceiling, OGE, IPS, 2.5 Minute OEI Power
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−56
Revision 5
5−10. HEIGHT VELOCITY DIAGRAM

ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠŠ ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
160 11000
SMOOTH HARD
150 SURFACE - WIND CALM
10000
140
ŠŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
130 6501 TO 6770 LB 9000
AVOID AREA
ŠŠŠŠŠŠŠ
120
8000
ŠŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÖÖÖÖÖÖÖ ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
110

6251 TO 6500 LB 7000
ŠŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
100
AVOID AREA
ALTITUDE - AGL (FEET)
ŠŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
90
6000
80
ŠŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÖÖÖÖÖÖÖ
70
5000
ŠŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
6001 TO 6250 LB
60
ŠŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
AVOID AREA 4000
50
ŠŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
ÖÖÖÖÖÖÖ
40
3000
ŠŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ÒÒÒÒÒÒÒ
NOTE:
30 2000
ŠŠŠŠŠŠŠ
IF THE COMBINATION
20 OF GROSS WEIGHT AND
DENSITY ALTITUDE 1000
10
FALL IN THE SHADED
0 REGION OF CHART “B”,
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 THE “AVOID AREAS” IN 4900 5100 5300 5500 5700 5900 6100 6300 6500 6700
INDICATED AIRSPEED - KNOTS CHART “A” APPLY
CHART "A" CHART "B"
F927−0161
Figure 5−48. Height Velocity Diagram
The clear area of Figure 5-48 Chart ``B'' represents density altitude/gross weight
combinations for which the height velocity diagram does not apply.
Safe landings and single engine fly-aways following an engine failure have been
demonstrated for the conditions stated below.
6000 LB gross weight at 7000 Ft HD and
6500 LB gross weight at 2000 Ft HD:
Safe landings following a vertical descent were demonstrated up to a 35 FT
skid height.
Safe run-on landings were demonstrated up to a 90 FT skid height.
Fly-aways were demonstrated down to a 100 FT skid height.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−57
Revision 5
5−11. POWER ASSURANCE CHECK − AUTOMATIC
The power assurance check provides a means for the pilot to determine, prior to
take off, that each engine is capable of developing specification power.
NOTE: The primary purpose of this chart is its use as an engine performance trending
tool to aid in determining whether the engine is producing specification power,
or if engine power deterioration has occurred. Power check data taken at regular
intervals should be plotted to monitor trends in engine condition. Any trend
indicating a reduction in engine performance should be investigated.
If desired, pilots can view the last power check under the IIDS POWER CHECK
menu or other previous power assurance checks in the TREND LOG under
AIRCRAFT MONITOR menu.
NOTE: This power check procedure refers to the automated IIDS power check. If unable
to perform the automated power check, use the manual power check method
found in paragraph 5−12.
TOP LEVEL SECOND LEVEL THIRD LEVEL FOURTH LEVEL

AUTOMATIC
POWER CHECK PERFORM POWER GND POWER CHK LFT ENG TQ XXX.X%
ASSURANCE CHK TIME 30 SEC
NOTE 1 AUTOMATIC
LT NG = XXX.X% RECORD DONE
RT NG = XXX.X% PRESS REC
VIEW LAST POWER L PA CHK NG-X.X L PA CHK NG-X.X

ASSURANCE CHK L PA CHK EGT-XX.X L PA CHK EGT-XX.X
AUTOMATIC
R PA CHK NG-X.X RT ENG TQ XXX.X%
R PA CHK EGT-XX.X TIME 30 SEC
NOTE 2 AUTOMATIC
RECORD DONE
PRESS REC
R PA CHK NG-X.X
NOTE 1: USED WHEN PERFORMING A MANUAL R PA CHK EGT-XX.X
POWER ASSURANCE CHECK.
NOTE2: PRESS REC KEY TO SAVE DATA IN TREND LOG;
MENU OR CLR KEY ABORTS FUNCTION
NOTE: TO RETURN TO PREVIOUS HIGHER LEVEL - PRESS MENU
f927−017
Figure 5−49. Power Assurance Check Menu
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−58
Revision 5
HOW TO PERFORM THE CHECK:

NOTE: Power checks should be performed under the following conditions.
1. Aircraft should be faced into the wind.
2. Wind speed should not exceed 15 knots nor gust spread 5 exceed knots while
performing the check.
3. Operate engine to be checked at 100% NP for five minutes to assure proper
operating temperatures are attained.
4. IPS and CABIN HEAT should be off and the generator load should be 10% or less.
The engine to be checked should be at FLY.
The other engine should be at IDLE or OFF.
IPS and CABIN HEAT should be off and the generator load should be 10% or less.
Select POWER CHECK top level menu on IIDS alphanumeric display.
Press the ENT key 3 times to access the fourth level menu. LFT ENG TQ XXX.X%
TIME 30 SEC
Notice that the IIDS lists the left engine as the first engine to be checked. If the
the right engine is to be checked first, press the to access the
right engine menu. RT ENG TQ XXX.X%

TIME 30 SEC
Stabilize engine torque at 3% of the ENG TQ value displayed for 30 seconds. The
IIDS provides a countdown from 30 seconds on the alphanumeric display during
data acquisition. The countdown is started after the torque value is within the 3%
range for more than 2 seconds.
NOTE: Counter will reset to 15 seconds if torque setting is not maintained within 3% for the
last 15 seconds of count down.
After the IIDS calculates the performance margin of the selected engine, the
RECORD DONE menu is displayed and advises the pilot to press the REC
PRESS REC
key to generate a trend log (Ref. Section VII) and to display the results of the power
check on the alphanumeric display.
NOTE: If the power check fails, the IIDS displays a warning on the alphanumeric display.
Lower collective and place engine control switch to IDLE
After NP stabilizes, place other engine control switch to FLY.
Press the to access the right engine menu; press the to
access the left engine menu.
Repeat check for other engine.
NOTE: The engine torque value displayed should be approximately the same as the first
engine.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−59
Revision 5
VIEWING THE PREVIOUS POWER CHECK:

Select POWER CHECK top level menu on IIDS alphanumeric display.
Press the ENT key once to access the second level menu. PERFORM POWER
ASSURANCE CHK
Press the key to enter the next second level menu. VIEW LAST POWER
ASSURANCE CHK
Press the ENT to view the last power check. L PA CHK NG-X.X
L PA CHK EGT-XX.X
Press the key to view the results for the other engine. R PA CHK NG-X.X
R PA CHK EGT-XX.X
5−12. POWER ASSURANCE CHECK − MANUAL
HOW TO PERFORM THE CHECK:

The engine to be checked should be at FLY.
The other engine should be at IDLE or OFF.
IPS and CABIN HEAT should be off and the generator load should be 10%
or less.
Record the IIDS OAT and pressure altitude.
Use the Engine Torque Chart (Ref. Figure 5-50) to determine the torque value
to be utilized based on the OAT and pressure altitude recorded in the previous
step.
Increase collective and stabilize at the predetermined torque value. After one
minute, record the EGT and NG from the IIDS.
Use the EGT Chart (Ref. Figure 5-51) and the NG Chart (Ref. Figure 5-52)
or Figure 5-53) to determine maximum values of EGT and NG for the specific
conditions. Subtracting the recorded values from the maximum values will
result in the EGT and NG margins.
NOTE: The IIDS displays NG in tenths (ie. 91.6%) viewable at the third level of the
POWER CHECK menu.
The power check is passed if both the EGT and NG margins are greater than
or equal to zero. If either the EGT or NG margin is negative, repeat the test
allowing torque to stabilize for 5 minutes. If the EGT margin is still negative,
then the power assurance check is failed. If only the NG margin is negative
refer to the Rotorcraft Maintenance Manual for additional testing and trouble
shooting.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−60
Revision 5
EXAMPLE:
NOTE: This example assumes the inability to access the third level POWER CHECK
menu and therefor uses Figure 5−52 to determine maximum NG value.
Recorded from the IIDS: OAT = +30°C
Pressure Altitude = 2000 ft.
Utilizing the Engine Torque Chart (Ref. Figure 5-50) the power setting for the above
noted conditions is determined to be:
Engine torque = 71%
Utilizing the EGT and NG Power Check Charts (Ref. Figure 5-51 and Figure 5-52)
the maximum values for EGT and NG for the above noted conditions is determined
to be:
EGT = 791°C
NG = 92.5%
After stabilizing the torque at 71% for one minute you record the following EGT
and NG readings from the IIDS:
EGT = 770°C
NG = 92%
Subtract the observed values of NG and EGT from the maximum values obtained
from the charts to determine the power check margins:
EGT = 791°C (from chart) minus 770°C (from IIDS) = 21°C (pass)
NG = 92.4% (from chart) minus 92% (from IIDS) = 0.5% (pass)
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−61
Revision 5
80
SEA LEVEL
PRESSURE ALTITUDE (FEET)
75
2000
70
4000
65
6000
ENGINE TORQUE (%)
60
8000
55
10000
50
12000
45 14000
16000
40
35
-36 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (°C)

f927−018
Figure 5−50. Engine Torque Chart
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−62
Revision 5
900
SEA LEVEL
850 PRESSURE ALTITUDE - FEET 4000
8000
12000
800
16000
750
700
650
600
550
500
−40 −20 0 20 40 60
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (°C)
f927−019
Figure 5−51. EGT Chart
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−63
Revision 5
96
SEA LEVEL

95
4000
94
8000
93
12000
92
91 16000
90
89
88
NG- %
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
−40 −30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 40 50
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (`C)
f927−020−1
Figure 5−52. NG Chart − (NG read from Secondary IIDS Display)
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−64
Revision 5
97
SEA LEVEL
96
4000
95 PRESSURE
ALTITUDE - FEET 8000
94
12000
93
16000
92
91
NG − %
90
89
88
87
86
85 20000
84
83
−40 −30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (‘C)
f927−020−2
Figure 5−53. NG Chart − (NG read from Third Level Power Check Menu)
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 5−65
Revision 5
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
5−66
Revision 5
Weight and
Balance Data
SECTION VI
WEIGHT AND
BALANCE DATA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH PAGE
6-1. Weight and Balance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Table 6-1. Center of Gravity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Figure 6-1. Center of Gravity Envelope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Figure 6-2. Reference Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Figure 6-3. Station Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Figure 6-4. Sample Weight and Balance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Figure 6-5. Sample Weight and Balance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-2. Load Limits and Balance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-3. Equipment Removal or Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Table 6-2. Cockpit, Cabin, and Baggage Compartment Doors Weight Data . . 6-7
Table 6-3. Cabin Doors Open Weight Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-4. Longitudinal Weight and Balance Determination:
Passenger Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
EXAMPLE I: Longitudinal CG Determination - Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6-5. Longitudinal Loading of Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
EXAMPLE II: Longitudinal CG Determination - Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6-6. Permissible Lateral Loadings - Passenger
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
EXAMPLE III: Lateral CG Determination - Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6-7. Lateral Loading of Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-8. Internal Loading of Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
EXAMPLE IV: Tiedown 500 pounds of cargo in the main cabin. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Table 6-4. Internal Cargo Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Figure 6-6. Cargo Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Figure 6-7. Fuel Station Diagram - Jet-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Figure 6-8. Fuel Station Diagram - Jet-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Table 6-5. Fuel Loading Table - Jet A (6.8 lb/U.S. gal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Table 6-6. Fuel Loading Table - Jet B (6.5 lb/U.S. gal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Table 6-7. Weight and Longitudinal Moments - Pilot, Passengers, Baggage . 6-19
Reissue 2
Original 6−i
Weight and
Balance Data
PARAGRAPH PAGE
Table 6-8. Weight and Longitudinal Moments - Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Table 6-9. Weight and Lateral Moments - Pilot and Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Table 6-10. Weight and Lateral Moments - Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Reissue 2
6−ii Original
MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E) Weight and
Balance Data
SECTION VI
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
DATA
6−1. WEIGHT AND BALANCE CHARACTERISTICS
The weight and balance characteristics are as follows:

Maximum weight on the landing gear with thruster extension: 6500 pounds.
Minimum Flying Weight: 3500 pounds.
Longitudinal Reference Datum: 199.3 inches forward of rotor hub centerline (rotor
hub centerline is located at Station 199.3)
Cargo Deck Capacity: 1500 pounds not to exceed 115 pounds per square foot.
Baggage compartment limit (sta. 234.3 to 256.9): 500 pounds not to exceed 115
lbs per square foot.
Ultimate load factors (cargo restraint): Forward: 17 G's
Lateral: 8 G's
Center of Gravity Limits:
NOTE: Lateral ‘‘+’’ is right of centerline ; lateral ‘‘−’’ is left of centerline when looking
forward.
Table 6−1. Center of Gravity Limits
Longitudinal C.G. Limit Lateral C.G. Limit

Gross Weight (Sta-in.) (Sta-in.)
(lb) Forward Aft (+) Right, (-) Left
6500 196.0 202.3 +2.0; -2.0
6250 196.0 203.2 +2.0; -2.0
5100 196.0 206.0 +2.0; -2.0
*3500 196.0 206.0 +2.0; -2.0
Airspeed restrictions apply. Refer to Section II:
6250 196.0 202.1 +5.0; -2.0
5100 196.0 203.7 +5.7; -2.0
*3500 196.0 204.4 +6.0; -2.0
*Minimum flying weight.
Reissue 2
Original 6−1
Weight and MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E)
Balance Data
6500
6000
GROSS WIGHT − LBS
5500
EXPANDED
CG LIMITS
5000
LATERAL CG ENVELOPE
4500
4000
NORMAL CG LIMITS
3500
3000
−3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CHART A: LATERAL C.G. STATION (IN.)
WHEN OPERATING IN THE

EXPANDED CG REGION OF CHART
A, THE MAXIMUM LONGITUDINAL
C.G. LIMIT, AS DEPICTED BY THE
DASHED LINE IN CHART B, APPLIES.
6500
6000
5100 LBS
GROSS WIGHT − LBS
5500
5000 LONGITUDINAL CG ENVELOPE
4500
4000 NORMAL CG LIMITS
3500
3000
194 196 198 200 202 204 206 208
CHART B: LONGITUDINAL C.G. STATION (IN)
F92−051C
Figure 6−1. Center of Gravity Envelope.
Reissue 2
6−2 Original
Balance Data
CG REAR FACING CL OF BAGGAGE

PASSENGERS COMPARTMENT
CG OF PILOT OR CG FWD FACING

COPILOT/PASSENGER PASSENGERS
CG CABIN
+19.0
+15.85
0.0 0.0
-15.85
-19.0
STA 193.0
STA 130.7 STA 173.0 STA 213.0 STA 245.6
F92−052
Figure 6−2. Reference Coordinates
Reissue 2
Original 6−3
Balance Data
50 -50
60 40 20 0 -20 -40 -60
220
200
180
160
140
120
WL 106
FLOOR
100
80
60
BL 8.5 BL 24
BEAM BEAM
60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 440 460 480
STA 199.25
WL 207.97 5° 0”
220
200 STA 292.817

WL 147
180
WL 159
160 ROOF DECK
140
WL 106 120
FLOOR
100
80
60
3° 16”
STA 155.5 STA 230.5
FRAME FRAME
JACKING
POINTS
F92−053A
Figure 6−3. Station Diagram
Reissue 2
6−4 Original
BASIC WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD
(CONTINUOUS HISTORY OF CHANGES IN STRUCTURE OR EQUIPMENT AFFECTING WEIGHT AND BALANCE)
AIRCRAFT MODEL SERIAL NUMBER REGISTRATION NUMBER N9XXXX PAGE 4 OF 4
MD900 900−000XXX
WEIGHT CHANGE RUNNING TOTAL
ITEM NO.
ADDED (+) REMOVED (-) BASIC AIRCRAFT
DATE DESCRIPTION OF ARTICLE
OR MOCIFICATION LONG LAT LONG LAT LONG LAT LONG LAT WEIGHT LONG LAT LONG LAT
IN OUT WEIGHT WEIGHT
ARM ARM MOMENT MOMENT ARM ARM MOMENT MOMENT ARM ARM MOMENT MOMENT
12/23/xx ACTUAL BASIC WEIGHT 3277.8 210.2 0.4 689103 1465
01/09/xx X FIXED BALLAST IN NOSE 5.0 87.6 438

01/09/xx REVISED CALCULATED BASIC WEIGHT 3272.8 210.4 0.4 688665 1309
Original
Reissue 2
ROTORCRAFT FLIGHT MANUAL
Figure 6−4. Sample Weight and Balance Record

Form HOQ014 (rev 5/00) MD Helicopters, Inc.
F92−054A
6−5
Balance Data
Weight and
Balance Data
AIRCRAFT ACTUAL WEIGHT

Model MD900 Serial No. 900-000XX Reg. No. N92XXX Date 12/23/XX
Weighed by J. Doe
EMPTY FULL
FUEL X
OIL, ENGINE LH X
OIL, ENGINE RH X
OIL, TRANSMISSION X
HYDRAULIC FLUID X
60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 440 460 480
STA 199.25
WL 207.97 5° 0”
220
200 STA 292.817

WL 147
180
WL 159
160 ROOF DECK
140
WL 106 120
FLOOR
100
80
60
3° 16”
STA 155.5 STA 230.5
FRAME FRAME
JACKING
POINTS F92−187A
NOTE: IN A LEVEL ATTITUDE, MAIN ROTOR MAST IS TILTED 3 DEG. FORWARD.
AVE. SCALE TARE OR NET LONGITUDINAL LATERAL LONGITUDINAL LATERAL

WEIGHING POINT READING CALIB. CORR. WEIGHT ARM ARM MOMENT MOMENT
LBS LBS LBS IN IN IN-LBS IN-LBS
Forward 869.7 0.0 869.7 154.0 -9.3 133929 -8066
Aft Right 1289.5 0.0 1289.5 233.0 23.3 300454 29981
Aft Left 887.5 0.0 887.5 233.0 -23.3 206788 -20634
TOTAL (AS WEIGHED) 3046.7 210.4 0.4 641170 1280
Less : Surplus Weight (See Table 1) -1.8 189.4 -10.4 -346 19
Plus: Missing Required Equipment (See Table 1) 222.6 198.0 0.0 44071 0
TOTAL - BASIC WEIGHT 3267.4 209.6 0.4 684895 1299
Figure 6−5. Sample Weight and Balance Report
Reissue 2
6−6 Original
Balance Data
6−2. LOAD LIMITS AND BALANCE CRITERIA
The load limits and balance conditions are as noted in Table 6-1.
Do not exceed these limitations at any time during flight.
Use the helicopter Basic Weight as recorded in the Basic Weight and Balance Record
inserted in this section to perform all weight and balance computations. Basic Weight
includes oil, hydraulic fluid, and unusable fuel.
6−3. EQUIPMENT REMOVAL OR INSTALLATION
Removal or addition of equipment must be entered on the repair and alteration

report form, FAA 337, in accordance with Federal Air Regulations which shall then
become part of the helicopter log book file.
Record the weight and balance effects of these changes in the Basic Weight and
Balance Record inserted in this section.
Use the balance and station diagrams shown as an aid for weight and balance
changes.
Use the following tables to assist in determining weight and balance effects with
doors opened or removed.
Table 6−2. Cockpit, Cabin, and Baggage Compartment Doors Weight Data
WEIGHT LONGITUDINAL LATERAL MOMENT

ITEM (LB) STATION STATION (IN−LB)
(ARM) (ARM) Longitudinal Lateral
Cockpit doors (2) 24.0 132.9 "30.6 3190 "367
Cabin doors (2) 32.2 196.0 "31.2 6311 "502
Baggage door (1) 9.4 269.0 0 2529 0
Table 6−3. Cabin Doors Open Weight Data

(LB) STATION STATION (IN−LB)
ITEM
Cabin doors (2) 32.2 248.0 "31.2 7986 "502

Note: At minimum flying weight (3500 LBS) the CG shifts 0.48 inch aft with cabin doors
open.
At maximum gross weight (6250 LBS) the CG shifts 0.27 inch aft with cabin doors open.
Reissue 2
Original 6−7
Balance Data
6−4. LONGITUDINAL WEIGHT AND BALANCE DETERMINATION:

PASSENGER CONFIGURATION
To determine that the gross weight and longitudinal center of gravity (fore and
aft) for a given flight are within limits, proceed as follows.
Obtain aircraft basic weight and moment from the Weight and Balance Record in
serted in this section.
Determine weights and moments of useful load items (Ref. Figure 6-2).
Add above items.
Determine corresponding center of gravity for gross weight by dividing total moment
by gross weight. This computation must be done with zero fuel and with mission
fuel gross weight (Ref. EXAMPLE I: ).
NOTE: If loadings are not symmetrical about the aircraft centerline, determine lateral
CG’s as described in Paragraphs 6−6 and 6−7.
EXAMPLE I: Longitudinal CG Determination − Passenger
WEIGHT STATION MOMENT
ITEM
(LB) (ARM) (IN−LB)
Basic Weight (from Figure 6-4) 3272.8 688665
Pilot 170 130.70 22219
Copilot/Passenger 170 130.70 22219
Passenger - Rear Facing R/H 170 173.0 29410
Passenger - Rear Facing L/H 170 173.0 29410
Passenger - FWD Facing R/H 170 213.0 36210
Passenger - FWD Facing L/H 170 213.0 36210
1. Zero Fuel Weight 4292.8 864343
Add: Fuel (Jet-A) 994.0 191.1 189953
2. Gross Weight 5286.8 1054296
Calculation of Longitudinal CG
CG at Zero Fuel Weight:
Moment at Zero Fuel Weight 864343

= = 201.3
Zero Fuel Weight 4292.8
CG at Gross Weight:
Moment at Gross Weight 1054296
= = 199.4
Gross Weight 5286.8
NOTE: The CG’s fall within the limits specified in Table 6−1; therefore, the loading meets
the longitudinal CG limits.
Reissue 2
6−8 Original
Balance Data
6−5. LONGITUDINAL LOADING OF CARGO
The large aft compartment of the Model 900 provides great flexibility in the variety
of cargo loads it can accommodate.
To determine the gross weight and center of gravity for a given flight are within
limits, proceed as follows.
Obtain the Basic Weight and Moment from the Weight and Balance Record (Ref.
Figure 6-4).
Establish the weight of cargo load.
Determine the location of the cargo longitudinal CG (Ref. Figure 6-3)
Obtain the cargo moment:
Cargo Moment = Cargo Weight X Cargo CG
Perform weight and balance as previously described for passenger configura
tion.
EXAMPLE II: Longitudinal CG Determination − Cargo

ITEM

Pilot 170 130.7 22219
Copilot/Passenger 170 130.7 22219
Cargo 750 190.0 142500
Add: Fuel (Jet-A) 300.0 187.0 56100
2. Gross Weight 4662.8 931703
Calculation of Longitudinal CG

= = 200.7
CG at Gross Weight:

= = 199.8
Gross Weight 4662.8
NOTE: The CG’s fall within the limits specified in Table 6−1; therefore, the loading meets
the longitudinal CG limits.
Reissue 2
Original 6−9
Balance Data
6−6. PERMISSIBLE LATERAL LOADINGS − PASSENGER

CONFIGURATION
Safe operation of this helicopter requires that it be flown within established lateral
as well as longitudinal center of gravity limits.
It is therefore imperative that lateral center of gravity control be exercised.
All combinations of internal loadings are permissible if gross weight, longitudinal,
and lateral center of gravity considerations permit.
To determine the gross weight and center of gravity for a given flight are within
limits, proceed as follows.
Obtain the basic weight and longitudinal moment from The Basic Weight and Bal
ance Record (Ref. Figure 6-4).
For pilot and passenger longitudinal and lateral center of gravity stations, see
Figure 6-2.
EXAMPLE III: Lateral CG Determination − Passenger

ITEM
Pilot 170 +15.85 2695
Passenger - Rear Facing R/H 170 +19.00 3230
Passenger - FWD Facing R/H 170 +19.00 3230
--
Add: Fuel (Jet-A) 500.0 0
2. Gross Weight 4282.8 10464
Calculation of Lateral CG

= = 2.77
CG at Gross Weight:

= = 2.44
Gross Weight 4282.8
NOTE: The CG’s fall outside the limits specified in Table 6−1; therefore, the loading
does not meet the lateral CG limits.
Reissue 2
6−10 Original
Balance Data
6−7. LATERAL LOADING OF CARGO
To determine the gross weight and lateral center of gravity for a given flight are
with limits, proceed as follows.
Find weight of load.
Determine lateral location (station) of load center of gravity.
Measure load distance from aircraft (centerline) lateral station zero), right
(+) : left (-).
Obtain the lateral load moment as follows.
Lateral moment = weight X lateral station (or use Table 6-10).
Perform weight and balance as previously described for longitudinal CG determina
tions.
6−8. INTERNAL LOADING OF CARGO
The following instructions should be followed when carrying internal cargo.

Restrain the cargo from shifting by using the correct number of tiedowns in accor
dance with Table 6-4.
Locate restraint loops in accordance with Figure 6-6.
NOTE: Cargo carried in the baggage compartment shall not be higher than 36 inches.
To assure that cargo is properly secured, refer to Table 6-4.
The numbered tiedown location is located in the far left column of Table 6-4
with their respective restraint values in the six columns to the right.
Locate the cargo tiedown numbers for all of the tiedowns that you will be using
in the respective cargo areas (main cabin or baggage compartment).
Add the restraint values for each of the tiedowns in each of the three directions
(forward, left and right).
If the sum of restraint values in each of the three directions equals or exceeds the
weight of the cargo, then the cargo is sufficiently restrained.
NOTE: 1. Cargo should be centered in the cabin or baggage compartment.
2. Do not load cargo outside the perimeter defined by the cargo tiedown fittings.
Reissue 2
Original 6−11
Balance Data
EXAMPLE IV: Tiedown 500 pounds of cargo in the main cabin.

LATERAL
TIEDOWN No. FORWARD LEFT RIGHT
1 --- 220 ---
14 --- --- 220
2 20 40 ---
13 20 --- 40
4 130 40 ---
11 130 --- 40
5 120 220 ---
10 120 --- 220
____ ____ ____
TOTAL 540 520 520
Since all three values exceed the weight of the cargo (500 pounds), the cargo is
sufficiently restrained.
Reissue 2
6−12 Original
Balance Data
Table 6−4. Internal Cargo Loading
TIE-DOWN LOCATION RESTRAINT VALUE/POUNDS OF CARGO

MAIN CABIN BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
TIE-DOWN FUSELAGE LATERAL RESTRAINT DIRECTION RESTRAINT DIRECTION
NUMBER STATION STATION LATERAL LATERAL LATERAL LATERAL
FORWARD FORWARD
LEFT (-) RIGHT (+) LEFT (-) RIGHT (+)
1 156.8 -27.0 220
2 174.9 -25.0 20 40
3 193.0 -25.0 130 20
4 211.1 -25.0 130 40
5 229.2 -27.0 120 220
6 229.2 -11.0 50 240
7 229.2 -8.0 50 240
8 229.2 8.0 50 240
9 229.2 11.0 50 240
10 229.2 27.0 120 220
11 211.1 25.0 130 40
12 193.0 25.0 130 20
13 174.9 25.0 20 40
14 156.8 27.0 220
15 156.8 11.0 240
16 156.8 8.0 240
17 156.8 -8.0 240
18 156.8 -11.0 240
19 232.9 -21.6 90 185
20 251.0 -24.8 120 135 110
21 233.3 0.0 85 85
22 257.9 0.0 20 120 120
23 232.9 21.6 90 185
24 251.0 24.8 120 135 110
25 230.5 -24.6 110
26 230.5 24.6 110
27 269.0 -17.5 105
28 269.0 17.5 105
Reissue 2
Original 6−13
Balance Data
CARGO RESTRAINT LOCATION
1 18 17 16 15 14
2 13
FWD
3 12
LEFT RIGHT
4 11
5 6 7 8 9 10
TIEDOWNS 25 AND 26 ARE ``D''
RINGS LOCATED AT WL 154.5
25 26
19 21 23
20 24
22
27 28
TIEDOWNS 19 THRU 28 ARE
``D'' RINGS. TIE DOWNS 27 AND
F92−056
28 ARE LOCATED AT WL 155.0
Figure 6−6. Cargo Restraint
Reissue 2
6−14 Original
Balance Data
1100
1075
1050
1025
1000
975
950
925
900
875
NOTES:
850
WEIGHTS AND MOMENTS BASED ON JET−A FUEL
825 (ASTM D−1655) AT 6.8 POUNDS PER U.S. GALLON
800
2. TOTAL WEIGHT OF FUEL IS DEPENDENT UPON
775 THE SPECIFIC GRAVITY AND TEMPERATURE
750 VARIATION SHOULD BE ANTICIPATED IN
GAUGE READINGS WHEN TANKS ARE FULL.
725 3. FUEL CG VARIES WITH QUANTITY
700
675
650
625
600
FUEL WEIGHT - POUNDS
575
550
525
500
475
450
425
400
375
350
325
300
275
250
225
200
175
150
125
100
75
50
25
0
183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191
FUSELAGE STATION CG F92−057−1
Figure 6−7. Fuel Station Diagram − Jet−A
Reissue 2
Original 6−15
Balance Data
1050
1025
1000
975
950
925
900
875
850
825 NOTES:
WEIGHTS AND MOMENTS BASED ON JET B FUEL
800 (ASTM D−1655) AT 6.5 POUNDS PER U.S. GALLON
775 2. TOTAL WEIGHT OF FUEL IS DEPENDENT UPON
750 THE SPECIFIC GRAVITY AND TEMPERATURE
VARIATION SHOULD BE ANTICIPATED IN
725 GAUGE READINGS WHEN TANKS ARE FULL.
3. FUEL CG VARIES WITH QUANTITY
700
675
650
625
600
575
FUEL WEIGHT - POUNDS
550
525
500
475
450
425
400
375
350
325
300
275
250
225
200
175
150
125
100
75
50
25
0
183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191
FUSELAGE STATION CG F92−057−2
Figure 6−8. Fuel Station Diagram − Jet−B
Reissue 2
6−16 Original
Balance Data
Table 6−5. Fuel Loading Table − Jet A (6.8 lb/U.S. gal)
VOLUME WEIGHT STATION MOMENT

U.S. GALLONS POUNDS INCHES IN−LBS
10 68 184.0 12511
15 102 184.4 18813
20 136 184.9 25144
25 170 185.3 31503
30 204 185.7 37888
35 238 186.1 44297

40 272 186.5 50728
45 306 186.9 57181
50 340 187.2 63653
55 374 187.5 70142
60 408 187.9 76647

65 442 188.2 83166
70 476 188.4 89697
75 510 188.7 96237
80 544 188.9 102787
85 578 189.2 109343

90 612 189.4 115905
95 646 189.6 122470
100 680 189.8 129038
105 714 189.9 135607
110 748 190.1 142176

115 782 190.2 148744
120 816 190.3 155309
125 850 190.4 161872
130 884 190.5 168431
135 918 190.6 174986

140 952 190.7 181537
145 986 190.8 188033
150 1020 190.8 194626
155 1054 190.9 201165
160 1088 190.9 207710
NOTES:
1. TOTAL WEIGHT OF FUEL IS DEPENDANT UPON THE SPECIFIC
GRAVITY AND TEMPERATURE. VARIATION SHOULD BE ANTICI−
PATED IN GAUGE READINGS WHEN TANKS ARE FULL.
2. FUEL CG VARIES WITH QUANTITY.
3. MAXIMUM USEABLE FUEL QUANTITY IS 994 LBS.
4. MAXIMUM USEABLE FUEL QUANTITY IS 1078 LBS. WITH RANGE
EXTENDER
Reissue 2
Original 6−17
Balance Data
Table 6−6. Fuel Loading Table − Jet B (6.5 lb/U.S. gal)
VOLUME WEIGHT STATION MOMENT

U.S. GALLONS POUNDS INCHES IN−LBS
10 65 184.0 11959
15 98 184.4 17983
20 130 184.9 24035
25 163 185.3 30113
30 195 185.7 36216
35 228 186.1 42342

40 260 186.5 48490
45 293 186.9 54658
50 325 187.2 60845
55 358 187.5 67048
60 390 187.9 73266

65 423 188.2 79497
70 455 188.4 85739
75 488 188.7 91992
80 520 188.9 98252
85 553 189.2 104519

90 585 189.4 110791
95 618 189.6 117067
100 650 189.8 123345
105 683 189.9 129624
110 715 190.1 135903

115 748 190.2 142181
120 780 190.3 148457
125 813 190.4 154730
130 845 190.5 161000
135 878 190.6 167266

140 910 190.7 173528
145 943 190.8 179786
150 975 190.8 186040
155 1008 190.9 192290
160 1040 190.9 198538
NOTES:
1. TOTAL WEIGHT OF FUEL IS DEPENDANT UPON THE SPECIFIC
GRAVITY AND TEMPERATURE. VARIATION SHOULD BE ANTICIPATED
IN GAUGE READINGS WHEN TANKS ARE FULL.
2. FUEL CG VARIES WITH QUANTITY.
3. MAXIMUM USEABLE FUEL QUANTITY IS 950 LBS.
4. MAXIMUM USEABLE FUEL QUANTITY IS 1030 LBS. WITH RANGE
EXTENDER
Reissue 2
6−18 Original
Balance Data
Table 6−7. Weight and Longitudinal Moments − Pilot, Passengers, Baggage
PILOT OR REAR FACING FWD FACING

PASSENGER COPILOT/PASSENGER STA 130.7 PASSENGER PASSENGER
WEIGHT STA 173.0 STA 213.0
(LBS) MOMENT MOMENT MOMENT
(IN−LB) (IN−LB) (IN−LB)
100 13070 17300 21300
120 15684 20760 25560
140 18298 24220 29820
160 20912 27680 34080
180 23526 31140 38340
200 26140 34600 42600
220 28754 38060 46860
240 31368 41520 51120
AFT AFT
BAGGAGE BAGGAGE
BAGGAGE STA 245.6 BAGGAGE STA 245.6
(LBS) (LBS)
MOMENT MOMENT
(IN−LB) (IN−LB)
100 24560 320 78592
120 29472 340 83504
140 34384 360 88416
160 39296 380 93328
180 44208 400 98240
200 49120 420 103152
220 54032 440 108064
240 58944 460 112976
260 63856 480 117888
280 68768 500 122800
300 73680
Reissue 2
Original 6−19
Balance Data
Table 6−8. Weight and Longitudinal Moments − Cargo
WEIGHT MOMENT (IN−LB)

(LBS) STATION 160 STATION 180 STATION 200 STATION 220 STATION 240
100 16000 18000 20000 22000 24000
120 19200 21600 24000 26400 28800
140 22400 25200 28000 30800 33600
160 25600 28800 32000 35200 38400
180 28800 32400 36000 39600 43200
200 32000 36000 40000 44000 48000

220 35200 39600 44000 48400 52800
240 38400 43200 48000 52800 57600
260 41600 46800 52000 57200 62400
280 44800 50400 56000 61600 67200
300 48000 54000 60000 66000 72000

320 51200 57600 64000 70400 76800
340 54400 61200 68000 74800 81600
360 57600 64800 72000 79200 86400
380 60800 68400 76000 83600 91200
400 64000 72000 80000 88000 96000

420 67200 75600 84000 92400 100800
440 70400 79200 88000 96800 105600
460 73600 82800 92000 101200 110400
480 76800 86400 96000 105600 115200
500 80000 90000 100000 110000 120000
Reissue 2
6−20 Original
Balance Data
Table 6−9. Weight and Lateral Moments − Pilot and Passengers
PILOT OR REAR FACING FWD FACING

PASSENGER COPILOT/PASSENGER PASSENGER PASSENGER
WEIGHT STA. ±15.85* STA. ±19.00* STA. ±19.00*
(LBS) MOMENT MOMENT MOMENT
(IN−LB) (IN−LB) (IN−LB)
100 1585 1900 1900
110 1744 2090 2090
120 1902 2280 2280
130 2061 2470 2470
140 2219 2660 2660
150 2378 2850 2850

160 2536 3040 3040
170 2695 3230 3230
180 2853 3420 3420
190 3012 3610 3610
200 3170 3800 3800

210 3329 3990 3990
220 3487 4810 4810
230 3646 4370 4370
240 3804 4560 4560
250 3963 4750 4750

260 4121 4940 4940
270 4280 5130 5130
280 4438 5320 5320
290 4597 5510 5510
300 4755 5700 5700
*Indicated moments are + (right lateral) and - (left lateral).
Reissue 2
Original 6−21
Balance Data
Table 6−10. Weight and Lateral Moments − Cargo
MOMENT (IN−LB)
WEIGHT
(LBS) LATERAL LATERAL LATERAL LATERAL
STATION ±5 in.* STATION ±10 in.* STATION ±15 in.* STATION ±20 in.*
20 100 200 300 400
40 200 400 600 800
60 300 600 900 1200
80 400 800 1200 1600
90 450 900 1350 1800
100 500 1000 1500 2000

110 550 1100 1650 2200
120 600 1200 1800 2400
130 650 1300 1950 2600
140 700 1400 2100 2800
150 750 1500 2250 3000

160 800 1600 2400 3200
170 850 1700 2550 3400
180 900 1800 2700 3600
l90 950 1900 2850 3800
200 1000 2000 3000 4000

210 1050 2100 3150 4200
220 1100 2200 3300 4400
230 1150 2300 3450 4600
240 1200 2400 3600 4800
250 1250 2500 3750 5000

260 1300 2600 3900 5200
270 1350 2700 4050 5400
280 1400 2800 4200 5600
290 1450 2900 4350 5800
300 1500 3000 4500 6000
*Indicated moments are + (right lateral) and - (left lateral).
Reissue 2
6−22 Original
Systems Description
SECTION VII
SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH PAGE
7-1. Helicopter Exterior Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Figure 7-1. Helicopter - Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-2. Fuselage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Figure 7-2. Door Opening Decals - Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-3. Tailboom and Empennage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-4. Landing Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Figure 7-3. Landing Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-5. Main Rotor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Figure 7-4. Main Rotor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-6. Flight Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Figure 7-5. Cyclic Controls Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Figure 7-6. Collective Controls Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Figure 7-7. Upper Flight Controls Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Figure 7-8. Anti-Torque Controls Subsystem (Sheet 1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Figure 7-9. VSCS Control Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7-7. Hydraulic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Figure 7-10. Hydraulic System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Figure 7-11. Hydraulic System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Figure 7-12. Rotor Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-8. Propulsion System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Figure 7-13. PW207E Engine Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Figure 7-14. Powerplant - Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Figure 7-15. Drive System (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Figure 7-15. Drive System (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-9. Engine Air Intake and Inlet Particle Separator (IPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Figure 7-16. Engine Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7-10. Engine Power Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Reissue 2
Original 7−i
Systems Description
PARAGRAPH PAGE
7-11. Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Figure 7-17. Fuel System Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Figure 7-18. IIDS Fuel System Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-12. Fire Extinguishing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Figure 7-19. Fire Extinguishing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7-13. Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Figure 7-20. Battery Power and External Power Subsystem Block Diagram . 7-36
Figure 7-21. Battery Power, External Power, and DC Power
Component Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
7-14. Environmental Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Figure 7-22. Heat/Defog System Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Figure 7-23. IIDS System Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Figure 7-24. IIDS Display Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Figure 7-25. Alphanumeric Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Table 7-1. Automatic Alphanumeric Display
Warning/Caution/Advisory Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
7-16. IIDS Data Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
7-17. Balance Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Figure 7-26. Balance Monitoring System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
7-18. IIDS Menu Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Figure 7-27. IIDS Top Level Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Figure 7-28. Time Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Figure 7-29. Balance Monitor, Main Rotor Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Figure 7-30. Balance Monitor, Run M/R Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Figure 7-31. Balance Monitor, Main Rotor Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Figure 7-32. Balance Monitor, Main Rotor Solution Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Figure 7-33. Balance Monitor, Display M/R Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Figure 7-34. Balance Monitor, M/R Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
Figure 7-35. Balance Monitor, NOTARR Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
Figure 7-36. Balance Monitor, NOTARR Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
Figure 7-37. Balance Monitor, Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
Figure 7-38. Balance Monitor, BMS Fault Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Figure 7-39. Balance Monitor, BMS Version Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
Figure 7-40. Balance Monitor, BMS Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
Reissue 2
7−ii Original
Systems Description
PARAGRAPH PAGE
Figure 7-41. Aircraft Monitor, Exceedance Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67

Figure 7-42. Aircraft Monitor - Trend Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
Figure 7-43. Aircraft Monitor, Fault Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
Figure 7-44. Aircraft Monitor - IIDS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
Figure 7-45. Fuel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
Figure 7-46. Set Engine Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
Figure 7-47. Set Time/Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
Reissue 2
Original 7−iii
Systems Description
Reissue 2
7−iv Original
MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E) Systems Description
SECTION VII
SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
7−1. HELICOPTER EXTERIOR DESCRIPTION
Design features:
Category A performance capabilities
Cockpit with outstanding field of view
All composite fuselage with expanded aluminium foil embedded in skin for light
ning protection
Wide (52 in/132 cm), sliding cabin doors for loading bulky cargo
Crash resistant fuel cell
Built-in steps and work platforms for maintenance
NOTAR anti-torque system
H-type empennage with twin vertical stabilizers
Five-bladed main rotor with swept blade tips
Hingeless low drag main rotor hub
Optional engine inlet air particle separator
On-board systems monitoring and computerized track and balance

The patented NOTAR anti-torque system provides many benefits. It results in
low noise by locating the fan in the fuselage and eliminating the conventional noisy
tail rotor, provides outstanding safety because there is no exposed tail rotor, and
improved directional controllability over that of the conventional tail rotor helicopter.
The five-bladed main rotor is designed for outstanding performance and flying quali
ties. Vibration in the passenger spaces is minimized by the incorporation of the
five blades and the unique dynamically-tuned ``static mount” that supports the
rotor and transmission. The swept tips on rotor blades improve performance and
reduce main rotor noise. Interior noise is minimized by using an acoustic noise
attenuating support for the transmission gearbox, and acoustic insulation in the
ceiling and sidewalls of the cabin.
Reissue 2
Original 7−1
Systems Description MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E)
MAIN ROTOR BLADE

ASSEMBLY
EMPENNAGE
ASSEMBLY
ENGINE
RIGHT
HAND
UPPER COWLING
AND FAIRINGS
ANTI-TORQUE
THRUSTER
ENGINE
CABIN DOOR TRANSMISSION LEFT HAND
ASSEMBLY TAILBOOM
ASSEMBLY
FUSELAGE STRUCTURE
ASSEMBLY
COCKPIT
DOOR
BAGGAGE ANTI-TORQUE
COMPARTMENT ASSEMBLY
DOOR
COCKPIT
DOOR
CABIN DOOR
LANDING GEAR
FLIGHT
ASSEMBLY
CONTROLS F92−058
Figure 7−1. Helicopter − Major Components
Reissue 2
7−2 Original
The composite flexbeam main rotor hub replaces the normal hinges with a fiberglass/
epoxy flexbeam that twists and bends to accommodate the blade motions. It, and
the elastomeric lead/lag dampers, are located within the elliptical pitchcase for a
low drag hub that is composed of a minimum number of parts.
The empennage includes a fixed horizontal stabilizer and two controlled vertical
stabilizers that provide directional stability.
The screened NOTAR inlet is on the top of the cowling, between the engines and
aft of the rotor. In this location it is protected from dust and debris, and is shaped
to direct NOTAR fan noise up and away from observers on the ground, thus helping
to minimize noise.
The cabin floor is approximately three feet above the ground. This provides space
under the fuselage for the energy absorbing landing gear to deflect, and room in
the lower fuselage for the 161.3 gallon fuel cell. A convenience step is provided
on the right side of the fuselage for entering and departing.
Step/handholds and fold-out work platforms are built into the sides of the fuselage,
forward and aft of the cabin doors, for easy access to equipment located on the
engine and transmission decks.
Two tiedown fittings are positioned high on the sides of the fuselage in line with
the forward edge of the cabin doors, and one on the fuselage centerline just above
the baggage compartment door. Fabric socks are used to capture the blade tips
for tying them to the landing gear crosstubes.
7−2. FUSELAGE
The fuselage contains the cockpit; cabin; baggage compartment; fuel cell; NOTAR
fan, support, and ducts; and avionics equipment. The rotor/transmission support,
engines, and systems equipment are mounted on the top, and the landing gear
on the bottom. The fuselage structure has an aluminum upper deck, main frames,
and anti-plowbeams under the cockpit, with graphite/epoxy skins, keel beams,
cockpit framing, floors, and doors.
The fuselage is one of three components that contribute to an integrated systems
approach to the MD Explorer's hard landing energy absorbing concept. The others
are the landing gear and crew/passenger seats. This approach has served well in
the OH-6A, AH-64A, and MD500 helicopters.
The cabin has an open flat floor from the front of the copilot's station through
the cabin and to the back of the baggage compartment area. With the seats removed,
the entire floor area is usable for loading cargo.
Space is provided in the nose for the battery; under the cockpit floor and in the
baggage compartment for avionics equipment; and under the baggage compartment
floor for air conditioning equipment. The single fuel cell is mounted in the belly
of the fuselage surrounded by bulkheads fore and aft, and keel beams to the sides.
Reissue 2
Original 7−3
Entry Doors:
Hinged cockpit doors, sliding cabin doors, and a hinged baggage compartment door
provide access. The cockpit doors have door release handles that allow the doors
to be removed (Ref. Section VIII). The windows in the cabin doors are easily remov
able and the meet Transport Category emergency exit size criteria.
The cockpit door handles have four positions and main cabin door handles have
three positions:
SAFELOCK
OPEN
SAFELOCK
OPEN
KEY
SLAM LOCK SLIDING
DOOR
LOCK
COCKPIT DOOR OPENING DECAL CABIN DOOR OPENING DECAL F927−024
Figure 7−2. Door Opening Decals − Exterior

The rotor/transmission mount consists of an eight-legged metal truss that sup
ports the mast base and the static mast. The transmission gearbox mounts beneath
the mast base and the rotor turns on the static mast tube on a set of tapered roller
thrust bearings. Two of the truss tubes on the right side of the aircraft are removable
for transmission maintenance.
Graphite/epoxy cowlings and access doors on top of the fuselage enclose the equip
ment located there.
Saddle mounts in the lower fuselage clamp the forward and aft landing gear cross
tubes in place.
Lightning protection for the graphite/epoxy skins is provided by expanded alumi
num foil molded into the surface, with all components electrically bonded together.
Electromagnetic pulse protection (EMP) is provided by the aluminum structure,
the expanded aluminum foil on the graphite skins, and the shielding of individual
electric/avionics systems components and wiring.
Reissue 2
7−4 Original
7−3. TAILBOOM AND EMPENNAGE
Anti-torque, directional control, and yaw stability is provided by the NOTAR

fan, circulation control tailboom, the thruster, and the horizontal and vertical
stabilizers with VSCS.
The NOTAR fan is driven directly from the main transmission. The fan is located
in the aft fuselage, and supplies pressurized air to the tailboom (pressure ratio
= 1.02 to 1.12). Its blade pitch and the thruster nozzle rotational positions are oper
ated by the anti-torque pedals.
The circulation control tailboom is a hollow graphite/epoxy cylinder that bolts
to the aft end of the fuselage and supports the horizontal and vertical stabilizers,
tail bumper, and the thruster. The tailboom directs the pressurized air to the thruster
while allowing some air to flow out of the two slots along its right side. This arrange
ment creates a significant side force on the tailboom as a result of the circulation
flow around the tailboom while it is immersed in the main rotor downwash. The
remainder of the side force required for directional control is produced by airflow
out of the controllable direct jet thruster at the end of the tailboom.
The empennage consists of the horizontal stabilizer with upper and lower moveable
vertical stabilizers located at each tip. The horizontal and vertical surfaces are graph
ite/epoxy. The horizontal stabilizer has an inverted NACA 2412 airfoil with a fixed
incidence of -1 degree. A trailing edge Gurney tab is installed above and below
the airfoil to balance aerodynamic moments. The vertical stabilizers have a hybrid
NACA 23012/NACA 0012 airfoil cambered toward the right side of the helicopter.
The vertical stabilizers are controlled in incidence by electro-mechanical actuators
located within the horizontal stabilizer that operate in response to collective pitch
inputs. Both vertical stabilizers also respond to the Vertical Stabilizer Control Sys
tem (VSCS) to function as a yaw damper.
To minimize tail vibration, the horizontal stabilizer attaches to the top of the tailboom
with an energy absorbing mount that is hinged along a fore-and-aft axis at the
right side, and connected by an elastomeric damper on the left side.
Lightning protection is provided by a strip of aluminum foil bonded onto the
surface of the tailboom, expanded aluminum foil co-cured onto the empennage sur
faces, and jumpers to form a continuous electrical path to the fuselage.
Reissue 2
Original 7−5
7−4. LANDING GEAR
The landing gear (Ref. Figure 7-3) supports the helicopter when it is in contact
with the ground. The landing gear can withstand loads encountered during landing,
ground handling, and provides a stable platform to prevent ground resonance.
The landing gear primarily absorbs normal landing forces, with the capabilities
to absorb severe landing forces during overload conditions. The landing gear dimen
sions are based on the required minimum roll-over and minimum pitch-over angles.
A minimum angle of 27 degrees is maintained from the center of gravity (CG) location
to the skid-to-ground contact point. The landing gear consists of the following compo
nents:
Forward and Aft Crosstubes - Provide energy absorbing capabilities during nor
mal or severe landings.
Forward and Aft Saddle Assemblies - Provide a means to attach the crosstube
assemblies to the fuselage attachment points.
Side Stop Clamp Assemblies - Prevent side movement of the crosstube assemblies.
Forward Spacer Fittings - Forward attachments for the skid tubes and forward
crosstube assembly.
Skid Tubes - Provide landing gear-to-ground contact points.
Damper Assemblies - Aft attachments for the skid tubes and aft crosstube assem
bly.
Each damper has a reservoir fluid level indicator that is a rotating shaft which
shows through a 120 pie shaped window. When the reservoir is filled, the window
shows green with a very thin wedge of red showing to the first notch on the
housing. The thin wedge of red shows the reservoir is not completely full, to
allow for fluid expansion.
Ensure fluid level in reservoir is within limits.
Reservoir is near empty, when the window shows red and should be serviced
(RMM. Section 12-00-00).
Reissue 2
7−6 Original
SIDE STOP
CLAMP ASSEMBLY
AFT
CROSSTUBE
PLUG
AFT AFT
ABRASION STRIP SADDLE ASSEMBLY
FORWARD DAMPER
CROSSTUBE ASSEMBLY
FORWARD
FORWARD SPACER FITTING
FORWARD SADDLE ASSEMBLY
ABRASION STRIP
GROUND HANDLING
STEP
ATTACH POINTS
MID ABRASION
SKID TUBE STRIP
LANDING GEAR DAMPER
RESERVIOR FLUID
LEVEL INDICATOR
SECOND NOTCH
FIRST NOTCH
RED
GREEN EMPTY FULL
RESERVOIR INDICATOR CLOCKING TYPICAL

F92−060
Figure 7−3. Landing Gear
Reissue 2
Original 7−7
7−5. MAIN ROTOR SYSTEM
The main rotor is a five-bladed, fully articulated hingeless flexbeam system. The
rotor diameter is 33.83 ft (10.34 m) with a blade chord of 10 in (25 cm). At its nominal
100 percent rotational speed (NR), the rotor runs at 392 rpm (695 feet/second tip
speed).
The flexbeam is primarily a unidirectional fiberglass/epoxy, y-shaped member that
connects the blade to the rotor hub, and twists and bends to accommodate the blade
motions, resisting centrifugal force while transmitting drive torque to the blade.
The five flexbeams attach to the hub by five bolts.
The pitchcase is a hollow, elliptically shaped graphite/epoxy tube that surrounds
the flexbeam and is attached to both the flexbeam and the blade at its outboard
end by a pair of expandable-bushing bolts. The pitchcase provides flapwise, chord
wise, and torsional stiffness to the inboard end of the blade and serves to transmit
the feathering control motions to the blade. The pitchcase is attached to the hub
at its inboard end by the elastomeric snubber/damper that provides centering for
flapping and feathering motions, and by a combination spring/damper restraint
for chordwise motion to eliminate ground resonance. An elastomeric bumper is
bonded to the flexbeam halfway along its length to bear against the inside of the
pitchcase and restrict a flexbeam bending oscillation that would otherwise occur
during spin-up and shut-down of the rotor.
Reissue 2
7−8 Original
ROTOR BLADE
ROTOR BLADE
RETENTION BOLTS
FLEXBEAM
PITCHCASE BUMPER
DRIVE DAMPER
PLATE
MAIN
ROTOR FLEXBEAM
HUB
CENTERING
BEARING
PITCH CHANGE
UPPER HORN INBOARD
HUB LOWER ABRASION STRIP
HUB
DRIVE
RING OUTBOARD
ABRASION STRIP
SCISSORS
TRIM TAB
ASSEMBLY F92−061
Figure 7−4. Main Rotor System

The hub consists of two machined aluminum plates with a steel spacer between
them. The plates are grooved to accept the flexbeams and are bolted together with
the same bolts that attach the flexbeams. The hub mounts to the static mast by
a pair of grease lubricated, tapered roller bearings. A splined drive plate bolts to
the top of the hub and is driven by the main rotor shaft that rotates inside the
mast.
This static mast rotor support configuration has been used successfully in the
OH-6A, AH-64A, and MD500 helicopters and is incorporated into the MD Explorer
for three reasons:
Vibration Control - fuselage/mast/rotor structure is tuned dynamically for mini
mum vibration.
Reduced transmission weight - gearcase is not required to support rotor loads.
Reissue 2
Original 7−9
Safety - if the drive shaft should break, the rotor remains mounted to the mast
by its two bearings for a safe autorotation landing.
The main rotor blade is made from fiberglass/epoxy with a hollow leading edge
spar and a Nomex honeycomb-filled trailing edge. It has a theoretical twist of -10
degrees; and the high performance airfoil tapers in thickness from 12 percent at
it's inboard end to 9.5 percent at the tip. The outboard 14 in. (36 cm) of the blade
planform has a parabolic swept back taper. A 8 in. (20 cm) long by 3/4 in. (20 mm)
chord trim tab is centered on the 77 percent radius station. Two pockets in the
bottom of the blade near the tip are provided for installing blade balance weights.
A titanium abrasion strip protects the inboard, constant-chord portion of the blade
while an electroformed nickel abrasion strip is fitted outboard. A polyurethane sheet
protects the under side of the blade outboard.
The MD Explorer has a built-in track and balance system for the main rotor and
for the NOTAR fan blades that operates through the Integrated Instrument Display
System (IIDS).
Lightning protection is afforded by a continuous electrical path from blade tip
to rotor mast, and so on into the fuselage. This consists of the metal abrasion strip
on the blade, expanded aluminum foil co-cured onto the surface of the pitchcase,
dual jumpers across all joints, and twin carbon brushes for hub-to-mast continuity.
7−6. FLIGHT CONTROLS
The flight controls provide a means of controlling blade pitch of the main rotor
in flight and during ground operations. The helicopter is equipped with dual pilot
controls.
The flight controls integrate pilot inputs from the cyclic, collective, and anti-torque
subsystems. The cyclic and collective control stick inputs are mechanically linked
to the upper flight controls for longitudinal, lateral, and vertical control. The anti-
torque pedal inputs are transmitted to the NOTAR fan and direct jet thruster
for directional control. The flight controls consist of the cyclic controls, collective
controls, upper flight controls, anti-torque controls, and vertical stabilizer control
subsystems.
The cyclic controls subsystem controls helicopter pitch and roll attitudes (longitu
dinal and lateral control). The cyclic controls move the upper flight controls to cycle
increases or decreases in the rotor blades angle of attack in a cyclic manner around
the rotor azimuth. The result is a change in the helicopter pitch and/or roll attitude.
The cyclic control subsystem consists of the following components:
Cyclic stick assembly - Provides pilot control of helicopter pitch and/or roll atti
tude. This cyclic stick mount places the stick grip at its highest point above
the floor when it is farthest aft - it moves down as it moves forward. This allows
the pilot to rest his/her forearm on his/her thigh throughout all flight modes
for very comfortable flying.
Reissue 2
7−10 Original
Longitudinal and lateral trim actuators - Allow the pilot to position the cyclic
as required during flight and while on the ground.
Longitudinal linkages - Allow for cyclic input to the main rotor blades for helicop
ter pitch control.
Longitudinal servoactuator - Hydraulically transfers longitudinal linkage inputs
to position the upper flight controls.
Lateral linkages - Allow for cyclic input to the main rotor blades for helicopter
roll control.
Lateral servoactuator - Hydraulically transfers lateral linkage inputs to position
the upper flight controls.
The collective controls subsystem controls helicopter lift (vertical control) and
thrust. As the collective stick assembly is moved, control linkages increase or de
crease the rotor blades angle of attack.
The collective pitch system includes two automatic control features:
Conventional `ànticipatory” circuit into the Engine Electronic Controls (EEC) to
prepare them for an upcoming change of power demanded by the changing collective
pitch position, and vertical stabilizer incidence angle change (VSCS).
The collective control subsystem consists of:
Collective stick assembly - Provides pilot control of helicopter lift.
Collective friction unit - Allows collective stick assembly resistance to vary
from 5-25 lb (2.27-11.34 kg).
Collective friction release switch - Allows the pilot to release collective stick
assembly resistance.
Collective linkages - Allows the pilot to transmit collective input to the upper
flight controls.
Collective servoactuator - Hydraulically transfers collective linkage inputs to
the upper flight controls.
Reissue 2
Original 7−11
REF
UPPER DECK
LATERAL
CONTROL
LONGITUDINAL CLOSET ROD
CONTROL ROD ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
CYCLIC STICK LONGITUDINAL

ASSEMBLY BELLCRANK
DUAL ASSEMBLY
LONGITUDINAL LONGITUDINAL
BRACKET ASSEMBLY CONTROL ROD LATERAL CONTROLS
ASSEMBLY BRACKET ASSEMBLY
CYCLIC CONTROL AFT COCKPIT

STICK BOOT LONGITUDINAL
CYCLIC BASE
ASSEMBLY CONTROL ROD
EXPANDABLE ASSEMBLY
DIAMETER
BOLT ASSEMBLY
LATERAL LATERAL
BRACKET BELLCRANK
ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
LATERAL
CONTROLS
LONGITUDINAL GRADIENT CONTROL ROD
SPRING ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
LONGITUDINAL TRIM ACTUATOR LATERAL GRADIENT

CRANK ASSEMBLY SPRING ASSEMBLY
COCKPIT LATERAL CONTROLS LONGITUDINAL CONTROLS

TUBE ASSEMBLY CONTROL ROD
DUAL LATERAL ROD END ASSEMBLY
BALL BEARING LATERAL
BELLCRANK
LONGITUDINAL ASSEMBLY LATERAL TRIM ACTUATOR
TRIM ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY CRANK ASSEMBLY
LATERAL
TRIM ACTUATOR
F92−062−1
Figure 7−5. Cyclic Controls Subsystem
Reissue 2
7−12 Original
COLLECTIVE HYDRAULIC
SERVOACTUATOR
LONGITUDINAL/ UPPER DECK

COLLECTIVE COLLECTIVE CONTROL
FOD COVER ROD ASSEMBLY
CONTROL BRACKET
ASSEMBLY
COLLECTIVE
BELLCRANK ASSEMBLY
COLLECTIVE
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
COLLECTIVE
CONTROL ROD ASSEMBLY COLLECTIVE
BELLCRANK ASSEMBLY
DETENT MODULE COLLECTIVE CONTROL
ASSEMBLY ROD ASSEMBLY
SENSOR
LINK ASSEMBLY
DETENT MODULE
MOUNTING BRACKET SENSOR COLLECTIVE
POSITION BELLCRANK
ASSEMBLY
POTENTIOMETER
PILOT CLAMP
COLLECTIVE STICK POTENTIOMETERS
ASSEMBLY
SENSOR
BRACKET
ASSEMBLY
INTERCONNECT
COLLECTIVE FRICTION
CABLE ASSEMBLY
RELEASE SWITCH
COLLECTIVE COLLECTIVE
CONTROL STICK BOOT BELLCRANK ASSEMBLY
COPILOT
COLLECTIVE STICK ASSEMBLY
COLLECTIVE
FRICTION UNIT
COLLECTIVE
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
COLLECTIVE STICK
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
COLLECTIVE INTERCONNECT
CONTROL ROD ASSEMBLY
F92−062−2
Figure 7−6. Collective Controls Subsystem
Reissue 2
Original 7−13
Main Rotor Controls:

The main rotor mechanical control system uses conventional pushrods and bell
cranks under the cockpit floor; in the forward, right hand cockpit/cabin bulkhead;
and in the cabin ceiling to transmit the control motions to the dual tandem hy
draulic actuators that operate the rotor control mixer and the swashplate.
SCISSORS DRIVE
LINK ASSEMBLY
ROTOR CONTROL
PITCH LINK ASSEMBLY
SWASHPLATE
ASSEMBLY
LATERAL ANTI-TORQUE
DRIVE LINK ASSEMBLY
COLLECTIVE DRIVE
LINK ASSEMBLY
MIXER
ASSEMBLY
F92−062−3
Figure 7−7. Upper Flight Controls Subsystem
Reissue 2
7−14 Original
Anti-torque Controls:
The anti-torque pedals are adjustable fore and aft and include an adjustable
friction device. They operate through a pushrod/bellcrank system and a single
hydraulic actuator to control the rotation of the direct jet thruster and change
the blade pitch angle of the NOTAR fan to maintain constant air pressure
in the tail boom as the thruster nozzle opens and closes. The hydraulic actuator
operates the NOTAR fan blade pitch through a pushrod/bellcrank/cam linkage,
and the thruster rotation through a push/pull type cable along the length of
the tailboom and a local tension cable loop at the thruster. The pedals do not
control the vertical stabilizers.
Attached to the lower directional crank assembly is the pedal anticipator. The
pedal anticipator provides the EEC's an indication of impending anti-torque
fan pitch change, which allows the EEC's to anticipate an increase in power
demand. The pedal anticipator also allows the IIDS to display and record pedal
position.
Reissue 2
Original 7−15
REF UPPER DECK

DIRECTIONAL DIRECTIONAL
CONTROL ROD ASSEMBLY BELLCRANK ASSEMBLY
LOWER CLOSET
HEEL REST DIRECTIONAL
ASSEMBLY BELLCRANK ASSEMBLY
AFT DIRECTIONAL
PEDAL COPILOT DUAL CONTROL
ADJUSTMENT DIRECTIONAL PEDAL ASSEMBLY
HANDLE
PEDAL HEEL REST

CRANK ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
PEDAL
ANTICIPATOR
RIGHT
HEEL REST
PILOT DUAL CONTROL SUPPORT
LEFT
DIRECTIONAL HEEL REST
PEDAL ASSEMBLY SUPPORT
DIRECTIONAL
INTERCONNECT
CONTROL ROD ASSEMBLY DIRECTIONAL PEDAL
LINK ASSEMBLY
F92−062−4
Figure 7−8. Anti−Torque Controls Subsystem (Sheet 1 of 3)
Reissue 2
7−16 Original
SPLITTER
ASSEMBLY
NOTAR® FAN INPUT FORCE
DIRECTIONAL LIMITING CONTROL ROD
FOD BRACKET ASSEMBLY ANTI-TORQUE
COVER UPPER SERVO ACTUATOR DIRECTIONAL CONTROLS
DIRECTIONAL DECK CONTROL ROD
BELLCRANK ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
DIRECTIONAL
CONTROL ROD
ASSEMBLY
DIRECTIONAL
CONTROL ROD DIRECTIONAL
ASSEMBLY BRACKET ASSEMBLY
DIRECTIONAL
CONTROL ROD
ASSEMBLY
DIRECTIONAL
CONTROL BELLCRANK
BRACKET ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
NOTAR® FAN INPUT FORCE DIRECTIONAL

LIMITING CONTROL ROD BRACKET
ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY DIRECTIONAL CABLE
ATTACH BRACKET
TO THRUSTER
OUTER BELLCRANK CONTROL
ASSEMBLY
DIRECTIONAL DIRECTIONAL
BELLCRANK CONTROL CABLE
ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
DIVERTER
PLATE ASSEMBLY
NOTAR® FAN INNER BELLCRANK
LINKAGE ASSEMBLY
DIRECTIONAL CONTROLS
F92−062−5A
Reissue 2
Original 7−17
ROTATING CONE
ASSEMBLY
THRUSTER BUILDUP
ASSEMBLY
TAILBOOM
ASSEMBLY
THRUSTER CONTROL
ROD ASSEMBLY
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL
CABLE ASSEMBLY
THRUSTER CONTROL
ROD ASSEMBLY
AFT
THRUSTER CONTROL
CABLE ASSEMBLY
THRUSTER
STATIONARY
CONE ASSEMBLY
THRUSTER CONTROL
SECTOR ASSEMBLY
THRUSTER CONTROL
DRUM ASSEMBLY
VIEW ROTATED
THRUSTER DRUM
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
F92−062−6
Reissue 2
7−18 Original
The Vertical Stabilizer Control System (VSCS) operates the incidence of the
vertical stabilizers through two electro-mechanical actuators, one for the left stabi
lizer and one for the right stabilizer. One portion of the system is a fly-by-wire
actuator of stabilizer incidence as a function of collective pitch stick position. It's
purpose is to provide an anticipation that a power change is occurring to prevent
rotor droop and to maximize the anti-torque contribution of the stabilizers at high
speed thereby minimizing power required by the fan - leaving more power available
for the main rotor. The second portion of the system is a fly-by-wire yaw damping
function that uses yaw gyro/lateral accelerometer signals to impose a supplementary
incidence on both vertical stabilizers. Instrumentation/control includes a dual indica
tor on the instrument panel to show incidence angle of the two vertical stabilizers;
a LEFT STAB FAIL, RIGHT STAB FAIL, or TOTAL STAB FAIL yellow CAUTION
annunciator on the IIDS alphanumeric display; and two OFF/ON/TEST ``L VSCS
R'' switches on the utility panel, and a ``YAW SYNC'' switch located on the collective
control module (Ref. Section IV). The ``YAW SYNC'' switch allows the pilot to reset
the VSCS to operate around the current lateral acceleration and yaw rate. This
feature is useful when transitioning from hovering to forward flight, and when transi
tioning from a turn to level flight or from level flight into a turn.
L VERTICAL STAB R
L VERTICAL STAB R
VSCS INDICATOR
RIGHT
VERTICAL
STABILIZER
RIGHT VERTICAL
STABILIZER LINKAGES
YAW
RATE RIGHT LINEAR
GYRO ACTUATOR
LEFT LEFT
COLLECTIVE LINEAR VERTICAL
CONTROL POSITION ACTUATOR
RIGHT LATERAL STABILIZER
TRANSDUCERS
ACCELEROMETER YAW RATE LEFT VERTICAL
GYRO STABILIZER LINKAGES
LEFT VSCS
CONTROL UNIT
RIGHT VSCS
CONTROL UNIT
F92−063
Figure 7−9. VSCS Control Subsystem
Reissue 2
Original 7−19
7−7. HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
Flight Controls:
The helicopter is equipped with two hydraulic systems for operation of the flight
controls. Under certain conditions, the main rotor control loads are such that
they require at least one hydraulic system operating at all times; hence, the
dual system for safety. However, the aircraft can be flown in a minimally degraded
condition with the anti-torque actuator depressurized.
The system is powered by two variable displacement hydraulic pumps mounted
on and driven by the main transmission, has a reservoir/manifold for each system
placed on opposite sides of the upper fuselage deck, and has three tandem actua
tors, one for each cyclic pitch function and one for collective pitch of the main
rotor.
The #1 system operates only the main rotor controls while the #2 system operates
the main rotor controls and also the NOTAR anti-torque control system.
The main rotor actuators are mounted forward of the main rotor while the anti-
torque actuator is mounted in the cabin ceiling just aft of the right hand cabin
door.
A hand pump option is installed for use in servicing the hydraulic systems in
the field.
The two systems normally operate at 500 psi each for a total system pressure
of 1000 psi. If pressure in one system should drop to less than 400 psi, the other
system automatically compensates by increasing its pressure to maintain a total
system pressure of 1000 psi nominal. A yellow caution annunciator,
``1 HYD'' or ``HYD 2'', illuminates on the IIDS caution/warning display and a
caution message is displayed on the alphanumeric display when the affected
system's pressure falls below 250 psi.
Reissue 2
7−20 Original
SYSTEM NO. 2
PUMP
SYSTEM NO. 2
MANIFOLD
SYSTEM NO. 1
PUMP
SYSTEM NO. 1
MANIFOLD
SAMPLING
VALVE
BLEED VALVE GSE PANELS

PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
TEMPERATURE
SWITCH
FLUID LEVEL
SIGHT GAUGE
FILTER BOWL SYSTEM

FILTER BOWL (PRESSURE) SELECT
(RETURN) SOLENOID
F927−023
F92−064
Figure 7−10. Hydraulic System Installation
Reissue 2
Original 7−21
SYSTEM 1 HAND SYSTEM 2

PUMP
(OPTIONAL)
VARIABLE VARIABLE
DELIVERY DELIVERY
PUMP PUMP
GSE MANIFOLD MANIFOLD GSE

PANEL RESERVOIR RESERVOIR PANEL
COLLECTIVE SERVO ACTUATOR
LONGITUDINAL SERVO ACTUATOR
LATERAL SERVO ACTUATOR
DIRECTIONAL SERVO ACTUATOR
F92−065
Figure 7−11. Hydraulic System Block Diagram
Reissue 2
7−22 Original
Rotor Brake:
A completely separate secondary stand-alone hydraulic system is a part of the
rotor brake installation. It incorporates a master cylinder operated by the brake
handle in the cockpit, and the actuator that operates the disc brake on the back
side of the transmission where the NOTAR drive shaft connects. A yellow
BRAKE caution annunciator in the IIDS secondary display screen warns if the
brake is not fully disengaged.
HYDRAULIC
TUBE
CONTROL LINKAGE MASTER CYLINDER WITH BRAKE

INTEGRAL RESERVOIR CALIPER
F92−066
Figure 7−12. Rotor Brake System
Reissue 2
Original 7−23
7−8. PROPULSION SYSTEM
The propulsion system is designed to meet the engine isolation requirements for
multi-engine rotorcraft that are defined by the Category A requirements of FAR
Part 29, paragraph 29.903(b).
Powerplant:
This system consists of two Pratt and Whitney Canada (P&WC) PW207E turbo
shaft engines mounted above the baggage compartment and pointing inboard
to drive into the main transmission gearbox (Ref. Figure 7-13 and Figure 7-14).
Each engine is mounted to the fuselage upper deck by a three point, adjustable
titanium mount. The air inlet which is in the middle of the engine is located
inside a titanium-walled inlet plenum that leads from a flush-mounted inlet
in the side of the cowling. The combuster end of the engine is surrounded by
titanium firewalls forward, aft, inboard side, and below. It is covered by a fairing
door, and is ventilated by an exhaust-driven ejector at the aft end of the compart
ment.
FORWARD
FIRE SEAL AFT PRIMARY EXHAUST
NOZZLE ASSEMBLY SECONDARY
FIRE SEAL
EJECTOR
FMU INSULATION
SHROUD BLANKET
TRIPOD
MOUNT
ENGINE
AIR INLET
REAR STAY
ASSEMBLY
TRIPOD FWD INLET AFT INLET

MOUNT PANEL PANEL
F92−067
Figure 7−13. PW207E Engine Installation
Reissue 2
7−24 Original
AIR INLET SCREEN

T6 THERMOCOUPLE
FUEL PUMP
FUEL FILTER
FMU
FMU SHROUD
LH OIL LEVEL SIGHT GLASS
OIL FILTER COVER

NP SENSOR
OIL FILTER IMPENDING DCU
BYPASS INDICATOR
CHIP DETECTOR
FUEL NOZZLE
T6 THERMOCOUPLE NG SENSOR STARTER
GENERATOR PAD
PMA
FUEL MANIFOLD
RH OIL LEVEL SIGHT GLASS
FREON PUMP PAD

(IF INSTALLED - RH ENGINE ONLY)
TORQUE
OIL PRESSURE PORT SENSOR
OIL TEMPERATURE PORT
F927−057
Figure 7−14. Powerplant − Components
Reissue 2
Original 7−25
Drive system:
A short shaft with flexible diaphragm couplings and anti flail devices connects
each engine to the transmission. A longer shaft with similar couplings drives
the NOTAR fan. The main rotor drive shaft connects the planet gear carrier
in the top of the transmission to the main rotor hub through a splined connection
at each end. The engines and transmission are electrically bonded to the airframe
by suitable jumpers.
MAIN ROTOR
DRIVE SHAFT
STATIC MAST
SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
INPUT
STRUT DRIVE SHAFTS
ASSEMBLY
BLOWER
HOUSING
ASSEMBLY
LUBRICATION
PUMP AND FILTER
TRANSMISSION
ASSEMBLY
DECK FITTING
ASSEMBLY TEMPERATURE
HYDRAULIC PROBE AND
PUMP DRIVE SWITCH F92−069−1
Figure 7−15. Drive System (Sheet 1 of 2)
Reissue 2
7−26 Original
To minimize structurally-transmitted acoustic noise from the transmission into

the passenger spaces, the transmission is supported from the mast base by eight
bolts in elastomeric bushings, and is restrained against rotation by a toothed
coupling arrangement that has a contoured elastomeric ring between the bottom
of the mast base and the top of the gearbox.
EXHAUST DUCT
INTERCONNECT DUCT
OIL COOLER
AIRFRAME
DECK
INLET DUCT
NOTAR FAN
DRIVE SHAFT
VIEW ROTATED
PRESSURE SWITCH
(LOW)
MAGNETIC
CHIP DETECTOR
F92−069−2
Figure 7−15. Drive System (Sheet 2 of 2)
Engine and transmission lubricating oil is cooled by air/oil heat exchangers

mounted in the sides of the cowling alongside the transmission. Each cooler is split
so that it serves separately one engine's requirements plus half of the transmission's
requirements. A direct drive fan on each side of the transmission induces ambient
air to flow through the cooler cores. Each engine has its own lubrication pump;
the transmission's pump is located low on the front centerline of the gearbox.
Magnetic chip detectors are provided for each engine and the transmission. The
detector in the transmission has ``burn-off '' capability; the detectors in the engines
do not.
Reissue 2
Original 7−27
7−9. ENGINE AIR INTAKE AND INLET PARTICLE SEPARATOR (IPS)
The air intake system provides a path for ambient air to enter each engine compressor
case inlet. The air intake system consists of an inlet screen or optional inlet particle
separator for each engine that prevents debris from entering the engine ducts.
Inlet screen:
The standard inlet screens are 1/4 in. ( 64 mm) steel wire mesh screens located
on the upper intake cowlings (Ref. Figure 7-16). Each engine inlet screen pre
vents large foreign objects from entering the inlet plenum. A bypass opening
is located at the aft end of each inlet screen. The aft facing bypass opening assures
airflow if the screen becomes clogged.
IPS (if installed):
The inlet particle separator is an inertial type particle separator that removes
debris from the ambient air before it enters the engine. The particle separator
is located on the upper intake cowling (Ref. Figure 7-16). Ambient air enters
the particle separator and the air velocity is increased as the air passes over
swirl guides. The swirl guides create a vortex that separates heavy particles
from the air. The particles drop to the bottom of the particle separator panel.
A solenoid valve and bleed air lines route engine compressor bleed air to the
particle separator ejector to eject the particles overboard. The ejector is controlled
by the pilot through the IPS switch located on the Utility panel. In the event
that the particle separator becomes clogged with debris, solenoid operated bypass
doors automatically open for both engines inlets.
NACA inlet:
The NACA engine inlets provide ``ram air'' for enhanced engine operation/perfor
mance during cruise flight. If the aircraft is equipped with the IPS, the NACA
doors open/close automatically when the airspeed is greater/less than 47 KIAS.
A NACA inlet switch is provided on the options switch panel that allows the
pilot to override the automatic door opening feature and leave the NACA inlet
doors in the closed position. On aircraft with the standard engine inlet screen,
the NACA inlet does not include doors, but has a screen covering the inlet. Addi
tional information for operations with the NACA inlet may be found in Sections
II, III, IV, and IX.
Reissue 2
7−28 Original
STANDARD INLET
SCREEN
BLEED AIR
TUBE ASSEMBLY
SOLENOID
SHUTOFF VALVE
EJECTOR
TUBE ASSEMBLY
PARTICLE SEPARATOR EJECTOR

PARTICLE
SEPARATOR PANEL
BYPASS DOOR
BYPASS DOOR
NACA INLET DOOR F92−070
SOLENOID LATCH
(IF INSTALLED)
Figure 7−16. Engine Air Intake
7−10. ENGINE POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Automatic Engine Control:

The Pratt and Whitney PW207E engine is equipped with a single channel Full
Authority Digital Electronic Control (FADEC) which consists of an Electronic
Engine Control (EEC), Fuel Metering Unit (FMU), and fuel pumps. A manual
backup system is provided for emergency operation in case the EEC becomes
inoperative. The pilot's controls for normal operation consist of two rotary engine
control switches on the engine control panel for the left and right engines. These
switches are gated between OFF and IDLE: the switch knobs must be lifted
to pass the gates. The other switch positions are FLY and TRAIN and are not
gated. For normal operation, the two twist grips on the collective pitch stick
are always left in their NORMAL detent position.
The EEC's of the two engines are connected together electrically for a torque-
matching function, and are both connected electrically to the collective stick
and pedal position resolvers for power change anticipation.
When the EEC's are working properly, the procedure for starting and stopping
requires no more than selection of the desired engine operation with an engine
control switch.
P&WC has built into the PW207E engine the proper shielding to protect the
EEC's from the HIRF threat, and the helicopter's wiring system components
Reissue 2
Original 7−29
that are associated with the EEC's are protected in a similar manner. With this
protection in place, freedom from lightning damage is also assured.
Train Mode:
Placing an engine control switch in the TRAIN position will simulate a one engine
inoperative condition by resetting the selected engine's governed speed to 92
percent NP, thereby putting the engine on standby while allowing single engine
training on the opposite engine. In the event of an engine failure on the opposite
engine, the engine in TRAIN will automatically revert to 100% NP.
Additionally, the opposite engine will retain the 5 minute Take-off Power engine
parameter limiters. The result is more realistic pilot OEI training, providing
rotor droop in training if the power requested is above the limiters as would
happen in a real OEI condition.
Emergency Manual Control:
The controls for manual operation of the engine power consist of two twist grips
on the collective pitch stick and a push button located on the collective control module
at the end of the collective stick.
The EEC is designed to ``fail-fixed” (EEC's stepper motor is fixed at its last con
trolled power setting) so there is no sudden change in the level of power if an
EEC becomes inoperative. The only noticeable happening is illumination of the
yellow EEC/red FAIL warning on the Integrated Instrument Display System
(IIDS). No matter at what power level the EEC becomes inoperative, there is
sufficient travel in the twist grip to control the engine manually from full power
to idle and engine shutdown.
After the EEC becomes inoperative, the pilot uses the appropriate twist grip
on the collective stick to modulate the power.
Reissue 2
7−30 Original
7−11. FUEL SYSTEM
The single crash-resistant elastomeric fuel cell is capable of holding 161.3 U.S.
gallons of jet fuel and is located in the lower fuselage under the main cabin floor
(Ref. Figure 7-17). It is contained between crash-resistant keelbeams and bulk
heads, with a support panel underneath.
The powerplant separation feature includes a partial-height baffle that runs fore
and aft along the bottom center of the cell that provides sufficient fuel reserve for
at least twenty minutes of flight following loss of fuel in the other compartment.
This provides two separate fuel supplies, and each are capable of transferring fuel
from the other. This is a pressurized system with a boost pump and jet pump located
on each side of the longitudinal baffle. With boost pumps operating, fuel is pumped
through jet pumps in the opposite fuel cell cavity. The jet pump draws fuel from
the sump through a pickup and the fuel is ejected on the other side of the longitudinal
baffle.
The fuel system is pressurized having a separate fuel pump located in the sump
in each side of the cell.
The cell is designed with a seven percent expansion space, and has two anti-slosh
baffles across it. Pilot-operated shutoff valves are positioned at the engine firewalls.
Self‐closing breakaway fittings are installed where fuel lines penetrate the cell walls
and where they penetrate the engine deck. Overboard fuel cell vent lines incorporate
rollover valves and flame arrestors located in the vent system stand pipes.
The gravity-type fuel filler port is located on the right side of the fuselage just
aft of the pilot's cockpit door.
Two sump overboard drains for removing sediment and water (one for each side
of the cell) are operated by knobs located under the right side cabin step.
The engine fuel drain system provides a path for residual fuel from the fuel manifold
that remains after shutdown to be returned to the fuel cell.
A provision is made in the fitting at the aft left hand corner of the cell for making
a connection to an optional auxiliary fuel tank.
The pilot controls the fuel system by the Fuel System Panel mounted switches.
Fuel level is sensed by a forward probe and an aft probe, and is displayed on the
IIDS. Two fuel pressure switches activate caution lights in the IIDS when the pres
sure falls below the acceptable limit.
Reissue 2
Original 7−31
RIGHT LEFT
ENGINE FUEL METERING UNIT (FMU) ENGINE
ENGINE DECK FRANGIBLE
SHROUD BOX (2 PL) CONNECTOR (2 PL)
FUEL SHUTOFF TEE FITTING VAPOR

VALVE (2 PL) ENGINE DECK SHROUD DRAIN (2 PL) TO
ENGINE DRAIN SYSTEM
FUEL PRESSURE
SWITCH (2 PL) TEE FITTING (2 PL) VENT-ROLLOVER
RH FUEL FEED SYS VALVE (4 PL)
RH FUEL FEED TO AFT LH
VAPOR SHROUD VENT SYS
TO FWD RH
VENT SYS SPRING LOADED
FLAPPER VALVE
FUEL FILLER FWD LH
ASSY VENT SYS
FLAME GRAVITY FILL VALVE LH FUEL FEED

ARRESTOR (2 PL) AND FLAPPER VALVE VAPOR SHROUD
VENT OVBD LH FUEL

DRAIN (2 PL) FEED SYS
FUEL FEED
FRANGIBLE
SUMP DRAIN CABLE CONNECTOR (2 PL)
FUEL BOOST SUMP OVBD LOW FUEL LEVEL
DRAIN (2 PL) FUEL CELL OUTLET
PUMP (2 PL) SUMP DRAIN SENSOR (2 PL) VAPOR SHROUD
VALVE (2 PL) FUEL CELL
FUEL QTY PROBE
(2 PL) LEFT AND RIGHT CENTER BAFFLE
FUEL BOOST
PUMP (2 PL) CENTER BAFFLE
FEED LINE TO R ENGINE FEED LINE TO L ENGINE
EJECTOR PUMP (2 PL)

”T” FITTING (2 PL)
CHECK VALVE (2 PL)
R FUEL XFER TUBING

LOOKING DOWN L FUEL XFER TUBING
FUEL TRANSFER SYSTEM F92−073
Figure 7−17. Fuel System Schematic
Reissue 2
7−32 Original
NOTE: If the voltage for the probe drops below the specified operating limit, the
segments in the fuel quantity vertical scale blank with the digital quantity still
active.
FUEL
FUEl QUANTITY FUEL LOW WARNING

SEGMENTS (GREEN) SEGMENT (RED)
FUEL LOW WARNING TICK MARK (RED) FUEL LOW CAUTION

SEGMENTS (YELLOW)
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE POSITION CURRENT FUEL QUANTITY
ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW) DIGITAL DISPLAY (WHITE)
FUEL FILTER IMPENDING FUEL FILTER IMPENDING

BYPASS ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW) BYPASS ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW)
LB
FUEL FLOW LINE

LOW FUEL PRESSURE LOW FUEL PRESSURE
ANNUNCIATORS (YELLOW) ANNUNCIATORS (YELLOW)
F92−072
Figure 7−18. IIDS Fuel System Display

Fuel quantity (FUEL) is shown by a vertical bargraph inside a fuel tank icon
rectangle, with the corresponding digit value in pounds, shown immediately below.
The green bar shortens vertically from the top as fuel is burned proportional to
the total tank volume. When the green box disappears, two yellow segments illumi
nate below to indicate a low fuel caution (approximately 45 minute reserve). When
the last yellow segment disappears, a red segment illuminates below to indicate
low fuel (approximately 20 minute reserve). Independent left and right fuel low
warning red ``tick'' marks beside the red segments are activated when the low level
sensor reaches the warning level of 100 lbs.
Fuel flow to the engines is shown below the fuel quantity bargraph: Connections
from the fuel tank to each engine is shown immediately below the digit value of
fuel quantity. A solid line indicates normal fuel flow and alternating white and yellow
offset segments indicate low fuel pressure.
The display of fuel valve left and right engine position is shown by a segment
above and below each fuel line for the respective left and right fuel valves. During
Reissue 2
Original 7−33
the time a fuel valve is in transit between open and closed positions, the fuel valve
indications will flash. Fuel valve in transit is defined by both fuel valve input discreets
being open circuit.
The fuel filter impending bypass status is shown by an inverted `Ù'' above each
fuel line indication.
7−12. FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
The fire extinguishing system provides a means for the pilot to direct a charge
of fire extinguishing agent into the designated fire zone of each engine. There is
no fire extinguishing system for the transmission area.
Refer to Section III, paragraph for fire emergencies.
The fire extinguishing system (Ref. Figure 7-19) contains two individual hermetical
ly sealed pressurized spherical containers (bottles) that are filled with 60 cubic
inches (16.38 CC) of CF3 BR (Bromotrifluoromethane), also known as Halon 1301,
and pressurized with nitrogen gas to an internal pressure of 700 PSIG (49.22 kg/cm2).
Each bottle serves as the primary bottle for its appropriate side engine.
Each bottle is equipped with dual outlet ports, a pressure gauge with electrical
low pressure warning signal to IIDS, filler port and thermal relief valve. The outlets
ports are fitted with electrically discharged explosive squibs. The fire extinguisher
cartridges are armed and ready for firing when the fuel shutoff valves are placed
in the OFF (closed) position. The bottles are discharged when the BOTTLE DIS
CHARGE switch is momentarily placed in the PRI (primary) or ALT (alternate)
position.
The BOTTLE DISCHARGE switch is a momentary type, three position switch lo
cated between the left and right fuel shutoff valves on the cockpit FUEL SYSTEM
panel. Placing a fuel shutoff valve OFF arms the fire extinguishing system for that
engine and selection of PRI discharges its primary bottle. Selection of ALT discharges
the second bottle onto the same engine.
Reissue 2
7−34 Original
PRESSURE GAUGE
FILLER PORT
(RED PORT)
PRIMARY
CARTRIDGE (BLUE PORT)
ALTERNATE
CARTRIDGE
DISCHARGE TUBE
DISTRIBUTION TUBE
RIGHT SIDE
REF
ENGINE
DECK
DISCHARGE
TUBE
REF
FIRE BOTTLE ENGINE DECK
ASSEMBLY
OUTLET DISTRIBUTION TUBE

PORT LEFT SIDE
CROSS FLOW OUTLET

TUBES PORT
FUEL SYSTEM
L BOOST R BOOST
ON ON FIRE EXTINGUISHER
OFF OFF
BOTTLE DISCHARGE
SWITCH
FUEL SHUTOFF
BOTTLE
DISCHARGE
PRI
O
F
F
ALT
LEFT OFF RIGHT OFF
F92−146
Figure 7−19. Fire Extinguishing System
Reissue 2
Original 7−35
7−13. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

The electric system is designed to maintain separation of the power generating sys
tems. Wiring for each system is physically separated to each side of the helicopter to
the greatest extent possible. Power from the two generators does not pass together
through a single connector at any point on the aircraft to preclude any single point
failure that could result in loss of power to the essential bus.
LEFT RIGHT
STARTER STARTER
GENERATOR GENERATOR
EXTERNAL POWER
LEFT RIGHT
START RELAY START RELAY
LEFT GCU RIGHT GCU
SHUNT 1 EXTERNAL SHUNT 2

POWER
RELAY
LEFT PWR RLY RIGHT PWR RLY

LEFT BUS TIE RELAY LEFT BUS TIE RELAY
BATTERY BUS
LEFT GEN BUS RIGHT GEN BUS

BATTERY RELAY
RIGHT AVIONICS
LEFT AVIONICS RELAY BAT RELAY
LT ESS BUS RT ESS BUS
RELAY RELAY
LEFT AVNCS BUS RIGHT AVNCS BUS RIGHT DC BUS
LEFT DC BUS
RT
ESS PWR
RIGHT ESS BUS

LT
ESS PWR
LEFT ESS BUS
F92-075B
Figure 7−20. Battery Power and External Power Subsystem Block Diagram
Two engine-mounted starter-generators rated at 200 amperes each provide
29 volts DC to the aircraft. Bus tie relays provide redundancy by allowing either
generator to provide power to all busses.
When installed, a generator cooling option allows aircraft operations in higher ambi
ent temperature conditions (Ref. Figure 7-21).
The left and right essential bus relays allow the left and right essential buses
to be powered by either of the two generators, or by the battery if all power from
the generators is lost.
Starter and generator functions are directed by individual generator control
units (GCU), each of which provides starter control, voltage regulation, and protec
tive functions. Electric power is distributed by two electric busses and a battery
Reissue 2
7−36 Original
bus. A starter contactor connects the starter generator to the battery bus. After
a successful start, the starter-generator begins generating current and is brought
on line by the GCU through the generator contactor.
The pilot monitors generator load on the IIDS. The pilot can manually reset or dese
lect either generator by using the generator switches located on the Electrical Master
panel.
A standard 22 ampere-hour nickel-cadmium battery is used for engine start
and for reserve electric power. A 27 amp hour and 44 amp hour (aft mounted battery
only) are also available as options. The battery relay and external power relay are
controlled by the power switch on the Electrical Master panel. The standard mount
ing of the battery is in the nose of the helicopter, however, an aft-mounted battery
is available as an option.
STARTER/GEN STARTER/GEN
GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT
EXTERNAL POWER
RECEPTACLE
BATTERY
GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT
ELECTRICAL
LOAD CENTER
OPTIONAL REAR-MOUNTED
BATTERY
POWER AND L/R

GENERATOR SWITCHES EXTERNAL POWER BOX RELAY
FOR REAR-MOUNTED BATTERY
EXTERNAL POWER BOX RELAY
(FRONT MOUNTED BATTERY)
GENERATOR COOLING INLET (IF INSTALLED)

VIEW LKG INBD
(RH SHOWN; LH OPPOSITE)
AIR VENT INLET (REF)
GENERATOR COOLING INLET
F927−091A
Figure 7−21. Battery Power, External Power, and DC Power Component Locator
Reissue 2
Original 7−37
The key switch is located on the right hand side of the instrument panel. All
switches and brightness controls that operate the electric system are on the console.
The ground power receptacle for 28 volts DC is in the right hand side of the
fuselage below and forward of the pilot's door.
Two grounding jacks are located on the right hand side of the fuselage, one ad
jacent to the ground power receptacle (forward mounted batery) and one adjacent
to the fuel filler port.
Circuit breakers for essential circuits are located in the cockpit on the Left and
Right Essential Bus panels; nonessential breakers are located in the baggage
compartment ceiling. One 29 volt DC outlet is located in the cockpit on the copilot's
side of the console, and another one is on the left hand cabin wall aft of the cabin
door.
Aircraft Lighting:
Aircraft Interior Lighting:
Cockpit:
Floodlight (1)
Map Light (1)
Instrument Floodlights (3) (Powered By Right Essential Bus)
Main Cabin:
Threshold Lights (2)
Baggage Compartment:
Floodlight (1)
Aircraft Exterior Lighting:
Nose:
Fixed Landing Light (1)
Fixed Hover Light (1)
Empennage:
Left End of Horizontal Stabilizer:
Red Navigation Light (1)
Right End of Horizontal Stabilizer:
Green Navigation Light (1)
Top Center of Stabilizer:
Flashing Red Anticollision Light (1)
White Navigation Light (1)
Bottom of Tailboom, Forward of Thruster:
Flashing Red Anticollision Light (1)
White Navigation Light (1)
Reissue 2
7−38 Original
7−14. ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
The environmental control system for the helicopter consists of the ventilation sys
tem and the heat/defog system.
Ventilation System:
Ambient air is taken in through an inlet in the right side of the upper cowling,
is directed through a water separator and a two-speed fan, and into a manifold
that distributes the air to the cockpit and to the cabin - then out of a port in
the baggage compartment door. In the cockpit, four adjustable gaspers, two on
the windshield's center bow blow outboard toward the pilots' heads, and two
on the forward door frame blow inboard toward their lower torsos. Six adjustable
gaspers are mounted in the ceiling of the cabin. The fan speed switch is located
on the Utility Panel.
Secondary ventilation for the cockpit is provided by two conventional clear plastic
adjustable snap vents in the window of each cockpit door.
Heat/Defog System:
The heat source is bleed air from the compressors of the two engines. This hot
air is directed through a pilot-operated on/off valve located on the Utility panel
to a pair of ejectors that mix bleed air and ambient air to a desired temperature
and flow rate. One ejector serves the cockpit; the other serves the cabin.
The cabin ejector is located low on the right side of the cabin just aft of the
door. Its discharge air is directed across the cabin under the rear seats. An adjust
ing lever for controlling the bleed air admitted to the ejector, and so the discharge
volume, is recessed in the wall at head height directly above the ejector.
The cockpit ejector is located in the compartment below the pilot's seat, and
is operated by a push/pull control mounted vertically along the right hand side
of the console. From the ejector, warm air is ducted forward to two aft-facing
nozzles above and forward of the pilots' feet, and to a pair of nozzles along the
bottom of the upper windshield panels to defog them. Each pilot has a push/pull
knob located under the instrument panel to operate a butterfly valve that modu
lates the airflow toward his/her feet.
An automatic disconnect monitored by the IIDS cuts off all bleed air whenever
either engine becomes inoperative in flight to maximize the operating engine's
power output to the rotor. This cutoff function maybe overridden by placing the
CAB HEAT switch in the OVRD position.
Reissue 2
Original 7−39
CHECK
VALVES
ENGINE ENGINE
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
FLOW
CONTROL
START−UP VALVES
LOCK OUT
HEAT ON/OFF PASSENGER

SWITCH COMPARTMENT
EJECTORS
FLOW CONTROL
FLOW CONTROL VALVES
SHUT−OFF VALVE
(ON/OFF) DEFOGGING
MANIFOLDS
PILOT HEAT
EJECTORS
FOOT HEATERS FOOT HEATERS
CONTROL VALVES
F92−076
CREW STATION
Figure 7−22. Heat/Defog System Schematic
Reissue 2
7−40 Original
7−15. INTEGRATED INSTRUMENTATION DISPLAY SYSTEM (IIDS)
General The IIDS provides for the monitoring and display of various aircraft
parameters and for caution/warning annunciation. The baseline config
uration includes a set of engine, drive train, rotor, NOTAR, electrical,
fuel, hydraulic, and caution/warning indicators. It also incorporates a
built-in rotor and NOTAR fan balance system and stores system oper
ating and exceedance parameters for enhanced maintainability.
The IIDS accepts analog and discrete inputs from various aircraft sub
system transducers and provides signal conditioning and conversion
to digital format. Once converted to digital format, this information
is provided to the display electronics for the cockpit display and to a
serial port for access by a data recorder or computer. Also, limit checking
on certain parameters is performed to provide the caution/warning an
nunciation. The display is a color, Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) panel
which allows the flexibility of integrating the specified sensor data and
caution/warning information onto a display packaged as one unit.
Built−In−Test Three levels of Built-in-Test (BIT) are used to determine system health,
including Power-up, Continuous, and Commanded BIT. Power-up diag
nostics will check the health of each function or module within the IIDS
and display this test status. Continuous testing checks the operation
of the IIDS during aircraft operation and displays and/or logs any fail
ures. Commanded BIT, initiated using the IIDS keyboard, performs
a display test, along with those tests performed during Continuous BIT.
The display is put into ``lamp test'' mode, where all segments are acti
vated, so that the display can be visually inspected for segment failures.
Both Power-up and Commanded BIT test the two engine and the trans
mission fire detectors, and the bleed air leak detector (if installed).
Reissue 2
Original 7−41
FUEL
SYSTEM
POWERPLANT
SYSTEM
DRIVE
SYSTEM
ROTOR
SYSTEM BALANCE
MONITORING
NOTAR SYSTEM
SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM INTEGRATED INSTRUMENT
DISPLAY SYSTEM (IIDS)
AIRFRAME
SYSTEM
F92−077
Figure 7−23. IIDS System Monitoring
BIT BIT failures are stored in non-volatile memory to assist in three situa
Failures tions:
First, a transient or intermittent failure;

Second, a situation where the pilot observed a problem with the IIDS
but didn't notice any failure annunciation;
Third, ease of IIDS maintenance on and off the aircraft. These fault
words are stored in the Fault Log when a BIT failure was detected
in the IIDS, BMS, EEC, or aircraft transducers/sensors, and can be
examined through the IIDS display or ground based maintenance com
puter (GBMC).
When the testing determines that an internal fault exists, the appropri
ate redundant function, if such redundant system exists, will be com
manded to assume the primary role. The redundant functions shall
be sufficiently isolated such that a failure of the function will not cause
Reissue 2
7−42 Original
the failure of another function. These fault monitoring provisions are

implemented using hardware Built-in-Test Equipment (BITE) and soft
ware diagnostics, allowing isolation of failures to at least the internal
module level. In addition, provisions are made to check operation of
the transducers and sensors and provide an appropriate maintenance
alert.
Any sensor that can be checked for proper function and is determined
to have failed causes blanking of the digit display for that parameter.
The following are exceptions to the above:
1. A failure of a sensor for the primary display parameters (EGT,
Torque, NR, and NP) causes both the vertical scale and digit value
to blank.
2. If the voltage for the fuel probes (Battery Bus voltage input) drops
below the specified operating low limit of 18 volts for more than
40 seconds, the low voltage indication shall be to blank the segments
in the fuel quantity vertical scale. The digit quantity shall remain
active. When the probe voltage goes back above 18 volts for more
than one second, the vertical scales shall be illuminated. A failure
of one of the fuel probes causes only the digit values to blank whereas
the failure of both probes causes both the vertical scale and digit
value to blank.
3. If the parameters displayed on the alphanumeric display (Pressure/
Density Altitude, L/R engine fuel flow, CLP, and Hydraulic Pressure)
are out-of-range, the display will read NOT VALD.
The functional architecture of the IIDS to meet these design goals and
the operational requirements of the aircraft is shown in Figure 7-23.
System SYSTEM OPERATING PROGRAM: The System Operating Program

Software provides the programming and functions controlling the data collection,
Architecture displays and formatting, key entry functions, date/time clock, cautions
and warnings, exceedance detection, memories and BIT feature.
Reissue 2
Original 7−43
Primary and The integrated display is divided into two separate displays. The prima
Secondary ry is on the right side and the secondary is on the left.
Displays The primary display includes the following information.
Power turbine speed: NP
Rotor speed: NR
Measured gas temperature: EGT
Engine Torque: TORQUE
NR and NP are displayed with three vertical bargraphs and a digit
value of NR displayed in the center.
Torque display: Displayed in % torque. The IIDS obtains engine torque
from the EEC. If the EEC fails, the IIDS calculates torque by using
NG, OAT, and pressure altitude measurements. The vertical bargraphs
and three digit indicators on this display indicate torque in percent
(%). The vertical bar has four ranges as defined below:
Green segments indicate continuous operating range including Maxi
mum Continuous Power (MCP).
Yellow segments indicate:
Transient Take Off Power (TOP) operating range (5 minute limit)
OEI operating range (2.5 minutes)
Top red segments - do not exceed limit.
NOTE: Even though the IIDS displays engine torque, the transmission sets the torque
limit for helicopter operations, and therefore, the displayed torque limits are
lower than those for the engine as stated in the Pratt & Whitney Maintenance
Manual.
EGT is indicated by two vertical bargraphs and a three digit indicator
showing EGT in 1°C increments. Displayed on the IIDS as EGT. Pratt
& Whitney refers to this measurement as MGT (Measured Gas Tempera
ture). The vertical bargraph has four ranges as defined by the display
mode; they are:
Green segments: continuous operating range (MCP operating range)
Yellow segments: transient operating range (TOP or OEI)
Top red segment: do not exceed limit
NOTE: The IIDS provides a time count−down on the alphanumeric display when the
pilot enters TOP, OEI, or transient flight conditions. Should the pilot exceed
the count−down, the IIDS then provides an time overcount, and exceedance
and data logs are created.
Warning annunciators in red are for EGT, Torque, NR, NP, and EEC FAIL.
Caution annunciators in yellow are for EEC minor fault, EEC MAN
(manual) mode, and OEI (one engine inoperative).
Reissue 2
7−44 Original
In the secondary display, caution annunciators in yellow are given

for engine chips, engine oil temperature, high or low, engine oil pressure
high or low, generator load high, generator out, NG high, transmission
chips, transmission oil temperature high or low, fuel pressure low, fuel
filter impending by-pass, fuel valve closed, battery warm, rotor brake,
hydraulic system status, baggage door open and IIDS status.
Engine oil pressure display: Displayed in % PSI, and is a function of
NG speed and engine oil temperature.
Engine oil temperature display: °C
Gas producer turbine speed display: %NG
Transmission oil pressure display: Displayed in % PSI, and is a function
of NR speed and transmission oil pressure.
Transmission oil temperature display: °C
Generator load display: %LOAD
Warning Annunciators displayed in red are shown for engine fire, engine
oil temperature high, engine oil pressure high or low, NG high or low,
transmission area fire, transmission oil pressure high or low, fuel quanti
ty low CAB HEAT (bleed air leak), and BAT HOT.
Display Day or night modes may be selected using the Light Master switch
Brightness located on the Lighting Control Panel. Placing the Light Master switch
Controls ON selects night mode.
The display brightness is adjustable using the inner ring of the IIDS
control potentiometer also located on the Lighting Control Panel.
When in the night mode, the IIDS will automatically increase display
brightness when a caution/warning message is received and displayed.
To return to the preset brightness, press the CLR key momentarily.
LIGHTING CONTROL
IIDS DISPLAY
LIGHT MASTER LT MSTR CONSOLE IIDS
ON BRIGHTNESS
SWITCH
CONTROL
OFF OFF OFF

FLOOD INSTR
STROBE POSN AREA
ON ON BOTH
CKP
CAB
OFF OFF OFF
F92−078
Figure 7−24. IIDS Display Brightness Control
Alphanumeric The IIDS has a 2 line by 16 character alphanumeric display. This display
Display allows messages to be displayed regarding systems limit exceedance,
Reissue 2
Original 7−45
condition, various cautions and warnings as well as expanded features

of the IIDS to be viewed by the pilot. Yellow and red segments are located
to the left of each line that indicate if the associated message is a caution
or a warning. The expanded features of the IIDS are selected in conjunc
tion with the IIDS keyboard.
Certain conditions will cause the alphanumeric display to automatically
display a message.
At start-up, and if required during flight, messages are displayed on
the alphanumeric display automatically. A list of these messages is
found in Table 7-1. This table also defines the priority of the message
to be displayed, the classification of the message (warning/caution/advi
sory W/C/A), and whether the message can be cleared (CLR) from the
display.
AOG The IIDS uses the following logic to determine an aircraft on-ground/off-
Logic ground condition. The IIDS uses this information to enable or disable
certain caution/warning, indications and alphanumeric display advisory
messages.
Aircraft on-ground if:

1. NR 80%
OR
Aircraft on-ground if:
1. NR >80%, and
2. CLP <5%, and
3. Torque (either engine) >10%
Otherwise, the aircraft is off-ground. The transition from one condition

to the other is not recognized until after the new condition has existed
for 5 seconds.
Reissue 2
7−46 Original
NOTE: Advisory messages may not indicate a malfunction or emergency.

WARNING
ANNUNCIATOR (RED)
CAUTION ANNUNCIATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALPHA-
(YELLOW) NUMERIC
MESSAGE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISPLAY
WARNING
ANNUNCIATOR (RED)
CAUTION ANNUNCIATOR NR TORQUE EGT
(YELLOW) NP NP
ENG
OUT
F92−079
Figure 7−25. Alphanumeric Display
Table 7−1. Automatic Alphanumeric Display Warning/Caution/Advisory Messages

SAMPLE MESSAGE CAUSE FOR
W/C/A CLR CORRECTIVE ACTION
(Fault) DISPLAY
ENG POWER CHECK Invalid performance
L PA CK NG -1.8 margin (power check W YES Advise Maintenance
LPA CK EGT-11.2 failed)
OVR TORQ LFT 2:30
OVR TORQ RT 2:30
OVR EGT LFT 2:30
MTO or OEI overcount W NO Advise Maintenance
OVR EGT RT 2:30
OVR NG LFT 2:30
OVR NG RT 2:30
Hydraulic system sta
Perform malfunction
PRES 1 = 0 PSI tus: activated on hy
C YES procedure.
PRES 2 = 1000 PSI draulic caution indica
Ref. Section III.
tion1
Perform malfunction
Hydraulic system over
TEMPERATURE C YES procedure.
temperature
Ref. Section III.
Start engine with engine
Engine oil temperature control in IDLE. Do not
L ENG OIL COLD C NO
cold (Starting) advance to FLY until
message blanks
Right Stabilizer
RIGHT STAB FAIL C YES
Actuator Failure
Perform malfunction
Left Stabilizer Actuator
LEFT STAB FAIL C YES procedure.
Failure
Ref. Section III.
Both Stabilizer
TOTAL STAB FAIL C YES
Actuator Failure
CHK BMS SENSOR BMS sensor(s) failure2 C YES Advise maintenance
Reissue 2
Original 7−47
Table 7−1. Automatic Alphanumeric Display Warning/Caution/Advisory Messages

SAMPLE MESSAGE CAUSE FOR
W/C/A CLR CORRECTIVE ACTION
(Fault) DISPLAY
Transmission input
TQ SPLIT EXCEED C YES Ref. Section III
torque split exceedance
TORQ LFT 2:30
TORQ RT 2:30
EGT LFT 2:30
TOP or OEI countdown A NO N/A
EGT RT 2:30
NG LFT 2 :30
NG RT 2:30
CARGO HOOK OPEN Cargo hook open A YES N/A
Particle separator
IPS BYPASS A YES Ref. Section III
clogged: IPS in bypass
NACA door in the incor
NACA DOOR A YES Advise Maintenance
rect position.
BATT DISCHARGE Battery Discharging A YES N/A
Optional fire extin
EXTGSHR PRESS LO guishing system bottle A YES Advise Maintenance
pressure low
Crew commanded data
RECORDING DATA A NO N/A
record
Download of data logs
DATA XFER CMPL to ground based com A YES N/A
puters
Fault Log during
CHECK FAULT LOG A YES Advise Maintenance
flight2,3
Exceedance Log during
CHK EXCEED LOG A YES Advise Maintenance
flight3
Main rotor out of bal
CHECK ROTOR BAL A YES Advise Maintenance
ance
NOTAR fan out of bal
CHECK NOTAR BAL A YES Advise Maintenance
ance
NOTE: 1.With a single system failure, this message is displayed when the failed system
pressure decreases to 250 PSI. This message will reappear when remaining
operating system pressure decreases to 500 PSI.
2.This caution does not affect dispatchability.
3.These messages are generated for conditions that create a fault log or an
exceedance log and are displayed only when the aircraft is on−ground as
determined by the AOG logic.
Reissue 2
7−48 Original
7−16. IIDS DATA STORAGE
Data Storage Selected information that is monitored by the IIDS for display is also
stored by the IIDS. Information is stored in non-volatile memory and
is available by selecting various menu functions through the front panel
keys. All information is available using a ground based maintenance
computer (GBMC). A partial Data Log and Cumulative Log are viewable
on the alphanumeric display. Complete Data and Cumulative logs are
available through the GBMC. The operating data is stored in one of
six data records:
LOG TYPE A/N DISPLAY

Data Log NO
Cumulative Log NO
Exceedance Log YES
Fault Log YES
Trend Log YES
Setup Log YES
Data Logs The data log provides one and a half minutes of data collection. The
data is recorded in a continuous memory buffer ``loop'' and will be contin
uously over-written unless an exceedance occurs, or the crew requests
a record of an event. Exceedances generate both data logs and excee
dance logs. The data log record provides a ``window in time'' to examine
events around an exceedance or other incident. The data log can store
five of these events. This information is accessed by the GBMC only.
Pilots may generate a data log by first clearing the alphanumeric display,
then pressing and holding the “REC” button for 7 to 10 seconds before
releasing. The message RECORDING DATA will then be displayed on
the alphanumeric display.
Cumulative Log The cumulative log retains data concerning the aircraft operational his
tory and current configuration. As the aircraft configuration changes
(e.g. component changes) the Cumulative Log will be updated by the
maintainer on the GBMC. The IIDS will only retain one Cumulative
Log in memory.
NOTE: Time Summary Menu procedure (Ref. Figure 7−28) may be used to access
cumulative usage data as well as flight time data.
Reissue 2
Original 7−49
Exceedance The exceedance Log provides a ``snapshot'' record of the parameter data
Log at a particular moment in time. This type of record occurs whenever
a parameter exceedance is detected. This recording function is only
active when NG for either engine AND NR is greater than 50 % AND
EGT on either engine is greater than 400°C
This feature is capable of storing 100 exceedance Logs. Exceedances
are recorded for EGT, engine torque, transmission torque, NG, NP, NR
(high), engine oil pressure (low), transmission oil pressure (low), and
cargo hook.
Exceedance logs maybe either recorded or downloaded to the GBMC.
Perform Exceedance Log Menu procedure (Ref. Figure 7-41) to access
cumulative usage data.
Fault The Fault Log contains data associated with fault discrete data from
Log the EEC's and a BIT failure that was detected in the IIDS, BMS, or
aircraft transducers/sensors. This type of log is recorded whenever an
IIDS, EEC, or aircraft sensor fault is detected. The system is capable
of storing 100 Fault Logs.
Fault logs maybe either recorded or downloaded to the GBMC.

Perform the Fault Log Menu procedure to access data (Ref. Figure 7-43).
IIDS Setup Log IIDS setup contains (Ref. Figure 7-44) data that reflects the current
configuration of the aircraft, such as, aircraft serial number, engine
type installed, engine serial number, fuel calibration, operating soft
ware, etc.
On power up, the IIDS uses information in the setup log to compare
the current Torque and EGT trim values from the EEC to the values
stored in the IIDS setup log to assure the data collected by the IIDS
remains with the respective engine. If there is a discrepancy, a fault
log is created and certain engine ASCM functions are disabled for the
affected engine(s): Exceedance Logs for NG, NP, Torque, EGT; Power
Assurance function (including trend logs); and Cumulative Logs (cycle
counting, SSO, FSO, TSN, and engine run time).
To recover from this disable function, the Setup Log must be revised
to match the values from that specific engine(s) through the GBMC.
Once the Setup Log has been revised, a power-up of the IIDS will verify
the new data. If the new values match, all engine ASCM functions are
restored.
Reissue 2
7−50 Original
IIDS The IIDS features 7 keys on the right side of the front face to allow
Keyboard the pilot access to the various functions/programs by paging through
the menus. The keys include:
``CLR'' (clear): Used to blank the alphanumeric display and exit all
menu functions if pressed for more than 1.5 seconds. If pressed for less
than 1.5 seconds in the Night Mode after a C/W/A event, the CLR key
resets the intensity to the previous setting.
MENU: Used to access the next higher level of the menu structure
or to enter the top level menu from display blanked and to return to
the `àction'' menu with edit fields not updated.
UP ARROW : Used to scroll between menu and submenu names,
or between data and message items. Holding this key for more than
2 seconds initiates automatic scrolling, at approximately one item per
second. When the scrolling reaches the end of the menu the scrolling
feature loops back to the start of the menu.
CLR
DN (down) ARROW: Same as the UP ARROW, except scrolls in
the opposite direction.
MENU ENT (enter): Used to enter a menu or submenu after it has been selected
with the ``'' or ``'' keys, enter an `Àction'' field within a menu selection
that is bracketed by ``< >'' to allow editing, and to advance to the next
edit digit (or field within the `Àction'' field. The digit (or field) that can
be edited will flash.
ENT ``REC'' (record): Used to initiate crew requested Data Log and to enter
into memory data that is used to initialize the TIME/DATE, ENGINE
REC PARM, and Cargo Hook CALIB CODE and FUEL CALIBRATION func
tions in the IIDS. When the key is pressed for 7 to 10 seconds, the
DISP parameter data from 45 seconds prior to and 45 seconds after key activa
tion, is stored in nonvolatile memory. The message RECORDING DATA
J1 is displayed on the alphanumeric display during this time.
``DISP'': Used to change the display from ``display by exception'' to ``con
tinuous display'' when the key is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds. In
the exception mode, the secondary display screen area is blank unless
F92−080
one of the limits is within a predetermined range of it's caution limit
value. When this happens, the digit display of the particular limit will
revert to continuous display until the parameter value drops below the
predetermined threshold. If the exceedance parameter enters caution
or warning range the appropriate caution or warning displays are illumi
nated.
When the ``DISP'' key is held for more than 1.5 seconds the IIDS performs
a BIT test and the front panel display will show all LCD segments in
a lamp test mode.
Reissue 2
Original 7−51
7−17. BALANCE MONITORING SYSTEM
NOTE: Helicopter gross weight should be at 5200 300 LBS before performing ‘‘Main
Rotor Balance’’ procedure.
Standard BMS The BMS program is an integrated vibration monitoring system which
Program calculates and displays balance solutions for both main rotor and NO
TAR fan. The intention of this integrated balance system is to eliminate
the requirement to fly dedicated tracking/balance flights.
The system is linked to three vibration sensors on the airframe and
two position pickups on the main rotor and the NOTAR fan. The stan
dard BMS program is a ``smart chart'' system. For most balancing actions
the user will simply follow the directions of the BMS Alpha-numeric
display (Ref. Figure 7-29 thru Figure 7-40). The normal sequence of
events is for the pilot to request the BMS program from the IIDS by
pressing the ``MENU'' key on the IIDS panel and paging down the menu
to BMS. The BMS system will then analyze the input from the rotor/fan
sensors and calculate a correction and display this information in the
IIDS Alpha-numeric display.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
1. IIDS
2. BMS SIGNAL PROCESSING UNIT
3. BMS SENSOR CABLE HARNESS
4. AZIMUTH SENSOR (MAG PICKUP/PHOTOCELL)
5. VIBRATION SENSOR (VELOCIMETER) F92−081
Figure 7−26. Balance Monitoring System Installation
Optional An optional item to the BMS is a Spectrum Analyzer Vibralog. The

Spectrum software for this program resides within the GBMC. Spectrum analysis
Analyzer allows downloading to the GBMC and viewing of the entire vibration
spectrum of the rotor and the NOTAR fan. The system allows the
operator to analyze vibrations, other than rotor/fan, and determine the
probable source by comparison with known component frequencies.
Reissue 2
7−52 Original
7−18. IIDS MENU STRUCTURES
TOP LEVEL
ELAPSED TIME `ÈNT'' Key resets, starts and stops timer (alternate action);
MM.SS ``CLR'' Key exits function and resets timer
TIME SUMMARY For expanded menu structure

ENT
Ref. Figure 7-28
POWER CHECK For expanded menu structure

ENT
Ref. Section V
BALANCE MONITOR For expanded menu structure

ENT
Ref. Figure 7-29 thru Figure 7-40
AIRCRAFT MONITOR For expanded menu structure

ENT
Ref. Figure 7-41 thru Figure 7-44
CLPXXX PERCENT
Continuous display of collective position
PRES ALT XXXXFT

Continuous display of altitude
DENS ALT XXXXFT
L ENG WF XXX PPH Continuous display of fuel flow

L ENG WF XXX PPH
FUEL CALIBRATION For expanded menu structure

ENT
Ref. Figure 7-45
SET ENGINE PARM For expanded menu structure

ENT
Ref. Figure 7-46
TIME/DATE For expanded menu structure

ENT
Ref. Figure 7-47
HOOK WT XXXX LBS For expanded menu structure

ENT
Ref. Section X
F92−082
Figure 7−27. IIDS Top Level Menus
Reissue 2
Original 7−53
TOP LEVEL SECOND LEVEL THIRD LEVEL

ENT
TIME SUMMARY LST FLT TIME
TOT FLT HR
TOT FLIGHTS
ENT
LFT ENGINE TIME
NOTE 1
RT ENGINE TIME GEAR BOX

TSO =
POWER MODULE
TSO=
IMPELLER CYCLE
CNT ACCUM =
CMPSR TURB CYCLE

CNT ACCUM=
POWER TURB CYCLE

CNT ACCUM=
NOTE 1: THIRD LEVEL MENU FOR RIGHT ENGINE

SAME AS FOR LEFT ENGINE
F92−083
Figure 7−28. Time Summary
Reissue 2
7−54 Original

BALANCE MONITOR MAIN ROTOR COLLECT M/R DATA FLY 100% GROUND
BALANCE RUN XX RPM XXX PRESS REC
NOTE 2
MAIN ROTOR TRACK RUN XX M/R ACQUIRING
MEASUREMENTS 100% GND LAT
NOTE 3
NOTAR MAIN ROTOR 100% GND LAT
BALANCE CONFIGURATION X.XX IPS AT YY.YY
NOTE 1
SPECTRUM MAIN ROTOR ACQUISITION
SOLUTION OPTIONS COMPLETE
BMS ADVISORY LOG DISPLAY M/R FLY HOVER IGE

SOLUTION RUN XX PRESS REC
NOTE 2
BMS FAULT LOG ACQUIRING
HOVER IGE LAT
NOTE 3
BMS VERSION LOG
HOVER IGE LAT
X.XX IPS AT YY.YY
NOTE 1
BMS MAINTENANCE
ACQUISITION FLY 120 KIAS
COMPLETE PRESS REC
NOTE 2
FLY 80 KIAS ACQUIRING
PRESS REC 120 KIAS LAT
NOTE 2
NOTE 3
ACQUIRING 120 KIAS LAT
80 KIAS LAT X.XX IPS AT YY.YY
NOTE 3
NOTE 1: WHEN COMPLETED, MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED NOTE 2
80 KIAS LAT ACQUIRING
FOR 1 SECOND 120 KIAS VERT
X.XX IPS AT YY.YY
NOTE 2: AUTOMATICALLY STEPS THROUGH ACQUIRING NOTE 2 NOTE 4
MEASUREMENTS SPECIFIED FOR THIS REGIME.
ACQUIRING 120 KIAS VERT
80 KIAS VERT X.XX IPS AT YY.YY
NOTE 3: WHEN COMPLETE, THE RESULT IS DISPLAYED
FOR 4 SECONDS AND THE DISPLAY GOES TO NOTE 3 NOTE 1
NEXT REGIME. 80 KIAS VERT ACQUISITION
NOTE 4: WHEN COMPLETE, THE RESULT IS DISPLAYED X.XX IPS AT YY.YY COMPLETE
FOR 4 SECONDS NOTE 1 NOTE 5
NOTE 5: THE DISPLAY GOES BACK TO THE FIRST ACQUISITION REDO 100% GND
REGIME WHEN THE ABOVE DATA HAS BEEN COMPLETE PRESS REC
COLLECTED

F92−084
Figure 7−29. Balance Monitor, Main Rotor Balance
Reissue 2
Original 7−55
BALANCE MONITOR MAIN ROTOR COLLECT M/R 100% GND LAT

BALANCE DATA RUN XX X.XX IPS AT YY.YY
MAIN ROTOR TRACK RUN XX M/R HOVER IGE LAT

MEASUREMENTS X.XX IPS AT YY.YY
NOTAR MAIN ROTOR 80 KIAS LAT

SPECTRUM MAIN ROTOR 80 KIAS VERT

SOLUTION OPTIONS X.XX IPS AT YY.YY
BMS ADVISORY LOG DISPLAY M/R 120 KIAS LAT

SOLUTION RUN XX X.XX IPS AT YY.YY
BMS FAULT LOG 120 KIAS VERT

X.XX IPS AT YY.YY
OR NOTE 1
BMS VERSION LOG NOT ACQUIRED
BMS MAINTENANCE
NOTE 1: COULD APPLY FOR EACH REGIME

F92−085
Figure 7−30. Balance Monitor, Run M/R Measurements
Reissue 2
7−56 Original
NOTE 1
BALANCE MONITOR MAIN ROTOR COLLECT M/R
BALANCE DATA RUN XX BLADE 1 HUB WT
<XXX> GRAMS
THROUGH NOTE 1 AND 2
MAIN ROTOR TRACK RUN XX M/R
MEASUREMENTS BLADE 5 HUB WT
<XXX> GRAMS
NOTE 1
NOTAR MAIN ROTOR
BALANCE CONFIGURATION BLADE 1 TRIM TAB
<XXX> MILS
SPECTRUM MAIN ROTOR
SOLUTION OPTIONS BLADE 5 TRIM TAB
<XXX> MILS
NOTE 1
BMS ADVISORY LOG DISPLAY M/R
SOLUTION RUN XX BLADE 1 PC WT
<XXX> GRAMS
BMS FAULT LOG
BLADE 5 PC WT
<XXX> GRAMS
BMS VERSION LOG
BMS MAINTENANCE
NOTE 1: “ENT” KEY SELECTS DIGITS TO BE EDITED,

AND KEYS INCREASE/DECREASE DIGIT VALUE,
“REC” KEY STORES SELECTED VALUES, “CLR” EXITS
OUT OF MENU TO DISPLAY BLANK.
NOTE 2: STEP THROUGH BLADES SEQUENTIALLY

F92−086
Figure 7−31. Balance Monitor, Main Rotor Configuration
Reissue 2
Original 7−57

NOTE 1
BALANCE MONITOR MAIN ROTOR COLLECT M/R
ADJUSTMENTS USED
BALANCE DATA RUN XX
<PCL/TAB/WEIGHT>
OR NOTE 2
MAIN ROTOR TRACK RUN XX M/R
<PCL/TAB>
MEASUREMENTS
OR NOTE 2
NOTAR MAIN ROTOR <PCL WEIGHT>
BALANCE CONFIGURATION
OR
SPECTRUM MAIN ROTOR <TAB/WEIGHT>
SOLUTION OPTIONS
NOTE 1
BMS ADVISORY LOG DISPLAY M/R COMPUTE
SOLUTION RUN XX <ENTIRE SOLTN>
OR NOTE 2
BMS FAULT LOG COMPUTE

<GND SOLTN ONLY>
OR NOTE 2
BMS VERSION LOG COMPUTE

<80 KIAS SOLUTION>
BMS MAINTENANCE
NOTE 1: “ENT” KEY SELECTS FIELD TO BE EDITED,

AND KEYS CHANGE FIELD SELECTION,
“REC” KEY STORES THE SELECTION, “CLR” EXITS
OUT OF MENU TO DISPLAY BLANK.
NOTE 2: OPERATOR OPTIONAL SELECTION

F92−087
Figure 7−32. Balance Monitor, Main Rotor Solution Options
Reissue 2
7−58 Original
BALANCE MONITOR MAIN ROTOR COLLECT M/R COMPUTING M/R NOTE 1

BALANCE DATA RUN XX SOLTN RUN XX.XX
MAIN ROTOR TRACK RUN XX M/R PREDICTED VIBS AUTOMATIC

MEASUREMENTS BELOW X.XX IPS
NOTAR MAIN ROTOR PCSE ADD XXX.X G

NOTE 2
BALANCE CONFIGURATION BLD X PCSE <NOT MADE>
OR
SPECTRUM MAIN ROTOR PCSE SUB XXX.X G NOTE 2

SOLUTION OPTIONS BLD X PCSE <NOT MADE>
BMS ADVISORY LOG DISPLAY M/R HUB ADD XXX.X G

NOTE 2
SOLUTION RUN XX BLD X <NOT MADE>
OR
BMS FAULT LOG HUB SUB XXX.X G NOTE 2

BLD X <NOT MADE>
BMS VERSION LOG TAB DWN XXX MILS NOTE 2

BLD X <NOT MADE>
OR
BMS MAINTENANCE TAB UP XXX MILS

NOTE 2
BLD X <NOT MADE>
PCL UP XX.X FLAT

NOTE 2
BLD X <NOT MADE>
OR
PCL DN XX.X FLAT

NOTE 2
BLD X <NOT MADE>
ENTIRE SOLTN
NOTE 3
<NOT MADE>
NOTE 1: MESSAGE FLASHING IF COMPUTING A SOLUTION
OR
NOTE 2: “ENT” KEY SELECTS FIELD TO BE EDITED, AND KEYS
GND SOLTN ONLY
CHANGE FIELD SELECTION FROM NOT MADE TO MADE, “REC” KEY STORES NOTE 4
<NOT MADE>
SELECTION, “CLR” EXITS TO BLANK DISPLAY.
NOTE 3: SELECTIONS ARE NOT MADE, ALL MADE, OR AS SELECTED OR
NOTE 4: SELECTIONS ARE ALL MADE, OR AS SELECTED
80 KIAS SOLTN
NOTE 4
<NOT MADE>
F92−088
Figure 7−33. Balance Monitor, Display M/R Solution
Reissue 2
Original 7−59
BALANCE MONITOR MAIN ROTOR

BALANCE
DEFAULT
MAIN ROTOR TRACK FLASH STROBE
BLD SPREAD <ON>
OR
NOTAR FLASH STROBE
BALANCE BLD SPREAD <OFF>
SPECTRUM
BMS ADVISORY LOG
BMS FAULT LOG
BMS VERSION LOG
BMS MAINTENANCE
F92−089
Figure 7−34. Balance Monitor, M/R Track
Reissue 2
7−60 Original
BALANCE MONITOR MAIN ROTOR COLLECT NOTAR FLY 100% GND

BALANCE RUN XX RPM XXXX PRESS REC
NOTE 1
MAIN ROTOR TRACK RUN XX NOTAR ACQUIRING

MEASUREMENTS 100% GND RADIAL
NOTE 2
NOTAR NOTAR WEIGHT 100% GND RADIAL

NOTE 3
SPECTRUM DISPLAY NOTAR ACQUISITION

SOLUTION RUN XX COMPLETE
BMS ADVISORY LOG
BMS FAULT LOG
BMS VERSION LOG
BMS MAINTENANCE
NOTE 1:AUTOMATICALLY STEPS THROUGH ACQUIRING

NOTE 2: WHEN COMPLETE, RESULT DISPLAYED FOR 4 SECONDS.
NOTE 3: WHEN COMPLETE, MESSAGE DISPLAYED FOR 1 SECOND

F92−090
Figure 7−35. Balance Monitor, NOTAR Balance
Reissue 2
Original 7−61

BALANCE
MAIN ROTOR
TRACK
NOTAR COLLECT 100% GND RADIAL

BALANCE NOTAR DATA X.XX IPS AT YY:YY
OR
SPECTRUM NOTAR NOT ACQUIRED
MEASUREMENTS
NOTE 1
BMS ADVISORY LOG STD 1 WEIGHT

<XX.X> GRAMS
NOTE 1
BMS FAULT LOG NOTAR WEIGHT STD 13 WEIGHT
CONFIGURATION <XX.X> GRAMS
NOTE 2
BMS VERSION LOG COMPUTING NOTAR

SOLTN RUN XX.XX
AUTOMATIC
BMS MAINTENANCE DISPLAY NOTAR PREDICTED VIBS

SOLUTION BELOW X.XX IPS
NOTE 3
ADD XXX GRAMS

NOTE 1: “ENT” KEY SELECTS DIGITS TO BE EDITED, STD XX <NOT MADE>
AND KEYS INCREASE/DECREASE DIGIT VALUE, OR NOTE 3
“REC” KEY STORES SELECTED VALUES, “CLR” EXITS SUB XXX GRAMS
OUT OF MENU TO DISPLAY BLANK. STD XX <NOT MADE>
NOTE 2: MESSAGE FLASHING IF COMPUTING A SOLUTION
NOTE 4
NOTE 3: “ENT” KEY SELECTS FIELD TO BE EDITED, AND KEYS
CHANGE FIELD SELECTION FROM NOT MADE TO MADE, “REC” KEY STORES NOTAR SOLUTION
SELECTION, “CLR” EXITS TO BLANK DISPLAY. <NOT MADE>
NOTE 4: SELECTIONS ARE MADE, ALL MADE OR AS SELECTED

F92−091
Figure 7−36. Balance Monitor, NOTAR Data
Reissue 2
7−62 Original
BALANCE MONITOR MAIN ROTOR FLY 100% GND

BALANCE PRESS REC
NOTE 1
MAIN ROTOR TRACK GATHERING TREND

SET XX SPC XX/XX
NOTE 2
NOTAR TREND SPECTRUM
BALANCE SET XX COMPLETE
SPECTRUM TREND SPECTRUMS FLY HOVER IGE

PRESS REC
NOTE 1
BMS FAULT LOG RANDOM SPECTRUM GATHERING TREND

PRESS REC SET XX SPC XX/XX
NOTE 1 NOTE 2
BMS VERSION LOG GATHERING RANDOM TREND SPECTRUM

NO XX SPC XX/XX SET XX COMPLETE
NOTE 2
RANDOM SPECTRUM FLY 120 KIAS

NO XX COMPLETE PRESS REC
NOTE 1
GATHERING TREND
SET XX SPC XX/XX
NOTE 2
TREND SPECTRUM
SET XX COMPLETE
NOTE 1: AUTOMATICALLY STEPS THROUGH ACQUIRING

FOR 3 SECONDS AND DISPLAY GOES BACK TO
RANDOM SPECTRUM MENU
FOR 3 SECONDS AND THE DISPLAY GOES TO THE
NEXT REGIME.

F92−092
Figure 7−37. Balance Monitor, Spectrum
Reissue 2
Original 7−63

BALANCE
MAIN ROTOR TRACK
NOTAR
BALANCE
NOTE 1
SPECTRUM BALANCE OK
OR
BMS ADVISORY LOG END OF BMS

ADVISORY LOG
BMS FAULT LOG DBASE USAGE XXX%

ADVISORIES = XX
NOTE 2
BMS VERSION LOG BMS OK
OR
BMS MAINTENANCE END OF BMS

FAULT LOG
NOTE 1: OR VIBRATION DATA

NOTE 2: OR ERROR MESSAGES

F92−093
Figure 7−38. Balance Monitor, BMS Fault Log
Reissue 2
7−64 Original
BALANCE MONITOR MAIN ROTOR BMS BOARD P/N

BALANCE XXXXX-XX
MAIN ROTOR TRACK BMSBP VER XX.XXX

P/N XXXXX-XX
NOTAR BMSBP CHECKSUM

BALANCE XXXXXXXX
SPECTRUM BMSOP VER XX.XXX

P/N XXXXX-XX
BMS ADVISORY LOG BMSOP CHECKSUM

XXXXXXXX
BMS FAULT LOG BMSBM VER XX.XXX

P/N XXXXX-XX
BMSBM CHECKSUM
BMS VERSION LOG
XXXXXXXX
MAIN ROTOR MODEL

BMS MAINTENANCE
VER XX.XXX
NOTAR MODEL
VER XX.XXX
VIB MONITOR
VER XX.XXX
SPECTRUM SETUP
VER XX.XXX

F92−094
Figure 7−39. Balance Monitor, BMS Version Log
Reissue 2
Original 7−65

NOTE 1
BALANCE MONITOR MAIN ROTOR CLEAR FAULT
BALANCE LOG
MAIN ROTOR TRACK CLEAR ADVISORY

LOG
NOTAR CLEAR SPECTRUM

BALANCE LOG
SPECTRUM CLEAR M/R

BALANCE LOG
BMS ADVISORY LOG CLEAR NOTAR

BALANCE LOG
BMS FAULT LOG CLEAR SETUP

CONFIGURATION
CLEAR ALL LOGS

BMS VERSION LOG
NOTE 2
BMS MAINTENANCE FORMAT DATABASE
AND RESET BMS
NOTE 1: FOR ALL ``CLEAR'' MENU SELECTIONS, PRESS ENT KEY AND A ``PRESS TO
CLEAR'' MESSAGE WILL BE DISPLAYED. PRESS REC KEY TO CLEAR THE LOG
AND A ``CLEARED OK PRESS ANY KEY'' MESSAGE WILL BE DISPLAYED.
PRESSING ANY KEY WILL RETURN TO THE ``CLEAR LOG MENU''.
NOTE 2: PRESS ENT KEY AND A ``PRESS TO FORMAT AND RESET'' MESSAGE WILL
BE DISPLAYED. PRESS REC KEY TO FORMAT THE DATA BASE AND A ``DBASE
FORMATTED INITIALIZING BMS'' MESSAGE WILL BE DISPLAYED. PRESSING
ANY KEY WILL RETURN TO THE ``CLEAR LOG'' MENU AFTER 30 SECONDS

F92−095
Figure 7−40. Balance Monitor, BMS Maintenance
Reissue 2
7−66 Original
ENT ENT
AIRCRAFT MONITOR EXCEEDANCE LOG EXCEED LOG XXX
L ENG TORQUE
TREND LOG DATE XX-XX-91

TIME XX:XX:XX
FAULT LOG PEAK VALUE XXX%

SEC TO PK = XX SEC
IIDS SETUP DATA LOG NO X

SEC ABV T1 = XX
SEC TO T2 = XX
SEC ABV T2 = XX
SEC TO T3 = XX
SEC ABVT3 = XX
SEC TO T4 = XX
SEC ABV T4 = XX
THE EXCEEDANCE LOG PROVIDES A ``SNAPSHOT” RECORD OF THE PARAMETER DATA AT A

PARTICULAR MOMENT IN TIME. THIS TYPE OF RECORD OCCURS WHENEVER A PARAMETER
EXCEEDANCE IS DETECTED.
NOTE: PRESSING THE MENU BUTTON WILL TAKE YOU TO THE PREVIOUS HIGHEST MENU LEVEL.
F92−096
Figure 7−41. Aircraft Monitor, Exceedance Log Menu
Reissue 2
Original 7−67
ENT
AIRCRAFT MONITOR EXCEEDANCE LOG
ENT
TREND LOG TREND LOG XX
LEFT ENGINE
FAULT LOG DATE

TIME
IIDS SETUP NP XXX%

T1 XC
TORQUE XX%
NG XX%
EGT XXXC
P0 XXXX FT
OAT XX C
PERFORM MARGIN
L PA CK NG -XX
L PA CK EGT-XX
NG COR FTR XX.X

EGT COR FTR XXX
NOTE: PRESSING THE MENU BUTTON WILL TAKE YOU TO THE PREVIOUS HIGHEST MENU LEVEL.
F92−097
Figure 7−42. Aircraft Monitor − Trend Log
Reissue 2
7−68 Original

ENT
AIRCRAFT MONITOR EXCEEDANCE LOG
TREND LOG
ENT
FAULT LOG FAULT LOG
L ENG S/N
IIDS SETUP R ENG S/N

DATE
TIME
IIDS FALT1=X XX
XX, XX
IIDS FALT XX
ACFT FALT=X
SENS FALT=X
BMS FALT=X
LEFT EEC
DSCWD1 =X XX XX
THE FAULT LOG CONTAINS DATA ASSOCIATED WITH EEC

FAULTS AND FAILURES DETECTED IN THE IIDS, BMS, OR NCFUR1=X XX
AIRCRAFT TRANSDUCERS/SENSORS. THIS LOG IS RE
NCFUR2=X XX XX
CORDED WHENEVER AN IIDS OR EEC FAULT IS DE
TECTED. STORAGE IS AVAILABLE FOR 100 FAULT LOGS.
NCFUR3=X XX
CFUR=0
RIGHT EEC RIGHT EEC MENU SAME AS

DSCWD1= LEFT EEC MENU.
NOTE: PRESSING THE MENU BUTTON WILL TAKE YOU
F92−098
TO THE PREVIOUS HIGHEST MENU LEVEL.
Figure 7−43. Aircraft Monitor, Fault Log Menu
Reissue 2
Original 7−69
AIRCRAFT MONITOR EXCEEDANCE LOG A/C NO XXXXXXXX
TREND LOG ENG INSTALL PWC

IPS INSTALLED
FAULT LOG HT/DEFOG INSTAL

ROTOR BRK INSTAL
IIDS SETUP FWD FUEL CAL XXX

AFT FUEL CAL XXX
TOP LVL SFTWR PN

XXXXXXXXXXXX
OPER SFTWR PN
XXXXXXXXXXXX
MAINT SFTWR PN BMSBM SFTWR PN

XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX
BMSOP SFTWR PN SETUP DATA ID

XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
BMSBP SFTWR PN CFG DAT MM-DD-YY

XXXXXXXXXXXX CFG TIM HR:MN:SE
F92−099
Figure 7−44. Aircraft Monitor − IIDS Setup
Reissue 2
7−70 Original

NOTE 1 NOTE 2
FUEL CALIBRATION SET CAL CODE FWD FUEL CAL<XXX>
AFT FUEL CAL <XXX>
NOTE 1
DO CALIBRATION AIRCRAFT READY?

CRUISE ATTITUDE?
NOTE 3
FWD FUEL CAL XXX

AFT FUEL CAL XXX
NOTE 1: PRESS “ENT” FOR MORE THAN 4 SECONDS TO ENTER

FUNCTION, THIRD LEVEL MENU APPEARS.
NOTE 2: “ENT” SELECTS DIGITS TO BE EDITED, AND KEYS
CHANGE SELECTED DIGITS, “REC” KEY STORES
NOTE 3: PRESS “ENT” FOR MORE THAN 4 SECONDS COMMANDS
CALIBRATION. IIDS WITH CAL CODES AFTER
CALIBRATION COMPLETE. “REC” CHANGES CODE TO
CALCULATED VALUE. PRESS ``MENU'' TWICE TO
RETURN TO TOP LEVEL
NOTE: TO MOVE HORIZONTALLY ( → ) TO THE NEXT LOWER LEVEL - PRESS ENT

F92−100
Figure 7−45. Fuel Calibration
Reissue 2
Original 7−71
TOP LEVEL SECOND LEVEL

NOTE 1
SET ENGINE PARM LNG COR FCTR <XX.X>

LEGT CORFCT <XX.X>
NOTE 1
RNG COR FCTR <XX.X>
REGT CORFCT <XX.X> NOTE 1: “ENT” SELECTS DIGITS TO BE EDITED, AND KEYS
CHANGE SELECTED DIGITS, “REC” KEY STORES

F92−101
Figure 7−46. Set Engine Parameters

NOTE 1
SET TIME/DATE TIME <HH:MM>

DATE MM-DD-YY
NOTE 1.: `ÈNT'' KEY SELECTS FIELD TO BE SET (MINUTE,
HOURS, DAY, MONTH, YEAR) AND SELECTED FIELD
BLINKS, AND KEYS INCREMENT/DEINCRE
MENT DIGIT VALUE, ``REC'' KEY CHANGES TIME
NOTE: TO RETURN TO PREVIOUS HIGHER LEVEL - PRESS MENU AND DATE TO SELECTED VALUES
F92−102
Figure 7−47. Set Time/Date
Reissue 2
7−72 Original
MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E) Handling Servicing
and Maintenance
S E C T I O N VIII
HANDLING, SERVICING
AND MAINTENANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH PAGE
8-1. Hoisting, Lifting, and Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8-2. Towing and Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Figure 8-1. Helicopter Towing and Ground Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-3. Parking and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Figure 8-2. Helicopter Tiedowns and Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Figure 8-3. Helicopter Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-4. Access and Inspection Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Figure 8-4. Access Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Figure 8-5. Nose Access Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Figure 8-6. Left Side Access Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Figure 8-7. Right Side Access Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Figure 8-8. Top View Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Figure 8-9. Bottom View Access Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Figure 8-10. Stabilizers Access Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Figure 8-11. Cabin Floor Interior Access Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Figure 8-12. Pedestal Access Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Figure 8-13. Fan Assembly Access Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8-5. Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Figure 8-14. Servicing Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Table 8-1. Acceptable Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Table 8-2. Servicing Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Figure 8-15. Fuel System Gravity Filler Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Figure 8-16. Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Figure 8-17. Main Transmission Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Figure 8-18. Rotor Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Figure 8-19. Engine Oil System - Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
8-6. Aircraft Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
8-7. Cockpit Door Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Reissue 2
Original 8−i
Handling Servicing
and Maintenance
PARAGRAPH PAGE
Figure 8-20. Cockpit Door Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
8-8. Cabin Seats: Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Figure 8-21. Cabin Passenger Seat Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
8-9. Copilot Flight controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Figure 8-22. Copilot Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
8-10. Engine Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Figure 8-23. EGT Vs Time - All Conditions Except Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Figure 8-24. EGT Vs Time - Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Figure 8-25. Power Turbine (NP) Speed Vs Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Figure 8-26. Compressor Turbine (NG) Speed Vs Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Figure 8-27. Engine Overtorque Limits - All Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
8-11. Special Operational Checks and Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Engine NP Overspeed Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Engine Out/Low Rotor Warning Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Hydraulic System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
VSCS Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Wet Engine Motoring Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Dry Engine Motoring Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Engine Wash procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Figure 8-28. Engine Wash Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Manual Engine Shutdown Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Manual Engine Start Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Autorotation RPM Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Battery Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Resetting IIDS Time/Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Figure 8-29. Set Time/Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Reissue 2
8−ii Revision 1
and Maintenance
SECTION VIII
HANDLING, SERVICING, AND
MAINTENANCE
8−1. HOISTING, LIFTING, AND JACKING
Hoisting, lifting, and jacking of the helicopter shall only be

CAUTION performed with the proper equipment and tools as specified in the
MD900 Rotorcraft Maintenance Manual. Failure to follow the
specified procedures will result in damage to aircraft components.
8−2. TOWING AND MOVING
Moving the helicopter on prepared surfaces is accomplished by mounting ground

handling wheels to fittings located on the landing gear skid tubes.
The ground handling wheel set is used for moving the MD Explorer by hand and
for towing. The wheels are manually lowered with a detachable jack handle, and
are held in the down position by a mechanical lock. The ground handling wheel
set is equipped with a tow bar attach fitting.
Helicopter Manual Moving:
Ensure all stress panels listed in Figure 8-11 are installed.
Airframe structure damage can occur if stress panels are not in

CAUTION place before moving helicopter.
NOTE: The wheel set attaches at four points, two inboard and two outboard, on the skid
assemblies.
A ``T” handle is strapped to the skid tubes and extends out, to pull the wheels
to and from the helicopter.
Position wheel set over skid tubes and roll wheel set forward.
NOTE: The wheel set can be installed in either direction, depending on jack handle
position.
Attach wheel set to attach points on skid tubes.
Hold tail up while lowering ground handling wheels.
Reissue 2
Original 8−1
Handling Servicing MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E)
and Maintenance
Jack hydraulic ram which forces wheels down and skids up.
When the jack is extended, a mechanical safety latch automatically snaps into
position, to prevent the wheels from going up in the event of loss of hydraulic
pressure.
Operators and maintenance personnel should avoid lead−lag loads

CAUTION in excess of 25 lb (11 kg) at the tip of the main rotor blades.
Excessive lead-lag load applied to the main rotor blades during ground handling
can result in damage to the damper assembly.
Manually move helicopter on ground handling wheel set by balancing tailboom
and pushing on rear fuselage portion of airframe.
When ground handling helicopter do not lift main rotor blades to

CAUTION clear objects. The main rotor should be rotated to clear objects.
To prevent rotor component damage, the main rotor hub deflection
for a non−operating rotor is not to exceed four feet up, maximum.
Measurement to be taken from static rest.
Helicopter Towing
The towbar is equipped with caster wheels and is designed for use with the
ground handling wheels and allows the helicopter to be moved by one person.
The towbar does not interfere with equipment that may be hung under the heli
copter

Raise helicopter up with wheel set.

Position caster wheels, to straddle, over front skid tubes.
Attach nylon strap under skid tubes and ratchet skid tubes into rubber cups.
Attach tow bar to a power unit.
Do not tow helicopter at speeds over 5 mph.

CAUTION When ground handling helicopter do not lift main rotor blades to
clear objects. The main rotor should be rotated to clear objects.
Reissue 2
8−2 Original
and Maintenance
Avoid sudden stops and starts.

Avoid short turns, which could cause helicopter to turn over.
CAUTION A safe minimum turning radius is approximately 20 feet (6.1m).
Allow inside wheel to turn (not pivot) while helicopter is being turned.
Helicopter Transport
The heli-porter is designed for the MD Explorer with the use of a towing tractor
or vehicle.
The heli-porter is a welded tubular steel frame with dual pneumatic swivel
caster on the front and rear. The platform is a grated walkway with hold down
safety straps for the landing gear. The heli-porter has a hand brake to the rear
tires and has a 10,000 lb (4540 Kg) capacity.

Land or hoist helicopter (Ref. RMM, Section 07-10-00) on heli-porter platform.

Attach safety hold-down straps to skid tubes.
Release heli-porter hand brake.
When ground handling helicopter do not lift main rotor blades to

CAUTION clear objects. The main rotor should be rotated to clear objects.
Do not tow helicopter at speeds over 5 mph. A safe minimum turning

CAUTION radius is approximately 20 feet (6.1m).
Attach heli-porter hook-up to a tow vehicle.
Reissue 2
Original 8−3
and Maintenance
TOW BAR
GROUND
HANDLING
VIEW ROTATED ATTACH POINTS
HELI-PORTER
SKID TUBE
F92−103
Figure 8−1. Helicopter Towing and Ground Handling
8−3. PARKING AND STORAGE
Helicopter tiedowns and covers

Covers and tiedowns (Ref. Figure 8-2) are provided to shield the MD Explorer
from inclement weather conditions and other outside environmental factors that
could cause FOD damage while the helicopter is parked, moored, or while in
storage.
NOTE: The decision to use protective covers and tiedowns is determined by the
prevailing weather conditions, length of storage/parking, and location.
Forward and aft tiedowns
Each tiedown (Ref. Figure 8-2) has a quick connect fitting with a streamer
attached ``REMOVE BEFORE FLIGHT”. Two aft tiedown straps are to
be attached to the upper aft fitting. Two separate upper forward tiedowns
attach to the forward fuselage. Additional lower fore and aft tiedown attach
points are located on left and right side of helicopter.
Blade tiedowns
Blade tiedowns (Ref. Figure 8-2) are socks, which fit over the blade tip, with
or without the blade covers installed.
Each blade tiedown is fitted with a generous length of rope which can be
tied down at any convenient spot.
Upper deck cover
The upper deck cover (Ref. Figure 8-2), encloses the NOTAR inlet, particle
separator inlets and exhaust stacks.
Reissue 2
8−4 Original
and Maintenance
Attach cover, at forward corners to snap-head screws placed in existing screw

holes on lower edge of particle separator inlet.
Attach cover, at rear corners with similar snaps, or with a strap going under
neath the tailboom where it meets the fuselage.
NOTAR boom cover
The boom cover (Ref. Figure 8-2) is a tubular cover made of nylon. Attach
boom cover to thruster using side-release buckles.
NOTAR thruster cover
The MD Explorer thruster cover (Ref. Figure 8-2) encloses the thruster cone
and chokes tightly around the base near the trailing edge of the horizontal
stabilizor.
Position cover on thruster.
Tighten cover with strap assembly.
Pitot tube cover
The pitot cover (Ref. Figure 8-2) is vinyl and reinforced with galvanized steel
staples at stress points.
A bright red warning streamer, ``REMOVE BEFORE FLIGHT” attaches
to the bottom edge of the cover
Attach pitot cover around pitot base.
Bubble cover
The MD Explorer bubble cover (Ref. Figure 8-2), encloses the entire canopy,
including the windshield, front and rear doors and windows.
The cover, attaches at four points.
The cover, is color-coded, with swatches sewn in the corners, for ease of instal
lation. Red = Left, Green = Right.
Attach upper rear corners to snap-head screws placed in existing screw holes
on lower edge of particle separator inlet.
Attach straps at lower rear corners to rear struts.
Tighten special rope in top and bottom hems, to insure a guarantee against
wind chaffing.
A large bright red pocket is sewn in the cover, for the temperature probe.
Reissue 2
Original 8−5
and Maintenance
FORWARD UPPER TIEDOWN AFT UPPER TIEDOWN
FORWARD LOWER TIEDOWN

(IF INSTALLED)
AFT LOWER TIEDOWN

(IF INSTALLED)
BLADE TIEDOWN
PITOT TUBE COVER
ROTOR HUB COVER

THRUSTER COVER
ENGINE AREA COVER
UPPER DECK COVER
BOOM COVER
BLADE COVER
BUBBLE COVER
F92−104A
Figure 8−2. Helicopter Tiedowns and Covers
Reissue 2
8−6 Original
and Maintenance
Rotor hub cover

The MD Explorer rotor hub cover (Ref. Figure 8-2) overlaps with the blade
covers and the engine area cover to insure complete protection for the entire
main rotor system.
Position cover over top of rotor hub.
Attach cover with buckles under each blade.
Tuck lower part of cover into the aperture beneath the rotor.
Engine area cover
The engine area cover is similar and does the same job as the upper deck
cover, except that it also encloses the fan inlet.
Blade covers - standard
Blade covers (Ref. Figure 8-2) can be installed from the ground.
Tighten covers at blade root with attached straps and buckles.
The small opening at the blade tip bottom allows attachment of tiedown ropes.
Blade covers - cold weather
The MD Explorer cold weather blade covers are similar to the standard blade
covers, but are fitted with full length zippers and heater hose boots near
the blade root.
Helicopter Parking
The decision to use protective covers and tiedowns is determined by the prevailing
weather conditions, length of parking, and location.
Normal Conditions
NOTE: Tie down rotor blade(s) whenever helicopter is parked in an area subject to
turbulent or gusting winds to prevent rotor windmilling. The maximum blade tie
down load is when the blade tip just begins to deflect downward.
Install pitot cover.
Close and secure all doors, windows and access panels.
Statically ground helicopter if possible.
Turbulent/Gusting Wind Conditions
Tie down all blades in winds of 45 knots or more to prevent

CAUTION excessive flapping and possible flexbeam damage.
NOTE: Maximum demonstrated wind speed for starting and stopping the rotor is 50
knots.
Reissue 2
Original 8−7
and Maintenance
If possible, park helicopter into the prevailing wind and secure in accordance
with normal parking conditions.
Statically ground helicopter (Ref. Figure 8-3).
GROUNDING JACK
(2 LOCATIONS)
CABLE PLUG
F92−105
Figure 8−3. Helicopter Grounding

Helicopter Storage
Install protective covers as necessary (Ref. Figure 8-2) to prevent entry of blowing
dust, water, freezing rain, snow and/or foreign objects into the helicopter during
ground storage.
Maintain full fuel cell to reduce condensation in the cell.
Ensure drain holes are free of debris and kept open during storage period.
Store helicopter in hangar, if space allows.
Statically ground helicopter (Ref. Figure 8-3).
Flyable Storage
Flyable storage will maintain a stored MD Explorer in an operable condition.
If daily use is impractical, the following procedures will keep the helicopter
in flyable condition. At regular intervals inspect helicopter. Date and type
of storage must be recorded in helicopter records.
Perform engine run-up, at least once every five days.
Perform pre-flight inspection, at least once every seven days.
Inspect helicopter and treat for corrosion control.
Inspect static ground wires, blade tiedowns and mooring devices at regular
intervals.
Inspect tiedowns immediately after winds exceeding 35 knots.
Enter type of storage and date helicopter was placed in storage, in helicopter
records.
Reissue 2
8−8 Original
and Maintenance
High Wind Conditions - Helicopter Mooring

When severe storm conditions or wind velocities higher than 40 knots are forecast,
helicopter should be hangared or evacuated to a safe area. If the helicopter must
be parked in the open during high winds, comply with the following.
Structural damage can occur from flying objects during high wind
CAUTION conditions. Helicopter should be hangared or evacuated to a safe
weather area when wind conditions above 75 knots are expected.
If a paved ramp with tiedown rings are available, park helicopter headed in
direction from which highest forecast winds are expected.
Secure helicopter to ramp tiedowns using forward and aft tiedowns (Ref.
Figure 8-2).
If a paved ramp with tiedown rings are not available, park helicopter on an
unpaved parking area, headed in the direction from which highest forecast winds
are expected.
Install blade tiedowns.
Tiedown rotor blades, whenever helicopter is parked, to prevent

CAUTION rotor damage from blade flapping as a result of air turbulence from
other aircraft or wind gusts. The maximum blade tie down load
is when the blade tip just begins to deflect downward.
Install engine area cover (Ref. Figure 8-2), and pitot cover.
Fill fuel cell, if possible.
After winds subside, inspect helicopter carefully for damage which may have
been inflicted by flying objects.
Return to service
Flyable Storage Depreservation and Activation
Remove protective covers and tiedowns.
Clean helicopter as necessary.
Open all doors and ventilate helicopter.
Record date helicopter was prepared for service in helicopter records.
Remove static ground wire installed for storage.
Perform preflight checks.
Reissue 2
Original 8−9
and Maintenance
8−4. ACCESS AND INSPECTION PROVISIONS
Various doors, covers, panels, and fairings are located through out the airframe
to provide access for inspection, maintenance, and servicing. External and internal
doors, covers, panels and fairings are shown in Figure 8-5 thru Figure 8-13. Each
door, cover, panel, and fairing has a letter and a number designator. Each figure
is directly related to a corresponding table which lists a reference designator, panel
name, accessible item, access method and fastener type.
Reference Designator:
The number indicates the nearest attaching fuselage station.
The letter indicates the location:
(N) Nose
(L) Left Side
(R) Right Side
(T) Top Side
(B) Bottom Side
(A) Cabin Floor (interior access)
(S) Stabilizer
(P) Pedestal (interior)
(F) Fan Assembly (interior)
A combination of two letters may be used to help identify a door, cover, panel
or fairing:
(FR) floor right
(FL) floor left
L and R will indicate doors, panels, and covers at the same station location:
F(L/R)160.0.
Removal and Installation Methods:
Removal or installation of doors, covers, panels, and fairings are described by
a method listed in a table with a supporting illustration. The type of fastener
and quantity used to remove or secure the door, cover, panel, and fairing is listed.
Reissue 2
8−10 Original
and Maintenance
KEYLOC CAMLOC LATCH HINGE

LOCKED UNLOCKED
1/4
TURN
UNLOCK- UNLOCK- PUSH HERE

COUNTERCLOCKWISE COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATES 180° TO UNLOCK
LOCK-CLOCKWISE LOCK-CLOCKWISE TO UNLOCK
CAMLOC LATCH SLEEVE BOLT

UNLOCKED LOCKED LOCKED UNLOCKED
1/4
TURN
PUSH TO
UNLOCK PUSH TO
LOCK
LEVER ACTION HANDLE HINGE PIN PIN SCREW CAMLOC
PULL TO RELEASE
DOOR PINS
BOLT
LATCH
UNLOCK-ONE ACTION LOCK-TWO ACTIONS
1 PUSH
HOOK-1
PULL
2 PULL
LIFT PUSH-2
TURN AND LOCK STRUT CAMLOC

LOCKED CLOSED UNLOCKED
PULL OFF
HERE
LIFT
HERE
9G06-008
F92-106
Figure 8−4. Access Methods
Reissue 2
Original 8−11
and Maintenance
N80
N82
N106
9G06-001
F92-107
Removal and Installation

Item Method
Name Permits Access To
No. Quantity Type Ref.
Figure 8−4
N80 Nose Door Pitot − Static System, Battery 2 Latch B
1 Keyloc A
N82 Panel Landing Light, Flight Control Rods 18 Screw L
Avionics Cooling Fan, Wire Harness,
External Power Box
N106 Panel 30 Screw L
Figure 8−5. Nose Access Panels
Reissue 2
8−12 Original
and Maintenance
L220 L260
L270
L155 L210
L262
L166
L109 L240
L107 F927-092

Item Method
No. Quantity Type Ref
Figure 8−4
L107 Crew Door Copilot Instrument Panel, Pedestal Console 1 Lever Action Handle H
1 Hinge Pin / Pin J, K
1 Strut End T
L109 Access Panel Assembly Electrical, Avionics, Flight Controls, 1 Keyloc A
Avionics, LH Static System Drain Valve 14 Camloc B
L155 Forward Access Door Main Transmission Access, Flight 5 Camloc E
Assembly, LH Control Actuators, Hydraulic Hand 2 Hinge D
Pump, System 1 Hydraulic Manifold/
Reservoir
L166 Passenger Door, LH Passenger and Cargo Compartment 1 Lever Action Handle H
L210 Transmission Access Main Transmission Access, Engine 2 Hinge D
Door Assembly, LH Reduction Gearbox Housing 5 Camloc E
UPPER W/ NACA
INLET
L210 Transmission Access Main Transmission Access, Engine 7 Camloc E
Door Assembly, LH Reduction Gearbox Housing
LOWER W/ NACA
INLET
L220 Engine Air Inlet Panel Inlet, Engine Compressor 25 Fastener Sleeve Bolt G
Assembly, LH
L240 GPU/EPR Door (AFT) Auxiliary / External Power Recep- 1 Camloc E
tacle
260 Engine Cowling Assem- Engine, Engine Controls 10 Fastener Sleeve Bolt G
bly, LH
L262 Baggage Compartment Baggage Compartment, 1 Lever Action Handle H
Door behind trim panels; Engine EEC’s,
Wire Harness, Drain Lines, Electrical
Load Center, Engine Fire Extinguish-
ing Bottles (optional)
L270 Exhaust Ejector Cowl Engine Exhaust 18 Machine Screw L
Assembly, LH
Figure 8−6. Left Side Access Panels
Reissue 2
Original 8−13
and Maintenance
R260 R220 R210
R270
R155
R107
R166
R185 R109 9G06-003

R158 R128 F92-109

Item Method
Figure 8−4
R107 Crew Door Pilot Instrument Panel, Pedestal Consol 1 Lever Action Handle H
1 Pin Assembly J, K
1 Strut T
R109 APU/EPR Door Auxiliary / External Power Recep- 1 Camloc E
tacle
R128 Avionics Access Panel Electrical, Avionics, Flight Controls, 1 Key Loc A
ECS Bleed Air Lines, Static System 14 Camloc B
Drain Valve
R155 Forward Access Door Main Transmission Access, Flight 5 Camloc E
Assembly, RH Control Actuators, System 2 2 Hinge D
Hydraulic Manifold/Reservoir
R158 Fuel Cap and Adapter Fuel Filler Neck 1 Turn and Lock S
R166 Passenger Door, RH Passenger and Cargo Compart- 1 Lever Action Handle H
ment 1 Release Pin R
R185 Fuel Drain Access Panel Fuel Sump Drain Control, Cables 1 Camloc N
Assembly
R210 Transmission Access Main Transmission Access, 2 Hinge D
Door Assembly, RH Engine Reduction Gearbox 5 Camloc E
UPPER W/ NACA INLET Housing
R210 Transmission Access Main Transmission Access, 7 Camloc E
Door Assembly, RH Engine Reduction Gearbox
LOWER W/ NACA Housing
INLET
R220 Engine Air Inlet Panel Inlet, Engine Compressor Section 25 Sleeve Bolt G
Assembly, RH
R260 Engine Cowl Engine, Engine Controls 11 Sleeve Bolt G
Assembly, RH
R270 Exhaust Ejector Cowl Engine Exhaust 19 Machine Screw L
Assembly, RH
Figure 8−7. Right Side Access Panels
Reissue 2
8−14 Original
and Maintenance
T292
TR218
T240
T155 T220 TL218
9G06-009
F92-110

Item Method
Figure 8−4
T155 Forward Fairing As- Hydraulic Servo Actuators, 19 Screw L
sembly Swashplate Swashplate, Mixer 4 Bolt M
TL118 Oil Dipstick Hand Engine Oil Level and Filler 1 Hinge Q
Hold, LH 2 Camlock E
TR118 Oil Dipstick Hand Engine Oil Level and Filler 1 Hinge Q
Hold, RH 2 Camlock E
T220 Aft Fairing Assembly Mast Support, Transmission, 58 Screw L
Swashplate Flight Controls, ECS, Engine 4 Bolt M
Oil Level and Filler
T240 Upper Inlet Duct As- Fan driveshaft, air inlet to fan 19 Screw L
sembly 24 Bolt M
T292 Upper Tailboom Fair- Required Panel Removal T240, 7 Screw L
ing Assembly L270 and R270
Figure 8−8. Top View Access Panel
Reissue 2
Original 8−15
and Maintenance
B178
B142
B230
9G06-005
F92-111

Item
Name Permits Access To Method Ref
No. Quantity Type
Figure 8−4
B142 Access Panel Assem- Throttle Interconnect Cable, RH 14 Screw L
bly Center Collective
B178 Access Panel Assem- Fuel Sump Drain Valves 22 Screw L
bly Sump
B230 Aft Crosstube Cover Landing Gear Crosstube Aft 30 Screw L
Assembly
Figure 8−9. Bottom View Access Panels
Reissue 2
8−16 Original
and Maintenance
S6
SR5
SR7 SL5
SL7
SR3 S4
SR1
SL1 S2 SL3
9G06-004
F92-112

Item Method
Figure 8−4
S2 Lower Tailboom/ Horizontal Stabilizer Mount Fitting 22 Screw L
Thruster Fairing Stationary Thruster Mounting
Assembly
S4 Thruster End Cover Attachment Bolts For Rotating 8 Screw L
Thruster
S6 Leading Edge Cover 10 Screw L
Center
SL1 Upper Tailboom/ Horizontal Stabilizer Mount Fitting 21 Screw L
Thruster Fairing As- Stationary Thruster Mounting
sembly, Left Side
SL3 Outboard Fairing As- Vertical Stab Torque Tube, Control 14 Screw L
sembly, LH (Endplate) Rod Electrical Wiring, Position Light
SL5 Center Access Cover, Wiring 10 Screw L
LH (Horizontal Stabi-
lizer)
SR1 Upper Tailboom/ Horizontal Stabilizer Mount Fitting 21 Screw L
Thruster Fairing Stationary Thruster Mounting
Assembly Right Side
SR3 Outboard Fairing As- Vertical Stab Torque Tube, Control 14 Screw L
sembly, RH (Endplate) Rod Electrical Wiring, Position Light
SR5 Center Access Cover Wiring 10 Screw L
(Horizontal Stabilizer)
SR11 Access Cover RH VSCS Actuator 10 Screw L
SL11 Access Cover LH VSCS Actuator 10 Screw L
Figure 8−10. Stabilizers Access Panels
Reissue 2
Original 8−17
and Maintenance
AR138 AR155 AR165 AR230 AR250
AR129
A235
AL138
AL230
AL129
AL155
A160 AL165 A170 A217 AL250
NOTE: ALL PANELS ARE STRESS PANELS. 9G06-010
F92-113

Item
Name Permits Access To Method Ref
No. Quantity Type
Figure 8−4
A160 Cabin Floor Forward Fuel Cell 69 Screw L
Panel Assembly
A170 Cabin Floor Center Fuel Cell 89 Screw L
Panel Assembly
A217 Cabin Floor Aft Panel Fuel Cell Aft Vent Rollover Valves 75 Screw L
Assembly
A235 Baggage Floor Center Condenser Fans, Condenser 64 Screw L
Panel
AL129 Cockpit Outboard Left LH Collective Stick Socket, Wire Harness, LH 30 Screw L
Floor Panel Static Port 1 Bolt M
AL138 Cockpit Floor Left Flight Control Tubes, Cyclic Bellcrank 24 Screw L
Access Panel 1 Bolt M
AL155 Cabin Floor Left For- Left Forward Fuel Vent Valve, Fuel Cell 12 Screw L
ward Access Cover
AL165 Cabin Floor Left Out- Fuel Cell Frangible Valve, Wire Harness 76 Screw L
board Panel
AL230 Cabin Floor Left Aft Ac- Left Aft Fuel Vent Valve, Fuel Cell 13 Screw L
cess Cover
AL250 Baggage Floor Left Fuel Tee Fittings, Fuel Pressure Switch Drain 25 Screw L
Outboard Panel Tubing, Fuel Hose Shrouds, Fuel Catch Can 4 Bolt M
AR129 Cockpit Outboard Right Fire Overheat Bleed Air Leak Control, Wire 34 Screw L
Floor Panel Harness, RH Static Port 1 Bolt M
AR138 Cockpit Floor Right Flight Control Tubes, Bellcranks, Throttle 35 Screw L
Access Panel Cables
AR155 Cabin Floor Right For- Right Forward Fuel Vent Valve, Fuel Cell 12 Screw L
ward Access Cover
AR165 Cabin Floor Right Out- Fuel Cell Frangible Valve, Heat/Defog Bleed 76 Screw L
board Panel Air Line, Fire Overheat Bleed Air Leak Detec-
tor
AR230 Cabin Floor Right Aft Right Aft Fuel Vent Valve, Fuel Cell 13 Screw L
Access Cover
AR250 Baggage Floor Right Fuel Hose Shrouds, ECS Tubing, Strobe 25 Screw L
Outboard Panel Power Supply, 4 Bolt M
Figure 8−11. Cabin Floor Interior Access Panels
Reissue 2
8−18 Original
and Maintenance
PR120
PL120 9G06-012
F92-114

Item Method
Figure 8−4
PL120 Panel Wire Harness, Forward Interconnect 9 Camloc U
Panel (Relays), Ground Modules
PR120 Panel Wire Harness, Forward Interconnect 9 Camloc U
Panel (TB2, TB3,TB4)
Figure 8−12. Pedestal Access Panels
Reissue 2
Original 8−19
and Maintenance
F4
F5
F3 REF. STATOR
F6
F7
F9
REF. FAN SUPPORT AND
HOUSING
F8
F1 F2
9G06-013
F92-115

Item Method
Figure 8−4
F1 Anti−Torque Drive Shaft Fan Drive Shaft 6 Screw L
Cover
F2 Anti−Torque Lower Inlet Plenum Fan Assembly 19 Screw L
Duct Assembly 14 Bolt M
F3 Anti−Torque Fan Fair- Fan Assembly, Fan Driveshaft Cou- 19 Screw L
ing/Center Body Assem- pling, Support Housing, Fan Balance
bly Monitor System Magnetic Pickup and
Accelerometer
F4 Anti−Torque Middle Inlet Fan Assembly Plenum air Inlet 4 Screw L
Duct Assembly 19 Bolt M
F5 Anti−Torque Fan Upper Plenum Air Inlet, Upper Stator Blades 24 Screw L
Duct Assembly attached
F6 Upper Center Diffuser Upper Stator Blades attached 24 Screw L
F7 Lower Center Diffuser Fan Assembly and Diverter, Lower 20 Screw L
Stator Blades attached
F8 Lower Access Panel As- Diverter 4 Latch P
sembly
F9 Anti−Torque Fan Lower Fan Assembly and Diverter, Fan 18 Screw L
Duct Assembly Control Linkage
Figure 8−13. Fan Assembly Access Panels
Reissue 2
8−20 Original
and Maintenance
8−5. SERVICING
General
Servicing includes replenishment of fuel, changing or replenishment of oil, and
other such maintenance functions (Ref. RMM, Section 12-00-00).
The locations of servicing points are shown in Figure 8-14.
Engine, transmission and hydraulic servicing materials and capacities are shown
in Table 8-2. A complete listing of servicing materials may be found in the RMM,
Section 12-00-00.
7
8
1
2
9 6
F927-059
3
1 ECS − AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM OIL 6 TRANSMISSION & DRIVE SYSTEM − MAIN TRANSMIS-
2 ECS − COMPRESSOR REDUCTION GEARBOX OIL SION LUBRICATING OIL
3 FUEL SYSTEM − FUEL 7 POWERPLANT − ENGINE LUBRICATING OIL
4 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM − MANIFOLD/RESERVOIR HY- 8 POWERPLANT − ENGINE WASH SOLUTION
DRAULIC FLUID 9 ROTOR BRAKE − HYDRAULIC FLUID
5 LANDING GEAR − DAMPER FLUID
Figure 8−14. Servicing Points
Reissue 2
Original 8−21
and Maintenance
Capacities - Fuel System:

JET A: 1097 lb; 498 kg; 161.3 U.S. gal; 611L total capacity
1078 lbs; 158.5 U.S. gal; 600L useable
JET B: 1048 lb; 476 kg; 161.3 U.S. gal; 611L total capacity
1030 lbs; 158.5 U.S. gal; 600L useable
Table 8−1. Acceptable Fuels
NOTE: For additional information on fuels, refer to Pratt and Whitney 207E Maintenance
Manual
SPECIFICATION
FUEL TYPE USA CANADA UK FRENCH NATO PRC
Kerosene: AVTUR
Jet A, A-1, A-2** ASTM D1655 CGSB DERD 2453* F-34 RP-3
JP8* MIL-T-83133 3.23-M86 DERD 2494* AIR 3405D F-35
Wide Cut: AVTAG
Jet B ASTM D1655 CGSB DERD 2454*
JP4* MIL-T-5624 3.22-M86 DERD 2486* AIR 3407B F-40
AVCAT
High Flash: CGSB DERD 2452* F-43
JP5* MIL-T-5624 3.GP-24Ma DERD 2498* AIR 3404C F-44
* Contains fuel system icing inhibitor (FSII). For JP-8, MIL-T-83133C allows two grades. The grade meeting NATO code F-34 has FSII
while the grade meeting code F-35 has no FSII without prior agreement.
** For Jet A-2 conforming to CAN/CGSB 3.23-M86 is acceptable for use, provided the restrictions regarding flash and freezing points are
strictly observed.
Table 8−2. Servicing Materials
Specification Material Manufacturer

1. Engine - Total Capacity 1.34 U.S. Gal (1.12 Imp Gal; 5.12 L)
NOTE: The mixing of different oil brands is not approved.
MIL-PRF-23699 AeroShell Turbine Oil 500 Shell Oil Co.
50 W. 50th St
New York, NY 10020
Shell Canada Products Ltd.

1500 Don Mills Road
Don Mills, Ontario
Canada M3B 3K4
Reissue 2
8−22 Original
and Maintenance
MIL-PRF-23699 Castrol 5000 Castrol Canada, Inc.

3660 Lakeshore Blvd. West
Toronto, Ontario
Canada M8W 1P2
Castrol Specialty Products Div.

16715 Von Karman Ave.
Suite 230
Irvine, CA 92714-4918
Castrol (U.K.) Ltd.

Burmah House
Pipers Way
Swindon, Berkshire
SN3 1RE England
Exxon Turbo Oil 2380 Exxon International Co.

Exxon Turbo Oil 2525 200 Park Avenue
Florham Park, NJ 07932-1002
Esso Petroleum Canada

55 St. Clair Avenue West
Toronto, Ontario
Canada M5W 2J8
Exxon Co.
P.O. Box 2180
Houston, TX 77001
Mobil Jet Oil II Mobil Oil Corp.

International Aviation Division
150n East 42nd Street
New York, NY 10017, USA
Mobil Oil Corp.

Aviation and Government Sales
3225 Gallows Road
Fairfax, VA 22037
Esso Petroleum Canada

55 St. Clair Avenue West
Toronto, Ontario
Canada M5W 2J8
Reissue 2
Original 8−23
and Maintenance

MIL-PRF-23699 Royco Turbine Oil 500 Royal Lubricants Co. Inc.
P.O. Box 518
Hanover, NJ 07936
Turbonycoil 525-2A Nyco S.A.
66Ave. Des Champs Elysee
Paris, France 75008
2. Main Transmission - Total Capacity 10.0 Quarts, 9.5 L
NOTE: Observe servicing instruction placard located on transmission oil filler.
Transmissions P/N 900D1400004-101 and 900D1400005-101:
MIL-PRF-23699 See item 1. Engine
Mobil Jet Oil 254
Transmission P/N 900D1400006-101:
Mobil AGL
NOTE: Do not use MobilSHC626lubricationoil designatedas
“NOTFORAVIATIONUSE"onthelabel. Refer to SB900-118.
3. Hydraulic System
MIL-PRF-83282
4. Rotor Brake
MIL-PRF-83282
Fuel system:
Fuel System Servicing Precautions
Only qualified authorized personnel may fuel the helicopter.
Static producing clothing shall not be worn.
Open flames and smoking are not permitted in refueling area.
Refueling vehicle should be parked a minimum of 20 feet from helicopter
during fueling operation.
At least one fully-charged 50 pound CO2 fire extinguisher shall be in the
immediate area.
Before starting fueling operation ground helicopter if possible.
Service fuel cell slowly.
Reissue 2
8−24 Revision 1
and Maintenance
Fuel system filling
NOTE: With the fuel system ‘‘topped off’’, the fuel quantity indication will not display
actual fuel weight. The pilot must visually determine fuel quantity by removing
the fuel cap and noting fuel level on the inside of filler neck (Ref. Figure 8−15).
Fuel helicopter with correct fuel as soon as possible after landing to prevent
moisture condensation.
Keep fuel nozzle free of all foreign matter.
Always ground fueling nozzle or fuel truck to GROUND HERE receptacle
or to another bare metal location before removing service cap.
Remove the filler cap and secure the lanyard in the slot provided in the filler
cap adapter.
NOTE: The lanyard must be secured properly in order to assure that the gravity filler port
check valve fully opens.
CAUTION Do not attempt to refuel helicopter if the lanyard has broken.
Service fuel cell slowly.

Secure filler cap after fueling.
Remove fuel nozzle and ground(s) from helicopter.
FUEL QUANTITY MARKS
146 - GAL
152 - GAL
156 - GAL
FUEL CAP LANYARD
FUEL SYSTEM FILLER PORT
F92−117
Figure 8−15. Fuel System Gravity Filler Port
Reissue 2
Original 8−25
and Maintenance
Hydraulic System:
NOTE: The hydraulic system may be serviced by using either the optional hydraulic
system hand pump or a hydraulic mule. For servicing the system using the mule,
refer to the RMM, Section 12−00−00.
If the hand pump is not installed, the hydraulic fluid level must monitored closely
and serviced before leaving an area where proper facilities are located.
The hand pump (optional) provides capability to pump fluid into the manifold/res
ervoir without the need of a ground support unit. The hand pump is mounted
next to the GSE panels on the transmission deck.
A sight glass indicates when the fluid is at the 0.3 qt level. On the underside
of the cover, a can opener provides a clean means of opening new cans of hydraulic
fluid.
A manually operated selector valve is mounted internally in the housing. The
selector valve lever provides for selection of system 1 or system 2 servicing.
The drive handle folds and clips against the reservoir housing for storage. When
in use, the handle extends through the open access panel, providing a convenient
means of operation.
NOTE: The following servicing procedure applies to aircraft equipped with the optional
hydraulic system hand pump.
Do not mix different specification hydraulic fluids. Ensure that only
CAUTION MIL−PRF−83282 fluid is used to service the hydraulic systems for
all helicopter operations in temperatures above −40°F.
The intentional mixing of approved hydraulic oils is not permitted.
Servicing - Hydraulic hand pump:
Open transmission access panel (Ref. Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7).
Verify that hydraulic fluid is low by checking oil level on hand pump reservoir
fluid level sight gauge (Ref. Figure 8-16).
Unscrew the reservoir cover to remove.
Add appropriate amount of hydraulic oil.
Replace cover.
Servicing - Hydraulic system:
Verify that pump reservoir has fluid; replenish if necessary.
Select system to be serviced by using the selector valve lever on the hand
pump (Ref. Figure 8-16).
Disengage handle from stowed position.
Rotate handle in direction of arrow (CW).
Servicing is complete when the hydraulic manifold fluid level sight gauge
is at the correct level.
Stow handle.
Reissue 2
8−26 Revision 1
and Maintenance
COVER
HANDLE (STOWED)
FLUID LEVEL
SIGHT GAUGE
MINIMUM OIL LEVEL
SELECTOR VALVE HANDLE IN

LEVER OPERATING POSITION
HAND PUMP (OPTIONAL)
FLUID TEMP
-40°C 95°C
FULL
FULL
REFILL
REFILL
EMPTY
VIEW LOOKING DOWN
HYDRAULIC MAINFOLD/RESERVOIR F927−025
Figure 8−16. Hydraulic System
Reissue 2
Original 8−27
and Maintenance
Main Transmission Filling

Open access panel (Ref. Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7).
Open oil filler cap (Ref. Figure 8-17).
Pour in oil.
Verify quantity of oil in sight window.
NOTE: Correct oil livel is when the observed level is halfway between the “ADD” and
“FULL” marks (Ref. Figure 8−17).
Close oil filler cap.
Close access panel (Ref. Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7).
Main Transmission Draining
Open access panel (Ref. Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7).
Remove chip detector (Ref. RMM, Section 63-20-00).
Using transmission drain line, place free end of drain line in a suitable container.
Insert drain line probe in chip detector housing.
Allow transmission to drain.
Remove drain line and install chip detector (Ref. RMM, Section 63-20-00).
Close access panel (Ref. Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7).
Reissue 2
8−28 Original
and Maintenance
OIL FILLER
TRANSMISSION
OIL FILL
SERVICE WITH CHIP

MOBIL AGL OIL DETECTOR
HOUSING
NOTE: 900D1400006-101 TRANSMISSION ONLY
OIL LEVEL
TRANSMISSION INDICATOR CHIP DETECTOR
OIL FILL
SERVICE WITH OIL

PER MIL−L−23699 FULL FULL
NOTE: 900D1400004-101 AND 900D1400005-101 TRANSMISSION IS SERVICED

TRANSMISSIONS ONLY PROPERLY WHEN OIL LEVEL IS
HALFWAY BETWEEN “FULL” AND “ADD”.
ADD ADD
VIEW ROTATED
IMPENDING FILTER BYPASS

INDICATOR F92−119C
Figure 8−17. Main Transmission Servicing
Reissue 2
Revision 1 8−29
and Maintenance
Rotor brake:
The rotor brake reservoir is located on the top forward deck.
Open right-hand forward access door.
Remove filler cap.
Using hydraulic fluid, fill reservoir to top of sight glass.
Install filler cap.
Close right-hand forward access door.
FILLER CAP
SIGHT GLASS
F92−120
Figure 8−18. Rotor Brake
Reissue 2
8−30 Original
and Maintenance
Powerplant
Engine Oil System Filling / Replenishing
Do not mix different brands or types of oil since their different

CAUTION chemical structures may make them incompatible. If different
brands or types of oil become mixed, drain system (including
engine integral oil tank, engine oil filter housing, engine oil heat
exchanger and oil in and out hoses) and refill with new oil.
NOTE: To reduce the possibility of over filling the oil tank, check the oil level 10 minutes
after engine shutdown.
Open oil dipstick hand hold/door (Ref. Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7).
Remove engine oil filler cap.
Refill engine oil tank with specified oil in related manufacturers' publications
(Ref. RMM, Section 01-00-00)
NOTE: Correct oil level is when the observed level is between the MAX and MIN marks
on the oil dipstick. Filling the oil tank to MAX may result in oil being vented
overboard, causing a buildup of carbon deposits on the tailboom and
empennage. Should this occur, monitor engine oil level without adding oil (unless
the oil level falls below MIN) to determine if the level stabilizes at some point
between MAX and MIN. Once this level is determined, fill oil to and maintain this
level.
Replace oil filler cap.
Install and lock the oil filler cap on the oil transfer tube as follows (Ref.
Figure 8-19).
Make sure to install the oil filler cap correctly. Incorrect installation
CAUTION can lead to disengagement of the cap locking lugs; the cap can
then lift from its locking position and have an incorrect sealing.
This can result in an oil loss that may require shuting down the
engine.
Place the dipstick in the gearbox and make sure that the dipstick off-set
of the cap is in line with the off-set hole of the oil filler tube of the gearbox.
Turn the handle and lock the cap. Make sure that the cap handle is in the
lock position.
If extra force is required to lock the cap, it means that the cap
CAUTION is not installed correctly. Remove the cap and reinstall it.
NOTE: The writing on the cap handle should be facing toward the front of the engine.
Close oil dipstick hand hold/door.
Reissue 2
Original 8−31
and Maintenance
WRITING ON TAB FACING FORWARD
OIL FILLER DIPSTICK

(VIEW ROTATED)
CHIP
NOTE: SOME ENGINE DETAIL OMITTED FOR CLARITY DETECTOR
OIL FILTER
IMPENDING
BYPASS INDICATOR
VIEW LOOKING AFT
F92−121A
Figure 8−19. Engine Oil System − Servicing
Reissue 2
8−32 Original
and Maintenance
8−6. AIRCRAFT CLEANING
General cleaning of oil and dirt deposits from the helicopter and its components
can be accomplished by using dry-cleaning solvent, standard commercial grade
kerosene, or a solution of detergent soap and water. Exceptions that must be observed
are specified in the following cleaning paragraphs.
Storage, use, and disposal of all solvents must be per Government

CAUTION and local health and safety regulations.
Fuselage Interior Trim and Upholstery

Fuselage Interior Trim and Upholstery Cleaning
Carpet cleaning agents may damage underlying metal or composite

CAUTION surfaces. Carpet or seats must be removed from helicopter prior
to cleaning and allowed to air dry prior to reinstallation.
Clean dirt or dust accumulations from floors and other metal surfaces with
vacuum cleaner or small hand brush.
Any flammable solvent that may affect material flammability must

CAUTION be removed completely after cleaning.
Sponge soiled upholstery and trim panels with a mild soap and lukewarm
water solution. Avoid complete soaking of upholstery and trim panels. Wipe
solution residue from upholstery with cloth dampened by clean water.
Use solvents sparingly. Some solvents may soften or dull material.

CAUTION Test an inconspicuous area prior to use.
Remove imbedded grease or dirt from upholstery and carpeting by sponging

or wiping with an upholstery cleaning solvent.
Helicopter Exterior
Main Rotor Blade Cleaning
Use care to prevent scratching of fiberglass skin when cleaning

CAUTION main rotor blades. Never use volatile solvents or abrasive materials.
Never apply bending loads to blades or blade tabs during cleaning.
NOTE: Avoid directing high pressure concentrations of soap and/or clean water toward
engine air intake areas, instrument static source ports and main rotor swashplate
bearings.
Clean rotor blades when necessary using solution of clean water and mild
soap.
Reissue 2
Original 8−33
and Maintenance
Fuselage Exterior Cleaning

NOTE: Avoid directing high pressure concentrations of soap and/or clean water toward
engine air intake areas, instrument static source ports and main rotor swashplate
bearings.
NOTE: Check and drain, if moisture present, the static system drain valves after the
aircraft has been washed or exposed to rain or snow and any time the airspeed
or altimeter indicators are showing sporadic readings. (Ref. Figure 8−6 and
Figure 8−7).
Clean helicopter exterior, including fiberglass/kevlar components, when nec
essary, use solution of clean water and mild soap.
Transparent Plastic
Transparent Plastic Cleaning
Clean outside surfaces of plastic panels by rinsing with clean water and rub
bing lightly with palm of hand.
Use mild soap and water solution or aircraft type plastic cleaner to remove
oil spots and similar residue.
Never attempt to dry plastic panels with cloth. To do so causes

CAUTION any abrasive particles lying on plastic to scratch or dull surface.
Wiping with dry cloth also builds up an electrostatic charge that
attracts dust particles from air.
After dirt is removed from surface of plastic, rinse with clean water and let
air-dry.
Clean inside surfaces of plastic panels by using aircraft type plastic cleaner
and tissue quality paper wipers.
8−7. COCKPIT DOOR REMOVAL
Disengage gas strut from cockpit floor attachment (Ref. Figure 8-20).
NOTE: Fit between socket end of strut and ball end of ball stud is by interference.
Removal of strut from its attachment requires a snap action motion to pull away
the socket end from the ball stud.
Remove lower quick release pin by pulling on the ring.
Remove door restraint by pulling away from lower fork assembly.
Remove upper quick release pin while holding the door.
Remove door.
Install quick release pins into upper and lower fork assemblies.
Installation is opposite of removal.
Reissue 2
8−34 Original
and Maintenance
VIEW LOOKING OUTBOARD

LEFT SIDE SHOWN, RIGHT SIDE OPPOSITE
DOOR
FRAME RING
WINDOW
LOWER DOOR ATTACHMENT WITH FRAME
REMOVABLE RESTRAINT. UPPER
DOOR ATTACHMENT SIMILAR. QUICK
RELEASE PIN
LOWER
FORK
ASSEMBLY
DOOR RESTRAINT
BALL SOCKET BALL STUD
GAS STRUT
F92−123A
Figure 8−20. Cockpit Door Attachment
Reissue 2
Original 8−35
and Maintenance
8−8. CABIN SEATS: REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Cabin Seat Removal (Ref. Figure 8-21):
First disengage upper quick disconnect fittings then lower quick disconnect fit
tings from their anchor plates to release cabin seat assembly. Remove seat assem
bly.
Cabin Seat Installation (Ref. Figure 8-21):
Align cabin seat assembly with floor anchor plates. First engage lower quick
disconnect fittings then upper quick disconnect fittings of cabin seat assembly
into mating roof and floor anchor plates to secure.
Ensure fittings are fully and properly engaged.
NOTE: PULLING/RELEASING THE KNURLED COLLAR ON

THE QUICK DISCONNECT RELEASES/ENGAGES
THE LOCKING MECHANISM
UPPER SEAT ATTACHMENT
QUICK DISCONNECT
ANCHOR PLATE
KNURLED COLLAR
LOWER SEAT ATTACHMENT ANCHOR PLATE

F92−124
Figure 8−21. Cabin Passenger Seat Attachment
Reissue 2
8−36 Original
and Maintenance
8−9. COPILOT FLIGHT CONTROLS
PEDAL SHAFT
ASSEMBLY
PEDAL ADJUSTMENT PINS
PEDAL CRANK
ASSEMBLY
PEDAL DISENGAGE PIN
HOOK TAPE
F92−125
Figure 8−22. Copilot Pedals

Copilot Pedals: Disengaging (Ref. Figure 8-22)
Copilots pedal shaft assemblies can be temporarily stowed in the full forward
position.
Pull up pedal adjustment pins.
Pull out pedal disengage pin.
Swing shaft assemblies forward to their hook tape secured positions.
Copilot Pedals: Engaging
Reengaging copilot's pedals is opposite of disengaging.
NOTE: Ensure that pedal adjustment pins are fully seated in pedal crank assemblies.
Reissue 2
Original 8−37
and Maintenance
8−10. ENGINE CHARTS
The following charts define maintenance action requirements for engine over temper
ature, overspeed, and overtorque.
AREA A - RECORD IN ENGINE LOG BOOK

(2.5 MINUTE RATING)
AREA B - RECORD IN ENGINE LOG BOOK
(CONTINUOUS OEI)
AREA C - RETURN ENGINE FOR OVERHAUL
1000 DO AN HSI IF THE FOLLOWING CONDITION OCCURS:
990 15 MINUTES OF CUMULATIVE RUNNING TIME IN AREA A.
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
980
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
970
960
AREA C
950
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
940 AREA C
AREA A
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
930
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE
920
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉ
910
ÉÉÉÉÉ
900
890
880
870
TAKE-OFF
(FIVE MINUTES) ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
AREA B
ÉÉÉÉÉ
860
850
840
820
NO ACTION REQUIRED
800
20
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 SEC
1 2 3 4 5 MIN
TIME (MINUTES AND SECONDS) F927−054
Figure 8−23. EGT Vs Time − All Conditions Except Starting
Reissue 2
8−38 Original
and Maintenance
AREA A - VISUAL INSPECTION THROUGH EXHAUST DUCT AND

RECORD IN ENGINE LOG BOOK
AREA B - PERFORM HSI
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
AREA C - RETURN ENGINE TO OVERHAUL
AREA D - DETERMINE CAUSE FOR HUNG START AND CARRY
875
OUT DRY MOTORING RUN PRIOR TO ATTEMPTING
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
A RE-START
MEASURED GAS TEMPERATURE (EGT)
820 AREA C
AREA B
760
AREA A
650 ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
NO ACTION REQUIRED AREA D
2 20 30 45
TIME (SECONDS) F92−127
Figure 8−24. EGT Vs Time − Starting
112.4
POWER TURBINE SPEED (% RPM)
AREA A - RETURN ENGINE TO OVERHAUL
104.5
100.0
NO ACTION REQUIRED
0 10 20 30 40 50 SEC
TIME (SECONDS) F92−128
Figure 8−25. Power Turbine (NP) Speed Vs Time
Reissue 2
Original 8−39
and Maintenance
AREA A - RECORD IN ENGINE LOG BOOK (2.5 MINUTE RATING)

AREA B - RECORD IN ENGINE LOG BOOK (CONTINUOUS RATING)
AREA C - RETURN ENGINE FOR OVERHAUL
104.1
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ AREA C
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
103.0
GAS GENERATOR SPEED − %N G
AREA A
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÉÉÉÉ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÉÉÉÉ
100.0
99.8
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
AREA B
ÉÉÉÉ
TAKE-OFF
(5 MINUTES)
ÉÉÉÉ
98.2
97.2
NO ACTION REQUIRED ÉÉÉÉ
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 SEC
1 2 2.5 3 4 5 MIN
TIME (MINUTES AND SECONDS) F927−055
Figure 8−26. Compressor Turbine (NG) Speed Vs Time

TORQUE
IIDS (XMSN) ENGINE
AEO OEI
AREA A DETERMINE CAUSE AND RECORD IN ENGINE LOG BOOK
145% 116.7 AREA B RETURN ENGINE FOR OVERHAUL
AREA C RECORD IN ENGINE LOG BOOK EXCEPT OEI CONDITION
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ AREA B
ÑÑÑ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
140% 112.7%
ÑÑÑ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
135%
2.5
ÓÓ ÑÑÑ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÉÉÉÉ

MIN AREA A
124% 100%
ÓÓ ÉÉÉÉ
10
ÓÓ
ÑÑ ÉÉÉÉ
SEC AREA C
110% 88.4%
ÑÑ
5 MCP
MIN
ÑÑ MCP
100%
NOTE: THE TORQUE DISPLAYED ON 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 (SEC)
THE IIDS PRIMARY DISPLAY 20 1 2 2.5 3 4 5 (MIN)
IS TRANSMISSION TORQUE.
TIME (MINUTES AND SECONDS) F927−056A
Figure 8−27. Engine Overtorque Limits − All Conditions
Reissue 2
8−40 Original
and Maintenance
8−11. SPECIAL OPERATIONAL CHECKS AND PROCEDURES
The following checks are typically utilized as part of a post maintenance run up
associated with scheduled inspections, troubleshooting or maintenance on specific
aircraft systems. Refer to the Rotorcraft Maintenance Manual (CSP900RMM-2)
for the recommended use and frequency of the following checks.
These checks and or procedures are to be performed only while
CAUTION aircraft is on the ground except where noted.
ENGINE NP OVERSPEED TEST PROCEDURE
NOTE: This procedure is to be performed with one engine at idle and the other engine
off.
Engine control switch IDLE
Collective INCREASE TO 20% TORQUE
OVSP test switch MOVE TOWARD OPERATING ENGINE AND HOLD
Primary IIDS display OBSERVE DECREASE IN TORQUE AND NR
OVSP test switch RELEASE
Primary IIDS display OBSERVE INCREASE IN TORQUE AND NR
Collective FULL DOWN
Engine control switch OFF
Start other engine and repeat procedure.
ENGINE OUT/LOW ROTOR WARNING CHECK
Engine control switches FLY

Collective INCREASE TO A CLP OF >5% FOR MORE
THAN 5 SECONDS
Collective LOWER TO A CLP OF 0%
Engine control switches SWITCH TO IDLE AND NOTE THE
FOLLOWING
ENG OUT warning light flashes and low rotor RPM tone is activated for one cycle. As
rotor RPM decreases through 88%, the low rotor RPM tone will reactivate until the
AOG logic disables the warning.
Reissue 2
Revision 1 8−41
and Maintenance
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CHECK
With the aircraft operating at IDLE or FLY (100%):

IIDS secondary display CHECK ‘‘1 HYD 2” CAUTION SEGMENTS ARE NOT
ILLUMINATED
With the aircraft operating at FLY (100%):
HYD TEST switch SET AND HOLD TO ‘‘SYS 1”
IIDS secondary display CHECK ‘‘1 HYD” CAUTION SEGMENT ILLUMINATES
IIDS alphanumeric display VERIFY 250 PSI MAXIMUM FOR HYD 1 AND 1,000
+100/−50 PSI FOR HYD 2
HYD TEST switch RELEASE AND CHECK ‘‘1 HYD” CAUTION
SEGMENT OFF
HYD TEST switch SET AND HOLD TO ‘‘SYS 2”
IIDS secondary display CHECK ‘‘HYD 2” CAUTION SEGMENT ILLUMINATES
IIDS alphanumeric display VERIFY 250 PSI MAXIMUM FOR HYD 2 AND 1,000
+100/−50 PSI FOR HYD 1
Do not perform the following check if the helicopter is parked on

CAUTION a wheeled platform, or slippery / icy surfaces. If unable to apply
right pedal or high resistance is felt, relax pressure on pedals and
release HYD TEST switch. Advise maintenance.
Anti-torque pedals APPLY SUFFICIENT PRESSURE ON THE RIGHT

PEDAL TO MOVE IT APPROXIMATELY 3 INCHES
(7.6 CM). REPEAT CHECK WITH LEFT PEDAL.
HYD TEST switch RELEASE AND CHECK ‘‘HYD 2” CAUTION
SEGMENT OFF
Reissue 2
8−42 Revision 1
and Maintenance
VSCS CHECK
NOTE: This functional check may be performed with the engines off and aircraft
connected to an external power source.
Left and right VSCS switches OFF
IIDS alphanumeric display VERIFY CAUTION SEGMENT ON AND ‘‘TOTAL STAB
FAIL” INDICATION
VSCS indicator needles CENTERED
Left VSCS switch ON
Right VSCS switch MOMENTARILY TO ‘‘TEST” AND THEN TO ‘‘ON’’
IIDS alphanumeric display VERIFY ‘‘RIGHT STAB FAIL” INDICATION FOR 5 TO 8
SECONDS, THEN OUT
Left VSCS switch MOMENTARILY TO ‘‘TEST” AND THEN TO ‘‘ON’’
IIDS alphanumeric display VERIFY ‘‘LEFT STAB FAIL” INDICATION FOR 5 TO 8
SECONDS, THEN OUT
VSCS indicator needles VERIFY NEEDLES ARE APPROXIMATELY 55% RIGHT
OF CENTER WITH 0% CLP AND AIRCRAFT LEVEL
NOTE: If the selected VSCS system fails the test, the failure annunciation will remain
on the IIDS alphanumeric display.
WET ENGINE MOTORING RUN
Before performing this procedure, insure that the power supply

CAUTION to the ignition exciter is disconnected (IGNTR circuit breakers
pulled).
When a fuel metering unit/pump is replaced in the field, motoring
CAUTION or starting the engine is not recommended until priming is
accomplished by performing a engine wet motoring run.
Twistgrip on selected engine(s) NORMAL
Fuel valve ON CHECK
Fuel boost pump ON
NOTE: Maintain starter operation for desired duration while observing starter limits.
Fuel boost pump OFF
NOTE: After a wet motoring run, a dry motoring should be accomplished before any start
is attempted.
Reissue 2
Revision 1 8−43
and Maintenance
DRY ENGINE MOTORING RUN
NOTE: This procedure is used to clear internally trapped fuel and vapor from the engine.
This procedure maybe used if there is evidence of a fire within the engine or lack
of EGT indication after lightoff at the beginning of an engine start.
Twist grip OFF
Engine control switch for selected engine SET TO IDLE −
OBSERVE STARTER TIME LIMITS
Engine control switch for selected engine OFF
EEC RESET button PRESS
Twistgrip PLACE IN NORMAL DETENT
EEC MAN or flashing indication CHECK OFF
ENGINE WASH PROCEDURES

Engine Water Wash - Desalination
Open main transmission access door (Ref. Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7).
NOTE: If cleaning agent is to be used, prepare solution and compressor wash system
in accordance with related manufacturers’ publications (Ref. RMM, Section
01−00−00)
Use of correct mixture as specified in the PWC Maintenance manual
CAUTION is very important, not only when the temperature is below freezing
at the time of washing, but also if the temperature is expected to
be below 2°C (36°F) between time of washing and the next start.
Connect cleaning solution or water source to engine wash panel using AN
type fittings.
NOTE: To prevent precipitation of deposits through the use of hard water, engine must
be allowed to cool to below 65°C (150°F). Minimum cooling period of 40 minutes
must be allowed since the engine was last operated.
Ensure inlet particle separator and heat / defog shutoff valves are
CAUTION turned off.
Do not motor engine for more than 30 seconds.

NOTE: Ensure cleaning solution or water source pressure of 60−82 PSI.
Perform dry engine motoring run; when NG reaches 5%, inject water solution
into air inlet case.
Close tank valve as soon as NG falls to 5%.
Reissue 2
8−44 Revision 1
and Maintenance
CAUTION Allow starter to cool between runs.
If water/methanol mixture has been used, perform additional dry engine mo
toring run.
Close main transmission access door (Ref. RMM, Section 06-00-00).
Repeat procedure on other engine.
Once engine wash is complete, start and operate engines at idle for at least
one minute to completely dry engines.
Engine Wash - Performance Recovery
Open main transmission access door (Ref. Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7).
NOTE: If cleaning agent is to be used, prepare solution and compressor wash system
in accordance with related manufacturers’ publications (Ref. RMM, Section
01−00−00)
Use of correct mixture as specified in the PWC Maintenance manual

CAUTION is very important, not only when the temperature is below freezing
at the time of washing, but also if the temperature is expected to
be below 2°C (36°F) between time of washing and the next start.
Connect cleaning solution or water source to engine wash panel using AN
type fittings.
NOTE: To prevent precipitation of deposits through the use of hard water, engine must
be allowed to cool to below 65°C (150°F). Minimum cooling period of 40 minutes
must be allowed since the engine was last operated.
Ensure inlet particle separator (IPS) and heat / defog shutoff valves
CAUTION are turned off.
Do not motor engine for more than 30 seconds.
NOTE: Ensure cleaning solution or water source pressure of 60−82 PSI.

Perform dry engine motoring run; when NG reaches 5%, inject wash solution
into air inlet case.
Close tank valve as soon as NG falls to 5%.
Allow cleaning solution to soak for 10 minutes.
Perform dry engine motoring run; when NG reaches 5%, inject one half of
rinse solution into air inlet case.
Observe starter cooling period.
Perform dry engine motoring run; when NG reaches 5%, inject remainder
of rinse solution into air inlet case.
Reissue 2
Revision 1 8−45
and Maintenance
If water/methanol mixture has been used, perform second dry engine motoring
run.
Close main transmission access door.
Repeat procedure on other engine.
Once engine wash is complete, start and operate engines at idle for at least
one minute to completely dry engines.
ENGINE WASH
RIGHT ENGINE WASH NOZZLE
TUBE ASSEMBLY
LEFT ENGINE WASH

TUBE ASSEMBLY
ENGINE
WASH
L
E
F
T
R
I
G
H
VIEW ROTATED T
F92−122
Figure 8−28. Engine Wash Panel
Reissue 2
8−46 Revision 1
and Maintenance
MANUAL ENGINE START CHECK
NOTE: Complete the Engine Prestart cockpit check (ref. Section IV) before you do a
manual start.
Twistgrip ROTATE TO FULL OPEN (PAST

THE ‘‘NORMAL’’ DETENT)
EEC MAN indication on primary IIDS CHECK
display
Twist grip ROTATE TO OFF
Generator OFF
L BOOST or R BOOST ON, CHECK IIDS INDICATIONS
Twist grip ROTATE TOWARD IDLE AS NG
INCREASES THROUGH 8
PERCENT
NOTE: As NG increases through 8% rotate twistgrip toward normal until lightoff occurs.
Monitor EGT indication for an immediate temperature rise. Monitor EGT and NG
during start. Obey the start limits. Increase twistgrip toward normal only as
necessary to keep NG accelerating toward idle. Manually bring NP/NR to 65%.

CAUTION 10 seconds, rotate the twistgrip to OFF and place the engine control
switch to off. Following a 30 second fuel drain period, perform a
30 second dry motoring run before attempting another start. Repeat
the complete start sequence observing limitations.
EEC RESET button PRESS WHEN NP/NR IS 65

PERCENT
EEC indication CHECK FLASHING
Twistgrip NORMAL DETENT
EEC indication CHECK OFF
Engine oil pressure CHECK
Generator ON
IIDS CHECK
Reissue 2
Revision 4 8−47
and Maintenance
MANUAL ENGINE SHUTDOWN CHECK
NOTE: This procedure should be performed with engine control switch in IDLE and all
unnecessary bleed air and electrical equipment, including generator, OFF.
Twist grip IDLE DETENT

NP slows to idle CHECK
EEC MAN indication on primary IIDS dis CHECK
play
Twistgrip SNAP TO CUTOFF
IIDS CHECK NORMAL SHUTDOWN
INDICATIONS
NG zero percent CHECK
EEC RESET button PRESS
Twistgrip PLACE IN NORMAL DETENT
DO NOT return twist grip to the NORMAL detent until NG is at zero

CAUTION and the EEC RESET button is pressed. Failure to follow this
procedure may cause a re−light with a subsequent EGT
exceedance.
EEC MAN indication CHECK OFF
Reissue 2
8−48 Revision 4
and Maintenance
AUTOROTATION RPM CHECK
Refer to CSP-900RMM-2, Section 18-00-00.

NOTE: This procedure should be performed with engine control switches in FLY and
collective full down. However, aircraft operating at or near gross weight limits and
at high density altitudes may not be able to perform this procedure with collective
full down without exceeding rotor limits. Refer to CSP−900RMM−2, Section
18−00−00 for alternative collective position while operating at high gross
weights.
Target altitude SELECT
NOTE: Select an altitude above target altitude so as to arrive at the target altitude in
steady state autorotation at 70 KIAS. Failure to maintain constant airspeed
during autorotation will cause rotor RPM fluctuations, resulting in inaccurate
RPM readings.
IIDS SELECT “CLP” ON

ALPHANEUMERIC DISPLAY
Airspeed 70 KIAS
Collective lever position ZERO % OR 10% AS REQUIRED
CAUTION Observe rotor limits.
At target altitude RECORD ROTOR RPM
NOTE: If gross weight/density altitude combination allows procedure with collective full
down, the torque reading should be zero percent at target altitude for accurate
autorotation RPM.
BATTERY REMOVAL
The battery should be removed from the helicopter and placed in a heated premises
if ambient air temperatures of minus 18°C or less or when long time exposure to
cold temperatures is expected.
Reissue 2
Original 8−49
and Maintenance
RESETTING IIDS TIME/DATE

NOTE 1
SET TIME/DATE TIME <HH:MM>

DATE MM-DD-YY
NOTE 1.: `ÈNT'' KEY SELECTS FIELD TO BE SET (MINUTE,
HOURS, DAY, MONTH, YEAR) AND SELECTED FIELD
BLINKS, AND KEYS INCREMENT/DEINCRE
MENT DIGIT VALUE, ``REC'' KEY CHANGES TIME
NOTE: TO RETURN TO PREVIOUS HIGHER LEVEL - PRESS MENU AND DATE TO SELECTED VALUES
F92−102
Figure 8−29. Set Time/Date

To change date or time:
This procedure is to be perfromed with both engines OFF.
Press MENU to enter menu system.
Use ↑ or ↓ keys to select SET TIME/DATE and press ENT. The following is
displayed on the IIDS two line alphanumeric display:
TIME HH:MM
DATE MM-DD-YY
Press ENT to edit display. The hour digits in the TIME HH:MM display will
blink indicating these are the digits selected for editing.
Use ↑ or ↓ keys to change value of flashing digit/value.
NOTE: Holding the arrow key for more than one second will cause the value of the
digit(s) being edited to increment at the rate of one per second.
Press ENT to select next digit(s) (the minutes digits will blink) and set value
using ↑ or ↓ keys.
NOTE: Each press of the ENT key will select the next value to edit in the sequence they
are displayed.
Repeat above steps until the correct time and date is displayed.
Use the REC key to save the changed time/date. Pressing the CLR key instead
of REC will abandon all changes.
NOTE: The REC key may be pressed at any time during the editing process to save the
changes made. Any fields not changes will remain at their present values.
Reissue 2
8−50 Original
Additional Operations
and Performance Data
SECTION IX
ADDITIONAL OPERATIONS
AND PERFORMANCE DATA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH PAGE
9-1. Abbreviated Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9-2. Fuel Flow vs Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Figure 9-1. Fuel Flow, AEO, Sea Level, ISA (15°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Figure 9-2. Fuel Flow, AEO, 4000 Feet HP , ISA (7°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Figure 9-3. Fuel Flow, AEO, 8000 Feet HP, ISA (-1°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Figure 9-4. Fuel Flow, AEO, Sea Level, ISA + 20°C (35°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Figure 9-5. Fuel Flow, AEO, 4000 Feet HP, ISA + 20°C (27°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Figure 9-7. Fuel Flow, AEO, Sea Level, ISA + 30°C (45°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Figure 9-10. Fuel Flow, OEI, Sea Level, ISA (15°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Figure 9-11. Fuel Flow, OEI, 4000 Feet HP , ISA (7°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Figure 9-12. Fuel Flow, OEI, 8000 Feet HP , ISA (-1°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Figure 9-13. Fuel Flow, OEI, Sea Level, ISA + 20°C (35°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Figure 9-14. Fuel Flow, OEI, 4000 Feet HP , ISA + 20°C (27°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Figure 9-16. Fuel Flow, OEI, Sea Level, ISA + 30°C (45°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Figure 9-19. Fuel Flow, OEI, -1000 Feet HP , ISA (17°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Figure 9-20. Fuel Flow, OEI, -1000 Feet HP , ISA + 20°C (37°C) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Figure 9-21. Fuel Flow, OEI, -1000 Feet HP , ISA + 30°C (47°C) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9-3. International Civil Aviation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Table 9-1. ICAO Noise Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Table 9-2. ICAO Noise Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Figure 9-22. Maximum Approved Passenger Seating Configuration . . . . . . . . 9-27
Reissue 2
Revision 5 9−i
Reissue 2
9−ii Revision 5
SECTION IX
ADDITIONAL OPERATIONS AND
PERFORMANCE DATA
9−1. ABBREVIATED CHECKLISTS
NOTE: These checklists do not have any CAUTION, WARNINGS, or NOTES. Be sure
you have a thorough understanding of the checks as described in Section IV
before attempting to operate the helicopter.
ENGINE PRE−START COCKPIT CHECK
ELECTRICAL POWER − OFF
All cabin doors CHECK

Seat belt and shoulder harness FASTENED
Rotor brake STOWED
Flight instruments CHECK STATIC POSITION/SET
Collective friction ON
Collective stick position FULL DOWN
Twistgrip alignment marks aligned with in CHECK
dex mark
LDG/HVR lights OFF
Key switch ON
Circuit breakers IN
Utility panel switches OFF EXCEPT VSCS ON
NACA inlet switch AS REQUIRED
Lighting control panel switches AS REQUIRED
Avionics AS DESIRED
L GEN and R GEN ON (OFF FOR GPU START)
POWER OFF
L BOOST AND R BOOST OFF
LEFT/RIGHT FUEL SHUTOFF ON; COVER CLOSED
Reissue 2
Original 9−1
Additional Operations MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E)
ELECTRICAL POWER − ON
POWER BAT/EXT
Monitor BIT FIRE WARNING ANNUNCIATORS ON
FOR 2 SECONDS; CHECK IIDS FOR
ADVISORIES AT COMPLETION OF BIT
Fuel quantity display CHECK
DISP (display by exception) AS DESIRED
ENGINE STARTING − AUTOMATIC

L BOOST or R BOOST ON; CHECK IIDS INDICATIONS
● EEC MAN indicators OFF
L ENGINE or R ENGINE SET TO IDLE/FLY AS REQUIRED
IIDS CHECK FOR NORMAL
INDICATIONS
Repeat starting procedure for second engine
GPU start only:
● L GEN/R GEN ON
● GPU DISCONNECT
ENGINE RUNUP
Avionics ON, AS DESIRED
L ENGINE and R ENGINE FLY
Reissue 2
9−2 Original
BEFORE TAKEOFF
Cyclic control CHECK RESPONSE
Collective friction AS DESIRED
Primary and secondary IIDS displays CHECK ADVISORIES
Utility panel switches AS REQUIRED
ENGINE/AIRCRAFT SHUTDOWN − NORMAL

Collective stick FULL DOWN/FRICTION ON
Pedals NEUTRAL
L ENGINE and R ENGINE IDLE
All unnecessary electrical equipment OFF
Heat OFF
AC (if installed) OFF
Pitot heat (if installed) OFF
Lighting control panel AS DESIRED
Avionics master switch OFF
L GEN/R GEN switches OFF
L BOOST/R BOOST OFF
ENG OUT indications CHECK IIDS FOR NORMAL
INDICATIONS
Rotor brake (if installed) APPLY BELOW
70% NR
IIDS CHECK FOR INDICATIONS
OR MESSAGES
POWER OFF
Reissue 2
Original 9−3
9−2. FUEL FLOW vs AIRSPEED
Description: The fuel flow charts presented in this section are based on level flight
performance data. Fuel consumption values are based on minimum specification
engines and thus may vary between engines. This data is based on a baseline aircraft
with 15% electrical load, engine bleeds and air conditioner off.
Use of Chart: Use the charts as illustrated by the example below.
NOTE: The following example uses Figure 9−1.
Example:
Wanted: Rate of fuel flow
Known: Airspeed = 110 KIAS
Known: Estimated gross weight = 6000 pounds
Method: Enter the chart at the known airspeed of 110 knots (interpolation re
quired). Move vertically to the 6000 pound point (interpolation required)
then move to the left to the fuel flow scale and read a fuel flow of approxi
mately 460 LB/HR.
Reissue 2
9−4 Original
MCP limit
600
6250 lb.
550
Long range cruise
500
450
FUEL FLOW - LB/HR
6500 lb.
6,000 lb.
400
5,000 lb.
350
4,000 lb.
300
250
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
INDICATED AIR SPEED - KNOTS
F927−026−1B
Figure 9−1. Fuel Flow, AEO, Sea Level, ISA (15°C)
Reissue 2
Original 9−5
600
MCP limit
550
Long range cruise

500
6500 lb.
450
FUEL FLOW - LB/HR
6250 lb.
400
6,000 lb.
350
5,000 lb.
300
4,000 lb.
250
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
F927-026-2A
Figure 9−2. Fuel Flow, AEO, 4000 Feet HP , ISA (7°C)
Reissue 2
9−6 Original
550
MCP limit
500
Long range cruise
450
6500 lb.
400
6250 lb.
FUEL FLOW - LB/HR
350
6,000 lb.
300
5,000 lb.
250
4,000 lb.
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
F927-026-3A
Figure 9−3. Fuel Flow, AEO, 8000 Feet HP, ISA (−1°C)
Reissue 2
Original 9−7
600
MCP limit
550
Long range cruise
500
450
6500 lb.
FUEL FLOW - LB/HR
400
6250 lb.
350
6,000 lb.
5,000 lb.
300
4,000 lb.
250
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
F927−027−1
Figure 9−4. Fuel Flow, AEO, Sea Level, ISA + 20°C (35°C)
Reissue 2
9−8 Original
550
MCP limit
500
Long range cruise
6500 lb.
450
400
FUEL FLOW - LB/HR
6250 lb.
350
6,000 lb.
5,000 lb.
300
4,000 lb.
250
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
F927-027-2A
Figure 9−5. Fuel Flow, AEO, 4000 Feet HP, ISA + 20°C (27°C)
Reissue 2
Original 9−9
500
MCP limit
450
Long range cruise
6500 lb.
400
FUEL FLOW - LB/HR
6250 lb.
350
6,000 lb.
300
5,000 lb.
250 4,000 lb.
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
F927-027-3A
Reissue 2
9−10 Original
550
MCP limit
500
6500 lb.
Long range cruise
450
6250 lb.
400
FUEL FLOW - LB/HR
6,000 lb.
350
5,000 lb.
300 4,000 lb.
250
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
F927-028-1A
Figure 9−7. Fuel Flow, AEO, Sea Level, ISA + 30°C (45°C)
Reissue 2
Original 9−11
500
MCP limit
450
6500 lb.
Long range cruise
400
FUEL FLOW - LB/HR
6250 lb.
350 6,000 lb.
5,000 lb.
300
4,000 lb.
250
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
F927-028-2A
Reissue 2
9−12 Original
500
450
MCP limit
6500 lb.
400
FUEL FLOW - LB/HR
Long range cruise
350
6250 lb.
6,000 lb.
300
5,000 lb.
250
4,000 lb.
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
F927-028-3
Reissue 2
Original 9−13
400
MCP limit
350
6500 lb.
FUEL FLOW - LB/HR
300
6250 lb.
6,000 lb.
250 5,000 lb.
4,000 lb.
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
F927−029−1A
Figure 9−10. Fuel Flow, OEI, Sea Level, ISA (15°C)
Reissue 2
9−14 Original
400
350
MCP limit
6500 lb.
FUEL FLOW - LB/HR
300
6250 lb.
6,000 lb.
250
5,000 lb.
4,000 lb.
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
F927−029−2A
Figure 9−11. Fuel Flow, OEI, 4000 Feet HP , ISA (7°C)
Reissue 2
Original 9−15
400
350
FUEL FLOW - LB/HR
300
MCP limit
250 6,000 lb.
5,000 lb.
4,000 lb.
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
F927−029−3A
Figure 9−12. Fuel Flow, OEI, 8000 Feet HP , ISA (−1°C)
Reissue 2
9−16 Original
400
350
MCP limit
FUEL FLOW - LB/HR
300
6250 lb.
6,000 lb.
5,000 lb.
250
4,000 lb.
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
F927−030−1A
Figure 9−13. Fuel Flow, OEI, Sea Level, ISA + 20°C (35°C)
Reissue 2
Original 9−17
400
350
FUEL FLOW - LB/HR
300 MCP limit
5,000 lb.
250
4,000 lb.
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
F927−030−2A
Figure 9−14. Fuel Flow, OEI, 4000 Feet HP , ISA + 20°C (27°C)
Reissue 2
9−18 Original
400
350
FUEL FLOW - LB/HR
300
MCP limit
5,000 lb.
250
4,000 lb.
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
F927−030−3A
Reissue 2
Original 9−19
400
350
MCP limit
FUEL FLOW - LB/HR
300
5,000 lb.
250
4,000 lb.
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
F927−031−1A
Figure 9−16. Fuel Flow, OEI, Sea Level, ISA + 30°C (45°C)
Reissue 2
9−20 Original
400
350
Fuel Flow − lb./hr.
300
MCP limit
5,000 lb.
250
4,000 lb.
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Indicated Airspeed − Knots
F927−031−2
Reissue 2
Original 9−21
400
350
300
MCP limit
250
4500 lb.
4,000 lb.
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
F927−031−3
Reissue 2
9−22 Original
400
MCP limit
350
6250 lb.
300
6,000 lb.
5,000 lb.
250
4,000 lb.
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
F927−032−1
Figure 9−19. Fuel Flow, OEI, −1000 Feet HP , ISA (17°C)
Reissue 2
Original 9−23
400
350
MCP limit
6250 lb.
300
6,000 lb.
5,000 lb.
250
4,000 lb.
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
F927−032−2
Figure 9−20. Fuel Flow, OEI, −1000 Feet HP , ISA + 20°C (37°C)
Reissue 2
9−24 Original
400
350
MCP limit
6,000 lb.
300
5,000 lb. 4,000 lb.
250
200
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Indicated Airspeed - Knots
F927−032−3
Figure 9−21. Fuel Flow, OEI, −1000 Feet HP , ISA + 30°C (47°C)
Reissue 2
Original 9−25
9−3. INTERNATIONAL CIVIL AVIATION INFORMATION
International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) Noise Levels:

The MD900 meets the ICAO Annex 16, Volume 1, Chapter 11, noise requirements
at the certified maximum gross weight of 6770 lb (3071 kg), for level flyover at
0.9 VH
Table 9−1. ICAO Noise Levels

ENGINE: PW 207E
81.49 dBA
The MD900 meets the ICAO Annex 16, Volume 1, Chapter 11, noise requirements
at the certified maximum gross weight of 6500 lb (2948 kg), for level flyover at
0.9 VH
Table 9−2. ICAO Noise Levels

ENGINE: PW 207E
81.2 dBA
Reissue 2
9−26 Revision 5
MAPSC and LOPA:

Maximum Approved Passenger Seating Configuration (MAPSC) and
Layout of Passenger Accommodation (LOPA) − 7 Seats
NOTE: The layout shown in Figure 9−22 represents the FAA−approved “Number of
Passenger Seats” as approved in the H19NM TCDS.
CG REAR FACING CG FWD FACING PAS

CG PASSENGERS SENGERS
+19.0
+15.85
0.0 0.0
-15.85
-19.0
STA 130.7 STA 173.0 STA 213.0

FM09−022
Figure 9−22. Maximum Approved Passenger Seating Configuration
Reissue 2
Revision 5 9−27
Reissue 2
9−28 Revision 5
Optional Equipment
SECTION X
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH PAGE
10-1. General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10-2. Listing - Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Table 10-1. Optional Equipment MD900 Helicopter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10-3. Compatibility - Combined Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Table 10-2. Optional Equipment Kit Compatibility - MD900 Helicopter . . . . 10-2
10-4. Optional Equipment Performance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10-5. Operating Instructions: Air Conditioning (P/N900P7250302-103) . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Figure 10-1. Air‐conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Figure 10-2. Air Conditioner Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10-6. Operating Instructions: Controllable Landing/Search Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Table 10-3. Search Light Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Figure 10-3. Collective Stick Switch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Figure 10-4. Circuit Breakers - Baggage Compartment Mounted (Typical) . . 10-10
10-7. Operating Instructions: Rotorcraft Cargo Hook Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Figure 10-5. VNE Placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Figure 10-6. Weight and Balance Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Figure 10-7. Cargo Hook IIDS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Figure 10-8. Cargo Hook Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10-8. Operating Instructions: Windscreen Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Figure 10-9. Windscreen Wiper with Optional Windscreen
Washer Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Figure 10-10. Windscreen Wiper Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Servicing Materials - Windscreen Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
10-9. Operating Instructions: Supplemental Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Figure 10-11. Gauge, Switch and Indicator Light - Location Typical . . . . . . . 10-27
EXAMPLE I: Longitudinal CG Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Table 10-4. Fuel Loading Table - Jet-A (6.8 LB/GAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Table 10-5. Fuel Loading Table - Jet-B (6.5 LB/GAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Figure 10-12. Fuel Station Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Figure 10-13. Supplemental Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−i
Optional Equipment
PARAGRAPH PAGE
10-10. Operating Instructions: Rescue Hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Figure 10-14. Center of Gravity Envelope for Hoist Operations
Below 60 KIAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Figure 10-15. Rescue Hoist Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
EXAMPLE I: Lateral CG Determination - Enroute (above 60 KIAS) . . . . . . . . 10-42
EXAMPLE II: Lateral CG Determination - Destination (below 60 KIAS) . . . . 10-42
EXAMPLE III: Lateral CG Determination - With Hoist Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Figure 10-16. Allowable Rescue Hoist Loading Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Figure 10-17. Rescue Hoist Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Table 10-6. Servicing Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
10-11. Operating Instructions: Removable CoPilot Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Figure 10-18. Collective and Cyclic Placards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Figure 10-19. Removable Copilot Cyclic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Figure 10-20. Removable Copilot Collective Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
10-12. Operating Instructions: Airframe Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Figure 10-21. Airframe Fuel Filter Installation and Block Diagram . . . . . . . . 10-58
10-13. Operating Instructions: SX-16 Night Sun with Aft Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Figure 10-22. SX-16 Aft Mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Figure 10-23. SX-16 Searchlight Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
10-14. Operating Instructions: RDR-1400C Weather Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Figure 10-24. RDR 1400C EFIS System Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Figure 10-25. CP 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
10-15. Operating Instructions: LEO-II-A5 Observation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Figure 10-26. LEO-II-A5 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
10-16. Operating Instructions: Annunciator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Figure 10-27. Caution and Advisory Test Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
10-17. Operating Instructions: Moving Map Navigation
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Figure 10-28. AVM4090 Display Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Table 10-7. AVM4090 Display Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Figure 10-29. AI-500 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Table 10-8. AI-500 Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
10-18. Operating Instructions: W.E.S.T Battery Protection
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Figure 10-30. Ensave02 Indicator/Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
10-19. Operating Instructions: SX-16 Night Sun with EPMS
mount and Laser Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−ii Original
Optional Equipment
PARAGRAPH PAGE
Figure 10-31. SX-16 EPMS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Figure 10-32. W.E.S.T. SX-16 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
10-20. Operating Instructions: Smoke Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
CArgo Compartment Fire/Smoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Figure 10-33. Smoke Detector and Press-To-Test Switch Location. . . . . . . . . . 10-90
10-21. Operating Instructions: Crew Door Modification with
Quick Release Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Figure 10-34. Cockpit Door Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−iii
Optional Equipment
PARAGRAPH PAGE
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−iv Original
MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E) Optional Equipment
SECTION X
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
10−1. GENERAL INFORMATION
This section provides general supplemental information on optional equipment for

the helicopter. The information includes a listing of usable optional equipment and
compatibility of combined equipment on the helicopter.
Supplemental data is prepared and included in this section whenever the installation
of that equipment affects the FAA Approval Data for Limitations (Section II), Emer
gency and Malfunction Procedures (Section III), Normal Procedures (Section IV),
and Performance Data (Section V).
The Flight Manual Supplemental Data is to be used in conjunction with the basic
Flight Manual data and takes precedence over that data when the equipment is
installed.
Be sure to include a review of the appropriate flight manual

CAUTION supplemental data for type of optional equipment installed
(including STC items) as a regular part of preflight planning.
10−2. LISTING − OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Table 10-1 lists MDHI optional equipment items available that require additional
operatinig instructions. This table does not include non-MDHI STC items that may
be FAA approved for use. Other optional equipment items may be found in the
RMM.
SPECIAL NOTE:
Items in the table marked with an asterisk (*) are optional equipment items that
have had their supplemental data incorporated into the main body of the flight
manual and are identified by the statement, `Ìf installed''.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−1
Optional Equipment MD900 (902 Configuration with PW 207E)
Table 10−1. Optional Equipment MD900 Helicopter

Equipment Publication No.
Air conditioner (P/N 900P7250302-101) CSP-902RFM207E-1 Section X
Search light CSP-902RFM207E-1 Section X
Cargo hook CSP-902RFM207E-1 Section X
Windscreen Wipers CSP-902RFM207E-1 Section X
Supplemental Fuel System CSP-902RFM207E-1 Section X
Rescue Hoist CSP-902RFM207E-1Section X
*Pitot heat CSP-902RFM207E-1
*Rotor brake CSP-902RFM207E-1
*Engine air particle separator filter CSP-902RFM207E-1
* Indicates data incorporated into the flight manual (Sections I thru IX where appropriate).
10−3. COMPATIBILITY − COMBINED OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Table 10−2. Optional Equipment Kit Compatibility − MD900 Helicopter

Compatibility: Blank = Yes; X = No
Optional A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N.
Equipment
A. Air conditioner
B. Search light
C. Engine air particle separator
D. Rotor brake
E. Pitot heat
F. Cargo hook
G. Windscreen Wipers
H. Supplemental Fuel System
I. Rescue Hoist
J. Removable Copilot controls
K. Airframe fuel filter
L. SX-16 Searchlight
M. RDR 1400C Weather radar
N. LEO-II-A5 Observation system
10−4. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE DATA
SPECIAL NOTE:
Optional equipment that affect IGE/OGE hover performance require
additional hover performance charts. All Optional Equipment hover
performance charts are located in Section V.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−2 Original
Optional Equipment
Air−Conditioning System
10−5. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: AIR CONDITIONING (P/N900P7250302−103)
PART I
GENERAL
The air-conditioning system circulates conditioned air throughout the cabin. A five
position rotary switch AC/VENT controls the vent fan and air-conditioning. COOL
HIGH provides air-conditioning at a high setting. COOL LOW provides air-condi
tioning at a low setting, selected from the center console utility panel assembly.
The air-conditioning system provides ventilation, temperature, and humidity con
trol. The air-conditioning system consists of:
Freon Compressor Assembly - Compresses the air conditioning system refriger
ant.
Lines and Tubing - Routes refrigerant throughout the air conditioning system.
Condenser - Heat exchanger for the condensing refrigerant.
Receiver Dehydrator - Removes moisture from the air conditioning system refrig
erant.
High Pressure Switch - Turns off the compressor in a high pressure condition
to prevent damage to air conditioning system.
Low Pressure Switch - Activates or deactivates the Freon compressor assembly
in a low pressure condition to prevent damage to the air conditioning system.
Thermal Expansion Valve - Regulates air conditioning system refrigerant injected
into the evaporator.
Evaporator - Heat exchanger that cools cabin air.
Evaporator Fan - Induces airflow through evaporator.
Three Way Valve Duct Assembly - Controls the flow of recirculated cabin air
or ambient air to the air conditioning system.
Three Way Valve Control Cable - Controls position of the three way valve.
The compressor is mounted on the gearcase of the right hand engine. The condensers
are attached to the oil cooler blowers. The evaporator occupies the forward end
of the upper cowling. The air conditioning system makes use of the ventilation sys
tem's ducting to direct the cooled air to cabin and cockpit, but adds a manual valve
to permit selection of fresh or recirculated air. The knob for this push/pull control
is on the rear cockpit wall above the pilot's right shoulder. Other air conditioner
controls are located on the Utility panel.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−3
Optional Equipment
COMPRESSOR
RH CONDENSER
WATER SEPERATOR
HIGH PRESSURE
GUAGE SWITCH
3-WAY VALVE LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
DUCT ASSEMBLY
RECIEVER
3-WAY VALVE DEHYDRATOR
3-WAY VALVE
CONTROL CABLE THERMOSTATIC
SWITCH AIR PLENUM
DUCT
EVAPORATOR
FAN
EVAPORATOR LINES AND
TUBING
SIGHTGLASS
F927−053
Figure 10−1. Air-conditioning System

FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−4 Original
Optional Equipment
PART II
LIMITATIONS
No change.
PART III
EMERGENCY AND MALFUNCTION PROCEDURES
NOTE: An automatic cutoff procedure similar to that for the heat/defog system shuts
down the air conditioner in flight if either engine becomes inoperative to maintain
the best power output from the running engine.
LOSS OF COOLING
Indications: No cooling air with system ON
Conditions: Automatic system safety shutdown, or internal failure
Procedures:
• A/C control switch OFF
• Use fresh air vent system as required
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−5
Optional Equipment
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A five position rotary switch AC/VENT controls the vent fan and air-conditioning.
Selecting the COOL HIGH position provides air-conditioning at a high setting;
COOL LOW provides air-conditioning at a low setting, selected from the center
console utility panel assembly.
HYD CAB AC/VENT

TEST HEAT COOL OFF VENT
SYS 1 OVRD LOW LOW
COOL VENT
ON HIGH HIGH
SYS 2 OFF
PITOT
HEAT IPS L VSCS R AC/VENT CONTROL
ON ON ON
OFF
OFF OFF
TEST
F92−138
Figure 10−2. Air Conditioner Control
PART V
PERFORMANCE DATA
Ref. Section V for hover performance with air‐conditioning ON.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−6 Original
Optional Equipment
Controllable Landing/Search Light
10−6. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: CONTROLLABLE LANDING/SEARCH

LIGHT
PART I
GENERAL
The controllable search light may be located on the lower fuselage ahead of the
forward landing gear crosstube and offset to the left of the centerline or installed
on a mounting pod that allows the use of the searchlight when other equipment
is installed in front of the standard search light location.
In the stowed position, the search light is flush with the lower fuselage skin and
faces downward.
Illuminating the search light is accomplished through the search light power switch
(SRCH) while positioning the search light is accomplished by operating the five-posi
tion search light control switch (Ref. Figure 10-3). The search light is available
with an optional IR lamp.
PART II
LIMITATIONS
No Change.
PART III
No Change.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−7
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Table 10−3. Search Light Switch Functions
SWITCH POSITION FUNCTION

SRCH LT Switches search light ON.
OFF Switches search light OFF.

IR Switches IR lamp ON (if installed).
Search Light EXT Press and hold switch to extend search light.
Control
Switch RET Press and hold switch to retract search light.
L Press and hold switch to rotate search light to the

left.
R Press and hold switch to rotate search light to the

right.
Preflight Checks - Electrical power OFF:
Search light CHECK FOR BROKEN COVER,

DAMAGE TO MECHANICAL
ASSEMBLY OR BURNED OUT
BULB.
Baggage compartment mounted SRCH LGT and IN (REF. FIGURE 10−4)
HVR LGT circuit breakers (early configuration)
Baggage compartment mounted SRCH LT and IN (REF. FIGURE 10−4)
SEARCH LT CONT circuit breakers (current con
figuration)
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−8 Original
Optional Equipment
Preflight Checks - Electrical power ON:

NOTE: The following operational checks shall be performed with an external power
source.
Electrical master panel

POWER switch BAT/EXT
Collective stick switch panel
SRCH switch to LT (Ref. Figure 10-3) CHECK SEARCH LIGHT ON
Use search light switch to rotate light left (L) CHECK OPERATION
and right (R)
SRCH switch to OFF SEARCH LIGHT OFF
SEARCH LIGHT
POWER SWITCH
SEARCH LIGHT
CONTROL SWITCH
F927−033
Figure 10−3. Collective Stick Switch Panel
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−9
LEFT GENERATOR BUS BATTERY BUS
AUDIO SEARCH SEARCH CKPT CAB L R L R RH FUEL

PNL 2 LT LT CONT UTL UTL BST PUMP EEC LOW
EVAP VENT COMP PITOT L R L R

EVAP HEAT 2 DETENT IGNTR
ATT CPLT CNDSR CNSL POSN STROBE AREA

GYRO 2 CLOCK FAN 2 LIGHTING
EADI EHSI L W/S AHRS LH DC AHRS AV AUX FIRE SMOKE

L L WIPER 1 AUX FDR 2 PRI MSTR FUEL HRD DET
CURRENT RIGHT GENERATOR BUS
CONFIGURATION
20
ENC SRCH HVR NACA LH FUEL

IIDS TRAK HYD AV IPS ALT LGT LGT FUEL
STB TEST FAN
CAB 5V NSUN NSUN CARGO

HOIST HOIST ATT PILOT CNDSR AUD DIM CONT PWR HOOK
CUT PWR GYRO1 CLOCK FAN 1
ELT R W/S AHRS RH DC L FLD R FLD

WIIPER 2 AUX FDR EXCIT EXCIT
EARLY
CONFIGURATION
FD SYN FLT DIR MODE SEL INVTR HDG SAS/AP ADF

LEFT ESS BUS 26 VAC BUS
LEFT AVIONICS BUS RIGHT AVIONICS BUS
ADF2 RADAR RADAR MKR RAD ADF1 FM FM1 FM2 FM3

RT IND BCN ALT CTRL RT RT RT
PA COM 3 XPNDR DIR NAV 3 DME STORM CAMERA NAV 1 RMI

PWR 2 GYRO 2 SCOPE
MVG
MAP
F92-141A
Figure 10−4. Circuit Breakers − Baggage Compartment Mounted (Typical)

FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−10 Original
Optional Equipment
PART V
PERFORMANCE DATA
No change.
PART VI
WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA
No change.
PART VII
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The search light is controlled by the three position SRCH toggle switch. This switch
connects battery bus power to the search light. Later configurations are powered
through the left generator bus.
Movement of the search light is accomplished by actuating the search light control
switch located on the collective stick switch panel.
Maximum light extension is 120° from stowed.
If the search light is rotated 90° either side of center and with an extended segment
of 0° to 60°, an interlock switch automatically deenergizes the lamp while positioning
the light is still possible.
PART VIII
HANDLING SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
No change.
PART IX
ADDITIONAL OPERATIONS AND PERFORMANCE DATA
No change.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−11
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−12 Original
Optional Equipment
Rotorcraft Cargo Hook Kit
10−7. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: ROTORCRAFT CARGO HOOK KIT
PART I
GENERAL
The cargo hook is an option that permits the helicopter to carry a jettisonable external
load of up to 3,000 pounds. The hook is suspended by a bridle of four cables that
attach to the landing gear saddle fittings, and join at the cargo load cell link to
support the hook.
The pilot's controls for the hook consist of an electric release push-button on the
top of the cyclic grip and a manual/emergency cargo hook release mechanism.
Quick disconnect pins at the four attachment points for the bridle allow the flight
crew to install or remove the hook assembly. Quick disconnects for the electric and
mechanical release cables are located on the bottom of the fuselage near the forward
cross tube.
When the kit is installed, an owner or operator holding a valid Rotorcraft External
Load Operator Certificate may utilize the helicopter for transportation of external
cargo when operated by a qualified pilot. OPERATIONS WITH CARGO ON THE
HOOK SHALL BE CONDUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE POR
TIONS OF FEDERAL AVIATION REGULATIONS PART 133.
Information provided in this supplement is presented with the intent of furnishing
important data that can be used in the Rotorcraft Load Combination Flight Manual.
The Combination Flight Manual, which is required by FAR Part 133, will be prepared
by the applicant to obtain the rotorcraft External Load Operator Certificate.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−13
PART II
LIMITATIONS
Weight Limitations:
Maximum weight allowed on the landing gear is 6500 pounds.
CAUTION Weight in excess of 6500 pounds and up to 6900 pounds must
be external and jettisonable.
Maximum Rotorcraft - Load Combination operating gross weight is 6900 pounds.
Center of Gravity Limitations:
See Figure 10-6.
Cargo Hook Limitations:
Maximum weight on the hook is 3000 LBS unless placarded otherwise (Ref.
Figure 10-8).
Airspeed Limitations:
With no load on hook, maximum VNE is 90 KIAS.
With load on hook, maximum VNE is 100 KIAS (Ref. Figure 10-5).
NOTE: Use caution as size and shape of load, and load attaching cable size and length
may affect flight characteristics. Satisfactory flight characteristics have been
demonstrated with a compact load.
Placards: Placard located on instrument panel.
20000
15000
VNE WITH LOAD ON THE HOOK
10000
5000
VNE WITH NO LOAD ON
THE HOOK IS 90 KIAS
0
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
INDICATED AIRSPEED - KNOTS F92−142
Figure 10−5. VNE Placard

FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−14 Original
Optional Equipment
7000
6500
LONGITUDINAL CG
6000 ENVELOPE
5500
WEIGHT - POUNDS
5000 NORMAL CG LIMITS

CARGO HOOK
4500 CG LIMITS >6250LBS
4000
3500
3000
194 196 198 200 202 204 206 208
FUSELAGE STATION (IN.)
7000
6500
LATERAL CG
6000 ENVELOPE
5500
WEIGHT - POUNDS
5000
NORMAL CG LIMITS
CARGO HOOK
CG LIMITS >6250LBS
4500
4000
3500
3000
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3 4 5
F92−143A
LATERAL CG STATION (IN)
Figure 10−6. Weight and Balance Envelope

FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−15
PART III
The presence of an external load may further complicate procedures following an

emergency or malfunction. Release of loads attached through the cargo hook should
be considered consistent with safety of flight factors.
Emergency Release:
Actuate the mechanical release handle, mounted on the cyclic stick, to release
cargo in the event of an electrical failure.
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Preflight Checks (Ref. Figure 10-8):

Verify security of cargo hook bridle attach points.
Visually inspect hardware for damage or indications of possible fatigue.
Check for fraying, wear or any other form of damage to the cable bridle assembly.
Inspect electrical release, and load indicating wire harness and connectors for gener
al condition and security.
Examine manual release cable housing for nicks, cuts, kinks or general damage
that might restrict movement of cable within housing.
Inspect manual release connector for general condition and security.
Ensure a service loop is present in the manual release cable at cargo hook.
Inspect hook for general condition.
Cargo Hook Operational Checks:
NOTE: Functional checks of the cargo hook require an external power source for
electrical power or an operating engine.
Ensure that the CRGO HOOK circuit breaker (left generator bus) is IN.
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 25−55−00 in the RMM for special functional checks required
following the initial installation of the cargo hook kit or following replacement of
the manual release cable.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−16 Original
Optional Equipment
With the load beam in its locked position, apply pressure to simulate a load on
the beam and functionally check the three methods of cargo hook release:
Mechanical release lever on the right side of hook
Manual cargo hook release handle on cyclic
Electric cargo hook release switch on cyclic
NOTE: The TARE weight should be reset each time following aircraft shutdown and
restart (ref. Figure 10−7).
Operating Procedures:
Use care to avoid passing load attaching cables over landing gear
CAUTION skid tube when attaching load to hook with helicopter on the
ground.
Apply collective smoothly when lifting cargo.
With the hook weight suspended, and the selection made on the IIDS panel
menu for HOOK WT (ref. Figure 10-7), the load indication should read HOOK
WT. xxxx LBS on the alphanumeric display.
Ensure there is sufficient clearance between the sling load and
CAUTION obstacles along the takeoff / landing flightpath. Do not drag cargo
across the ground.
Activate cargo release switch on cyclic stick to release cargo.
Check CARGO HOOK OPEN advisory on IIDS alphanumeric display.
NOTE: Ground support personnel should manually assure positive reset of the cargo
hook after use of mechanical release, prior to further cargo pickups.
Instruct ground crew to ensure that the helicopter has been electrically grounded
prior to attaching cargo to drain charges of static electricity that may build up
in flight.
The cargo hook extends 18 inches (45.72 cm) below the landing
CAUTION gear while hovering. Ensure that there is adequate clearance
between the cargo hook and any obstacles along the flightpath.
HOOK WT 2456 LBS ZERO WEIGHT DISP PRESSING “ENT” FOR MORE THAN 2 SECONDS
2456 LBS TAKES A TARE READING AND ZEROS DISPLAY
“ENT” SELECTS DIGITS TO BE EDITED (LEFT TO RIGHT),

SET CALIB CODE
AND KEYS INCREMENT/DEINCREMENT DIGIT VALUE,
<XXXX>
“REC” KEY CHANGES CODE TO SELECTED VALUE,

F92−144
Figure 10−7. Cargo Hook IIDS Menu

FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 10−17
QUICK RELEASE PIN

(SEE NOTE)
LINK ASSEMBLY
AFT SADDLE CLAMP
CABLE
QUICK
RELEASE PIN
(SEE NOTE)
PIN LINK FORWARD
PIN LINK
LINK ASSEMBLY
FWD SADDLE CLAMP
CABLE
NOTE: ENSURE QUICK RELEASE

PIN HEAD FACES `ÙP''
AFTER INSTALLATION
LH AFT LANDING
GEAR FITTING
MAX WORKING
LOAD 2200 LB
RH AFT LANDING
GEAR FITTING
CARGO HOOK PLACARD
LH FWD LANDING
GEAR FITTING
RH FWD LANDING
GEAR FITTING
CYCLIC STICK
CARGO HOOK SERVICE LOOP
MECHANICAL
RELEASE LEVER
LOAD BEAM
LOAD INDICATOR
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
ELECTRICAL RELEASE
MANUAL CARGO HOOK CONNECTOR
RELEASE
ELECTRIC CARGO MANUAL RELEASE
HOOK RELEASE CABLE CONNECTION
CYCLIC GRIP ROTATED
F92−145A
Figure 10−8. Cargo Hook Installation

FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−18 Original
Optional Equipment
PART V
PERFORMANCE DATA
Hover Ceiling:
Use the OGE hover ceiling charts: Refer to Section V for Hover Ceiling Data.
PART VI
Cargo Hook Longitudinal CG: 203.0 In.

Cargo Hook Assembly Weight: 26.12 lbs.
The following table of Cargo Hook Loads may be used by the operator to assist
in determining the helicopter center of gravity.
Cargo Weight Moment/100 Cargo Weight Moment/100

(lb) (in.−lb) (lb) (in.−lb)
100 20300 1600 324800
200 40600 1700 345100
300 60900 1800 365400
400 81200 1900 385700
500 101500 2000 406000
600 121800 2100 426300
700 142100 2200 446600
800 162400 2300 466900
900 182700 2400 487200
1000 203000 2500 507500
1100 223300 2600 527800
1200 243600 2700 548100
1300 263900 2800 568400
1400 284200 2900 588700
1500 304500 3000 609000
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−19
PART VII
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Cargo Hook Installation (Ref. Figure 10-8):

Align cargo hook cable attaching hardware with landing gear saddle clamp assem
blies.
Install FWD link assemblies into FWD saddle clamps.
Install FWD pin links into link assemblies and quick release pins into FWD
pin links.
Connect cargo hook electrical connector, load indicator electrical connector and
mechanical release control cable connector.
Repeat procedure for aft link assembly attachment.
Perform cargo hook preflight and operational checks.
Cargo Hook Removal (Ref. Figure 10-8):
Remove quick release pins from Aft pin links and remove cable assembly from
aft saddle clamps.
Disconnect cargo hook electrical connector, load indicator electrical connector
and manual release control cable connector.
Remove pin links attaching cargo hook cables and cargo hook to FWD landing
gear saddle clamp assemblies.
Remove cargo hook and bridle assembly.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−20 Original
Optional Equipment
Windscreen Wipers
10−8. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: WINDSCREEN WIPERS
PART I
GENERAL
The windscreen wipers provide the pilot a means to clear the windscreens of rain
or snow.
The windscreen washers (if installed) provide pressurized washer fluid to the wind
screen through spray nozzles. The washer pump and reservoir are located in the
battery compartment.
There are no changes to limitations, emergency procedures, or performance data
with the installation of the windscreen wipers or windscreen washers.
WINDSCREEN
WIPERS
WASHER
RESERVOIR WASHER PUMP
F92-170A
Figure 10−9. Windscreen Wiper with Optional Windscreen Washer Installation
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 10−21
Original
Optional Equipment
Windscreen Wipers
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Windscreen wipers:
Use the windscreen wipers whenever it is necessary to clear the windscreens
of rain or snow.
Do not use the windscreen wipers on a dry windscreen.
The wipers have a panel mounted control switch (Ref. Figure 10-10). The rotary
switch has four positions:
PARK, OFF, LOW, and HIGH.
The PARK position is a momentary position and is used to stow the wipers when
not in use.
The OFF position turns the wipers off.
The LOW and HIGH positions refer to wiper speed. Select the speed appropriate
for weather conditions.
The three position toggle switch HIGH (HI) and LOW (LO) positions function
as above. The OFF position parks and turns the wipers off.
Windscreen washer (if installed):
Preflight Check
Check washer reservoir fluid level.
On dry windscreen
Press and hold the WASHER button for two to three seconds before turning
the WINDSHIELD WIPERS switch to LOW. Turn off wipers while windscreen
is still wet.
During wiper operation
Press and hold the WASHER button for two to three seconds or as needed
to clear the windscreen.
Cold weather operation
Use 50 percent by volume isopropyl alcohol mixed with distilled or deionized
water when temperatures are at or below 0°C.
WASHER CONTROL SWITCH ROTARY CONTROL SWITCH
(IF INSTALLED) 3-POSITION LOCKING
3-POSITION TOGGLE SWITCH
TOGGLE SWITCH
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS OFF WINDSHIELD
PARK WIPERS
LOW WIPERS
HIGH HI
HIGH LO
LOW
OFF
WASHER
OFF
DO NOT OPERATE WIPERS DO NOT OPERATE WIPERS DO NOT OPERATE WIPERS
ON DRY WINDSCREEN ON DRY WINDSCREEN ON DRY WINDSCREEN F927-093B
Figure 10−10. Windscreen Wiper Control Switch
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−22
Original
Optional Equipment
Windscreen Wipers
PART VI

ITEM
Washer reservoir full - water only 4.8 82.7 394
Washer reservoir full - water alcohol mixture 4.3 82.7 356
PART VIII
HANDLING, SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Servicing Materials − Windscreen Washer Fluid

Washer reservoir - Total Capacity approximately 2 US quarts.
None Distilled or deionized water for opera None
tions above freezing and 50 percent by
volume mixture of isopropyl alcohol
and distilled or deionized water for op
erations below freezing.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 10−23
Original
Optional Equipment
Windscreen Wipers
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−24
Original
Optional Equipment
Supplemental Fuel System
10−9. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: SUPPLEMENTAL FUEL SYSTEM
PART I
GENERAL
The MD900 supplemental fuel system option adds a transfer type auxiliary fuel
tank located below the baggage compartment floor. Refer to Part VII for system
description.
PART II
LIMITATIONS
Placards:
SUPPLEMENTAL FUEL SYSTEM

USE MAIN FUEL DOWN TO LOCATED BY AUXILIARY FUEL GAUGE.
700 LBS BEFORE SELECTING
AUX FUEL TRANSFER NOTE: LOCATION MAY VARY.
F92-172B
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 10−25
Revision 1
Optional Equipment
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Preflight checks:
Fuel cap SECURED

Prestart cockpit check:
Fuel transfer switch OFF

Inflight operation:
Fuel transfer switch ON; VERIFY FUEL TRANSFER LIGHT
‘‘ON’’
NOTE: Fuel transfer should be begun when the fuel level in the main tank is between
700 and 300 LBS.
Main fuel tank quantity begins to CHECK
increase and auxiliary fuel quantity
begins to decrease.
NOTE: Fuel Transfer:

Fuel transfer time is approximately 20 minutes (22 minutes if second check valve
installed) with a full auxiliary fuel tank while in normal cruise.
Transferring fuel to the main tank may be accomplished once main tank
indicated fuel quantity is at or less than approximately 500 LB in normal ground
attitude or approximately 700 LB in normal cruise attitude.
Fuel transfer rate is approximately 600 LB/HR (540 LB/HR with second check
valve) in normal cruise and approximately 400 LB/HR in normal ground attitude.
Starting Fuel Transfer below 300 LBS:
CAUTION With engines at MCP, the auxiliary fuel transfer rate may not keep
up with the engine fuel consumption rate.
Starting fuel transfer below 300 LBS following a boost pump failure
(boost pumps OFF, Ref. Section III) may result in early right engine
fuel starvation (fuel transfers from the auxiliary fuel tank into the
left side of the main fuel tank).
Fuel transfer switch OFF WHEN TRANSFER IS COMPLETE

NOTE: The auxiliary fuel quantity gauge has been found to be inaccurate (indicates
high) during hover operations.
Engine/aircraft shutdown
Fuel transfer switch OFF; VERIFY FUEL TRANSFER LIGHT
‘‘OFF’’
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−26
Original
Optional Equipment
SUPPLEMENTAL FUEL SYSTEM

USE MAIN FUEL DOWN TO
700 LBS BEFORE SELECTING
AUX FUEL TRANSFER.
ON
FUEL
FUEL TRANSFER SWITCH XFER
OFF FUEL TRANSFER INDICATOR LIGHT
50 100 150
E F
AUXILIARY FUEL QUANTITY GAUGE

AUX FUEL
GAUGE, SWITCH AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
F92-173B
Figure 10−11. Gauge, Switch and Indicator Light − Location Typical
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 10−27
Original
Optional Equipment
PART VI
Weight and balance characteristics:

The lateral CG of the auxiliary fuel tank is at station -2.0.
Calculate CG as shown in the example below.
EXAMPLE I: Longitudinal CG Determination

ITEM
Basic Weight 3512.4 738045
Pilot 185.0 130.70 24180
Copilot/Passenger 185.0 130.70 24180
Passenger - Rear Facing R/H 175.0 173.0 30275
Passenger - Rear Facing L/H 175.0 173.0 30275
Passenger - FWD Facing R/H 175.0 213.0 30275
Passenger - FWD Facing L/H 175.0 213.0 30275
1. Zero Fuel Weight 4582.4 201.1 30275
2. Add: Fuel - Main Tank Only (Jet-A) 1025.0 191.2 195980
Gross Weight: 5607.4 199.3 1117484
3. Add: Fuel - Auxiliary Tank Only 200.0 244.8 48960
Gross Weight: 4782.4 202.9 970464
4. Add: Fuel - Both Tanks 1225.0
Gross Weight: 5807.4 200.9 1166444
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−28
Original
Optional Equipment
Table 10−4. Fuel Loading Table − Jet−A (6.8 LB/GAL)
FUEL WEIGHT LONGITUDINAL LONGITUDINAL LATERAL LATERAL

(LB) STATION MOMENT STATION MOMENT
20 239.4 4789 -2.0 -40
40 240.6 9625 -2.0 -80
60 241.6 14494 -2.0 -120
80 242.3 19387 -2.0 -140
100 242.9 24294 -2.0 -200
120 243.4 29210 -2.0 -240
140 243.8 34133 -2.0 -280
160 244.1 39062 -2.0 -320
180 244.4 44000 -2.0 -360
200 244.8 48951 -2.0 -400
Table 10−5. Fuel Loading Table − Jet−B (6.5 LB/GAL)
FUEL WEIGHT LONGITUDINAL LONGITUDINAL LATERAL LATERAL

(LB) STATION MOMENT STATION MOMENT
20 239.5 4790 -2.0 -40
40 240.7 9629 -2.0 -80
60 241.7 14501 -2.0 -120
80 242.5 19397 -2.0 -140
100 243.1 24306 -2.0 -200
120 243.5 29224 -2.0 -240
140 243.9 34149 -2.0 -280
160 244.3 39080 -2.0 -320
180 244.6 44022 -2.0 -360
200 244.9 48982 -2.0 -400
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 10−29
Original
Optional Equipment
JET − A (6.8 LB/GAL)

210
200
190
180
170
160
150
FUEL WEIGHT − LB
140
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
238.0 238.5 239.0 239.5 240.0 240.5 241.0 241.5 242.0 242.5 243.0 243.5 244.0 244.5 245.0
FUSELAGE STATION − INCHES
JET − B (6.5 LB/GAL)

210
200
190
180
170
160
FUEL WEIGHT − LB
150
140
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
238.0 238.5 239.0 239.5 240.0 240.5 241.0 241.5 242.0 242.5 243.0 243.5 244.0 244.5 245.0
FUSELAGE STATION − INCHES
F92-174
Figure 10−12. Fuel Station Diagram
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−30
Original
Optional Equipment
PART VII
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The MD900 supplemental fuel system option adds a transfer type auxiliary fuel
tank with a usable capacity of approximately 29.4 US gallons (200 LB, Jet-A) under
neath the baggage compartment floor. The tank is filled through a gravity fill port
on the right side of the aircraft. Transfer into the main tank is performed using
a fuel transfer pump mounted in the auxiliary fuel tank. Overfilling the main tank
is prevented by use of a float-type level control valve mounted in the main tank.
This level control valve prevents transfer into the main tank until the fuel remaining
in the main tank is less than approximately 500 LB in normal ground attitude
or approximately 700 LB in normal cruise attitude. The level control valve will
shut off transfer into the main tank if the fuel in the main tank increases to approxi
mately 755 LB in normal ground attitude or approximately 832 LB in normal cruise
attitude. An inline check valve is installed in the fuel transfer line in the main
fuel tank to prevent backflow of fuel from the main tank into the auxiliary tank.
A second check valve may be installed in the auxiliary fuel tank transfer line that
prevents gravity transfer from the auxiliary tank into the main tank in high-speed
cruise flight. The auxiliary tank vent is teed into the existing main tank aft vent
tubing.
The installation includes a cockpit mounted fuel quantity gauge (AUX FUEL) for
the auxiliary tank, a fuel transfer pump switch, and a fuel transfer indicator light
and on some installations, an additional grounding jack is located above the auxiliary
fuel tank filler.
Electrical power is supplied from the battery bus through the `ÀUX FUEL'' 5 AMP
circuit breaker. A separate 1 AMP `ÀUX FUEL XMIT'' circuit breaker provides
power for fuel quantity indicating. These circuit breakers are located on the baggage
compartment circuit breaker panel under ``BATTERY BUS''.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 10−31
Original
Optional Equipment
AUXILIARY TANK FILLER NECK FUEL VENT ROLL OVER VALVE
FUEL QUANTITY TRANSMITTER

FUEL VENT LINE
AUXILIARY FUEL TANK
FUEL TRANSFER LINE
FUEL TRANSFER LINE

FUEL LEVEL CONTROL VALVE
MAIN FUEL TANK (REF.)
SUPPLEMENTAL FUEL SYSTEM INSTALLATION
STA 230.5 BULKHEAD

VENT ROLLOVER VALVE AUX FUEL PORT
CHECK VALVE BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR
(REF.)
CABIN FLOOR (REF)
FUEL TRANSFER LINE VENT/ROLLOVER VALVE
FUEL TRANSFER LINE VENT LINE
MAIN FUEL TANK

(REF) GRAVITY FILL PORT
LEVEL CONTROL VALVE

CHECK VALVE
AFT RH VENT LINE

AUXILIARY FUEL TANK
FLAME ARRESTOR NEW CHECK VALVE FUEL QUANTITY XMITTER FLOAT
(IF INSTALLED)
AFT VENT FAIRING TRANSFER PUMP
FUEL TANK DRAIN PLUG
FUEL TRANSFER LINE
(AUXILIARY FUEL TANK ROTATED 90° CW FOR CLARITY)
SUPPLEMENTAL FUEL SYSTEM SCHEMATIC

F92-175B
Figure 10−13. Supplemental Fuel System
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−32
Original
Optional Equipment
PART VIII
Fuel additives:
Anti-icing additives, if required, must be added to the auxiliary fuel tank during
refueling.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 10−33
Original
Optional Equipment
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−34
Original
Optional Equipment
Rescue Hoist
10−10. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: RESCUE HOIST
PART I
GENERAL
The rescue hoist system provides a means for lowering and raising personnel or
cargo from an airborne helicopter. It can be operated from the passenger cabin by
a qualified crewmember or from the pilot station.
PART II
LIMITATIONS
Type of operation:
Hoist operations must be done under the approved airworthiness and/or operating
rules for external loads.
Minimum flight crew:
Pilot - operations with hoist stowed.
Pilot and hoist operator - during hoist operations.
The hoist operator must wear the approved safety gear and safety
WARNING harness, and have voice communications with the pilot during
hoist operations.
Weight and balance:
With hoist installed, lateral CG can be more than the weight and
CAUTION balance limits shown with fuel consumption. Flight planning must
include a minimum fuel lateral CG check.
Maximum lateral CG limit at 60 KIAS or less (ref. Figure 10-14):

+9.0 inch (22.86 cm) at 5550 lb (2495 kg) gross weight;
+7.5 inch (19.05 cm) at 6500 lb (2948 kg) gross weight.
At airspeeds more than 60 KIAS, normal CG limits apply.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 10−35
Rescue Hoist
Airspeed limitations:
Observe airspeed limitations in Section II with hoist installed and doors closed.
Observe VNE for doors open/removed flight in Section II.
Hoist limitations:
Maximum load on hoist is 600 lb (272 kg).
Maximum permissible cable deflection is 15° with respect to the aircraft vertical
axis.
NOTE: Flight with a load on the hook can increase hook loads and exceed hoist load
limits. Flight conditions that could cause an overload are shock loads induced
from slack on the cable or sharp turns with an extended cable.
During normal flight operations, the cable/hook must be in the fully raised posi
tion.
Center of gravity limitations:
Size, weight, shape of load, and cable length may affect flight
CAUTION characteristics.
6500 MAXIMUM LATERAL CG

LIMIT AT KIAS OR LESS:
+9.0 INCH AT 5550 LB
6000 GROSS WEIGHT; +7.5 INCH
AT 6500 LB GROSS WEIGHT.
5500
WEIGHT (LB)
5000
4500
4000
3500
3000
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LATERAL CG STATION (INCH)
FM10-015
Figure 10−14. Center of Gravity Envelope for Hoist Operations Below 60 KIAS
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−36 Revision 4
Optional Equipment
Rescue Hoist
PART III
CABLE CUTTING:
Procedures:
Pilot: Activate the CABLE CUT switch on collective to jettison load in the
event of an emergency.
Hoist operator: Use provided cable cutters.
GENERATOR FAILURE:
NOTE: Hoist operations can require up to 125 amps of electrical power (63% load from
one generator).
Procedures:
Monitor operating generator load and turn off unnecessary electrical
equipment if required to maintain generator load within limits. Allowing
a GENERATOR HIGH LOAD condition to exist will result in the
operating generator going off line.
ADVISORY INDICATIONS:
Indications: Green or yellow indicator light (located on control pendant) - steady green
or yellow.
Conditions: Motor overtemperature.
NOTE: The light will remain on until the motor has cooled or electrical power to the
controller is switched off.
Procedures: Complete hoist operation in progress.
Prolonged operation of hoist with motor over−temperature light

CAUTION illuminated will result in damaged or a “burned out” motor.
Indications: Flashing green light and a reduction of hoist speed.
Conditions: Hoist load above 250 LB with load mode select switch set to 250.
Procedures: Reduce hoist load or place load mode select switch to 600.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−37
Rescue Hoist
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Preflight checks:
To lower the work platform/steps, remove the quick release pin
CAUTION on the hoist strut and move strut aside. The quick release pin must
be reinstalled before any load is placed on the hoist.
NOTE: External power is required for functional checks.
Rescue hoist assembly CHECK − FOR OIL
LEAKS AND GENERAL
CONDITION
Hoist fairing CONDITION AND
SECURITY
Electrical connections CHECK
Hook assembly - freeness of swivel and latch CHECK
Hoist support tube CHECK MOUNTING
Hoist strut CHECK MOUNTING AND
QUICK RELEASE PIN
Pendant control - electrical connection CHECK
HOIST PWR and HOIST CUT circuit breakers IN
Pilot's hoist control panel CHECK SWITCH OFF
Electrical Master Panel
Power switch BAT/EXT
Pilot's Hoist Control
Hoist arming switch ON
Hoist armed light - on CHECK
Payout displays CHECK
Hoist operational check (pilot and operator) CHECK
Do not restrict cable payout during this check. Fouling of the cable
CAUTION on the drum will result if this precaution is not followed.
Reel out approximately 25 feet (8 meters) or more of OPERATE HOIST

cable by using both the pendant and the pilot payout
controls. Do not exceed 15° cable deflection
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−38 Original
Optional Equipment
Rescue Hoist
NOTE: The cable should be reeled out onto a smooth, clean surface or payed out into
a drum. Exercise care to prevent kinking of the cable.
Reel in cable by using both the pendant and the pilot OPERATE HOIST
payout controls and verify hoist stops when hook
reaches upper limit without excess tension on cable.
Verify that pilot's pay out switch overrides hoist oper
ator's pendant control.
NOTE: It is important that the cable be reeled in with an even pull under a drag load of
10 to 20 lb (4.54 to 9.07 kg) so that it does not wrap loosely on the drum. A drag
load must be applied using a gloved hand or clean heavy cloth on the cable to
achieve tight, even layers on the drum.
Hoist arming switch OFF
Electrical Master Panel:
Power switch OFF
Hoist operation:
The hoist operator must wear the approved safety gear and safety
WARNING
harness, and have voice communications with the pilot during
hoist operations.
NOTE: Operation of the pilot payout switch overrides the hoist operator.
Hoist arming switch ON
Stabilize the rotorcraft in a hover over area ESTABLISH
Cabin door (if closed) OPEN
Hoist operator select load mode 250 OR 600 LB
Payout control switch DOWN
NOTE: If possible, ensure that the helicopter has been electrically grounded prior to
attaching cargo to remove static electricity that may build up in flight.
Payout control switch UP
Maintain hover until the load is inside the passenger cabin – unless
CAUTION safety or operational conditions dictate otherwise.
NOTE: Certain combinations of weight and cable length may induce a noticeable
lateral oscillation. Should a lateral oscillation occur, raise or lower the load to
alleviate this condition.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 10−39
Rescue Hoist
MOTOR
Ô CABLE PAYOUT DISPLAY
ÔÔ
Ô ÔÔ
UP FEET MOTOR
METERS
106 UP
Ô ÔÔ
WRN
6
LOAD MODE SELECT WRN 25
INDICATOR OFF
Ô ÔÔ
LIGHT 0 OFF 6
2 0 0
5 2 0
Ô ÔÔ
DN 0 5
HOIST LB DN 0
HOIST LB
PAYOUT EMERGENCY CABLE CUT

EMERGENCY CABLE CUT
DIRECTION/SPEED PUSH BUTTON SWITCH
CONTROL
CABLE
ICS CONTROL SWITCH
CUT
LATEST
CONFIGURATION
CABLE CUT
UP
H
O
I T/O
HOIST OPERATOR CONTROL S
PENDANT ASSEMBLY
DN T
PILOT'S PAYOUT TIMER
CONTROL SWITCH
COLLECTIVE CONTROL
MODULE (REF)
25 NOTE: LOCATIONS OF PILOT HOIST POWER SWITCH/ARMED LIGHT AND HOIST POWER
SWITCH/ARMED INDICATOR VARY WITH INSTALLED OPTIONS.
CABLE PAYOUT
METERS
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT MOUNTED CIRCUIT
BREAKER PANEL
HOIST ARMING SWITCH
ON HOIST HOIST
HOIST CUT PWR
106
PWR
OFF
CABLE PAYOUT HOIST
FEET HOIST POWER SWITCH/ARMED RESCUE HOIST
INDICATOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LATEST CONFIGURATION
PILOT HOIST CONTROL HOIST ARMED LIGHT FM10-016
Figure 10−15. Rescue Hoist Controls

FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−40 Original
Optional Equipment
Rescue Hoist
PART V
PERFORMANCE DATA
Reduce hover gross weight capability 70 LB when hovering with

CAUTION rescue hoist installed.
Refer to Section V for hover performance data.
PART VI
Maximum operating and hoist load weights:

Maximum gross weight for hoist operations is 6500 LB including hoist load.
Maximum load on the hoist is 600 LB. This is a structural limit and does not
assure loading within approved limits. Maximum allowable hoist load changes
with gross weight and aircraft CG. Refer to Figure 10-16 to determine maximum
allowable hoist load.
STATION (ARM) MOMENT

ITEM WEIGHT
Lateral Longitudinal Lateral Longitudinal
Hoist installation 136.8 55.60 199.1 7611 27231

Hoist Load −−−−− 59.25 199.1 −−−−− −−−−−
Hoist lateral CG determination:

The following examples show a minimum crew of pilot and hoist operator. Notice
that in Example I, the helicopter is enroute (above 60 KIAS) and the hoist operator
is stationed in the left rear facing seat, thereby maintaining the lateral CG limit
of "2 IN.
In Example II, the helicopter is at the destination (below 60 KIAS) and the hoist
operator moves to the right of the aircraft cabin and stands on step.
Example III shows CG with a load on the hoist.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−41
Rescue Hoist
EXAMPLE I: Lateral CG Determination − Enroute (above 60 KIAS)

ITEM
Hoist Installation 136.8 55.60 7611
Pilot 200 15.85 3170
Hoist Operator (L/H seat) 200 -19.00 -3800
Fuel 700 0.00 0
Gross Weight 4509.6 8446
Calculation of Lateral CG:

CG at Gross Weight:

= = 1.90
Gross Weight 4509.6
EXAMPLE II: Lateral CG Determination − Destination (below 60 KIAS)

ITEM
Hoist Installation 136.8 55.60 7611
Pilot 200 15.85 3170
Hoist Operator (R/H step) 200 35.00 7000
Fuel 400 0.00 0
Gross Weight 4209.6 19246

CG at Gross Weight:

= = 4.60
Gross Weight 4209.6
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−42 Original
Optional Equipment
Rescue Hoist
EXAMPLE III: Lateral CG Determination − With Hoist Load

ITEM
Basic Weight 3272.8 1465.0
Hoist Installation 136.8 55.60 7611.0
Pilot 200.0 15.85 3170.0
Hoist Operator (R/H step) 200.0 35.00 7000.0
Hoist load 250.0 59.25 14812.5
Fuel 400.0 0.00 0
Gross Weight 4409.6 34058.5

CG at Gross Weight:
Moment at Gross Weight 34058.5

= = 7.72
Gross Weight 4409.6
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−43
Rescue Hoist
6500 100 LB
6400
200 LB
6300
300 LB
HELICOPTER GROSS WEIGHT (LB) - WITHOUT HOIST LOAD
6200
400 LB
6100
500 LB
6000 600 LB
5900 FOR USE BELOW
5800 60 KIAS ONLY
5700
5600
5500
5400
MAXIMUM
5300 HOIST LOAD
5200
5100
5000
4900
4800
4700
4600
4500
4400
4300
4200
4100
4000
3900
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0
HELICOPTER LATERAL STATION CG (INCH) - WITHOUT HOIST LOAD FM10-017
Figure 10−16. Allowable Rescue Hoist Loading Chart
Use of chart:
Use Figure 10-16 to determine the maximum hoist load for this operation.
Example:
Known:
From EXAMPLE II: lateral CG = 4.6 inches
gross weight = approximately 4210 LB.
Enter chart at the ``Helicopter Gross Weight Without Hoist Load'' scale at 4210
pounds and proceed horizontally to intersect with a line drawn vertically from
the ``Helicopter Lateral Station Without Hoist Load'' scale at 4.6 IN. Where the
two lines intersect is the allowable hoist load. For this example the allowable
hoist load is approximately 369 pounds.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−44 Revision 4
Optional Equipment
Rescue Hoist
PART VII
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The hoist assembly consists of a cable drum that holds 245 feet (75.7 meters) of
3/16” in. (5 millimeter) spin resistant cable, a fail safe load brake, 28 VDC electric
motor, limit switches coupled to the cable drum to control fully-extended and inter
mediate cable positions, and redundant switches. The hoist installation is mounted
to the airframe by a support tube and strut assembly (Ref. Figure 10-17).
Hoist speed control is accomplished by a command applied to either the variable
speed switch on the hoist operator's control pendant or the constant speed switch
located on the collective control module. With the load selection switch set at 250,
cable speed is 225 feet (68.5 meters) per minute. With the load selection switch
set at 600, cable speed is 100 feet (30.5 meters) per minute (Ref. Figure 10-15).
If the load select switch is set at 250 and the hoist load is above 250 LB, a flashing
warning light will illuminate and the hoist speed will automatically be reduced
to 100 feet (30.5 meters) per minute.
The controller also passes cable position information from the hoist. This position
information is absolute and will continue to provide cable position information if
power is interrupted.
The pilot's payout switch overrides the hoist operator. When the pilot operates the
payout switch, the hoist is automatically set to the 600 LB 100 feet (30.5 meters)
per minute mode.
Additional information pertaining to the hoist installation may be found in the
Breeze-Eastern Corp. manual TD-92-015.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−45
Rescue Hoist
HOIST ASSEMBLY
(FAIRING
REMOVED) VARIABLE SPEED
CONTROLLER
É
HOOK
CONTROL
PENDANT
MID SKID GUARD
HOIST SUPPORT ASSEMBLY ROTATED
FAIRING
HAND HOLD
(OPTIONAL)
SUPPORT
TUBE
15°
15°
WHITE STRIPE WHITE STRIPE

STRUT
AFT SKID TUBE

INBOARD
COVER
MID SKID FWD SKID TUBE
AFT COVER
GUARD
F92-177A
Figure 10−17. Rescue Hoist Installation

FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−46 Original
Optional Equipment
Rescue Hoist
PART VIII
Table 10−6. Servicing Materials

Hoist assembly:
MIL-L-7808 Stauffer Jet I Stauffer Chemical Co.
380 Madison Avenue
New York, NY 10017
American PQ American Oil and
Lubricant 6899 Supply Co.
Mobil Avrex S Mobil Oil Co.
Turbo 256
Brayco 880H Bray Oil Co
1925 Marianna Street
Los Angeles, CA 90032
Exxon Turbo Exxon Co.
Oil 2389
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−47
Rescue Hoist
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−48 Original
Optional Equipment
Removable Copilot Controls
10−11. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: REMOVABLE COPILOT CONTROLS
PART I
GENERAL
The Removable copilot controls allows the aircrew to change their cockpit configura
tion from dual to single controls and back to dual, as desired, without the use of
tools.
PART II
LIMITATIONS
Flight crew:
Single pilot operation from the copilot seat is not approved with removable copilot
controls installed.
Placards:
NO SINGLE PILOT OPERATION

USING THIS CONTROL STICK
Figure 10−18. Collective and Cyclic Placards
PART II
LIMITATIONS
No change.
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Copilot cyclic stick removal (Ref. Figure 10-19):
Pull back hook tape fasteners (Velcro) and remove cyclic boot.
Detach P1 connector from receptacle on bulkhead.
Detach bonding jumper.
Remove quick release expandable bolts from from cyclic. Slide cyclic forward
to remove.
Remove protective cover or jumper plug from adjacent dummy receptacle and
install it on J143.
Reinstall cyclic boot.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−49
Properly stow cyclic.

Copilot cyclic stick installation:
NOTE: Verify correct operation of cyclic switches following installation.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−50 Original
Optional Equipment
EXPANDABLE DIAMETER BOLT
CYCLIC STICK ASSEMBLY COPILOT QUICK

RELEASE
BOOT
CYCLIC
BASE
DUMMY RECEPTACLE
JUMPER PLUG OR PROTECTIVE COVER
J143
P-1 CONNECTOR
BONDING JUMPER BULKHEAD (REF)
OPEN CLOSED
COPILOT QUICK RELEASE

F927−060
Figure 10−19. Removable Copilot Cyclic Control

FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−51
Copilot collective stick removal (Ref. Figure 10-20):

Remove dust cap from dummy receptacle.
Detach electrical connector P2 from receptacle J532 and connect it to dummy
receptacle.
Install dustcap on receptacle J532.
Pull back hook tape fasteners (Velcro) along collective boot.
Remove quick release pin by depressing button on top of pin and pull pin out.
Slide collective forward to remove.
Properly stow collective.
Copilot collective stick installation:
NOTE: Verify correct operation of collective switches following installation.
P2
DUST CAP
BOOT
( QUICK RELEASE PIN

DUMMY RECEPTACLE
B
J532
F927−061A
Figure 10−20. Removable Copilot Collective Control

FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−52 Original
Optional Equipment
PART VI
Use the weight information listed below to determine C.G. shift following control
removal or installation.

ITEM (LB) STATION STATION (IN−LB)
Collective control 3.60 142.35 -27.60 512.46 -99.36
Cyclic 3.11 119.86 -15.70 372.77 -48.82
Cyclic boot 0.28 118.65 -15.85 33.22 -42.29
Pedal cover 0.56 101.14 -15.85 56.64 −8.88
Cyclic hole cover 0.45 120.00 -15.85 54.00 -7.13
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−53
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−54 Original
Airframe Fuel FIlter
10−12. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: AIRFRAME FUEL FILTER
PART I
GENERAL
The airframe fuel filter incorporates a filter unit mounted in series between the
aircraft fuel system and the engine fuel system. A pressure sensing switch in the
filter body will illuminate a FUEL FILTER L or R caution light on the instrument
panel when the fuel differential pressure across the filter increases to a preset level.
When the filter becomes fully clogged, a bypass valve contained in the filter unit
opens and the fuel bypasses the filter element.
PART II
LIMITATIONS
Placards:
When the airframe fuel filter is installed, the following placard is required:
AIRFRAME
FUEL FILTER
INSTL
USE PRIMARY
FUELS ONLY
F927−094
Fuel system:
Fuel specification
Primary fuels only (Ref. Section II).
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−55
PART III
FUEL FILTER CLOGGED

FUEL
Indications: Yellow FILTER caution indicator ON.
L R
Conditions: Left, right, or both airframe fuel filter(s) in impending bypass condition.
Procedures: With both fuel boost pumps operational.
Continue the flight in progress.

Service the airframe filter prior to next flight.
Procedures: With single fuel boost pump failure.

Leave operating fuel boost pump ON.
If flight is continued into low fuel conditions (less than 300 pounds
CAUTION remaining), the engine with the failed boost pump will experience
an early flame out due to a loss of the fuel transfer system (Ref.
Figure 10−21).
Land as soon as practical if fuel level falls below 300 pounds.

Procedures: With dual fuel boost pump failure.
FUEL BOOST PUMP FAILURE

Procedures:
Leave operating fuel boost pump ON.
If flight is continued into low fuel conditions (less than 300 pounds
CAUTION remaining), the engine with the failed boost pump will experience
an early flame out due to a loss of the fuel transfer system (Ref.
Figure 10−21).

Land as soon as practical if fuel level falls below 300 pounds.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−56 Original
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Preflight:
Power switch BAT/EXT
Left and right boost pumps ON
Attempting to drain the fuel filter with boost pumps off will cause
CAUTION air to enter the fuel system.
Filter unit, drain valve, and associated lines CHECK FOR LEAKS
Filter unit drain valve PRESS TO DRAIN
NOTE: If the aircraft has been exposed to freezing temperatures, failure of the drain may
be due to ice formation in the filter element.
Press-to-test button PRESS
AIRFRAME FILTER caution lights ON
Left and right boost pumps OFF
Power switch OFF
Post Flight:
When ambient temperature is expected to go below freezing, any water in the fil
ter unit should be drained following completion of flight.
Following the completion of the flight in progress after illumination of the FUEL
FILTER caution light, service the filter prior to the next flight.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−57
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
PRESS TO TEST
BUTTON
OUTLET HOSE
FUEL FILTER
ENCLOSURE
DRAIN VALVE
LH DRAIN LINE DRAIN HOSE
INLET HOSE
NOTE: LEFT HAND SHOWN; RIGHT HAND OPPOSITE. NOT TO SCALE.
RIGHT LEFT
ENGINE ENGINE
VIEW LOOKING AFT
ENGINE DECK
AIRFRAME
FUEL FILTER
RH FUEL FEED SYS
FUEL TRANSFER SYSTEM
LH FUEL
FEED SYS
FUEL FILTER
DRAIN (2PL)
VENT OVBD
DRAIN (2 PL) FUEL BOOST PUMPS FUEL CELL F927−065
Figure 10−21. Airframe Fuel Filter Installation and Block Diagram

FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−58 Original
SX−16 Night Sun: Aft Mount
10−13. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: SX−16 NIGHT SUN WITH AFT MOUNT
PART I
GENERAL
These operating instructions describe the SX-16 Nightsun Searchlight installation
for the MD900 as installed with the aft mount. Additional information may be found
in the SX-16 operations manual. Whenever the installation or operation of this
special mission equipment affects the operation of the basic helicopter, appropriate
mention of the affected procedure, limitation, operation, will be described herein.
The searchlight is mounted to a trapeze-style, quick-disconnect, aft support mount
attached to the rear of the fuselage (Ref. Figure 10-22)
PART II
LIMITATIONS
A landing light shall be switched on when operating below 100ft AGL with the
searchlight (SX-16) on.
The use of the SX-16 as a landing light is not approved.
Do not turn ON the SX-16 while on the ground.
PART III
No change.
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
WARNING Ensure that the searchlight assembly has cooled before handling.
Do not turn the searchlight ON while on the ground.
Temporary blindness may occur to personnel if searchlight is

aimed at vehicles or other aircraft at distances closer that 330 feet
(100 meters).
In the infrared (IR) mode, the light beam is invisible and is a hazard
to personnel at distances closer that 425 FT (130 meters). Do not
perform operational checks of the searchlight with the IR filter in
place while helicopter is on the ground.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−59
Preflight checks:
Aft mount (Ref. Figure 10-22):

Support tube and quick release pins CHECK ATTACHMENT
Vertical and side struts CHECK ATTACHMENT
Bonding jumpers CHECK ATTACHMENT
Mounting plate CHECK ATTACHMENT

Searchlight (Ref. Figure 10-23):
Drive assemblies CHECK
IR filter CHECK CONDITION
Clear lens CHECK CONDITION
Cooling fan intake NO OBSTRUCTIONS
Searchlight mounting CHECK ATTACHMENT
Search light operation (while airborne only):

Turning searchlight ON:
Master switch ON; THEN TO START
Holding the start switch to START longer than 5 seconds will cause
CAUTION damage to the lamp.
NOTE: Do not operate searchlight while on ground unless conducting maintenance

checks. Ground checks may be accomplished with generator power or with the
aircraft connected to a GPU.
The magnetic compass may become inaccurate with the SX−16 ON.
• • Focus and directional control switches OPERATE AS

NECESSARY

Turning searchlight OFF:
CAUTION Do not turn lamp OFF until lamp is fully illuminated.
Searchlight SET TO NEUTRAL

POSITION
Master switch OFF
NOTE: Allow lamp to cool for one minute before turning back ON.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−60 Original
SEARCHLIGHT
SUPPORT TUBE
SX-16
SIDE STRUT
BONDING
JUMPER QUICK
QUICK RELEASE PIN
RELEASE PIN BONDING
JUMPER VERTICAL
STRUT
AFT/SIDE MOUNT STRUT AND SUPPORT TUBE ATTACHMENTS F927-074A
Figure 10−22. SX−16 Aft Mount Installation

Baggage compartment access:
NOTE: To gain access to the baggage compartment, the searchlight and support
assembly must be lowered. Lowering may be accomplished with generator
power or with the aircraft connected to a GPU.
Before attempting to lower the searchlight and support, the

CAUTION searchlight must be aimed toward the ground and the infrared lens
must be lowered. Damage to the lamp assembly and aircraft can
occur if lamp assembly is left in the up position while lowering.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−61
Lowering searchlight and support (Ref. Figure 10-22):

Hand controller
Master switch ON
IRCO switch CLOSE
Directional control switch DOWN
The searchlight must be aimed toward the ground and the infrared
CAUTION lens must be lowered. Damage to the lamp assembly and aircraft
can occur if lamp assembly is left in the up position while lowering.
Master switch OFF

Eectrical master panel:
Power switch OFF

SX 16 Aft mount:
Side strut bonding jumpers SEPARATE
Vertical strut bonding jumper SEPARATE
Side strut quick release pins REMOVE
Aft strut release pin REMOVE
NOTE: While holding the searchlight vertical support strut remove the quick release pin
from the vertical strut, gently lower the SX−16 to the ground.
Raising searchlight and support (Ref. Figure 10-22):
Raising searchlight and support is opposite of lowering except there is no require
ment for electrical power.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−62 Original
AZIMUTH DRIVE ASSEMBLY
ÌÌÌÌÌÌ IR FILTER
ÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ELEVATION DRIVE
ÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ASSEMBLY CLEAR LENS
IR LENS
CONTROL
IR FILTER DRIVE
ASSEMBLY
NOTE: IR FILTER SHOWN RETRACTED
FOCUS
CONTROL
MASTER
SWITCH
DIRECTIONAL
CONTROL
HAND CONTROLLER
F927-063A

Master OFF Removes electrical power from SX-16 system.
ON Turns on electrical power to SX-16 system.
START Energizes lamp starting circuit.
Directional LEFT, RIGHT, Allows aiming of the searchlight.
Control UP, DOWN
FOCUS Press Momentary switch that changes light beam spread.
IRCO CLOSE Positions IR filter in front of lamp.
OPEN Retracts IR filter.
Figure 10−23. SX−16 Searchlight Assembly
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−63
PART V
PERFORMANCE DATA
No change.
PART VI
WEIGHT LONGITUDINAL LONGITUDINAL LATERAL LATERAL

ITEM (LB) STATION (IN) MOMENT STATION (IN) MOMENT
(ARM) (IN-LB) (ARM) (IN-LB)
SX-16 Search light and 66.0 279.3 18433.8 0.0 0.0
support assembly
PART VII
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The SX-16 searchlight installation consists of a gimbal mounted searchlight assem

bly attached to an airframe searchlight mount, an electrical junction box a hand
controller. A 70 AMP circuit breaker, located on the baggage compartment circuit
breaker panel, recieves power from a generator bus.
The SX-16 has a 1600 Watt short arc Xenon lamp with a peak beam intensity
of 30 million candlepower and a typical range of 3200 feet (1 km).
PART VIII
NOTE: A ground power unit should be used while conducting ground maintenance
checks of the SX−16.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−64 Original
RDR 1400C Weather Radar
10−14. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: RDR−1400C WEATHER RADAR
PART I
GENERAL
No change.
PART II
LIMITATIONS
Ambient temperature limits:
Maximum temperature for operating radar is 40°C.
National safety regulations for radar operations shall be followed.
Do not operate radar within 50 FT (15M) of refueling vehicles or

WARNING containers containing flammables or explosives.
Do not operate radar within 100 FT (30M) of refueling operations.
Do not allow personnel within 15 FT (5M) of area being scanned

by antenna when system is transmitting.
Placard:
WEATHER RADAR SYSTEM MUST BE TURNED TO “STBY” OR “OFF” WHEN ON THE GROUND.
PART III
No change.
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
NOTE: Additional operating instructions may be found in the Telephonics Pilot’s Guide,
RDR−1400C Color Weather and Search & Rescue Radar, publication number
106501.
Preflight checks:
• Radome CHECK CONDITION
Engine starting:
Ensure that the RDR 1400C is not switched ON during engine starts.
Landing:
• Function switch SET TO “STBY”, OR

OFF
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−65
Optional Equipment
PART V
PERFORMANCE DATA
No change.
PART VII
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
RDR-1400C interface with EFIS 40 or EFIS 50:
The Telephonics Weather Radar RDR1400C is an integrated system, interfacing
with the LITEF LCR 92S AHRS and the Honeywell EFIS 40 installed by the
Honeywell (formerly Allied Signal, Inc.) IFR STC SR00436WI-D, or the
Honeywell EFIS 50 installed by the Heli-Dyne STC SR09151RC.
The Telephonics Weather Radar system consists of 5 flight-line replaceable units:
Receiver-Transmitter RT-1401B
Control Panel CP-113
Navigation Concentrator NC-104B
Radar Antenna Drive unit DA-1203A
Antenna Array AA-4510A
The Receiver-Transmitter (R/T) is installed in the nose of the MD900. The
R/T provides pulsed X-band output signal to the sector-scanning antenna. The
reflected signal is amplified by the receiver, digitized and then routed to the
Navigation Concentrator for conversion to ARINC 453 data for the EFIS Symbol
Generators. Operating parameters permit optimum performance in each of the
five operational modes: 3 search, weather, and beacon modes
The Radar Control Panel is located in the center console. All of the WX system
controls except for display range are located on this control panel. Mode selections,
Antenna Tilt, Search gain, BCN gain, and Scan are available for selection. The
Antenna Tilt and Roll adjustment screws are also located on this panel.
The Navigation Concentrator (NC) is installed in the nose, just above the
R/T. It provides interface capabilities to convert WX R/T data into ARINC 453
format required by the EFIS Symbol Generator. The Nav Concentrator receives
low speed ARINC 429 data from the EFIS containing the range selected and
converts this into usable information for the R/T. The NC also receives low speed
ARINC 429 data from the Control Panel converting it into mode and control
commands for the R/T. Lastly, the NC converts 429 attitude information from
the AHRS for the R/T.
The Radar Antenna Assembly consists of a drive unit and a 10 inch array.
The motor driven drive unit positions the array in azimuth and elevation axis.
Scans are performed in 90 degree sectors. Stabilization is in accordance with
pitch and roll signals from aircraft AHRS as converted by the NC-104B. Tilt
is selectable for +/- 15 degrees from horizontal from the Control panel. The 10
inch array has a range of 185NM.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−66 Original
EFIS #1 EFIS #2
RANGE RANGE
ARINC 429 ARINC 429
DATA NAV DATA
ARINC 429 CONCENTRATOR ARINC 429
ATTITUDE ARINC 453 ARINC 453
CONTROL PANEL
CP-113
ON/OFF
RT-1401B
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
WAVE GUIDE
ÉÉÉ
ANTENNA DRIVE
TILT
DA-1203 ROLL TRIM
ANTENNA
AA-451A
F927−078
Figure 10−24. RDR 1400C EFIS System Interface

System Function/Operational Modes:
Search modes
There are three search modes, with 6 ranges. Two of the search modes (SR1,
SR2) can detect and display surface targets down to a minimum range of
1000 feet. Even under adverse conditions, targets such as a small boat can
be detected. The search modes permit ground mapping or searching for topo
graphical features such as bodies of water, islands, high ground, bridges,
etc. The slant range from the aircraft to a reflective ground object, within
the area of scan, can be deduced directly from the display. The Search 1 mode
uses special clutter rejection circuitry and is designed for short-range (ie
0.5, 1,2,5,10 and 20NM) mapping of targets in a sea clutter environment.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−67
Optional Equipment
Search 2 is designed for precision ground mapping with very high resolution
of short ranges (ie 20NM or less). Search 3 is designed for maximum clutter
returns as required for mapping of oil slicks. On long ranges (beyond 20NM),
Search 1 and Search 2 are similar to Search 3.
Weather Avoidance Modes (Wx and WxA)
By means of a radar echo displayed on the EFIS, the system can furnish
continuous enroute weather information relative to rain cloud formation, rain
fall rate, thunderstorms with moisture, and areas of icing conditions. Digital
circuitry provides a means for determining the relative density of the rainfall
areas. With the EFIS display the pilot can see storm areas in his flight path
and can also distinguish corridors of relative calm through the storms. The
system detects the strong returns from high density rainfall and converts
them into red areas on the EFIS display. If the pilot changes the mode to
the weather alert (WxA) mode and the red area is beyond the range displayed,
the TGT ALRT will flash.
Beacon Mode
In the beacon mode, the system can interrogate and receive pulses from a
fixed transponder(s) located within a range up to 160 NM. The coded replies
are received on a special beacon frequency (9310 MHz). The radar indicator
displays beacon returns from both 2-pulse and DO-172 6 pulse transponders,
located in range and bearing with respect to the aircraft.
The beacon mode can be operated alone, or combined with either the weather
or search modes.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−68 Original
ON 60
TST Wx WxA
ANTENNA
STBY CONTROL
SRCH BCN
OFF
FUNCTION SELECTOR
SRCH GAIN TILT
0
PRIMARY MODE
BCN -5 +5
SELECTORS
GAIN PULL
PUSH STAB -10 +10
CODE OFF
MIN MAX MIN MAX -15 +15
SECONDARY MODE SELECTOR AND

GAIN CONTROLS F927−090
Figure 10−25. CP 113

Operational controls:
Function Selector
OFF Removes system power.
STBY System is operationally ready; no display.
TEST Displays a test pattern without transmitting, identified by TEST and
RT FAULT.
ON System transmits in normal operation.
605 is not supported by this installation and functions the same as “ON”.
Primary Mode Selectors (PUSH ON/ PUSH OFF)
Wx Selects weather mode, the primary mode of operation. Weather displayed
and Wx appear on screen. When pressed again, the weather mode is removed.
If no other mode button is active, the Wx mode remains.
WxA Selects weather alert mode. WxA appears and Target Alert is enabled.
SRCH Pressing this push button selects the three Search modes in sequential
cyclic manner (i. e., Search 1, Search 2, Search 3, etc.).
Search modes are as follows:
Search 1 - Sea clutter rejection. Active on the ten- mile range or less.
Search 2 - Short range precision mapping. Active on the ten- mile range
or less.
Search 3 - Normal surface mapping.
NOTE: Beacon mode is compatible with both weather mode and Search mode.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−69
Optional Equipment
BCN Pressing this button will select the two Beacon type formats to be se
lected. Sequentially pressing the Beacon button will select the following bea
con modes:
Beacon Only Mode - Beacon A, Beacon B, Beacon A, Beacon B, . . .
Dual Mode (Beacon/ Weather or Beacon/ Search) Beacon A, Beacon B, Beacon
Off, Beacon Am . . .
Beacon Only Mode: - If the starting mode of operation is weather (or search),
then pressing the beacon button will place the system in Beacon/ Weather
(Search) mode. To activate beacon only mode, press the weather (or search)
button to turn off weather (search) mode. To reactivate dual mode, press either
the weather or search buttons.
Beacon A - Standard 2-pulse beacon

Beacon B - DO-172 compatible beacon
Secondary Mode Selector and Gain Controls
BCN GAIN - The Beacon Gain is a rotary potentiometer that controls the
gain of the Beacon receiver.
SRCH GAIN - The Search Gain is a rotary potentiometer that controls the
gain of the Search receiver.
CODE - Pressing this switch selects Beacon Codes in a sequential cyclic fash
ion (i. e., Code 0, Code 1, Code 2, . . . Code 15 or Code 0, Code 1, Code 2,
. . . Code 9) depending on Beacon Mode selected. The selected code is annun
ciated on the MFD.
When DO-172 Beacon (Beacon Mode B) is selected via the BCN button, the
total of sixteen codes (0-15) can be selected by the Code switch. Selecting
a Standard two-pulse Beacon (Beacon Mode A) via the BCN button, the total
of ten codes (0-9) can be selected by the Code button. The Code button is
not active unless the Beacon mode has been selected.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−70 Original
LEO−II−A5 Observation System
10−15. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: LEO−II−A5 OBSERVATION SYSTEM
PART I
GENERAL
These operating instructions describe the LEO-II-A5 installed either on the “univer
sal mount” or the External Paload Mounting System (EPMS). Additional information
may be found in the LEO-II-A5 operator manual.
Whenever the installation or operation of this special mission equipment affects
the operation of the basic helicopter, appropriate mention of the affected procedure,
limitation, operation, will be described herein.
PART II
LIMITATIONS
EPMS only:
Maximum airspeed 140 KIAS.
Do not use the equipment adaptors as steps.
PART III
No change.
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
NOTE: Additional operational procedures may be found in the Cumulus LEO−II−A5
operating instructions manual.
Preflight checks:
• Stabilized turret assembly CHECK CONDITION

AND ATTACHEMENT
TO MOUNTING
SURFACE
• EPMS
• • Main beam and cross tube attachment brackets CHECK CONDITION
AND INTEGRITY OF
STEP ASSEMBLY
• • Cross tube attachment brackets CHECK ATTACHMENT
TO LANDING GEAR
• • Equipment adaptor CHECK CONDITION
AND SECURITY
Engine starting:
Ensure that the laptop control unit power switch is OFF during engine starts.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−71
UNIVERSAL MOUNT
AFT CROSS TUBE AT EPMS

TACH BRACKET MAIN BEAM STABILIZED TURRET
ASSEMBLY
EQUIPMENT ADAPTOR
FRONT CROSS TUBE AT
TACH BRACKET
F927−064A
Figure 10−26. LEO−II−A5 Mounting
PART V
PERFORMANCE DATA
No change.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−72 Original
PART VI

Universal Mount:
Stabilized turret assembly 94.90 83.60 7933.60 0.0 0.0
with external harness
EPMS:
Main beam 28.75 181.90 5229.60 +41 +1178.8
Leo-II Adaptor (fwd RH) 12.80 119.90 1534.70 +41 +524.80
Stabilized turret assembly 94.90 105.50 10011.95 +41 +3890.9
with external harness
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−73
PART VII
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The LEO-II-A5 Observation System consists of a Stabilised Turret Assembly (STA),
Control Electronics Unit (CEU) and Laptop Control Unit (LCU).
Stabilized Turret Assembly:
The STA consists of three sub units namely the Stabilised Turret Unit (STU),
Sensor Pack Assembly (SPA), and the Front Shell Assembly.
The STA may be mounted to either the universal mount or the EPMS (Ref.
Figure 10-26).
Stabilised turret unit (STU)
The STU is a four-axis design, gyro stabilised in outer azimuth and elevation
and inner azimuth and elevation. The STU provides the remote movement
of the Sensor Pack Line-Of-Sight (LOS), corresponding to the centre of the
imaged scene, to any position within the Field-Of-Regard (FOR). The FOR
for the LEO-II-A5 Observation System is mechanical +20 degrees to –105
degrees in elevation and a continuous 360 degrees in azimuth from the
look-ahead position.
Sensor pack Assembly (SPA)
The Sensor Pack contains the gyroscope, Sensor Control Electronics PCB,
Triple QWIP thermal imager with three fields of view optics, TV Zoom Camera
Assembly with a Three-CCD camera and 54X zoom lens, and a Dummy
Spotter TV Assembly in the standard configuration.
Front Shell Assembly
The Front Shell Assembly consists of an aluminium shell into which windows
are fitted to accommodate the optical paths of the various sensors of the Sensor
Pack Assembly. It also houses a desiccant holder, which eliminates moisture
built-up in the STA.
CONTROL ELECTRONIC UNIT (CEU):
The CEU houses all computing and control functions of the STA. It is the central
point of transfer for system signals, command, and data I/O. The CEU controls
power distribution and system timing. It implements software algorithms that
perform such tasks as the generation of overlay symbology and controlling the
menu-driven functions of the system. The CEU communicates with other system
modules through a serial data bus.
LAPTOP CONTROL UNIT (LCU)
The LCU is a lightweight laptop held unit by which control of the Observation
System is executed.
The Laptop Control Unit is held in place with a neck strap on the operator's
lap during flight. The Laptop Control Unit is used by the operator to steer the
STA and control the sensor fitted in the Sensor Payload Assembly.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−74 Original
Annunciator Panel
10−16. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
PART I
GENERAL
This panel advises the pilot of the operating mode and status of auxiliary fuel trans
fer, pitot heat, ground power unit door (aft mounted battery only), and airframe
fuel filter. These annunciator lights may be installed individually or in part as deter
mined by the optional equipment installed and are only available with the Honeywell
IFR Avionics STC.
PART III
For actions following illumination of any of the caution/advisory annunciators, refer
to Section X for Supplemental Fuel System and Airframe Fuel Filter; for the remain
ing caution/advisories, refer to Section III.
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
To check the operation of the annunciators, press the ANNUN test button on the
Avionics switch panel.
DME ANNUN
CCW HOLD DIM CCW
CW RELEASE BRIGHT CW
AHRS2 TEST AHRS1
MRKR AP/SAS ANNUN
DG DG
SLVD SLVD
F927−110
Figure 10−27. Caution and Advisory Test Button
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−75
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−76 Original
Moving Map Navigation Systems
10−17. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: MOVING MAP NAVIGATION

SYSTEMS
PART I
GENERAL
Whenever the installation or operation of this special mission equipment affects
the operation of the basic helicopter, appropriate mention of the affected procedure,
limitation, or operation, will be described herein.
EuroNav III:
The EuroNav III is a GPS based navigation system with moving map display
and integrated task management system. The system is protected by a 5 ampere
circuit breaker located on the baggage compartment circuit breaker panel and
is approved with for use with the AI-500 monitor.
AeroNav R II:
The AeroNav II is a Moving Map and Task Management system. The system
is protected by a 5 ampere circuit breaker located on the baggage compartment
circuit breaker panel and is approved with for use with the AVM4090 monitor.
Dornier DKG4:
The DKG 4 moving map is a digital map system that provides pilot navigation
support. The digital pictorial information is displayed on the Avalex AVM4090
Monitor in the cockpit and/or on a Skyquest monitor in a cabin workstation
(if installed). The system is protected by a 2 ampere circuit breaker located on
the baggage compartment circuit breaker panel.
PART II
LIMITATIONS
The use of any approved moving map navigation system as a primary means of
navigation is not approved.
EuroNav III:
Normal ambient temperature range is 0°C to 40°C for cockpit mounted AI-500
monitor.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−77
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
AeroNav R II and Dornier DKG4:

Refer to AeroNavII/III HB-NAV-350, and Dornier DKG4 HB103-000000B/01
operator manuals for operational information.
PWR CMPT VIDEO FRZ/Z
F927−113
Figure 10−28. AVM4090 Display Controls

Table 10−7. AVM4090 Display Control Functions
Control Function
PWR Turns unit on or off when pressed.
Displays the video source. Each time this button is pressed, the video source
CMPT
(VGA1 or VGA2) appears on the lower left side of the display.
This button allows the display of FLIR, CCD, or VCR playback. Each time this but
VIDEO ton is pressed, the video source (VID1, VID2 or VID3) appears on the lower left
side of the display.
This button processes video and CMPT (SVGA) inputs and either freezes or zooms
FRZ/Z
or toggles between the two.
These buttons are used to control display brightness and operates the menu sys
tem. The monitor retains the previous brightness setting upon restart.
NOTE: Refer to the Avalex AVM4090 Operations guide for more detailed information.
EuroNav III:
Refer to Table 10-8 for AI-500 monitor operating instructions.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−78 Original
F927−109
Figure 10−29. AI−500 Monitor

Table 10−8. AI−500 Control Functions
Control Function
POWER When the Power button is depressed to ON the adjacent power indicator lights to
green. To turn the power off, depress the POWER button again.
VIDEO SELECT The two buttons, identified as IR/CCD or MAP select their respective video source.
The selected button lights in green when depressed.
MENU Pressing the MENU button provides a screen menu which allows the operator to
adjust the following levels:
CONTRAST: (Picture Contrast) Adjusts the picture contrast. Decreasing the value
lowers the contrast, and increasing the value raises it. Adjustable range: -30 to
+30
BRIGHTNESS: (Picture Brightness) Adjusts the picture brightness. Decreasing
the value makes the picture darker, and increasing the value makes it brighter.
Adjustable range: -30 to +30
SHARPNESS: (Picture Sharpness) Adjust the picture sharpness. Decreasing the
value makes the picture softer, and increasing the value makes it more sharp. Ad
justable range: -30 to +30
CHROMA: (Picture Chroma) Adjusts the picture chroma. Decreasing the value
makes the picture lighter, and increasing the value makes it deeper. Adjustable
range: -30 to +30
PHASE: (Picture phase, NTSC only) Adjusts the picture phase. Decreasing the val
ue makes the picture more reddish and increasing the value makes it more green
ish. Adjustable range: -30 to +30
COLOUR SYSTEM: (Colour System) Displays the colour system (NTSC or PAL)
used by the video equipment.
POWER SAVE: (Power Save) With the power save function set to ON (active) the
monitor automatically enters standby mode when no video signal is input. When
the power save function is active the POWER indicator blinks in green. When a
video signal is input, the power save function becomes inactive and the monitor is
restored to normal operation. Pressing any buttons on the front operation panel
also sets the power safe function to inactive.
The power save function becomes active when no video signal is input for over 30
seconds.
COLOUR SWITCH: Turns the picture into black and white for checking the white
balance.
The MENU + and - buttons control the settings for each of these controls.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−79
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−80 Original
W.E.S.T. Battery Protection System
10−18. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: W.E.S.T BATTERY PROTECTION

SYSTEM
PART I
GENERAL
The W.E.S.T. Ensave 02 battery protection system allows the pilot to use selected
electrical equipment with the aircraft battery OFF.
PART III
No change.
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Operating the Ensave 02:
NOTE: The battery protection system will not function with generator/GPU power and
is designed to be operated with the POWER switch OFF.
Pressing the indicator button, activates the battery protection system.
Press the indicator button once to activate the GND 1 consumers.
Press the indicator button a second time to activate and add the GND 2 con
sumers.
Pressing the indicator button a third time deactivates the battery protection
system.
Once the system is activated, battery power to GND 1/GND2 consumers will
be available for one hour. After the one hour period is completed, a buzzer sounds
advising the operator that battery power to the GND 1/GND 2 consumers will
be removed within 10 seconds.
NOTE: The operator may reactivate the battery protection system following an
automatic shut off by pressing the button again, however sufficient battery power
for starting may not be available.
GND 1
GND 2
F927−097
Figure 10−30. Ensave02 Indicator/Button
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−81
W.E.S.T. Battery Protection System
PART VII
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system uses a timer and “consumer” button functions to time the usage of
selected equipment for specific periods without draining the battery to the extent
that a battery start could not be accomplished. At the end of the specified time,
a buzzer sounds to alert the pilot that battery usage has reached a defined point.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−82 Original
SX−16 Night Sun: EPMS Mount
10−19. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: SX−16 NIGHT SUN WITH EPMS

MOUNT AND LASER POINTER
PART I
GENERAL
These operating instructions describe the SX-16 Nightsun Searchlight with laser
pointer installed on the external payload mounting system (EPMS). Additional infor
mation may be found in the SX-16 operator manual and the W.E.S.T. “Operator
panel for SX-16 and laser system”. Whenever the installation or operation of this
special mission equipment affects the operation of the basic helicopter, appropriate
mention of the affected procedure, limitation, operation, will be described herein.
PART II
LIMITATIONS
A landing light shall be switched on when operating below 100FT AGL with the
searchlight (SX-16) on.
The use of the SX-16 as a landing light is not approved.
Do not turn ON the SX-16 while on the ground.
Maximum airspeed 140 KIAS.
Do not use the equipment adaptors as steps.
Searchlight to be in maximum up position and facing forward when not in use.
PART III
No change.
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
WARNING Ensure that the searchlight assembly has cooled before handling.
Do not turn the searchlight ON while on the ground.
Temporary blindness may occur to personnel if searchlight is

aimed at vehicles or other aircraft at distances closer that 330 feet
(100 meters).
In the infrared (IR) mode, the light beam is invisible and is a hazard
to personnel at distances closer that 425 FT (130 meters). Do not
perform operational checks of the searchlight with the IR filter in
place while helicopter is on the ground.
Avoid aiming the laser pointer at personnel below a distance of 72

feet (22 meters).
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−83
PREFLIGHT CHECKS
EPMS (Ref. Figure 10-31):

Main beam and cross tube attachment CHECK CONDITION AND
brackets INTEGRITY OF STEP ASSEMBLY
Cross tube attachment brackets CHECK ATTACHMENT TO
LANDING GEAR
Equipment adaptors CHECK CONDITION AND
SECURITY
AFT EQUIPMENT ADAPTOR
SX-16-AFT MOUNT
FWD EQUIPMENT
ADAPTOR
LASER POINTER
SX-16-FWD MOUNT
AFT CROSS TUBE

ATTACH BRACKET
MAIN BEAM
FRONT CROSS TUBE

ATTACH BRACKET
AZIMUTH DRIVE ASSEMBLY
ÌÌÌÌÌÌ IR FILTER
ÌÌÌÌÌÌ HEAT SHIELD
ÌÌÌÌÌÌ
ELEVATION DRIVE
ASSEMBLY
ÌÌÌÌÌÌ
CLEAR LENS
IR FILTER DRIVE
ASSEMBLY NOTE: IR FILTER SHOWN
F927-088A
RETRACTED
Figure 10−31. SX−16 EPMS Installation
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−84 Original

Searchlight (Ref. Figure 10-31):
Drive assemblies CHECK
IR filter CHECK CONDITION
Clear lens CHECK CONDITION
Cooling fan intake NO OBSTRUCTIONS
Laser pointer CHECK ATTACHMENT
Searchlight mounting CHECK ATTACHMENT
Heat shield CHECK ATTACHMENT
AFTER TAKEOFF
The SX-16 is fully controllable in azimuth up to 85 KIAS. Above 85 KIAS, control
of the SX-16 may be affected by the slipstream, resulting in the searchlight moving
on its own by slipping the clutch.
With the IR lens in the forward and horizontal position, the SX-16 can be controlled
up to 80 KIAS . As the light is moved to the side and rear position, the lens is
less affected by the slipstream and can be raised and lowered at progressively higher
airspeeds up to 100 KIAS.
Search light operation (while airborne only):

Turning searchlight ON:
Master switch ON; THEN MOMENTARILY TO
START POSITION
NOTE: Do not operate searchlight while on ground unless conducting maintenance
checks. Ground checks may be accomplished with generator power or with the
aircraft connected to a GPU.
The magnetic compass may become inaccurate with the SX−16 ON.
• • W.E.S.T. control panel switches OPERATE AS

NECESSARY

Turning searchlight OFF:
CAUTION Do not turn lamp OFF until lamp is fully illuminated.

Searchlight MAXIMUM UP
POSITION
Master switch OFF
NOTE: Allow lamp to cool for one minute before turning back ON.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−85
INFRARED FILTER SLAVE LASER

INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR
GIMBAL DIRECTION SX-16 “ON”

CONTROL INDICATOR
F927−114

SX16 Off Removes electrical power from SX-16 system.
Of Turns on electrical power to SX-16 system.
Start Energizes lamp starting circuit.
FOCUS Press Momentary switch that changes light beam spread.
Gimbal LEFT, RIGHT, Allows aiming of the searchlight.
Directional UP, DOWN
Control
IFCO UP Positions IR filter in front of lamp.
Retracts IR filter.
Slave UP Connects to AeroNav slaving unit (or other system as
determined by installation requirements).
Laser Off Turns laser off.
On Turns laser on.
Flash Flashes the laser beam.
BLT UP Allows testing of laser system before flight or during
maintenance.
Sync. UP Provides synchronization between the FLIR and SX-16
zero-position.
Figure 10−32. W.E.S.T. SX−16 Control Panel
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−86 Original
PART V
PERFORMANCE DATA
No change.
PART VI

Main beam 28.75 181.90 5229.60 -41 -1178.80
SX-16 Adaptor (aft LH) 8.75 251.10 2197.10 -41 -358.80
SX-16 Search light (aft LH) 47.50 264.80 12578.00 -41 -1947.50
SX-16 Adaptor (fwd LH) 8.75 122.00 1067.50 -41 -358.80
SX-16 Search light (fwd LH) 47.50 110.00 5225.00 -41 -1947.50
PART VII
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The SX-16 searchlight installation consists of a gimbal mounted searchlight assem
bly attached to an airframe searchlight mount, an electrical junction box a panel-
mounted controller. A 70 AMP circuit breaker, located on the baggage compartment
circuit breaker panel, receives power from a generator bus.
The SX-16 Control Panel incorporates full authority over the Nightsun system in
cluding an enhancement to automate beam “cool down” following use. The Panel
also incorporates full authority over the laser spotter device. Additionally, the laser
pointer is coupled to the radar altimeter and automatically turns off when a predeter
mined decision height has been reached. If desired, the pilot/copilot may allow the
SX-16 to operate in a synchronized mode with the FLIR LEO II surveillance system
if installed.
The SX-16 has a 1600 Watt short arc Xenon lamp with a peak beam intensity
of 30 million candlepower and a typical range of 3200 feet (1 km).
PART VIII
NOTE: A ground power unit should be used while conducting ground maintenance
checks of the SX−16.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−87
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−88 Original
Smoke Detector
10−20. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: SMOKE DETECTOR
PART I
GENERAL
No change.
PART II
LIMITATIONS
No change.
PART III
CARGO COMPARTMENT FIRE/SMOKE

Indications: Smoke detector warning tone in headset.
Procedures:




Power switch OFF
Procedures:

AC/VENT switch VENT LOW OR VENT HIGH
Cockpit door vents OPEN
Land immediately
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−89
Smoke Detector

After landing:
Power switch OFF
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
PRE FLIGHT CHECKS: ELECTRICAL POWER ON
Baggage compartment:
Circuit breaker panel cover REMOVE

SMOKE DET press-to-test button PRESS

Listen for smoke detector warning tone in CHECK
headset.
NOTE: A second crew member is required to perform this check.

Circuit breaker panel cover REPLACE
SMOKE
RH REAR FUSELAGE DETECTOR BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
SHELL ASSEMBLY CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
HDG SAS/AP ADF

26 VAC BUS
RIGHT AVIONICS BUS
ADF1 FM FM1 FM2 FM3

CTRL RT RT RT
DME STORM CAMERA NAV 1 RMI

SCOPE
PRESS TO
TEST
SMOKE
DET
F927−118
Figure 10−33. Smoke Detector and Press−To−Test Switch Location.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−90 Original
Smoke Detector
PART V
PERFORMANCE DATA
No change.
PART VII
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The smoke detector is a photoelectric device specifically developed for aircraft cargo
bay applications and is located on the upper right hand wall of the baggage compart
ment adjacent to the baggage compartment door. The detector incorporates specific
design features that virtually eliminate the reliability problems typically associated
with aircraft smoke detectors. The detector is a dual-channel, ratio-comparing de
vice in which one channel detects the presence of smoke and the second channel
serves as a reference. By comparing smoke and reference ratios, the detector is
able to operate reliably despite dust, moisture, temperature changes, and aging.
The detector provides an alarm signal (sweeping tone) to the aircraft ICS system
when the output from the smoke channel exceeds a predetermined ratio to the output
from the reference channel. The warning tone is heard through the headset. A test
input activates a complete through-the-lens check of electronic and optical func
tions. The press-to-test button is located on the lower right hand corner of the
right avionics bus.
The smoke detector system receives power from the battery bus and is protected
by a 5 amp. circuit breaker.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−91
Smoke Detector
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−92 Original
Crew Door Modification
10−21. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: CREW DOOR MODIFICATION WITH

QUICK RELEASE MECHANISM
PART I
GENERAL
The quick release mechanism allows removal of crew doors in the field.
PART II
LIMITATIONS
No change.
PART III
No change.
PART IV
NORMAL PROCEDURES
PRE FLIGHT CHECKS
Left/Right crew door interior (Ref. Figure 10-34):

Door release handle up CHECK
Pull rods engaged in fork assemblies CHECK
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−93
Cockpit door removal:

Open cockpit door.
Pull lower end of gas strut (1) up away from pivot post ball fitting (2) to remove.
NOTE: Fit between lower socket end of strut and ball fitting is by interference. Removal
of strut from its attachment requires a snap action motion to pull away the socket
end from the post ball fitting.
Push door release handle (3) forward to disengage pull rod assemblies (10) and
release cockpit door retaining bosses (4).
NOTE: When activating cockpit door release mechanism, spacer, washer, and retaining
bosses (6, 5, 4) will fall loose as the pull rods (10) are retracted. Place loose
attaching hardware in a suitable location for reinstallation
Remove complete door assembly with retainers (7) in place on fork (8) assemblies.
Cockpit door installation:
NOTE: Refer to Figure 10−34 for proper placement of attaching hardware.
Install cockpit door assembly into door frame with retainers and spacer (7, 5)
in place on fork assemblies (8).
Install washer (6), door restraint (9), and retaining boss (4) to lower fork assembly
(8).
Install spacer (5) and retaining boss (4) on upper fork assembly (8).
Align pull rods (10) with retaining bosses (4).
Pull door release handle (3) backward and verify insertion of pull rods into retain
ing bosses.
Push down lower end of gas strut (1) onto lower pivot post ball fitting (2) to
attach.
Close cockpit door.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−94 Original
UPPER PULL ROD ASSEMBLY
DOOR RELEASE HANDLE
LOWER PULL ROD ASSEMBLY
DOOR RESTRAINING STRAP
DOOR RELEASE MECHANISM
5 4
7 5
8
10
3
DOOR ATTACHING HARDWARE
6
7 1
10
8
4
9 2
GAS STRUT
2
F927−130
Figure 10−34. Cockpit Door Attachment

FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 10−95
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
10−96 Original
Category A Operations
S E C T I O N XI
CATEGORY A
OPERATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH PAGE
Part I General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11−1
11-1.1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11-1.2. Definitions - Category A Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11-1.3. Definitions - Category A Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Part II Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11−5
11-2.1. Clear Airfield, Heliport and Elevated Helipad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Figure 11-2.1. Takeoff and Landing Wind Azimuth Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11-2.2. Maximum Takeoff and Landing Weight Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Figure 11-2.2. Weight Altitude Temperature Limits - Clear Airfield . . . . . . . . 11-7
Figure 11-2.3. Weight Altitude Temperature Limits -
Heliport/Elevated Helipad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11-2.3. 6501 - 6700 LBS Clear Airfield Operations Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Figure 11-2.4. Takeoff and Landing Wind Azimuth Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Table 11-2.1. Clear Airfield Continued Takeoff Distance -
6501 to 6770 LBS (3071 KG) at 3000 FT HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Table 11-2.2. MD900 Clear Airfield Category A Rejected Takeoff Distance -
6501 to 6700 LBS (3071 KG) at 3000 FT HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Table 11-2.3. MD900 Clear Airfield Category A OEI Landing Distance -
6501 to 6700 LBS (3071 KG) at 3000 FT HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Part III Takeoff and Landing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11−11
11-3.1. Clear Airfield Takeoff Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Figure 11-3.1. Takeoff Timing Indicator Lights and Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Figure 11-3.2. Normal Takeoff and Takeoff Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Figure 11-3.3. Category A Rejected Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Figure 11-3.4. Continued Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 5 11− i
11-3.2. Heliport/Elevated Helipad Takeoff Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

Figure 11-3.5. Normal Takeoff Profile - Heliport/Elevated Helipad . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11-3.3. Landing Procedures - Clear Airfield, Heliport and Elevated Helipad . 11-17
Figure 11-3.6. Normal Landing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Figure 11-3.7. Balked Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Figure 11-3.8. Continued Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
11-3.4. Confined Heliport/Helipad Takeoff procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Figure 11-3.9. Vertical Takeoff Weight Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Figure 11-3.10. Reward Climb Profile From IP to TDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
11-3.5. Takeoff Decision Point (TDP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
Table 11-3.1. Variable Obstacle Height and TDP (Confined Heliport) . . . . . . . 11-21
11-3.6. Rejected Takeoff - Confined heliport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
Figure 11-3.11. Example - Rejected Takeoff To Clear a 30ft/9.1m Obstacle . . 11-22
Figure 11-3.12. Example - Rejected Takeoff to Clear Obstacle
Greater Than 30ft/9.m and up to 100ft/30.5m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
11-3.7. Continued Takeoff - Confined Heliport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Figure 11-3.13. Example - Confined Heliport CTO Profile and Distance to Clear
30ft/9.1m Obstacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Figure 11-3.14. Example - Confined Heliport CTO Profile and Distance to Clear
100ft/30.5m Obstacle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
11-3.8. Short field Takeoff Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
Table 11-3.2. Short Field Length IP HAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
Table 11-3.3. Variable Obstacle Height and TDP (Short Field) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
Figure 11-3.15. Example - Short Field Takeoff Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
11-3.9. Confined heliport and Balked landing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Table 11-3.4. Variable Obstacle Height and LDP (Confined Heliport) . . . . . . . 11-29
Figure 11-3.16. OEI/Balked Landing with 30ft/9.1m Obstacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
Figure 11-3.17. OEI/Balked Landing with 100ft/30.5m Obstacle . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
11-3.10. Equipment Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
Part V Takeoff and Landing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11−35
11-5.1. Takeoff Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
11-5.2. Takeoff Distance Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
Figure 11-5.1. Distance Required to Clear a 35 FT (11M)
Obstacle on Takeoff (Clear Airfield) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
Figure 11-5.2. Rejected Takeoff Distance Required (Clear Airfield) . . . . . . . . . 11-37
Figure 11-5.3. Distance Required to Clear a 35 FT (11M)
Obstacle on Takeoff Heliport/Elevated Helipad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11− ii Revision 5
11-5.3. Continued Takeoff Flight Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39

Figure 11-5.4. OEI Takeoff Flight Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39
Figure 11-5.5. Takeoff Distance Segment I - Distance Required to
Climb from 35 FT (11M) to 200 FT (61M) HAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-40
Figure 11-5.6. Acceleration Distance - Distance to Accelerate from
45 KIAS (83 KM/H) to VY at 200 FT (61M) HAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41
Figure 11-5.7. Takeoff Distance Segment II - Distance Required to
Climb from 200 FT (61M) HAT to 1000 FT (305M) . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-42
11-5.4. Landing Performance - Open Airfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
11-5.5. Landing Performance - Heliport/Elevated Helipad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
Part IX Additional Operations and Performance Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11−45
11-9.1. Category A OEI Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45
Figure 11-9.1. Recommended OEI Training Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 5 11− iii
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11− iv Revision 5
General
SECTION XI
CATEGORY A OPERATIONS
PART I
GENERAL
11−1.1. GENERAL
Information contained in this section pertains to Category A operations only and

supplements information that appears in Sections 1 thru 10 of this manual.
There are several ``Parts'' to this section. Each ``Part'' is associated with a respective
Section from the RFM, with the exception of Part III which covers both normal
and emergency procedures.
NOTE: Performance charts in this section are based on an aircraft with IPS, NACA inlet
door closed, and a power assurance check with zero margin for both engines.
11−1.2. DEFINITIONS − CATEGORY A TAKEOFF
Category A takeoff:
The takeoff must be performed in such a manner that in the event of a single
engine failure the helicopter must be able to:
Prior to TDP, return to, and stop safely on the takeoff area (rejected takeoff).
After TDP, continue the takeoff and climbout, and attain a configuration and
airspeed that allows continued flight.
Best rate of climb speed (VY):
The best rate of climb speed is that airspeed that achieves the best rate of climb
at a given density altitude (Ref. Section V).
Continued takeoff distance (CTO):
The continued takeoff distance is the horizontal distance along the takeoff path
from the start of the takeoff to the point at which the rotorcraft attains and
remains at least 35 feet (11m) above the takeoff surface, attains and maintains
a speed of at least VTOSS, and establishes at least a 100 ft/min (30.5m/min) rate
of climb, assuming the recognition of a critical engine failure at TDP.
Intermediate Point (IP):
The point at which transition from vertical to rearward flight is established
during confined heliport/short field takeoff operations. If engine failure occurs
prior to the IP or before the TDP is attained, a safe rejected takeoff (RTO) is
assured.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 3 11−1
General
Take-off Decision Point (TDP):

Clear airfield
The TDP is a point that occurs 8 seconds after the takeoff procedure is initiated.
The takeoff light will display a yellow ``NO-GO'' indication for 8 seconds.
The green ``GO'' indicator illuminates after the TDP.

Heliport/Elevated helipad
The TDP is a point 100 FT (30.5m) HAT and approximately 300 FT (91.4m)
behind the center of the heliport.
HAT
Height above touchdown.
Rejected takeoff (RTO) distance:
The horizontal distance required to land and come to a complete stop should
the engine fail before reaching TDP.
Short Field Takeoff:
The short field takeoff procedure is used for instances when 300 ft (91.4m) ground
distance does not exist forward of the takeoff point. The pilot may perform a
combination of vertical and rearward climb to attain the TDP HAT. For any
rearward climb, or combination of vertical and rearward climb, the helicopter
takeoff profile must follow the heliport/elevated helipad profiles to ensure RTO
up to the TDP HAT (Ref Figure 11-3.15).
Take-Off Safety Speed (VTOSS):
The speed (40 KIAS [74km/h]) at which a safe take-off can be continued following
an engine failure.
Takeoff Segment distances:
Segment I distance
The horizontal distance required to climb at VTOSS from 35 FT (10.7m) AGL
to 200 FT (61m) AGL.
Acceleration distance
The horizontal distance required to accelerate from VTOSS at 200 FT (61m)
to VY.
Segment II distance
The horizontal distance required to climb at VY from 200 FT (61m) AGL
to 1000 FT (305m) AGL.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−2
Revision 3
General
11−1.3. DEFINITIONS − CATEGORY A LANDING
Category A landing:
The landing must be performed in such a manner so that if the critical engine
fails at any point in the approach path, the helicopter must be able to:
Prior to LDP, climb out and attain an airspeed that allows continued flight
(balked landing).
After LDP, land and stop safely.
Landing Decision Point (LDP):
The landing decision point is the last point in the approach and landing path
at which a balked landing can be accomplished with the critical engine failed
or failing and with the engine failure recognized by the pilot. This point is defined
as 100 FT (30m) HAT and 35 KIAS (65km/h).
Landing Distance:
Clear Airfield
The horizontal distance required to land and come to a complete stop from
a point 50 feet (15m) above the landing surface.
Heliport/Elevated helipad
The horizontal distance required to land and come to a complete stop from
a point 25 feet (8m) above the landing surface.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Original 11−3
General
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−4
Original
Limitations
PART II
LIMITATIONS
NOTE: Limitations contained in this part pertain to Category A operations only and
supplements information that appears in Section II.
11−2.1. CLEAR AIRFIELD, HELIPORT AND ELEVATED HELIPAD

Flight Restrictions:
Aircraft equipped with Bendix/King KFC900 Flight Control System:
NOTE: The following information supersedes applicable limitations found in Bendix/King
IFR Avionics/KFC 900 RFMS 006−00845−0000 and 006−00845−0004.
For VFR flights at gross weights between 6251 (2835kg) and 6500LB
(2948):
Maximum airspeed with autopilot engaged is 100 KIAS (185 km/h)
Maximum Operating Altitude with autopilot engaged 5000 FT (1524m) HD
IFR flights are only approved at gross weights up to 6250 LB and:
Autopilot must be operational.
Maximum airspeed with autopilot engaged is 100 KIAS (185 km/h)
Maximum Operating Altitude with autopilot engaged 5000 FT (1524m) HD
Environmental operating conditions:
Kinds of operations
This rotorcraft is certified in the normal helicopter category for day and night
VFR Category A operations when the appropriate instruments and equipment
required by the airworthiness and/or operating rules are approved, installed
and are in operable condition.
Critical wind azimuth
Refer to Figure 11-2.1.
Weight altitude temperature limits
Open field: Maximum weight for Category A operations is 6500 LB (2948kg)
or less as determined by Figure 11-2.2.
Heliport/Elevated helipad: Maximum weight for Category A operations is
6500 LB (2948kg) or less as determined by Figure 11-2.3.
Maximum altitude for Category A operations is 10,000 FT (3048m) HD.
Power assurance checks:
Each engine must pass a power assurance check before the first flight of the
day (ref. Section V).
Heliport/Elevated helipad requirements:
Heliport/Elevated helipad restricted to a solid surface.
Minimum Heliport/Elevated helipad dimensions: 50 FT X 50 FT
(15m X 15m).
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 11−5
Revision 4
Limitations
330° 0° 30°
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ
CATEGORY A TAKEOFFS
AND LANDINGS WITH
WINDS FROM THE CROSS
HATCHED AREA ARE NOT
PERMITTED.
F927−040
Figure 11−2.1. Takeoff and Landing Wind Azimuth Limitations
11−2.2. MAXIMUM TAKEOFF AND LANDING WEIGHT LIMITS
Description: These charts show the maximum gross weight for a given temperature
and altitude for Category A operations from a clear airfield (Ref. Figure 11-2.2)
or Heliport/Elevated helipad (Ref. Figure 11-2.3).
Figure 11-2.2.
Example:
Wanted: Maximum gross weight for Category A operations from a clear
airfield.
Known: Pressure altitude = 2000 FT (610m)
Method: Enter bottom of chart at 28°C. Move up to the 2000 FT (610m)
line and then directly to the left to read 6160 LB (2794kg).
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−6
Original
Limitations
5000
(2268kg) NOTE: CABIN HEAT AND AC OFF
5100
(2313kg)
5200 MAXIMUM OAT

(2359kg) 10000 HD
(3048M)
LIMIT
LIMIT
5300
(2404kg)
11000
5400 (3353M)
(2449kg)
5500
(2495kg)
5600
(2540kg)
5700
GROSS WEIGHT - LBS (kg)
(2585kg) 10000
(3048M)
5800
(2631kg)
DASHED LINES FOR
AIRCRAFT WITHOUT
(2676kg) MODIFICATION
9000
(2743M)
6000
(2722kg)
6100
(2767kg)
8000
(2438M)
6200
(2812kg)
6300
(2858kg)
6400
(2903kg)
6500
(2948kg) 7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 SL −1000
(2134M) (1829M) (1524M) (1219M)(914M)(610M) (305M) PRESSURE
(−305M) ALTITUDE - FEET
(METERS)
-20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55

OAT - °C F927−034−1D
Figure 11−2.2. Weight Altitude Temperature Limits − Clear Airfield
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 11−7
Original
Limitations
10000 HD
(3048M)
LIMIT NOTE: CABIN HEAT AND AC OFF
5000
(2268kg)
5100 10000
(2313kg) (3048M
)
5200 MAXIMUM OAT
(2359kg)
5300
(2404kg) 9000
(2743M)
5400
(2449kg)
5500 8000
(2495kg)
(2438M)
5600
(2540kg)
5700
GROSS WEIGHT - LBS (kg)
(2585kg)
7000
(2134M)
5800
(2631kg)
DASHED LINES FOR
(2676kg) 6000 GENERATOR COOLING
(1829M) MODIFICATION
6000
(2722kg)
6100
(2767kg) 5000
(1524M)
6200
(2812kg)
6300
(2858kg)
6400
(2903kg)
6500
(2948kg) 4000 3000 2000 1000 SL -1000 PRESSURE
ALTITUDE - FEET
(1219M) (914M) (610M) (305M) (-305M) (METERS)
-20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55

OAT - °C
F927−034−2D
Figure 11−2.3. Weight Altitude Temperature Limits − Heliport/Elevated Helipad
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−8
Original
Limitations
11−2.3. 6501 − 6700 LBS CLEAR AIRFIELD OPERATIONS ONLY
0°
300° 60°
ÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌÌ CATEGORY A TAKEOFFS
AND LANDINGS WITH
WINDS FROM THE CROSS
HATCHED AREA ARE NOT
PERMITTED.
F927−040−1
Figure 11−2.4. Takeoff and Landing Wind Azimuth Limitations
FAA Approved
Reissue 2 11−9
Revision 4
Limitations
Clear airfield takeoff procedures:

Takeoff and landing procedures and profiles remain the same for clear airfield
operations at the gross weights listed in the tables below.
Table 11−2.1. Clear Airfield Continued Takeoff Distance −
6501 to 6770 LBS (3071 KG) at 3000 FT HD
Gross Weight Density Altitude Established
Description
(lbs) (FT) Distance
Continued Takeoff Distance 6501 6770 3000 and below 1500 FT
Segment I Distance 6501 6770 3000 and below 2700 FT
Acceleration Distance 6501 6770 3000 and below 3000 FT
Segment II Distance 6501 6770 3000 and below 33,000 FT
Table 11−2.2. MD900 Clear Airfield Category A Rejected Take-off Distance −

6501 to 6700 LBS (3071 KG) at 3000 FT HD
Description
(lbs) (FT) Distance
Rejected Takeoff Distance 6501 – 6770 3000 and below 700 FT
Table 11−2.3. MD900 Clear Airfield Category A OEI Landing Distance −

6501 to 6700 LBS (3071 KG) at 3000 FT HD
Description
(lbs) (FT) Distance
OEI Landing Distance 6501 – 6770 3000 and below 750 FT
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−10
Revision 4
Takeoff and Landing Procedures
PART III
TAKEOFF AND LANDING PROCEDURES
NOTE: This section contains both normal and emergency procedures for Category A
takeoffs and landings as well as special procedures for equipment malfunctions.
11−3.1. CLEAR AIRFIELD TAKEOFF PROCEDURES
Takeoff timer operation and check:

To start the takeoff timer, push up on the TAKEOFF TIMER switch (Ref.
Figure 11-3.1). This action turns on the yellow NO-GO light. After 8 seconds,
the green GO light illuminates.
To shutoff the takeoff timer, push down on the TAKEOFF TIMER switch a second
time.
The TAKEOFF TIMER switch is not functional on the copilot's collective (if dual
controls are installed).
NOTE: The GO and NO−GO lights dim when the LIGHT MASTER switch is placed in
the ON (‘‘night mode’’) position.
Follow the above procedure prior to performing a clear airfield takeoff.
YELLOW GREEN
NO-GO LIGHT NO-GO GO GO LIGHT
TAKEOFF TIMER
SWITCH
F927-035
Figure 11−3.1. Takeoff Timing Indicator Lights and Switch

NOTE: TDP is a point that occurs 8 seconds after the takeoff procedure is initiated.
The takeoff light will display a yellow ‘‘NO−GO’’ indication for 8 seconds.
At the TDP, the green ‘‘GO’’ indicator illuminates.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−11
Normal takeoff and takeoff path:

Power assurance check PASS
Takeoff timer CHECK
Pre takeoff check PERFORM
Hover ESTABLISH − 3.5 FT (1M) SKID HEIGHT; NOTE
HOVER TORQUE
Takeoff/climb SIMULTANEOUSLY:
START LEVEL ACCELERATION TAKEOFF
(APPROXIMATELY 12° NOSE DOWN).
START TAKEOFF TIMER,
SET COLLECTIVE TO A TORQUE 10% ABOVE
HOVER POWER.
AS AIRCRAFT PASSES THROUGH ETL MAINTAIN
PITCH ATTITUDE TO ALLOW CLIMB AND
CONTINUED ACCELERATION TO TDP.
(AT TDP THE ALTITUDE SHOULD BE
APPROXIMATELY 20 FT (6M)HAT.)
NOTE: Category A timer will display NO GO for 8 seconds; then GO.

After TDP CLIMB AND ACCELERATE TO VY.
Takeoff timer TURN OFF AS DESIRED
8 SECONDS
ACCELERATE
TO VY CLIMB AT VY
TDP
HOVER AT 3.5 FT (1M)
SKID HEIGHT
F927-041
Figure 11−3.2. Normal Takeoff and Takeoff Path
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−12
Revision 4
ENGINE FAILURE BEFORE TDP
Indications: Normal engine failure indications (Ref. Section III).
Conditions: Takeoff timer displays yellow NO GO.
Procedures:
Simultaneously reduce collective and establish a decelerative attitude.
When approaching the ground, establish a landing attitude.
Apply power to cushion landing.
8 SECONDS
TDP
HIGE AT 3.5 FT (1M)
SKID HEIGHT
REJECTED TAKEOFF DISTANCE F927-042A
Figure 11−3.3. Category A Rejected Takeoff
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−13
ENGINE FAILURE AFTER TDP
Indications: Normal engine out indications.
Conditions: Category A timer displays GO.
Procedures:
Decrease collective to prevent rotor droop and adjust power to OEI 2.5 minute
limit.
Continue takeoff/climb and accelerate to above 40 KIAS (74 Km/H).
Assure power set to OEI 2.5 minute limits.
Climb at 45 KIAS (83 Km/H) to 200 FT (61M) HAT.
Accelerate to VY .
Climb at VY and OEI MCP (Ref. Section II).
Refer to Section III for single engine emergencies.
Takeoff timer - OFF
2-1/2MIN. OEI LIMIT CLIMB

OEI MCP
8 SECONDS AT VY
ACCELERATE TO 200 FT (61M) HAT

VTOSS (40 KIAS)
(74KM/H)
ACCELERATE TO
VY
CLIMB AT 45 KIAS
35 FT
(83KM/H)
HIGE AT 3.5 FT (1M) TDP (11m)
SKID HEIGHT
F927-043A
CONTINUED TAKEOFF DISTANCE
Figure 11−3.4. Continued Takeoff
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−14
Revision 4
11−3.2. HELIPORT/ELEVATED HELIPAD TAKEOFF PROCEDURES

Normal heliport takeoff and takeoff path:
NOTE: TDP is a point 100 FT HAT and approximately 300 FT behind center of heliport.
The distance behind the helipad is achieved by following the takeoff procedure
below.
Heliport elevation NOTE HELIPORT ELEVATION WHILE AT FLAT PITCH
Takeoff ESTABLISH CORRECT SIGHT PICTURE BY CLIMBING
VERTICALLY UNTIL THE FAR EDGE OF THE
HELIPORT IS JUST ABOVE THE SIGHT PLANE OF THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL GLARE SHIELD.
CONTINUE REARWARD CLIMB MAINTAINING SAME
SIGHT PICTURE TO 130 FT (40M) ABOVE HELIPORT
USING THE BAROMETRIC ALTIMETER (100 FT [30M])
HAT).
At TDP PITCH NOSE DOWN TO TRANSITION TO LEVEL OR
CLIMBING FLIGHT WHILE ACCELERATING TO VY
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
HELIPAD
ACCELERATE
TO VY
CLIMB AT VY
TDP
F927-044
Figure 11−3.5. Normal Takeoff Profile − Heliport/Elevated Helipad

FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−15
ENGINE FAILURE PRIOR TO TDP
Indications: Normal engine failure indications.
Conditions: Before reaching or at TDP.
Procedures:
Pitch nose down (initial pitch down attitude varies with height above the heli
pad starting at 0° at 10 FT (3M) and varying to 20° at TDP) and reduce collective
to prevent rotor droop.
When approaching the ground establish a landing attitude. Apply power to

cushion landing.
Conditions: After TDP and initiation of forward acceleration (nose down pitch).
Procedures:
Pitch nose down and reduce collective to prevent rotor droop, accelerate to
VTOSS (40 KIAS [74 Km/H]) and adjust power to 2.5 minute OEI limit (Ref.
Section II).
NOTE: Initial pitch down attitude is determined by the airspeed at the time of engine
failure − up to 20 degrees nose down prior to an indication of airspeed.
Continue climb at 45 KIAS (83 Km/H) to 200 FT (61M) HAT.
Accelerate to VY.
Continue climb at VY and observe OEI limits (Ref. Section II).
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−16
Revision 4
11−3.3. LANDING PROCEDURES − CLEAR AIRFIELD, HELIPORT AND

ELEVATED HELIPAD
Normal landing profile:

NOTE: LDP is 100 feet (30 meters) above intended landing area at an airspeed of 35
KIAS and a rate of descent of 500 ft/pm (152 m/min) or less.
Before landing checks PERFORM

Approach angle ESTABLISH A 6° SIGHT PICTURE AND PLAN
APPROACH TO ARRIVE AT LDP AT 35 KIAS
Landing TERMINATE APPROACH ABOVE LANDING AREA
AT 3.5 FT (1M) SKID HEIGHT
LDP 100 FT (30M) AGL

AND 35 KIAS
(65KM/H)
HOVER AT 3.5 FT (1M)
SKID HEIGHT
F927-045A
Figure 11−3.6. Normal Landing Profile
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−17
ENGINE FAILURE PRIOR TO LDP
Indications: Normal engine failure indications
Conditions: Prior to LDP
Procedures:
NOTE: The pilot may elect to perform the following procedures or continue the approach
and landing by following the procedures stated for ‘‘Engine Failure After LDP’’.
Increase power to OEI 2.5 minute limit.
Accelerate to above 40 KIAS (74 Km/H).
Climb to 200 FT (61m) at 45 KIAS (83 Km/H).
Accelerate to VY.
2-1/2MIN. OEI LIMIT OEI MCP
200 FT
(61M) HAT
CLIMB AT 45 KIAS CLIMB OEI MCP
LDP (83KM/H) AT VY
35 KIAS (65KM/H) ACCELERATE
ENGINE FAILURE TO VY
PRIOR TO LDP 100 FT (30M) AGL
F927-046A
Figure 11−3.7. Balked Landing
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−18
Revision 4
ENGINE FAILURE AFTER LDP
Conditions: After to LDP
Procedures:
Continue approach.
Perform OEI landing.
2-1/2MIN. OEI LIMIT
LDP
ENGINE FAILURE 35 KIAS (65KM/H)
AFTER LDP 100 FT (30M) AGL
DECELERATE
50/25 FT
(15/8m)
CATEGORY A LANDING DISTANCE

OPEN AIRFIELD/HELIPORT/ELEVATED HELIPAD F927-047A
Figure 11−3.8. Continued Landing
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−19
11−3.4. CONFINED HELIPORT/HELIPAD TAKEOFF PROCEDURES

Confined heliport vertical takeoff and takeoff path:
Determine allowable weight limit from Heliport/Elevated Helipad WAT chart (Ref
Figure 11-2.3.)
Do not perform a Category A Vertical takeoff procedure if the
WARNING combination of weight and density altitude at takeoff falls within
the shaded region of Figure 11−3.9
11000
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0 ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
4900 5100 5300 5500 5700 5900 6100 6300 6500
GROSS WEIGHT - LBS
F927−044−10
Figure 11−3.9. Vertical Takeoff Weight Limits
REARWARD CLIMB
SIGHT PICTURE TO TDP
IP
VERTICAL TAKEOFF
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ LANDING SURFACE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ F927-044-11
Figure 11−3.10. Reward Climb Profile From IP to TDP
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−20
Revision 4
11−3.5. TAKEOFF DECISION POINT (TDP)
The TDP of 100ft/30.5m HAT is located at a ground distance of 300ft/91.4m behind

the center of the helipad or landing area when there is no obstacle in the takeoff
path.
To ensure a safe CTO or RTO, the confined heliport/VTOL technique is flown to
ensure that 300ft/91.4m exists between the helicopter and the far edge of the confined
heliport.
Variable obstacle heights (Ref. Table 11-3.1):
For varying obstacle heights, the pilot maintains the same sight picture from
a TDP HAT of 100ft/30.5m to 200ft/61.0m above the surface of the heliport/
helipad. A TDP HAT of 200ft/61.0m (maximum) will be attained at a ground
distance of 600ft/189.9m ft behind the center of the helipad.
CAUTION Obstacle heights FWD and AFT of the takeoff point must be known.
NOTE: All HAT data not barometric corrected.

Table 11−3.1. Variable Obstacle Height and TDP (Confined Heliport)
TDP HAT Obstacle Required HAT at End of
FT/M Height FT/M Ground Distance Segment I Climb – AGL FT/M
FT/M
100/30.5 0/0 300/91.4 200/61.0
110/33.5 10/3.1 330/100.6 210/64.0
120/36.6 20/6.1 360/109.7 220/67.1
130/39.6 30/9.1 390/118.9 230/70.1
140/42.7 40/12.2 420/128.0 240/73.2
150/45.7 50/15.2 450/137.2 250/76.2
160/48.8 60/18.3 480/146.3 260/79.2
170/51.8 70/21.3 510/155.4 270/82.3
180/54.9 80/24.0 540/164.6 280/85.3
190/57.9 90/27.4 570/173.7 290/88.4
200/61.0 100/30.5 600/182.9 300/91.4
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−21
11−3.6. REJECTED TAKEOFF − CONFINED HELIPORT
REJECTED TAKEOFF PROCEDURES
TDP
130 FT
(39.6 M)
IP
2.5 MIN OEI PROFILE AT VTOSS

100FT
(30.5M)
OBSTACLE 100FT
(30.5M)
30 FT 35 FT (10.7 M)
LANDING PROFILE
(9.1 M) 30 FT
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
(9.1 M)
OBSTACLE
240 FT
(73.2 M)
60 FT
(18.3 M)
300 FT (91.4 M)
(NOT TO SCALE) F927-044-3
Figure 11−3.11. Example − Rejected Takeoff To Clear a 30ft/9.1m Obstacle

Determine allowable weight limit from Heliport/Elevated Helipad WAT chart (Ref.
Figure 11-2.3.).
Determine TDP HAT (Ref. Table 11-3.1)
Vertical Takeoff ESTABLISH CORRECT SIGHT PICTURE BY CLIMBING VERTICALLY TO IP
100 FT (30.5 M) UNTIL THE FAR EDGE OF THE HELIPORT IS JUST ABOVE
THE SIGHT PLANE OF THE INSTRUMENT PANEL GLARE SHIELD (REF.
FIGURE 11-3.10).
CONTINUE CLIMB REARWARD, MAINTAINING SAME SIGHT PICTURE TO
130 FT (39.6 M) HAT USING THE BAROMETRIC ALTIMETER.
Engine failure prior to PITCH NOSE DOWN AND ADJUST COLLECTIVE TO PREVENT ROTOR
TDP DROOP.
Landing ESTABLISH LANDING ATTITUDE AND APPLY COLLECTIVE TO CUSHION
LANDING.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−22
Revision 4
TDP
200 FT (61M)
IP

35 FT (10.7 M)
100FT
(30.5M)
OBSTACLE 100FT
(30.5M) 100 FT
30 FT LANDING PROFILE (30.5 M)
(9.1 M) OBSTACLE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
240 FT
(73.2 M) ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
60 FT
(18.3 M)
300 FT (91.4 M)
Figure 11−3.12. Example − Rejected Takeoff to Clear Obstacle Greater Than

30ft/9.m and up to 100ft/30.5m.
Figure 11-2.3.).
Determine TDP HAT (Ref. Table 11-3.1)
THE SIGHT PLANE OF THE INSTRUMENT PANEL GLARE SHIELD.
200 FT (61M) TDP HAT USING THE BAROMETRIC ALTIMETER.
Engine failure prior to PITCH NOSE DOWN AND ADJUST COLLECTIVE TO PREVENT ROTOR
TDP DROOP.
Landing ESTABLISH LANDING ATTITUDE AND APPLY COLLECTIVE TO CUSHION
LANDING.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−23
11−3.7. CONTINUED TAKEOFF − CONFINED HELIPORT
ACCELERATE
CLIMB AT VY
TO VY
TDP
100FT
(30.5M)
300FT (91.4M) F927-044-1
Figure 11−3.13. Example − Confined Heliport CTO Profile and Distance to Clear
30ft/9.1m Obstacle
Determine allowable weight limit from Heliport/Elevated Helipad WAT chart
(Ref. Figure 11-2.3.).
Determine TDP (Ref. Table 11-3.1)
Vertical Takeoff ESTABLISH SIGHT PICTURE BY CLIMBING VERTICALLY TO IP HAT 100 FT
AND CONTINUES REARWARD CLIMB UNTIL THE FAR EDGE OF THE
HELIPORT IS JUST ABOVE THE SIGHT PLANE OF THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL GLARE SHIELD AT 130 FT TDP HAT (REF. FIGURE 11-3.13).
At TDP PITCH THE AIRCRAFT NOSE DOWN, ACCELERATE TO VTOSS, AND
REDUCE COLLECTIVE TO PREVENT ROTOR DROOP WHILE ADJUSTING
POWER TO 2.5 MINUTE OEI LIMIT AND CLIMB OUT AT VTOSS.
From 200ft/61m to AT 230FT/70.1M AGL (REF. TABLE 11-3.1), ACCELERATE TO VY AND CLIMB
300ft/91.4m AGL TO 1000FT/305M AT OEI MCP.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−24
Revision 4
TDP
200FT (61M)
IP 35 FT (10.7 M)
100FT
(30.5M)
100FT 100 FT
OBSTACLE
(30.5M) (30.5 M)
OBSTACLE
30 FT
(9.1 M) LANDING PROFILE
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
240 FT
(73.2 M)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
60 FT
(18.3 M)
300 FT (91.4 M)
Figure 11−3.14. Example − Confined Heliport CTO Profile and Distance to Clear
100ft/30.5m Obstacle.
Determine allowable weight limit from Heliport/Elevated Helipad WAT chart
(Ref. Figure 11-2.3).
Determine TDP (Ref. Table 11-3.3)
THE SIGHT PLANE OF THE INSTRUMENT PANEL GLARE SHIELD.
200 FT (61M) TDP HAT USING THE BAROMETRIC ALTIMETER.
At TDP PITCH NOSE DOWN TO AND ACCELERATE TO VTOSS AND ADJUST
COLLECTIVE TO 2.5 MIN. OEI POWER.
From 200ft/61m to AT 300FT/91.4M AGL (REF. TABLE 11-3.1), ACCELERATE TO VY AND CLIMB
300ft/91.4m AGL TO 1000FT/305M AT OEI MCP.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−25
11−3.8. SHORT FIELD TAKEOFF PROCEDURES
Table 11-3.2 presents the transition from vertical to rearward takeoff (IP) HAT
for short field VTOL. If engine failure occurs prior to IP or before TDP is attained,
a safe RTO is assured. Figure 11-3.15 shows the short field takeoff profile.
Short field length and obstacle heights must be known

CAUTION
Table 11−3.2. Short Field Length IP HAT

Short Field Length Intermediate Point IP HAT
ft/m ft/m
60/18.3 20/6.1
90/27.4 30/9.1
120/36.6 40/12.2
150/45.7 50/15.2
180/54.9 60/18.3
210/64.0 70/21.3
240/73.2 80/24.4
270/82.3 90/27.4
Table 11−3.3. Variable Obstacle Height and TDP (Short Field)

TDP HAT Obstacle Required HAT at End of
FT/M
100/30.5 0/0 300/91.4 200/61.0
110/33.5 10/3.1 330/100.6 210/64.0
120/36.6 20/6.1 360/109.7 220/67.1
130/39.6 30/9.1 390/118.9 230/70.1
140/42.7 40/12.2 420/128.0 240/73.2
150/45.7 50/15.2 450/137.2 250/76.2
160/48.8 60/18.3 480/146.3 260/79.2
170/51.8 70/21.3 510/155.4 270/82.3
180/54.9 80/24.0 540/164.6 280/85.3
190/57.9 90/27.4 570/173.7 290/88.4
200/61.0 100/30.5 600/182.9 300/91.4
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−26
Revision 4
TDP
200 FT (6 1M)
IP
100FT HATMIN TDP IP

(30.5M)
100FT
(30.5M)
OBSTACLE 30 FT IP
(9.1 M) REJECTED TAKEOFF OBSTACLE
30 FT (9.1 M)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TO
100 FT (30.5 M)
240FT (73.3M) 60 FT 240FT (73.3M)

(18.3 M) (NOT TO SCALE) F927-044-5
Figure 11−3.15. Example − Short Field Takeoff Profile

Figure 11-2.3.).
Determine IP HAT based on short field length (Ref. Table 11-3.2).
Determine TDP HAT based on obstacle height (Ref. Table 11-3.3).
Determine Rearward Ground Distance from far edge of the helipad
(Ref. Table 11-3.3).
UNTIL THE FAR EDGE OF THE HELIPORT IS JUST ABOVE THE SIGHT
PLANE OF THE INSTRUMENT PANEL GLARE SHIELD. CONTINUE CLIMB
REARWARD, MAINTAINING SAME SIGHT PICTURE TO 200 FT (61M) TDP
HAT USING THE BAROMETRIC ALTIMETER.
Engine failure at TDP PITCH NOSE DOWN, ACCELERATE TO VTOSS AND ADJUST COLLECTIVE
TO PREVENT ROTOR DROOP. ADJUST POWER TO 2.5 MINUTE OEI LIMIT.
From variable 200FT/61M AT 300FT/91.4M AGL (REF. TABLE 11-3.3), ACCELERATE TO VY AND CLIMB
to 300FT/91.4M Segment I TO 1000FT/305M AT OEI MCP.
AGL
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−27
EXAMPLE:
Short Field Length = 240ft/73.2m, FWD obstacle Height = 100ft/30.5m
NOTE: Aft obstacle height must be known.
Determine IP HAT from Table 11-3.2 based on short field length.
IP HAT = 80ft/24.4m.
Determine TDP HAT from Table 11-3.3 based on obstacle height.
TDP HAT = 200ft/61.0m.
Determine Rearward Ground Distance from far edge of the helipad from
Table 11-3.3 = 600ft/182.9m.
Determine allowable weight limit from Heliport/Elevated Helipad WAT chart.
The pilot establishes a sight picture by climbing vertically to IP and continues
rearward climb until the far edge of the heliport is just above the sight plane
of the instrument panel glare shield at 130ft/39.6m HAT (Ref. Figure 11-3.15).
At the TDP, the pilot pitches the aircraft nose down to accelerate toward VTOSS,
then reduces collective to prevent rotor droop and adjusts the power to the 2.5
minute OEI limit.
Climb out at VTOSS between 40 and 45 KIAS.
From variable 200ft/61m to 300ft/91.4m Segment I AGL, accelerate to VY.
At COEI continue at VY to achieve 1000ft/304.8m at the end of Segment II.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−28
Revision 4
11−3.9. CONFINED HELIPORT AND BALKED LANDING PROCEDURES
Table 11−3.4. Variable Obstacle Height and LDP (Confined Heliport)

LDP HAT Obstacle Required HAT at End of
FT/M
100/30.5 0/0 300/91.4 200/61.0
110/33.5 10/3.1 330/100.6 210/64.0
120/36.6 20/6.1 360/109.7 220/67.1
130/39.6 30/9.1 390/118.9 230/70.1
140/42.7 40/12.2 420/128.0 240/73.2
150/45.7 50/15.2 450/137.2 250/76.2
160/48.8 60/18.3 480/146.3 260/79.2
170/51.8 70/21.3 510/155.4 270/82.3
180/54.9 80/24.0 540/164.6 280/85.3
190/57.9 90/27.4 570/173.7 290/88.4
200/61.0 100/30.5 600/182.9 300/91.4
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−29
LDP
130 FT
(39.6 M)
IP

100FT 100FT
(30.5M)
(30.5M)
OBSTACLE
35FT
10.7M
30 FT
(9.1 M) LANDING PROFILE 30 FT
(9.1 M)
OBSTACLE
240 FT 60 FT
(73.2 M) (18.3 M) 300 FT (91.4 M)
Figure 11−3.16. OEI/Balked Landing with 30ft/9.1m Obstacle

OEI LANDING PROCEDURE:
Example: Obstacle Height = 30ft/9.1M
From Table 11-3.4, LDP HAT = 130ft/39.6m
From Table 11-3.4, Required ground distance from far edge of helipad =
390ft/118.9m.
Establishe 6° sight picture and plan a normal approach to arrive at LDP at
35 KIAS.
If engine failure indication occurs after LDP, perform OEI landing.
BALKED LANDING PROCEDURE:

Example: Obstacle Height = 30ft/9.1M
From Table 11-3.4, LDP HAT = 130ft/39.6m
From Table 11-3.4, Required ground distance from far edge of helipad =
390ft//118.9m.
35 KIAS.
If engine failure indication occurs prior to LDP, accelerate to VTOSS and increase
power to the 2.5 minute OEI limit.
Climb at VTOSS 40 - 45 KIAS to 230ft/70.1m AGL.
At 230ft/70.1m (Ref Table 11-3.3), accelerate to VY.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−30
Revision 4
LDP
200 FT (61M)
IP 35 FT (10.7 M)
100FT
(30.5M) 100 FT
100FT
OBSTACLE (30.5M) LANDING PROFILE (30.5 M)
OBSTACLE
30 FT
(9.1 M)
240 FT ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
60 FT 300 FT (91.4 M)
(73.2 M) (18.3 M)
Figure 11−3.17. OEI/Balked Landing with 100ft/30.5m Obstacle

OEI LANDING PROCEDURE
Obstacle Height = 100ft/30.5m
From Table 11-3.4, LDP HAT = 200ft/61.0m and Required ground distance from
far edge of helipad = 600ft/182.9m
35 KIAS.
If engine failure indication occurs after LDP, perform OEI landing.
BALKED LANDING PROCEDURE
Obstacle Height = 100ft/30.5m
From Table 11-3.4, LDP HAT = 200ft/61.0m and required ground distance from
far edge of the helipad = 600ft/182.9m
The pilot establishes a 6° sight picture and plans a normal approach to arrive
at LDP at 35 KIAS.
If engine failure indication occurs prior to LDP, the pilot accelerates to VTOSS
and increases power to the 2.5 minute OEI limit.
Climbs at VTOSS 40 and 45 KIAS to 300ft/91.4m above the ground.
At 300ft/91.4m (Ref. Table 11-3.3), the pilot accelerates to VY.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−31
ENGINE FAILURE PRIOR TO TDP

Conditions: Before reaching TDP.
Procedures:
Pitch nose down (initial pitch down attitude varies with height above the heli
pad starting at 0° at 10 FT (3M) and varying to 20° at TDP) and reduce collective
to prevent rotor droop.
When approaching the ground establish a landing attitude. Apply power to

cushion landing.
Conditions: After TDP and initiation of forward acceleration (nose down pitch).
Procedures:
Pitch nose down and reduce collective to prevent rotor droop, accelerate to
VTOSS (40 KIAS [74 Km/H]) and adjust power to 2.5 minute OEI limit (Ref.
Section II).
NOTE: Initial pitch down attitude is determined by the airspeed at the time of engine
failure − up to 20 degrees nose down prior to an indication of airspeed.
Continue climb at 45 KIAS (83 Km/H) to 200 FT (61M) HAT.
Accelerate to VY.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−32
Revision 4
11−3.10. EQUIPMENT MALFUNCTIONS
IIDS FAILURE
Indications: IIDS displays blanks.
Conditions: Loss of electrical power to IIDS.
Procedures: On ground
Shut down
Procedures: In flight
Reduce airspeed to 75 KIAS (139 Km/H).
Reduce electrical load.
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−33
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−34
Revision 4
Performance Data
PART V
TAKEOFF AND LANDING PROCEDURES
11−5.1. TAKEOFF PERFORMANCE
Takeoff performance:
Takeoff performance is limited by weight/altitude/OAT limits (Ref. Figure 11-2.2
and Figure 11-2.3).
11−5.2. TAKEOFF DISTANCE REQUIRED
Description: Flight planning must be based on the rejected and continued takeoff
distance charts (Ref. Figure 11-5.1, thru Figure 11-5.3.) and the respective charts
for Segment I and Segment II climb gradients and acceleration distance (Ref.
Figure 11-5.5 thru Figure 11-5.7)
Figure 11-5.1.
Example:
Wanted: Takeoff distance required.
Known: Maximum takeoff gross weight from example in paragraph
11-2.2 = 6160 LB (2791KG).
Known: Pressure altitude = 2000 FT (610M)
Method: Enter top chart at 28°C, move right to the 2000 FT (610M) pressure
altitude line, now move down to the 6160 LB (2791KG) weight
point (interpolated) and now to the left to read approximately
750 FT (229M) takeoff distance.
NOTE: Rejected Takeoff Distance Required (Clear Airfield) for the above example is
approximately 680 FT (207M) (Ref. Figure 11−5.2)
NOTE: Distance Required to Clear a 35 FT Obstacle for the above example is
approximately 370 FT (113M) (Ref. Figure 11−5.3)
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−35
Performance Data
−20
10000 HD
(3048M)
10000 LIMIT
−10 (3048M)
9000
(2743M)
0
10
8000
(2438M)
20
OAT − ° C
7000
30 (2134M)
6000
40 SL (1829M)
PRESSURE
ALTITUDE - FEET
(METERS) 5000
50 (1524M)
-1000 3000
300 (-305M) (914M) 4000
1000 (1219M)
(91M) (305M)
2000
(610M)
500
(152M)
700
(213M)
900
(274M)
TAKEOFF DISTANCE
FEET (METERS)
1100
(335M)
5000
(2268kg)
1300
(396M)
1500 5500
(457M) (2495kg)
6000
1700 (2722kg)
(518M)
6500 GROSS WEIGHT - POUNDS
(2948kg) (KILOGRAMS)
1900 (579M) F927−036B
Figure 11−5.1. Distance Required to Clear a 35 FT (11M) Obstacle on Takeoff

(Clear Airfield)
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−36
Revision 4
Performance Data
11000 10000 HD
(3353M) (3048M)
−20
LIMIT
−10
10000
(3048M)
0
9000
(2743M)
10
OAT − ° C 8000
(2438M)
20
7000
30 (2134M)
6000
40 PRESSURE (1829M)
ALTITUDE - FEET
(METERS) 5000
50 (1524M)
-1000 SL 3000
300 (-305M) (914M) 4000
(91m) 1000 (1219M)
(305M)
400 2000
(122m) (610M)
500
(152m)
600
(183m)
700
(213m)
800
(238M)
TAKEOFF DISTANCE 900 5000
FEET (METERS) (274m) (2268kg)
1000
(305m) GROSS WEIGHT - POUNDS
(KILOGRAMS)
1100
(335m) 5200
(2359kg)
1200
(366m)
1300
(396m)
1400
(427m) 5400
6500 5600 (2449kg)
1500 (2948kg) (2540kg)
(457m) 6250 6000 5800
(2835kg) (2722kg) (2631kg)
1600 F927−050B
(488m)
Figure 11−5.2. Rejected Takeoff Distance Required (Clear Airfield)
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−37
Performance Data
−20
10000 HD
(3048M)
LIMIT
−10
10000
(3048M)
0
9000
(2743M)
10
8000
(2438M)
OAT − ° C
20
7000
(2134M)
30
6000
40 PRESSURE (1829M)
ALTITUDE - FEET
(METERS)
5000
(1524M)
50
-1000
SL 3000
10 ,0 00
11 ,0 00
4000
−6 ,0 0 0
7 ,000
8 ,000
9 ,000
(-305M) (914M)
0 1000 (1219M)
(305M)
2000
(610M)
100
(30M)
200
(61M)
300
(91m)
TAKEOFF DISTANCE
FEET (METERS)
GROSS WEIGHT - POUNDS
400 6500
(122m) (KILOGRAMS)
(2948kg)
500
(152m)
6000
(2722kg)
600
(183m) 5500 5000
(2495kg) (2268kg)
700
(213m) F927−051B
Figure 11−5.3. Distance Required to Clear a 35 FT (11M)Obstacle on Takeoff

Heliport/Elevated Helipad
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−38
Revision 4
Performance Data
11−5.3. CONTINUED TAKEOFF FLIGHT PATH

The continued takeoff flight path begins at the end of the Continued Takeoff Distance
Required, at 35 feet (11 meters) above the takeoff surface or higher at VTOSS, and
is divided into three segments.
CONTINUOUS OEI LIMIT

2-1/2MIN. OEI LIMIT
SEGMENT II
CLIMB AT VY
ACCELERATE
1000 FT
TO VY
SEGMENT I (305M) AGL
CLIMB AT 45 KIAS
(83KM/H)
200 FT (61M) AGL
F927−048A
Figure 11−5.4. OEI Takeoff Flight Path
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−39
Performance Data
−20 10000 HD
(3048M)
11000 LIMIT
−10 (3353M)
10000
(3048M)
0
9000
(2743M)
10
8000
OAT − ° C (2438M)
20
7000
(2134M)
30
6000
40 (1829M)
PRESSURE
ALTITUDE - FEET
(METERS)
5000
50 (1524M)
-1000 SL 3000
(-305M) (914M) 4000
500 1000 (1219M)
(152M) (305M)
2000
(610M)
1000
(305M)
1500
(457M)
TAKEOFF DISTANCE
FEET (METERS)
5000
2000 (2268kg)
(610M)
5200
2500 (2359kg)
(762M)

(914M) (KILOGRAMS) 5400
(2449kg)
5600
(2540kg)
3500
(1067M) 5800
6000 (2631kg)
6250 (2722kg)
6500 (2835kg)
(2948kg)
4000
(1219M) F927−037B
Figure 11−5.5. Takeoff Distance Segment I − Distance Required to Climb from 35 FT

(11M) to 200 FT (61M) HAT
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−40
Revision 4
Performance Data
−20
10000 HD
(3048M)
11000
−10 (3353M) LIMIT
10000
(3048M)
0
9000
(2743M)
10
8000
(2438M)
OAT − °C 20
7000
30 (2134M)
6000
40 (1829M)
PRESSURE ALTITUDE
X 1000 FT 5000
50 (1524M)
-1000 SL 3000
(-305M) (914M) 4000
1000 (1219M)
500 (305M)
(152M) 2000
(610M)
700
(213M)
900 5000
(274M) (2268kg)
5200
1100 (2359kg)
(335M)
TAKEOFF DISTANCE - FEET
(METERS)
1300 5400
(396M) (2449kg)
1500
(457M)
5600
(2540kg)
(518M) (KILOGRAMS)
5800
(2631kg)
1900
(579M) 6000
6250 (2722kg)
6500
(2948kg) (2835kg)
2100 (640M) F927−038B
Figure 11−5.6. Acceleration Distance − Distance to Accelerate from 45 KIAS (83 KM/H)
to VY at 200 FT (61M) HAT
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−41
Performance Data
−20 11000
(3353M)
−10 10000
(3048M)
0 9000
(2743M)
10 8000
(2438M)
20 10000 HD
7000 (3048M)
(2134M)
LIMIT
OAT - °C
30
PRESSURE 6000
ALTITUDE - FEET (1829M)
(METERS)
40
5000
(1524M)
50
-1000 3000
4000
(-305M) 1000 (914M) (1219M)
5000 (305M)
(1524m) 2000
(610M)
10000
(3048m)
15000
(4572m)
20000
(6096m)
TAKEOFF DISTANCE
FEET (METERS)
25000
(7620m)
GROSS WEIGHT - POUNDS

30000 (KILOGRAMS)
(9144m)
35000
6500 (2948kg)
6250 (2835kg)
5600 (2540kg)
(10668m)
5800 (2631kg)
6000 (2722kg)
5200 (2359kg)
5400 (2449kg)
5000 (2268kg)
40000 (12192m) F927−039B
Figure 11−5.7. Takeoff Distance Segment II − Distance Required to Climb from

200 FT (61M) HAT to 1000 FT (305M)
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−42
Revision 4
Performance Data
11−5.4. LANDING PERFORMANCE − OPEN AIRFIELD
The landing distance from 50 FT (15m) above the landing surface to the point at
which the helicopter comes to a complete stop is 500 FT (152m).
11−5.5. LANDING PERFORMANCE − HELIPORT/ELEVATED HELIPAD
The landing distance from 25 FT (8m) above the landing surface to the point at
which the helicopter comes to a complete stop is 250 FT (76m).
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−43
Performance Data
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−44
Revision 4
PART IX
ADDITIONAL OPERATIONS AND PERFORMANCE DATA
11−9.1. CATEGORY A OEI TRAINING
To simulate OEI operations in a Category A environment, follow the profiles as

described in ``Part 3, Takeoff and Landing Procedures'', of this section.
Operate at the recommended gross weight as depicted in Figure 11-9.1. See example
below.
Observe normal (twin) engine operating limitations (Ref. Section II).
NOTE: Operating at the recommended gross weight, assists the pilot in maintaining
normal (twin) engine operating limitations and accurately simulates actual OEI
conditions.
Description: This chart (Ref. Figure 11-9.1) reflects the weight at which Category
A OEI training may be performed with the operating engine within normal (twin)
engine operating limitations.
Figure 11-9.1.
Example:
Wanted: Maximum gross weight for training under the following conditions.
Known: HP = 4000 FT (1219m), OAT = 10°C
Method: Enter the chart at 10°C and move vertically to 4000 HP (1219m) curve.
At this point move directly to the left and read from the gross weight scale,
5200 LB (2359kg).
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
Revision 4 11−45
14000 13000 12000 11000 10000

(4267M) (3962M) (3658M) (3353M) (3048M)
3700
(1678kg) 9000
(2743M)
3800
(1724kg) 10000 HD
8000
(2438M) (3048M)
3900
(1769kg) LIMIT
7000
(2134M)
4000
(1814kg)
6000
4100 (1829M)
(1860kg)
4200 5000
(1905kg) (1524M)
4300 4000
(1950kg) (1219M)
4400
3000
PRESSURE ALTITUDE − FEET (M)
(1996kg) (914M)
4500
GROSS WEIGHT - POUNDS (KG)
(2041kg) 2000
4600 (610M)
(2087kg)
4700 1000
(2132kg) (305M)
4800
(2177kg) SL
4900
(2223kg)
5000
-1000
(2268kg)
(-305M)
5100
(2313kg)
5200
(2359kg)
5300
(2404kg)
5400
(2449kg)
5500
(2495kg)
5600
(2540kg)
5700
(2585kg)
-36 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
OAT − °C
F927-049B
Figure 11−9.1. Recommended OEI Training Weight
FAA Approved
Reissue 2
11−46
Revision 4

Csp-902rfm207e-1 I02 r05

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Csp-902rfm207e-1 I02 r05

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CSP−902RFM207E−1

Approved By: _____________________________________

Manager, Flight Test Branch, ANM-160L

Original Approval Date: July 28, 2000

Manual: CSP-902RFM207E-1 Rotorcraft Flight Manual

This page intentionally left blank!

LOG OF REVISIONS BY DATE

FAA / NON−FAA REVISIONS

REVISION NUMBER AND DATE

Manager, Flight Test Branch, ANM-160L

European Aviation Safety Agency approved

Log of EASA Revisions By Date

This page intentionally left blank!

Joint Aviation Authorities (JAA)

This page intentionally left blank!

Section III − Emergency and Malfunction Procedures

Section IV − Normal Procedures

Section V − Performance Data

Section VI − Weight and Balance Data

Section VII − Systems Description

Section VIII − Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance

Section IX − Additional Operations and Performance Data

Section X − Optional Equipment

Section XI − Category A Operations

NOTE: Revisions are listed below by number with appropriate remarks.

Section II pages marked [C]* indicate FAA approved color pages.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

FAA APPROVED NON FAA APPROVED

I 1-i -------- Reissue 2 Original

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

FAA APPROVED NON FAA APPROVED

II 2-i Reissue 2 Revision 4 --------

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

FAA APPROVED NON FAA APPROVED

III 3-i Reissue 2 Revision 1 --------

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

FAA APPROVED NON FAA APPROVED

IV 4-i Reissue 2 Revision 4 --------

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

FAA APPROVED NON FAA APPROVED

V 5-i Reissue 2 Revision 5 --------

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

FAA APPROVED NON FAA APPROVED

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

FAA APPROVED NON FAA APPROVED

VI 6-i -------- Reissue 2 Original

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

FAA APPROVED NON FAA APPROVED

VII 7-i -------- Reissue 2 Original

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

FAA APPROVED NON FAA APPROVED

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

FAA APPROVED NON FAA APPROVED

VIII 8-i -------- Reissue 2 Original

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

FAA APPROVED NON FAA APPROVED

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

FAA APPROVED NON FAA APPROVED

IX 9-i -------- Reissue 2 Revision 5

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

FAA APPROVED NON FAA APPROVED

X 10-i Reissue 2 Original --------

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES